Gfz-63665en 01

GE Fanuc Automation
Computer Numerical Control Products
Series 16i-LB
Series 160i-LB
Maintenance Manual
GFZ-63665EN/01 August 2004

GFL-001
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes
as Used in this Publication
Warning
Warning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that hazardous voltages, currents,
temperatures, or other conditions that could cause personal injury exist in this equipment or
may be associated with its use.
In situations where inattention could cause either personal injury or damage to equipment, a
Warning notice is used.
Caution
Caution notices are used where equipment might be damaged if care is not taken.
Note
Notes merely call attention to information that is especially significant to understanding and
operating the equipment.
This document is based on information available at the time of its publication. While efforts
have been made to be accurate, the information contained herein does not purport to cover all
details or variations in hardware or software, nor to provide for every possible contingency in
connection with installation, operation, or maintenance. Features may be described herein
which are not present in all hardware and software systems. GE Fanuc Automation assumes
no obligation of notice to holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made.
GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty, expressed, implied, or statutory

with respect to, and assumes no responsibility for the accuracy, completeness, sufficiency, or
usefulness of the information contained herein. No warranties of merchantability or fitness for
purpose shall apply.
©Copyright 2004 GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.

All Rights Reserved.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
This section describes the safety precautions related to the use of CNC units. It is essential that these precautions
be observed by users to ensure the safe operation of machines equipped with a CNC unit (all descriptions in this
section assume this configuration).
CNC maintenance involves various dangers. CNC maintenance must be undertaken only by a qualified
technician.
Users must also observe the safety precautions related to the machine, as described in the relevant manual supplied
by the machine tool builder.
Before checking the operation of the machine, take time to become familiar with the manuals provided by the
machine tool builder and FANUC.
Contents
1. DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s–2
2. WARNINGS RELATED TO CHECK OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s–3
3. WARNINGS RELATED TO REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s–5
4. WARNINGS RELATED TO PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s–6
5. WARNINGS AND NOTES RELATED TO DAILY MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . s–7
s–1
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B–63665EN/01
1 DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE
This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the maintenance personnel (herein referred
to as the user) and preventing damage to the machine. Precautions are classified into Warnings and
Cautions according to their bearing on safety. Also, supplementary information is described as a
Note. Read the Warning, Caution, and Note thoroughly before attempting to use the machine.
WARNING
Applied when there is a danger of the user being injured or when there is a danger of both the user
being injured and the equipment being damaged if the approved procedure is not observed.
CAUTION
Applied when there is a danger of the equipment being damaged, if the approved procedure is not
observed.
NOTE
The Note is used to indicate supplementary information other than Warning and Caution.
` Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.
s–2
B–63665EN/01 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
2 WARNINGS RELATED TO CHECK OPERATION
WARNING
1. When checking the operation of the machine with the cover removed
(1) The user’s clothing could become caught in the spindle or other components, thus
presenting a danger of injury. When checking the operation, stand away from the machine
to ensure that your clothing does not become tangled in the spindle or other components.
(2) When checking the operation, perform idle operation without workpiece. When a
workpiece is mounted in the machine, a malfunction could cause the workpiece to be
dropped or destroy the tool tip, possibly scattering fragments throughout the area. This
presents a serious danger of injury. Therefore, stand in a safe location when checking the
operation.
2. When checking the machine operation with the power magnetics cabinet door opened
(1) The power magnetics cabinet has a high–voltage section (carrying a mark). Never
touch the high–voltage section. The high–voltage section presents a severe risk of electric
shock. Before starting any check of the operation, confirm that the cover is mounted on
the high–voltage section. When the high–voltage section itself must be checked, note that
touching a terminal presents a severe danger of electric shock.
(2) Within the power magnetics cabinet, internal units present potentially injurious corners and
projections. Be careful when working inside the power magnetics cabinet.
3. Never attempt to machine a workpiece without first checking the operation of the machine.
Before starting a production run, ensure that the machine is operating correctly by performing
a trial run using, for example, the single block, feedrate override, or machine lock function or
by operating the machine with neither a tool nor workpiece mounted. Failure to confirm the
correct operation of the machine may result in the machine behaving unexpectedly, possibly
causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the user.
4. Before operating the machine, thoroughly check the entered data.
Operating the machine with incorrectly specified data may result in the machine behaving
unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the
user.
s–3
WARNING
5. Ensure that the specified feedrate is appropriate for the intended operation. Generally, for each
machine, there is a maximum allowable feedrate. The appropriate feedrate varies with the
intended operation. Refer to the manual provided with the machine to determine the maximum
allowable feedrate. If a machine is run at other than the correct speed, it may behave
user.
6. When using a tool compensation function, thoroughly check the direction and amount of
compensation.
Operating the machine with incorrectly specified data may result in the machine behaving
user.
s–4
3 WARNINGS RELATED TO REPLACEMENT
WARNING
1. Always turn off the power to the CNC and the main power to the power magnetics cabinet. If
only the power to the CNC is turned off, power may continue to be supplied to the serve section.
In such a case, replacing a unit may damage the unit, while also presenting a danger of electric
shock.
2. When a heavy unit is to be replaced, the task must be undertaken by two persons or more. If
the replacement is attempted by only one person, the replacement unit could slip and fall,
possibly causing injury.
3. After the power is turned off, the servo amplifier and spindle amplifier may retain voltages for
a while, such that there is a danger of electric shock even while the amplifier is turned off. Allow
at least twenty minutes after turning off the power for these residual voltages to dissipate.
4. When replacing a unit, ensure that the new unit has the same parameter and other settings as the
old unit. (For details, refer to the manual provided with the machine.) Otherwise, unpredictable
machine movement could damage the workpiece or the machine itself, and present a danger of
injury.
s–5
4 WARNINGS RELATED TO PARAMETERS
WARNING
1. When machining a workpiece for the first time after modifying a parameter, close the machine
cover. Never use the automatic operation function immediately after such a modification.
Instead, confirm normal machine operation by using functions such as the single block function,
feedrate override function, and machine lock function, or by operating the machine without
mounting a tool and workpiece. If the machine is used before confirming that it operates
normally, the machine may move unpredictably, possibly damaging the machine or workpiece,
and presenting a risk of injury.
2. The CNC and PMC parameters are set to their optimal values, so that those parameters usually
need not be modified. When a parameter must be modified for some reason, ensure that you
fully understand the function of that parameter before attempting to modify it. If a parameter
is set incorrectly, the machine may move unpredictably, possibly damaging the machine or
workpiece, and presenting a risk of injury.
s–6
5 WARNINGS AND NOTES RELATED TO DAILY

MAINTENANCE
WARNING
1. Memory backup battery replacement

When replacing the memory backup batteries, keep the power to the machine (CNC) turned on,
and apply an emergency stop to the machine. Because this work is performed with the power
on and the cabinet open, only those personnel who have received approved safety and
maintenance training may perform this work.
When replacing the batteries, be careful not to touch the high–voltage circuits (marked and
fitted with an insulating cover).
Touching the uncovered high–voltage circuits presents an extremely dangerous electric shock
hazard.
NOTE
The CNC uses batteries to preserve the contents of its memory, because it must retain data such as
programs, offsets, and parameters even while external power is not applied.
If the battery voltage drops, a low battery voltage alarm is displayed on the machine operator’s panel
or LCD screen.
When a low battery voltage alarm is displayed, replace the batteries within a week. Otherwise, the
contents of the CNC’s memory will be lost.
To replace the battery, see the procedure described in Section 2.8 of Series 16i/18i/160i/180i–
MODEL B Maintenance Manual (B–63525EN).
s–7
WARNING
2. Absolute pulse coder battery replacement

When replacing the memory backup batteries, keep the power to the machine (CNC) turned on,
and apply an emergency stop to the machine. Because this work is performed with the power
on and the cabinet open, only those personnel who have received approved safety and
maintenance training may perform this work.
When replacing the batteries, be careful not to touch the high–voltage circuits (marked and
fitted with an insulating cover).
Touching the uncovered high–voltage circuits presents an extremely dangerous electric shock
hazard.
NOTE
The absolute pulse coder uses batteries to preserve its absolute position.
If the battery voltage drops, a low battery voltage alarm is displayed on the machine operator’s panel
or CRT screen.
When a low battery voltage alarm is displayed, replace the batteries within a week. Otherwise, the
absolute position data held by the pulse coder will be lost.
To replace the battery, see the procedure described in FANUC SERVO MOTOR α series
Maintenance Manual (B–65165E).
s–8
WARNING
3. Fuse replacement
Before replacing a blown fuse, however, it is necessary to locate and remove the cause of the
blown fuse.
For this reason, only those personnel who have received approved safety and maintenance
training may perform this work.
When replacing a fuse with the cabinet open, be careful not to touch the high–voltage circuits
(marked and fitted with an insulating cover).
Touching an uncovered high–voltage circuit presents an extremely dangerous electric shock
hazard.
s–9
B–63665EN/01 PREFACE
PREFACE
Description of 1.Display and operation

this manual
This chapter covers those items, displayed on the screen, that are related
to maintenance. A list of all supported operations is also provided at the
end of this chapter.
2.Hardware
This chapter covers hardware–related items, including the hardware

configuration, connection, and NC status indicated on printed circuit
boards. A list of all units is also provided as well as an explanation of how
to replace each unit.
3.Data input/output
This chapter describes the input/output of data, including programs,

parameters, and tool compensation data, aswell as the input/output
procedures for conversational data.
4.Interface between the CNC and PMC
This chapter describes the PMC specifications, the system configuration,

and the signals used by the PMC.
5.Digital servo
This chapter describes the servo tuning screen and how to adjust the
reference position return position.
6.Trouble shooting
This chapter describes the procedures to be followed in the event of

certain problems occurring.
APPENDIX
The appendix consists of a list of all alarms, a list of maintenance parts,

and boot system.
This manual does not provide a parameter list. If necessary, refer to the
separate PARAMETER MANUAL (B–63530EN, B–63670EN).
p–1
PREFACE B–63665EN/01
Applicable models This manual can be used with the following models. The abbreviated
names may be used.
Pruduct name Abbreviation
FANUC Series 16i–LB 16i–LB Series 16i
FANUC Series 160i–LB 160i–LB Series 160i
NOTE
Some function described in this manual may not be applied
to some products.
For details, refer to the DESCRIPTIONS manual.
p–2
B–63665EN/01 Table of Contents
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s–1
PREFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . p–1
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

1.1 FUNCTION KEYS AND SOFT KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.1.1 Soft Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.2 SCREEN DISPLAYED IMMEDIATELY AFTER POWER IS TURNED ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
1.2.1 Slot Status Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
1.2.2 Setting Module Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
1.2.3 Configuration Display of Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
1.3 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
1.3.1 Display Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
1.3.2 Configuration of PCBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
1.3.3 Software Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
1.3.4 Module Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
1.4 ALARM SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
1.4.1 Alarm History Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
1.4.1.1 Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
1.4.1.2 Clearing Alarm History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
1.4.1.3 Alarm Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
1.4.2 System Alarm History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
1.4.2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
1.4.2.2 System alarm history screen (history list screen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
1.4.2.3 System alarm history screen (detail screen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
1.4.2.4 Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
1.5 EXTERNAL OPERATOR MESSAGES RECORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
1.5.1 Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
1.5.2 Deletion of External Operator Messages Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
1.5.3 Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
1.5.4 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
1.6 OPERATION HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
1.6.1 Parameter Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
1.6.2 Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
1.6.3 Setting the Input Signal or Output Signal to be Recorded in the Operation History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
1.6.4 Inputting and Outputting the Operation History Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
1.6.5 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
1.7 HELP FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
1.7.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
1.7.2 Display Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
1.8 DISPLAYING DIAGNOSTIC PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
1.8.1 Displaying Diagnostic Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
1.8.2 Contents Displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
1.9 CNC STATE DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
1.10 WAVEFORM DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
1.10.1 Setting Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
1.10.2 Waveform Diagnostic Parameter Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
1.10.3 Graphic of Wave Diagnosis Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
1.10.4 Data Sampling for Storage Type Waveform Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
1.10.5 Outputting Waveform Diagnosis Data (Storage Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
1.10.6 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
c–1
Table of Contents B–63665EN/01
1.11 OPERATING MONITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

1.11.1 Display Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
1.11.2 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
1.12 LIST OF OPERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
1.13 WARNING SCREEN DISPLAYED WHEN AN OPTION IS CHANGED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
1.14 WARNING SCREEN DISPLAYED WHEN SYSTEM SOFTWARE IS REPLACED
(SYSTEM LABEL CHECK ERROR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
1.15 MAINTENANCE INFORMATION SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
1.15.1 Screen Display and Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
1.15.2 Maintenance Information Input/Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
1.16 COLOR SETTING SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
1.16.1 Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
1.16.2 Color Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
1.16.3 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
1.16.4 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
1.17 CONTRAST ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
1.18 POWER MATE CNC MANAGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
1.18.1 Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
1.18.2 Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
1.18.3 Parameter Input/Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
1.18.4 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
2. HARDWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
2.1 ANALOG INPUT BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
3. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

3.1 SETTING PARAMETERS FOR INPUT/OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
3.2 INPUTTING/OUTPUTTING DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
3.2.1 Confirming the Parameters Required for Data Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
3.2.2 Outputting CNC Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
3.2.3 Outputting PMC Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
3.2.4 Outputting Pitch Error Compensation Amount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
3.2.5 Outputting Custom Macro Variable Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
3.2.6 Outputting Tool Compensation Amount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
3.2.7 Outputting Part Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
3.2.8 Inputting CNC Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
3.2.9 Inputting PMC Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
3.2.10 Inputting Pitch Error Compensation Amount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
3.2.11 Inputting Custom Macro Variable Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
3.2.12 Inputting Tool Compensation Amount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
3.2.13 Inputting Part Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
3.3 DATA INPUT/OUTPUT ON THE ALL IO SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
3.3.1 Setting Input/Output–related Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
3.3.2 Inputting and Outputting Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
3.3.3 Inputting and Outputting Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
3.3.4 Inputting and Outputting Offset Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
3.3.5 Outputting Custom Macro Common Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
3.3.6 Inputting and Outputting Floppy Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
3.4 DATA INPUT/OUTPUT USING A MEMORY CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

4.1 GENERAL OF INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
c–2
4.2 SPECIFICATION OF PMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

4.2.1 Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
4.2.2 Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
4.2.3 System Reserve Area of Internal Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
4.2.4 Execution Period of PMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
4.3 PMC SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
4.3.1 PMC Menu Selection Procedure Using the Soft Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
4.3.2 Ladder Diagram Display/Editing (PMC–SB7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
4.3.2.1 Ladder diagram display screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
4.3.2.2 Program list display screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
4.3.2.3 Selection monitor function (PMC–SB7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
4.3.2.4 Ladder diagram editing screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
4.3.2.5 Net editing screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
4.3.2.6 Signal trace function (PMC–SB7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
4.3.3 PMCDGN Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
4.3.4 PMCPRM Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
4.3.5 Setting Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
4.4 LIST OF SIGNALS BY EACH MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
5. DIGITAL SERVO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

5.1 INITIAL SETTING SERVO PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
5.2 SERVO TUNING SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
5.2.1 Parameter Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
5.2.2 Displaying Servo Tuning Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
5.3 ADJUSTING REFERENCE POSITION (DOG METHOD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
5.3.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
5.4 DOGLESS REFERENCE POSITION SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
5.4.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
5.4.2 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
5.4.3 AssociatedParameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
6. EMBEDDED ETHERNET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

6.1 SETTING THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
6.1.1 Parameter Setting of the FOCAS1/Ethernet Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
6.1.1.1 Notes on using the FOCAS1/Ethernet function for the first time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
6.1.1.2 FOCAS1/Ethernet parameter setting screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
6.1.2 Using the FOCAS1/Ethernet Function on a Small Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
6.1.3 Using the DNC1/Ethernet Function on a Small Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
6.1.4 Configuring a Large Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
6.2 SWITCHING BETWEEN THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
6.3 EMBEDDED ETHERNET ERROR MESSAGE SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
6.4 EMBEDDED ETHERNET MAINTENANCE SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
6.5 TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
6.5.1 Check Items Related to Connection with the Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
6.5.2 Check Items Related to Connection with a Backbone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
6.5.3 Checking the Setting of Each Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
6.5.4 Checking Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
6.6 ERROR MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
6.6.1 EMB_ETH MASTER CTRL Log Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
6.6.2 EMB_ETH FOCAS1/ETHER Log Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
c–3
7. TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
7.1 CORRECTIVE ACTION FOR FAILURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
7.1.1 Investigating the Conditions under which Failure Occurred . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
7.2 NO MANUAL OPERATION NOR AUTOMATIC OPERATION CAN BE EXECUTED . . . . . . . . 256
7.3 JOG OPERATION CANNOT BE DONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
7.4 HANDLE OPERATION CANNOT BE DONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
7.5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION CANNOT BE DONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
7.6 CYCLE START LED SIGNAL HAS TURNED OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
7.7 NOTHING IS DISPLAYED ON THE LCD WHEN THE POWER IS TURNED ON . . . . . . . . . . . 274
7.8 THE DISPLAY ON THE LCD UNIT FLASHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
7.9 INPUT FROM AND OUTPUT TO I/O DEVICES CANNOT BE PERFORMED INPUT/
OUTPUT CANNOT BE PERFORMED PROPERLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
7.10 IN A CONNECTOR PANEL I/O UNIT, DATA IS INPUT TO AN UNEXPECTED ADDRESS . . 281
7.11 IN A CONNECTOR PANEL I/O UNIT, NO DATA IS OUTPUT TO AN EXPANSION UNIT . . . 282
7.12 ALARM 85 TO 87 (READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE ALARM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
7.13 ALARM 90 (REFERENCE POSITION RETURN IS ABNORMAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
7.14 ALARM 300 (REQUEST FOR REFERENCE POSITION RETURN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
7.15 ALARM 401 (V READY OFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
7.16 ALARM 404 (V READY ON) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
7.17 ALARM 462 (SEND CNC DATA FAILED)
ALARM 463 (SEND SLAVE DATA FAILED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
7.18 ALARM 417 (DIGITAL SERVO SYSTEM IS ABNORMAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
7.19 ALARM 700 (OVERHEAT: CONTROL UNIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
7.20 ALARM 701 (OVERHEAT: FAN MOTOR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
7.21 ALARM 5134 (FSSB: OPEN READY TIME OUT)
ALARM 5135 (FSSB: ERROR MODE)
ALARM 5137 (FSSB: CONFIGURATION ERROR)
ALARM 5197 (FSSB: OPEN TIME OUT)
ALARM 5198 (FSSB: ID DATA NOT READ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
7.22 ALARM 5136 (FSSB: NUMBER OF AMPS IS SMALL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
7.23 ALARM 900 (ROM PARITY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
7.24 ALARMS 910 AND 911 (SRAM PARITY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
7.25 ALARMS 912 TO 919 (DRAM PARITY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
7.26 ALARMS 920 AND 921 (SERVO ALARMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
7.27 ALARM 926 (FSSB ALARM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
7.28 ALARM 930 (CPU INTERRUPT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
7.29 ALARM 935 (SRAM ECC ERROR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
7.30 ALARM 950 (PMC SYSTEM ALARM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
7.31 ALARM 951 (PMC WATCHDOG ALARM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
7.32 ALARM 972 (NMI ALARM ON AN OPTION BOARD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
7.33 ALARM 973 (NMI ALARM WITH AN UNKNOWN CAUSE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
7.34 ALARM 974 (F–BUS ERROR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
7.35 ALARM 975 (BUS ERROR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
7.36 ALARM 976 (LOCAL BUS ERROR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
7.37 SERVO ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
7.38 SPC ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
c–4
APPENDIX
A. ALARM LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
A.1 LIST OF ALARM CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
A.2 LIST OF ALARMS (PMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
A.3 ALARM LIST (SERIAL SPINDLE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
A.4 ERROR CODES (SERIAL SPINDLE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
B. LIST OF MAINTENANCE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
C. BOOT SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

C.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
C.1.1 Starting the Boot System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
C.1.2 System Files and User Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
C.1.3 Boot Slot Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
C.2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND OPERATING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
C.2.1 System Data Loading Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
C.2.2 System Data Check Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
C.2.3 System Data Delete Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
C.2.4 SYSTEM DATA SAVE Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
C.2.5 SRAM DATA BACKUP Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
C.2.6 MEMORY CARD FILE DELETE Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
C.2.7 MEMORY CARD FORMAT Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
C.2.8 LOAD BASIC SYSTEM Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
C.3 ERROR MESSAGES AND REQUIRED ACTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
D. MEMRY CARD SLOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420

D.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
D.2 MEMORY CARD TYPES (FUNCTIONS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
D.3 HARDWARE CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
E. LED DISPLAY AND MAINTENANCE OF STAND–ALONE TYPE UNIT . . . . . . . 425

E.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
E.2 LAYOUT OF THE 7–SEGMENT LED AND SWITCHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
E.3 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
E.3.1 Operation Before Power–On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
E.3.2 Function Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
E.3.3 Seven–Segment LED Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
E.3.3.1 NC status display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
E.3.3.2 LED display during automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
E.3.3.3 LED display when the push switch is pressed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
E.3.3.4 LED display when a system alarm is issued . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
E.3.3.5 Display on the 7–segment LED at power–on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
E.3.4 Operation of Each Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
F. MAINTENANCE OF OPEN CNC (BOOT–UP AND IPL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434

F.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
F.2 CHANGING START SEQUENCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
c–5
F.3 EXPLANATION OF SCREENS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439

F.3.1 Boot Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
F.3.1.1 System data manipulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
F.3.1.2 SRAM operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
F.3.1.3 File operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
F.3.2 IPL Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
F.3.2.1 Functions on the IPL screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
F.4 OTHER SCREENS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
F.4.1 CNC Alarm Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
F.4.2 Status Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
F.4.3 Option Setting Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
G. FSSB START–UP PROCEDURE/MATERIALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449

G.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
G.2 SLAVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
G.3 AUTOMATIC SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
G.3.1 [Sample Setting 1] General Configuration (Semi–Closed Loop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
G.3.2 [Sample Setting 2] General Configuration (Closed Loop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
G.3.3 [Sample Setting 3] When the C–Axis is a Cs Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
G.3.4 [Sample Setting 4] Tandem Control Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
G.3.5 [Sample Setting 5] When the Simple Electronic Gear Box (EGB) Function is Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
G.4 MANUAL SETTING 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
G.5 MANUAL SETTING 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
G.6 ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
G.7 ACTIONS FOR TROUBLE ENCOUNTERED AT START–UP TIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
G.8 EXAMPLES OF SETTINGS USING OTHER CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
G.8.1 Example 1: Learning Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
G.8.2 Example 2: When a 2–Axis Amplifier is Shared by Two Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
G.9 FSSB DATA DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
G.9.1 Amplifier Setting Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
G.9.2 Axis Setting Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
G.9.3 Amplifier Maintenance Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
H. NOTATION OF MDI KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
c–6
B–63665EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
1 DISPLAY AND OPERATION
This chapter describes how to display various screens by the function

keys. The screens used for maintenance are respectively displayed.
1.1 FUNCTION KEYS AND SOFT KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

1.2 SCREEN DISPLAYED IMMEDIATELY AFTER
POWER IS TURNED ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
1.3 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . 21
1.4 ALARM SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
1.5 EXTERNAL OPERATOR MESSAGES
RECORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
1.6 OPERATION HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
1.7 HELP FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
1.8 DISPLAYING DIAGNOSTIC PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
1.9 CNC STATE DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
1.10 WAVEFORM DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . 78
1.11 OPERATING MONITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
1.12 LIST OF OPERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
1.13 WARNING SCREEN DISPLAYED WHEN
AN OPTION IS CHANGED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
1.14 WARNING SCREEN DISPLAYED
WHEN SYSTEM SOFTWARE IS REPLACED
(SYSTEM LABEL CHECK ERROR) . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
1.15 MAINTENANCE INFORMATION SCREEN . . . . . 105
1.16 COLOR SETTING SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
1.17 CONTRAST ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
1.18 POWER MATE CNC MANAGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
1
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–63665EN/01
1.1 Operations and soft key display staturs for each function key are described
below:
FUNCTION KEYS
AND SOFT KEYS
1.1.1 To display a more detailed screen, press a function key followed by a soft
Soft Keys key. Soft keys are also used for actual operations.
The following illustrates how soft key displays are changed by pressing
each function key.
The symbols in the following figures mean as shown below :
: Indicates screens
: Indicates a screen that can be displayed by pressing a

function key(*1)
[ ] : Indicates a soft key(*2)
( ) : Indicates input from the MDI panel.
[ ] : Indicates a soft key displayed in green (or highlighted).
: Indicates the continuous menu key (rightmost soft key)(*3).
*1 Press function keys to switch between screens that are used frequently.
*2 Some soft keys are not displayed depending on the option
configuration.
*3 In some cases, the continuous menu key is omitted when the 12 soft
keys type is used.
2
POSITION SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key POS
POS
Absolute coordinate display
[ABS] [(OPRT)] [PTSPRE] [EXEC]
[RUNPRE] [EXEC]
Relative coordinate display
[REL] [(OPRT)] (Axis or numeral) [PRESET]
[ORIGIN] [ALLEXE]
[Axis name] [EXEC]

[PTSPRE] [EXEC]
[RUNPRE] [EXEC]
Current position display
[ALL] [(OPRT)] (Axis or numeral) [PRESET]
[ORIGIN] [ALLEXE]
[Axis name] [EXEC]

[PTSPRE] [EXEC]
[RUNPRE] [EXEC]
Handle interruption
[HNDL] [(OPRT)] [PTSPRE] [EXEC]
[RUNPRE] [EXEC]
Monitor screen
[MONI] [(OPRT)] [PTSPRE] [EXEC]
[RUNPRE] [EXEC]
3
PROGRAM SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key PROG
in the MEM mode
1/2
PROG
Program display screen
[PRGRM] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See “When the soft key [BG–EDT] is pressed”
(O number) [O SRH]
(1) (N number) [N SRH]
[REWIND]
[P TYPE]
[Q TYPE]
[F SRH] [CAN]
(N number) [EXEC]
Program check display screen
[CHECK] [ABS] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See “When the soft key [BG–EDT] is pressed”
[REL] (O number) [O SRH]
(N number) [N SRH]
[REWIND]
[P TYPE]
[Q TYPE]
[F SRH] [CAN]
(N number) [EXEC]
Current block display screen
[CURRNT] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See “When the soft key [BG–EDT] is pressed”
Next block display screen
[NEXT] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See “When the soft key [BG–EDT] is pressed”
Program restart display screen
[RSTR] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See “When the soft key [BG–EDT] is pressed”
(2)(Continued on the next page)
4
2/2
(2)
[FL.SDL] [PRGRM] Return to (1) (Program display)
File directory display screen
[DIR] [(OPRT)] [SELECT] (File No. ) [F SET]

[EXEC]
Schedule operation display screen
[SCHDUL] [(OPRT)] [CLEAR] [CAN]

[EXEC]
(Schedule data) [INPUT]
5
in the EDIT mode
1/2
PROG
Program display
(O number) [O SRH]
(Address) [SRH↓]
(Address) [SRH↑]
[REWIND]
[F SRH] [CAN]
(N number) [EXEC]
[READ] [CHAIN] (The cursor moves to the end of a program.)
[STOP]
[CAN]
(O number) [EXEC]
[PUNCH] [STOP]
[CAN]
(O number) [EXEC]
[DELETE] [CAN]
(N number) [EXEC]
[EX–EDT] [COPY] [CRSR∼] (O number) [EXEC]
[∼CRSR]
[∼BTTM]
[ALL]
[MOVE] [CRSR∼] (O number) [EXEC]
[∼CRSR]
[∼BTTM]
[ALL]
[MERGE] [∼CRSR] (O number) [EXEC]
[∼BTTM]
[CHANGE] (Address) [BEFORE]
(Address) [AFTER] [SKIP]

[1–EXEC]
[EXEC]
6
2/2
(1)
Program directory display
[LIB] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See “When the soft key [BG–EDT] is pressed”
(O number) [O SRH] Return to the program
[READ] [CHAIN]
[STOP]
[CAN]
(O number) [EXEC]
[PUNCH] [STOP]
[CAN]
(O number) [EXEC]
Floppy directory display
[FLOPPY] [PRGRM] Return to the program

[DIR] [(OPRT)] [F SRH] (Numeral) [F SET]
[CAN]
[EXEC]
[READ] (Numeral) [F SET]
(Numeral) [O SET]
[STOP]
[CAN]
[EXEC]
[PUNCH] (Numeral) [F SET]
(Numeral) [O SET]
[STOP]
[CAN]
[EXEC]
[DELETE] (Numeral) [F SET]
[CAN]
[EXEC]
7
in the MDI mode
PROG
Program display
Program input screen
[MDI] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See “When the soft key [BG–EDT] is pressed”
[START] [CAN]
[EXEC]
(Address) [SRH↓]
(Address) [SRH↑]
[REWIND]
8
in the HNDL, JOG, or REF mode
PROG
Program display
in the TJOG or THDL mode
PROG
Program display
Program input screen
[MDI] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See “When the soft key [BG–EDT] is pressed”
(Address) [SRH↓]
(Address) [SRH↑]
[REWIND]
[LIB] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See “When the soft key [BG–EDT] is pressed”
9
PROG
PROGRAM SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key
(When the soft key [BG–EDT] is pressed in all modes)
1/2
PROG
Program display
[PRGRM] [(OPRT)] [BG–END]

(O number) [O SRH]
(Address) [SRH↓]
(Address) [SRH↑]
[REWIND]
[F SRH] [CAN]
(N number) [EXEC]
[READ] [CHAIN] (The cursor moves to the end of a program.)
[STOP]
[CAN]
(O number) [EXEC]
[PUNCH] [STOP]
[CAN]
(O number) [EXEC]
[DELETE] [CAN]
(N number) [EXEC]
[EX–EDT] [COPY] [CRSR∼] (O number) [EXEC]
[∼CRSR]
[∼BTTM]
[ALL]
[MOVE] [CRSR∼] (O number) [EXEC]
[∼CRSR]
[∼BTTM]
[ALL]
[MERGE] [∼CRSR] (O number) [EXEC]
[∼BTTM]
[CHANGE] (Address) [BEFORE]
(Address) [AFTER] [SKIP]

[1–EXEC]
[EXEC]
10
2/2
(1)
[LIB] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT]

[READ] [CHAIN]
[STOP]
[CAN]
(O number) [EXEC]
[PUNCH] [STOP]
[CAN]
(O number) [EXEC]
Floppy directory display
[FLOPPY] [PRGRM] Return to the program

[DIR] [(OPRT)] [F SRH] (Numeral) [F SET]
[CAN]
[EXEC]
[READ] (Numeral) [F SET]
(Numeral) [O SET]
[STOP]
[CAN]
[EXEC]
[PUNCH] (Numeral) [F SET]
(Numeral) [O SET]
[STOP]
[CAN]
[EXEC]
[DELETE] (Numeral) [F SET]
[CAN]
[EXEC]
11
OFFSET/SETTING SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key

OFFSET
SETTING
OFFSET
SETTING
Tool offset screen
[OFFSET] [(OPRT)] (Number) [NO SRH]

(Axis name) [INP.C.]
(Numeral) [+INPUT]
(Numeral) [INPUT]
[CLEAR] [ALL]
[WEAR]
[GEOM]
[READ] [CAN]
[EXEC]
[PUNCH] [CAN]
[EXEC]
Setting screen
[SETING] [(OPRT)] (Number) [NO SRH]

[ON:1]
[OFF:0]
(Numeral) [+INPUT]
(Numeral) [INPUT]
Work coordinate system setting screen
[WORK] [(OPRT)] (Number) [NO SRH]

(Axis, numeral) [+INPUT]
(Numeral) [INPUT]
Macro variables display screen
[MACRO] [(OPRT)] (Number) [NO SRH]

(Axis name) [INP.C.]
(Numeral) [INPUT]
[PUNCH] [CAN]
[EXEC]
Patten data input screen
[MENU] [(OPRT)] (Number) [SELECT]
Software operator’s panel screen
[OPR]
12
LASER SETTING SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key OFFSET
SETTING
OFFSET
SETTING
Laser power display screen
[POWER]
Laser setting screen
[SET] [TRACE] [(OPRT)] [ZERO]

[START]
[W–AXIS] [END]
Cutting condition setting screen
[DATA] [CUT] [(OPRT)] (VALVE) [+INPUT]

(VALVE) [INPUT]
[PIERCE] [(OPRT)] (VALVE) [+INPUT]
(VALVE) [INPUT]
[EDGE] [(OPRT)] (VALVE) [+INPUT]
(VALVE) [INPUT]
[P.CHG] [(OPRT)] (VALVE) [+INPUT]
(VALVE) [INPUT]
3–Dimensional conversion screen
[3D. TRN]
Laser status display screen
[STATUS]
13
SYSTEM SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key SYSTEM
1/3
SYSTEM
Parameter screen
[PARAM] [(OPRT)] (Number) [NO SRH]

[ON:1]
[OFF:0]
(Numeral) [+INPUT]
(Numeral) [INPUT]
[READ] [CAN]
[EXEC]
[PUNCH] [CAN]
[EXEC]
Diagnosis screen
[DGNOS] [(OPRT)] (Number) [NO SRH]
PMC screen
[PMC] [PMCLAD] [SEARCH] [TOP]

[BOTTOM]
[SRCH]
[W–SRCH]
[N–SRCH]
[F–SRCH]
[ADRESS]/[SYMBOL]
[TRIGER] [TRGON]
[TRGOFF]
[START]
[DUMP] [SEARCH]
[DPARA]/[NDPARA] [BYTE]
[TRGSRC] [WORD]
[INIT] [D.WORD]
[WINDOW] [DIVIDE]
[CANCEL]
[DELETE]
[SELECT]
[WIDTH]
(1) (2) (3)
(Continued on the next page)
14
(1) (2) (3) 2/3

[DUMP] [SEARCH]
[BYTE]
[WORD]
[D.WORD]
[DRARA]/[NDPARA]
[PMCDGN] [TITLE]
[STATUS] [SEARCH]
[ALARM]
[TRACE] [T.DISP]/[TRCPRM]
[EXEC]
[M.SRCH] [SEARCH]
[INPUT]
[ANALYS] [SCOPE] [SGNPRM]
[DELETE] [START]/[STOP]
[INIT] [T–SRCH]
[ADRESS]/[SYMBOL]
[EXCHG] [SELECT] [TO] [EXEC]
[CANCEL]
[ADRESS]/[SYMBOL]
[PMCPRM] [TIMER]
[COUNTR]
[KEEPRL]
[DATA] [G.DATA] [C.DATA]
[G.CONT] [G–SRCH]
[NO.SRH] [SEARCH]
[INIT]
[SETTING] [YES]/[MANUAL]/[ROM]
[NO]/[AUTO]/[RAM]
[STOP]/[RUN]
[I/O] [EXEC]
[CANCEL]
(No.)
[SPEED] [INPUT]
[INIT]
[MDI]/[ROM]
System configuration screen
[SYSTEM]
(4)
(Continued on the next page)
15
(4) 3/3
Pitch error compensation screen
[PITCH] [(OPRT)] (No.) [NO SRH]

[ON:1]
[OFF:0]
(Numeral) [+INPUT]
(Numeral) [INPUT]
[READ] [CAN]
[EXEC]
[PUNCH] [CAN]
[EXEC]
Servo parameter screen
[SV.PRM] [SV.SET] [ON:1]

[(OPRT)]
[SV.TUN] [OFF:0]
(Numeral) [INPUT]
[TRACE]
[SV.TRC] [(OPRT)]
[TRNSF]
Waveform diagnosis screen
[W.DGNS] [W.PRM]
[W.GRPH] [STSRT]
[TIME→]
[←TIME]
[H–DOBL]
[H–HALF]
[STSRT]
[CH–1↑]
[CH–1↓]
[V–DOBL]
[V–HALF]
[STSRT]
[CH–2↑]
[CH–2↓]
[V–DOBL]
[V–HALF]
16
MESSAGE SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Alarm display screen
[ALARM]
Message display screen
[MSG]
Alarm history screen
[HISTRY] [(OPRT)] [CLEAR]
HELP SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key HELP
HELP
Alarm detail screen
[ALARM] [(OPRT)] [SELECT]
Operation method screen
[OPERAT] [(OPRT)] [SELECT]
Parameter table screen
[PARAM]
17
GRAPHIC SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key GRAPH
Tool path graphics
GRAPH
Tool path graphics
[PARAM]
[EXEC] [(OPRT)] [AUTO]

[STSRT]
[STOP]
[REWIND]
[CLEAR]
[ZOOM] [(OPRT)] [EXEC]

[←]
[→]
[POS]
[↑]
[↓]
Solid graphics
GRAPH
Solid graphics
[PARAM]
[BLANK] [(OPRT)] [ANEW]

[+ROT]
[–ROT]
[+TILT]
[–TILT]
[EXEC] [(OPRT)] [A.ST]]

[F.ST]
[STOP]
[REWIND]
[REVIEW] [(OPRT)] [ANEW]

[+ROT]
[–ROT]
[+TILT]
[–TILT]
[PARAM]
[3–PLN] [(OPRT)] [ ]
[←]
[→]
[↑]
[↓]
18
1.2
SCREEN DISPLAYED
IMMEDIATELY AFTER
POWER IS TURNED
ON
1.2.1 Types of PCBs mounted on the slots are displayed.
Slot Status Display If a hardware trouble or an incorrect mounting is found, this screen is
displayed.
D Slot state screen
SLOT CONFIGURATION DISPLAY
0: 003E4000 0:
1: 30464202 1:
2: 00504303 2:
3: 3:
4: 4:
5: 5:
… …
Physical slot number (2ndary side)

Module ID of the PCB mounted (*1)
Physical slot number (primary side)
*1) Module ID of PCB

ff j j ∆ ∆
Internal slot number

Module function (software ID)
Type of PCB (module ID)
D Module ID ID Name
D5 Series 16i motherboard
CC Series 160i motherboard
CD Serial communication board: remote buffer/DNC2
Serial communication board: DNC1
C language board
CF RISC board
A3 Data server board
9E Analog Input board
AA HSSB interface board
C9 PC function card
D3 Loader control board
19
D Software ID 40 : Main CPU

41 : C language
4A : Remote buffer
53 : Loader control
59 : RISC board for high–precision contour control
5E : HSSB interface (with PC)
6F : Analog Input board
1.2.2
Setting Module Screen
END : Setting
B8H1–01 completed
SLOT 01 (3046) : END Space :

SLOT 02 (0050) : Setting incom-
pleted
Module ID
Slot number
1.2.3
Configuration Display
of Software
CNC control
B8H1–01 software
SERVO : 9090–01 Digital servo

SUB : xxxx–xx ROM
OMM : yyyy–yy Sub CPU
(Remote buffer)
PMC : zzzz–zz
Order made
macro/macro
compiler
PMC
20
1.3 After the system has been installed correctly, you can find the PCBs
installed and the softwares integrated on the system configuration screen.
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
SCREEN
1.3.1 (1) Press SYSTEM key.

Display Method
(2) Press soft key [SYSTEM], then the system configuration screen is
displayed.
(3) The system configuration screen is composed of three screens and
PAGE
each of them can be selected by the page key PAGE
.
1.3.2
Configuration of PCBs
D Screen
Software series of mod-
ule with CPU
SYSTEM CONFIG (SLOT) PAGE01
SLOT MODULE ID SERIES VERSION

00 3008 : 40 B0H1 0001 Software version
01 00CF : 66 B835 0001 of module with
CPU
Software ID (type)
Module ID
Slot No.
(80 to 8F are 2nd side)
21
D Module ID
ID Name
D5 Series 16i motherboard
CC Series 160i motherboard
CD Serial communication board: remote buffer/DNC2
Serial communication board: DNC1
C language board
CE Sub–CPU board
CF RISC board
A3 Data server board
D3 Loader control board
AA HSSB interface board
C9 PC function card
D Software ID 40 : Main CPU

41 : C language
43 : Sub CPU
4A : Remote buffer
53 : Loader control
59 : RISC board for high–precision contour control
5E : HSSB interface (with PC)
1.3.3
Kind of software
Software Configuration Software series
Screen
SYSTEM CONFIG (SOFTWARE) 01234 N12345
PAGE:02
SYSTEM B8H0 0001 Software version
BASIC+OPTION–A1 Software
SERVO 90B0 0001 configuration
PMC(SYS) 406G 0001
406G 0001
PMC(LAD) FS16 0001 Character written
MACRO LIB BZN0 0001 on PMC title screen
MACRO APL AAAA BBBB Character written
BOOT 60M5 0001 on macro compiler.
GRAPHIC–1 60V5 0001
GRAPHIC–2 60V6 0001
EMBED ETH 656A 0001
MEM **** *** *** 12:14:59
[ PARMA ][ DGNOS ][ PMC ][ SYSTEM ][(OPRT)]
22
1.3.4 Configuration of the modules displayed on PCB.

(1)
Module Configuration
Screen SYSTEM CONFIG (MODULE) 01234 N12345
PAGE:03
SLOT 00 MOTHER BOARD (2)
AXIS CTRL CARD : 08

DISPLAY CTRL CARD : 0E
CPU CARD : 11
FROM DIMM : C7
SRAM DIMM : 05 (4)
DRAM DIMM : A9
PMC CPU : 01
(3)
MEM **** *** *** 12:14:59
[ PARMA ][ DGNOS ][ PMC ][ SYSTEM ][(OPRT)]
Contents of display
(1) Slot number (The number is corresponding to PCB configuration
screen)
(2) Type of PCB mounted
(3) Name of card PCB or DIMM module
(4) Hardware ID of mounted card PCB or DIMM module
Refer to “Series 16i/18i/160i/180i–Model B Maintenance Manual
(B–63525EN)” for correspondence with each hardware ID and
drawing number.
PAGE
Pressing the PAGE key PAGE
displays the system configuration
screen of other PCBs.
23
1.4
ALARM SCREEN
1.4.1 Alarms generated in the NC are recorded. The latest 50 alarms generated
Alarm History Screen are recorded. The 51st and former alarms are deleted.
1.4.1.1 (1) Press MESSAGE

key .
Screen Display
(2) Press soft key [HISTRY] and an alarm history screen is displayed.
PAGE
(3) Other pages are displayed by PAGE
or key.
ALARM HISTORY O1234 N12345
97/04/18 20:56:26
506 OVERTRAVEL : +X
97/04/18 19:58:11
000 TURN OFF POWER
97/04/18 19:52:45
000 TURN OFF POWER
97/04/18 19:48:43
300 APC ALARM : X–AXIS ZERO RETURN REQUEST
97/04/18 18:10:10
507 OVERTRAVEL : +B
[ ALARM ][ MSG ][ HISTRY ][ ][(OPRT)]
1.4.1.2 (1) Press soft key [(OPRT)].

Clearing Alarm History (2) Press soft key [(CLEAR], then the alarm history is cleared.
1.4.1.3 When an external alarm (No. 1000 to 1999) or a macro alarm (No. 3000
Alarm Display to 3999) is output, the alarm history function can record both the alarm
number and message if so specified in the following parameter. If
recording of the message is not set or if no message is input, only an
external alarm or macro alarm is displayed.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3112 EAH
[Data type] Bit

#3 (EAH) The alarm history function:
0 : Does not record the messages output with external alarms or macro
alarms.
1 : Records the messages output with external alarms or macro alarms.
24
1.4.2
System Alarm History
1.4.2.1 Up to three system alarms issued in the past are stored, and information
General about those alarms can be displayed on the system alarm history screen.
SYSTEM ALARM HISTORY O1234 N12345
1 2001–03–13 12:13:19
930 CPU INTERRUPT
2 2001–03–11 07:23:07
900 ROM PARITY
3 2001–02–27
973 NON MASK INTERRUPT
EDIT **** *** *** 08:20:52

[ ][ ][ NMIHIS ][ ][ ]
1.4.2.2 By setting bit 2 (NMH) of parameter No. 3103 to 1, information about up

System alarm history to three system alarms including the latest system alarm can be displayed.
The latest system alarm information is displayed at the top of the list, and
screen (history list
a lower item in the list indicates older system alarm information.
screen)
Procedure 1 Set bit 2 (NMH) of parameter No. 3103 to 1.

2 Press the function key <MESSAGE>.
3 Press the [NMIHIS] chapter selection soft key.
The following information is displayed:
1. System alarm occurrence date and time
2. System alarm number
3. System alarm message (No message is displayed for some
system alarms.)
25
1 2001–03–13 12:13:19
930 CPU INTERRUPT
2 2001–03–11 07:23:07
900 ROM PARITY
3 2001–02–27
EDIT **** *** *** 08:20:52

[ ][ ][ NMIHIS ][ ][ ]
[ SELECT ][ RETURN ][ CLEAR ][ ][ ]
[SELECT] soft key This soft key displays the details of a system alarm.
Procedure
1 Press the [(OPRT)] soft key on the system configuration screen.
PAGE
2 By using the cursor keys PAGE

, move the cursor to the system
alarm number whose details are to be displayed.
3 Press the [SELECT] soft key.
4 The details of the selected system alarm are displayed.
[CLEAR] soft key This soft key clears all system alarm information stored.
When bit 4 (OPC) of parameter No. 3110 is set to 1, this soft key is
displayed. When bit 4 (OPC) of parameter No. 3110 is set to 0, this soft
key is not displayed.
Procedure
1 Set bit 4 (OPC) of parameter No. 3110 to 1.
2 Press the [(OPRT)] soft key on the system configuration screen.
3 Press the [CLEAR] soft key.
4 Information about all of the three system alarms stored is cleared.
[RETURN] soft key Pressing the [RETURN] soft key while system alarm history screen
(detail screen) is displayed returns the screen display to the system alarm
list screen.
26
1.4.2.3 The system alarm history screen (detail screen) displays information
System alarm history items such as registers and stacks involved when a system alarm is issued.
screen (detail screen) The following items are displayed:
1. System alarm occurrence date and time
2. System alarm number
3. System alarm message (No message is displayed for some system
alarms.)
4. System alarm occurrence series and edition
5. Number of display pages
6. General–purpose resistor, pointer index register, segment register,
task register, LDT register, flag register, interrupt source, error
code, error address
7. Contents of stacks (up to 32 stacks)
8. Contents of stacks of privilege level 3 (up to 48 stacks)
9. NMI information
You can switch among the information items 6 to 9 by the page keys PAGE
PAGE
Pressing the [RETURN] soft key returns the screen display to the state
alarm history list screen.
2 2001–03–11 07:23:07 B8H1–01(1/4)

EAX EBX ECX EDX
00000000 00930063 000003E0 00000040
ESI EDI EBP ESP
00000010 009404E0 0000FFB4 0000FFDC
SS DS ES FS GS TR LDTR
06D8 0338 0248 0440 0338 0628 0028
EFLAGS VECT ERRC ERROR–ADDRESS
00003046 FFFF 0000 03E0:000009BC
EDIT **** *** *** 08:20:52

(Detail display screen 1)
27
2 2001–03–11 07:23:07 B8H1–01(2/4)

STACK (PL0)
3646 0338 7CBA 0001 0958 FFF8 0068 0063
0346 0000 0000 02BC 08F8 52F1 2438 0338
0580 0440 0580 001F 03C0 0214 0780 0FFF
0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
EDIT **** *** *** 08:20:52

2 2001–03–11 07:23:07 B8H1–01(3/4)

STACK!(PL3)
SS:ESP3 =0804:00007C50
CS:EIP =1350:00001234
1008 1408 0001 0002 0003 0004 1008 FFE4
1008 3678 00FA 0024 0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
EDIT **** *** *** 08:20:52

2 2001–03–11 07:23:07 B8H1–01(4/4)

NMIC
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SVL
11111111 11111111
SVR
11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111
11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111
ADRS
007F0000
EDIT **** *** *** 08:20:52

28
CAUTION
1 In the case of an NMI on other than the main board, the
registers of detail display screen 1, and the contents of detail
display screen 2 and detail display screen 3 are displayed.
2 2001–03–11 07:23:07 B8H1–01(1/1)

972 NMI OCUURRED IN OTHER MODULE
SLOT> 02 0080415F
<1> <2>
EDIT **** *** *** 08:20:52


<1> NMI occurrence slot number
<2> Message address set with the NMI occurrence slot (string address)
2 2001–03–11 07:23:07 B8H1–01(1/1)

900 ROM PARITY
00000000 00000000
<1>
EDIT **** *** *** 08:20:52


<1> ROM parity cause
Basic ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2F(h)
(800000A97FFFF)
Additional ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40(h)
(A00000AA3FFFF)
OMM ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80(h)
Servo ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100(h)
Built in MMC ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200(h)
Online Custom Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400(h)
29
1.4.2.4
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3103 NMH
[Data type] Bit

NMH The system alarm history screen is:
0 : Not displayed.
1 : Displayed.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3110 OPC
[Data type] Bit

OPC On the operation history screen, the [CLEAR] soft key is:
0 : Not enabled.
1 : Enabled.
30
1.5 This function enables the saving of external operator messages as a

record.
EXTERNAL The record can be viewed on the external operator message history screen.
OPERATOR
MESSAGES RECORD
1.5.1 (1) Press the MESSAGE function key.

Screen Display
(2) Press the rightmost soft key .
(3) Press the [MSGHIS] soft key.
PAGE
(4) To display the previous or subsequent screen, press the PAGE

or
key.
MESSAGE HISTORY O1234 N12345 →Date,

time, and
97/04/01 17:25:00 PAGE : 1
page
No. **** →Message
No.
Up to 255 characters Display

range
MEM STRT MTN FIN ALM 17:25:00

[ ][ MSGHIS ][ ][ ][ ]
1.5.2 (1) The recorded external operator message can be deleted by setting the
Deletion of External MMC bit (bit 0 of parameter 3113) to 1.
Pressing the [CLEAR] soft key erases all the records of the external
Operator Messages operator message.
Record (2) The MS1 and MS0 bits (bits 7 and 6 of parameter 3113) specify the
number of records to be displayed on the external operator message
history screen. When the bits are changed, all external operator
message records retained up to that point are erased.
31
1.5.3
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3113 MS1 MS0 MHC
#0 (MHC) The records of an external operator message:

0 : Cannot be erased.
1 : Can be erased.
#6, #7 (MS0, MS1) These bits set the number of characters to be retained in each record of an
external operator message, as well as the number of records, as shown in
the following table:
MS1 MS0 Number of characters in Number of records
each record
0 0 255 8
0 1 200 10
1 0 100 18
1 1 50 32
* An external operator message of up to 255 characters can be specified.

Combining the MS1 bit and MS0 bit (bits 7 and 6 of parameter No.
3113) selects the number of records by limiting the number of
characters to be retained as the record of an external operator message.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3112 OMH
#2 (OMH) The external operator message history screen is:

0 : Not displayed.
1 : Displayed.
NOTE
After setting this parameter, briefly turn the power off, then
on again.
1.5.4 When the number of an external operator message is specified, the system
Notes starts updating the records of the specified message. The system
continues to perform update until another external operator message is
specified or until an instruction to delete the records of the external
operator message is specified.
32
1.6 This function displays the key and signal operations performed by the
operator upon the occurrence of a fault or the output of an alarm, together
OPERATION with the corresponding alarms.
HISTORY This function records the following data:
(1) MDI key operations performed by the operator
(2) Status changes (ON/OFF) of input and output signals (selected signals
only)
(3) Details of alarms
(4) Time stamp (date and time)
1.6.1
Parameter Setting
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3106 OHS OPH
[Data type] Bit

#4 (OPH) The operation history screen is:
0 : Not displayed.
1 : Displayed.
#7 (OHS) The operation history is:
0 : Sampled.
1 : Not sampled.
3122 Interval at which the clock time is recorded in the operation history
[Data type] Word

[Units of data] Minutes
[Valid data range] 0 to 1439
The clock time is recorded to the operation history at specified intervals.
If zero is set as the interval, ten minutes is assumed. The time is recorded
only when data is recorded within the corresponding interval.
33
1.6.2
Screen Display
D Displaying the operation
(1) Press the SYSTEM
function key.
history
(2) Press the continue menu key [ ]. The [OPEHIS] [(OPRT)] soft key
are displayed.
(3) Press the [OPEHIS] soft key twice. The operation history screen is
displayed.
OPERATION HISTORY O1234 N12345

Page : 123
No.DATA No.DATA No.DATA
01 97/06/03 11 F0000.7↑ 21 F0001.0↓
02 08:40:00 12 F0000.5↑ 22 <POS>
03 <DELETE> 13 F0001.0↑ 23 <PROG>
04 F0000.6↑ 14 F0000.5↓ 24 <RESET>
05 MEM 15 P/S0010 25 EDIT
06 G0009.0↑ 16 97/06/03 26 O
07 G0009.1↑ 17 09:27:49 27 1
08 G0009.2↑ 18 <PROG> 28 2
09 ST↑ 19 <RESET> 29 3
10 ST↓ 20 F0000.7↓ 30 4
EDIT **** *** *** 08:20:52

[ TOP ][ BOTTOM ][ ][ ][PG.SRH]
On the operation history screen, the soft keys are configured as shown
below:
⇒[ ] [ PARAM ] [DGNOS] [PMC]
[SYSTEM] [(OPE)] [ ]
ãpush
[ ] [W.DGNS] [ ][ ] [OPEHIS] [(OPE)] [ ]
ã push
[ ] [ OPEHIS ] [SG–SEL] [ ] [ ] [(OPE)] [ ]
ãpush
[ ] [ TOP ] [BOTTOM] [ ] [ ] [PG.SRH] [ ]
(4) To display the next part of the operation history, press the page down
PAGE
key . The next page is displayed.
To display the interface between two pages, press cursor key or
. The screen is scrolled by one row. On a 14–inch CRT screen,

pressing the cursor key scrolls the screen by half a page.
These soft keys can also be used:
1) Pressing the [TOP] soft key displays the first page (oldest data).
2) Pressing the [BOTTOM] soft key displays the last page (latest
data).
3) Pressing the [PG.SRH] soft key displays a specified page.
Example) By entering 50 then pressing the [PG.SRH] key, page 50 is
displayed.
34
Data displayed on the operation history screen

(1) MDI keys
Address and numeric keys are displayed after a single space.
Soft keys are displayed in square brackets ([]).
Other keys (RESET/INPUT, for example) are displayed in angle
brackets (<>).
A key pressed at power–on is displayed in reverse video.
For two–path control, the operations of path 2 are displayed in the
same way, but preceded by S_.
1) Function key: POS , PROG , OFFSET

SETTING , etc.
2) Address/numeric key: A to Z, 0 to 9, ; (EOB), +, –, (, etc.

3) Page/cursor key: PAGE
, ,
4) Soft key: [SF1], [SF2], etc.
5) Other key: RESET , CAN , etc.
6) Key pressed at power–on: RESET
(2) Input and output signals

General signals are displayed in the following format:
G0000.7↑
The ↑ mark indicates that the signal is

turned on.
The ↓ mark indicates that the signal is
turned off.
Indicates the bit.
Indicates the address.
Some signals are indicated by their symbol names.
SBK ↑ (Indicates that the single block switch is turned on.)
35
Mode selection signals and rapid traverse override signals

are displayed as indicated below:
Input signal
Name displayed
MD1 MD2 MD4 REF DNC1
0 0 0 0 0 MDI
1 0 0 0 0 MEM
1 0 0 0 1 RMT
0 1 0 0 0 NOMODE
1 1 0 0 0 EDT
0 0 1 0 0 H/INC
1 0 1 0 0 JOG
1 0 1 1 0 REF
0 1 1 0 0 TJOG
1 1 1 0 0 THND
Input signal
Name displayed
ROV1 ROV2
0 0 R 100%
1 0 R 50%
0 1 R 25%
1 1 R F0%
(3) NC alarms
NC alarms are displayed in reverse video.
P/S alarms, system alarms, and external alarms are displayed together
with their numbers.
For other types of alarms, only the alarm type is displayed. (No details
are displayed.)
(4) Time stamp (date and time)
The following time data (date and time) is recorded:
1) Date and time of power–on
2) Date and time of power–off
3) Date and time when an NC alarm occurs
4) The clock time is recorded at predetermined intervals, together
with each new calendar day.
36
1) The power–on time is displayed as shown below:

97/01/20 ==== Year/Month/Day
09:15:30 ==== Hour:Minute:Second
2) The power–off time and the time when an NC alarm occurred are
displayed in reverse video.
If a system alarm occurs, the date and time are not recorded.
3) At predetermined intervals, the clock time is displayed in reverse
video. Set the interval in minutes in parameter No. 3122. If zero
is set, the time is stamped at ten–minute intervals.
Each new calendar day is displayed in reverse video.
CAUTION
The clock time is recorded for a specified interval only when
data is stored within that interval.
D Input signal or output

(1) Press the SYSTEM function key.
signal to be recorded in
the operation history (2) Press the continuous menu key [ ]. The [OPEHIS] (operation
history) soft key is displayed.
(3) Press the [OPEHIS] soft key, then press the [SG–SEL] soft key. The
operation history signal selection screen is displayed.
OP_HIS SIGNAL SELECT O1000 N02000
No. ADDRES SIGNAL No. ADDRES SIGNAL

01 X0000 00001000 11 G0000 00000001
02 X0004 10000000 12 G0004 00000011
03 X0008 00001100 13 G0008 00000111
04 X0009 00111000 14 G0003 00001111
05 X0012 00001111 15 G0043 01100000
06 Y0000 01000000 16 ********
07 Y0004 00110000 17 ********
08 Y0007 00011100 18 ********
09 Y0008 00011100 19 ********
10 Y0010 00011100 20 ********
>
EDIT **** *** * * * 00:00:00
[OPEHIS] [SG–SEL] [ ] [ ] [ (OPE) ]
37
1.6.3 (1) On the operation history signal selection screen, press the [(OPE)] soft
Setting the Input Signal key.
or Output Signal to be
Recorded in the OP_HIS SIGNAL SELECT O1000 N02000
Operation History No. ADDRES SIGNAL No. ADDRES SIGNAL

01 G0004 00000010 11 ********
02 ******** 12 ********
03 ******** 13 ********
04 ******** 14 ********
05 ******** 15 ********
06 ******** 16 ********
07 ******** 17 ********
08 ******** 18 ********
09 ******** 19 ********
10 ******** 20 ********
>
EDIT **** *** *** *** 00:00:00
[ ALLDEL ][ DELETE ][ ON:1 ][ OFF:0 ][ ]
(2) Press the cursor key or to position the cursor to a desired

position.
(3) Key in a signal type (X, G, F, or Y) and an address, then press the INPUT
key.
Example) G0004 INPUT
Signal address G0004 is set in the ADDRES column. The

corresponding position in the SIGNAL column is initialized to
000000000.
(4) Select the bit to be recorded.
To select all bits of the specified signal address, press the [ON:1] soft
key while the cursor is positioned to 00000000 .
To select a particular bit, position the cursor to that bit by pressing the
cursor key or , then press the [ON:1] soft key. To cancel
a selection made by pressing the [ON:1] soft key or to cancel a
previously selected signal, press the [OFF:0] soft key.
(5) Up to 20 addresses can be specified by means of this signal selection.
These addresses need not always be specified at consecutive positions,
starting from No.1.
(6) Pressing the [ALLDEL] and [EXEC] soft keys deletes all data. If the
[ALLDEL] key is pressed by mistake, it can be cancelled by pressing
the [CAN] key.
(7) To delete a selected signal address, position the cursor to the
corresponding position then press the [DELETE] and [EXEC] soft
keys. In the SIGNAL column, asterisks ******** are displayed in
place of the deleted data. In the ADDRES column, the corresponding
position is cleared.
If the [DELET] key is pressed by mistake, it can be cancelled by
pressing the [CAN] key.
38
(8) Pressing the return menu key [ ] causes the [OPEHIS] (OPE) soft
key to be displayed again.
D Input signals and output
signals to be recorded in
the history NOTE
1 A cross (×) indicates that a signal will not be recorded. Also,
any signal for which an address is not specified will not be
recorded, either.
2 A circle (f) indicates that a signal can be recorded.
3 A signal indicated by its symbol name will also be displayed
by its symbol name.
1. addresses
MT→PMC
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X000 f f f f f f f f
∼∼
X127 f f f f f f f f
PMC→CNC
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G000 f f f f f f f f
∼∼
G004 f f f f FIN f f f
G005 f f f f TFIN SFIN f MFIN
G006 f f f f f *ABS f SRN
G007 RLSOT EXLM *FLUP f f ST STLK f
G008 ERS RRW *SP *ESP f f f *IT
∼∼
∼∼
G019 RT f f f f f f f
∼∼
39
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G043 f × f × × f f f
G044 f f f f f f MLK BDT1
G045 BDT9 BDT8 BDT7 BDT6 BDT5 BDT4 BDT3 BDT2
G046 DRN KEY4 KEY3 KEY2 KEY1 f SBK f
∼∼
G061 f f f f f f f RGTA
∼∼
G100 +J8 +J7 +J6 +J5 +J4 +J3 +J2 +J1
G102 –J8 –J7 –J6 –J5 –J4 –J3 –J2 –J1
∼∼
G106 MI8 MI7 MI6 MI5 MI4 MI3 MI2 MI1
G108 MLK8 MLK7 MLK6 MLK5 MLK4 MLK3 MLK2 MLK1
G110 +LM8 +LM7 +LM6 +LM5 +LM4 +LM3 +LM2 +LM1
G112 –LM8 –LM7 –LM6 –LM5 –LM4 –LM3 –LM2 –LM1
G114 *+L8 *+L7 *+L6 *+L5 *+L4 *+L3 *+L2 *+L1
G116 *–L8 *–L7 *–L6 *–L5 *–L4 *–L3 *–L2 *–L1
40
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G118 *+ED8 *+ED7 *+ED6 *+ED5 *+ED4 *+ED3 *+ED2 *+ED1
G120 *–ED8 *–ED7 *–ED6 *–ED5 *–ED4 *–ED3 *–ED2 *–ED1
∼∼
G126 SVF8 SVF7 SVF6 SVF5 SVF4 SVF3 SVF2 SVF1
∼∼
G130 *IT8 *IT7 *IT6 *IT5 *IT4 *IT3 *IT2 *IT1
G132 f f f f +MIT4 +MIT3 +MIT2 +MIT1
G134 f f f f –MIT4 –MIT3 –MIT2 –MIT1
∼∼
PMC→MT
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Y000 f f f f f f f f
∼∼
Y127 f f f f f f f f
CNC→PMC
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F000 f f f f f f f f
∼∼
F255 f f f f f f f f
41
1.6.4 Recorded data can be output to an input/output unit connected via a

Inputting and reader/punch interface. An output record can be input from the
input/output unit.
Outputting the Set the input/output unit to be used in setting parameters No. 0020 and
Operation History Data 0100 to 0135.
To output the data, set a code in the ISO bit of a setting parameter (bit 1
of parameter No. 0020).
D Output (1) Select EDIT mode.

(2) Press the SYSTEM key, then select the operation history display screen.
(3) Press the soft keys [(OPRT)], , [PUNCH], and [EXEC] in this
order.
The data output to the FANUC Floppy Cassette or FANUC FA Card is
stored under file name OPERATION HISTORY.
D Input (1) Select EDIT mode.

(2) Press the SYSTEM key, then select the operation history display screen.
(3) Press the soft keys [(OPRT)], , [READ], and [EXEC] in this
order.
D Output data format 1. MDI/soft key
2. Signal
3. Alarm
4. For extension (date or time)
The header and recorded operation data are output, in this order. The
operation history data is divided into four parts by identifier words. Data
other than the identifier words depends on the type.
T(identifier word)
T0 : Header
T50 : MDI/soft key
T51 : Signal
T52 : Alarm
T53 : For extension (date or time)
42
1) Header
T 0 C O P E R A T I O N
H I S T O R Y ;
C: Data word
2) MDI/soft key
T 5 0 P 0 to 1 H * * ;
P0: Usually
P1: At power–on
H **: Key code (See the page 39.)
3) Signal
T 5 1 P 0 to 6 N 0 to 255 H * * , * * ;
New data Old data

P0: X0000 and above
P2: G0000 and above
P4: Y0000 and above
P6: F0000 and above
N***: DI/DO number
H **: Signal information data (hexadecimal)
43
4) Alarm
T 5 2 P 0 to 10 N * * * * ;
P0: P/S No. 100

P1: P/S No. 000
P2: P/S No. 101
P3: P/S No. 0001 to 254
P4: Overtravel alarm
P5: Overheat alarm
P6: Servo alarm
P7: System alarm
P8: APC alarm
P9: Spindle alarm
P10: P/S alarm No. 5000 to 5999
P15: External alarm
N****: Alarm number (for P/S alarm, system alarm, and external alarm only)
5) For extension (date or time)
Date T 5 3 P 0 to 1 E 0 D * * * * * * * * ;
Time T 5 3 P 0 to 1 E 1 D * * * * * * ;
P0: Usually
P1: At power–on
E0: Date
E1: Time
D*..*: Data Example) October 29, 1997
D 1 9 9 7 1 0 2 9
44
Key codes (MDI/soft key)

(00H to 7FH)
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
0 Space 0 @ P
1 ! 1 A Q
2 ” 2 B R
3 # 3 C S
4 $ 4 D T
5 % 5 E U
6 & 6 F V
7 ’ 7 G W
8 ( 8 H X
9 ) 9 I Y
A ; * : J Z
(EOB)
B + K [
C ’ < L ¥
D – = M ]
E . > N
F / ? O –
45
(80H to FFH)
8 9 A B C D E F
0 Reset F0
* *
1 MMC F1
* *
2 CNC F2
* *
3 F3
*
4 Shift Insert F4
* *
5 Delete F5
* *
6 CAN Alter F6
* *
7 F7
*
8 Cur→ Input POS F8

* * * *
9 Cur← PROG F9
* * *
A Cur↓ Help OFFSET

* * SETTING
*
B Cur↑ SYSTEM
* *
C MESSAGE
*
D CUSTOM
GRAPH
*1*
E Page↓ CUSTOM FR
* * *
F Page↑ Fapt FL
* * *
*1:On the small–sized keypad, ED corresponds to the CUSTOM

GRAPH key. On a
standard keyboard, ED corresponds to the GRAPH key and EE to the
CUSTOM
key.
* : Command key
46
1.6.5 (1) While the operation history screen is displayed, no information can be
Notes recorded to the history.
(2) An input signal having an on/off width of up to 16 msec is not recorded
in the history. Some signals are not recorded in the history.
(3) Once the storage becomes full, old data is deleted, starting from the
oldest record. Up to about 8000 key information items can be
recorded.
(4) The recorded data is retained even after the power is turned off. A
memory all clear operation, however, erases the recorded data.
(5) The operation history function cannot execute sampling when the
OHS bit (bit 7 of parameter No. 3106) is set to 1.
(6) Set the date and time on the setting screen.
(7) The time needed to input and output 6000 operation records at a rate
of 4800 baud is as follows:
Output: About 5 minutes
Input: About 2 minutes and 30 seconds
This file corresponds to a paper tape of about 180 m in length.
47
1.7
HELP FUNCTION
1.7.1 The help function displays alarm information, operation method and a
table of contents for parameters. This function is used as a handbook.
General
1.7.2 Press HELP key on any screen other than PMC screen, then a help screen
Display Method
appears.
(However, it is not available when PMC screen/CUSTOM screen is
displaying)
D Display of help screen
HELP (INITIAL MENU) O1234 N12345
***** HELP *****

1. ALARM DETAIL
2. OPERATION METHOD
3. PARAMETER TABLE
[ALARM] [OPERAT] [PARAM] [ ] [ ]
D Help for alarm (1) When an alarm is generated, press soft key [ALARM], then a help
message of the alarm is displayed.
HELP (INITIAL MENU) O1234 N12345
NUMBER : 010
M’SAGE : IMPROPER G CODE
FUNCTION :
ALARM :
A G CODE NOT LISTED IN G–CODE TABLE
IS BEING COMMANDED
ALSO G–CODE FOR FUNCTION NOT ADDED
IS BEING COMMANDED
[ALARM] [OPERAT] [PARAM] [ ] [ (OPRT) ]
(2) Pressing soft key [OPERAT],(alarm No.), and soft key [SELECT]
in this order, a help message corresponding to the input alarm number
is displayed.
48
D Help for operation (1) Press [2 OPR], then a menu for operation method is displayed.
HELP (OPERATION METHOD) O1234 N12345
1. PROGRAM EDIT
2. SEARCH
3. RESET
4. DATA INPUT WITH MDI
5. DATA INPUT WITH TAPE
6. OUTPUT
7. INPUT WITH FANUC CASSETTE
8. OUTPUT WITH FANUC CASSETTE
9. MEMORY CLEAR
[ALARM] [OPRERAT] [PARAM] [ ] [(OPRT)]
(2) Press [OPERAT], (an item number) and soft key [SELECT], then an
operation method of the item is displayed.
PAGE
Pressing PAGE key PAGE
or displays another pages.
HELP (OPERATION METHOD) O1234 N12345

<<1.PROGRAM EDIT>> 1/4 Current
page/ Total
DELETE ALL PROGRAMS page
MODE :EDIT
SCREEN :PROGRAM
OPR :(0–9999) – (DELETE)
DELETE ONE PROGRAM

MODE : EDIT
SCREEN : PROGRAM
OPR :(0+PROGRAM NUMBER) – <DELETE>
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [SELECT]
49
D Parameter table Press soft key [PARAM], then a parameter table is displayed.
HELP (PARAMETER TABLE) O1234 N12345

1/4 Current
page/ Total
·SETTING (NO.0000~ ) page
·READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE (NO.0100~ )
·AXIS CONTROL/SETTING UNIT (NO.1000~ )
·COORDINATE SYSTEM (NO.1200~ )
·STROKE LIMIT (NO.1300~ )
·FEED RATE (NO.1400~ )
·ACCEL/DECELERATION CTRL (NO.1600~ )
·SERVO RELATED (NO.1800~ )
·DI/DO (NO.3000~ )
[ ALARM ] [OPERAT][ PARAM ] [ ][SELECT]
PAGE
Another screen can be selected by the PAGE key PAGE
or .
50
1.8
DISPLAYING
DIAGNOSTIC PAGE
1.8.1 (1) Press SYSTEM key.

Displaying Diagnostic
(2) Press soft key [DGNOS], then a diagnostic screen is displayed.
Page
1.8.2
Contents Displayed
D Causes when the 000 WAITING FOR FIN SIGNAL An auxiliary function is being
machine does not travel executed.
in spite of giving a 001 MOTION Travel command of cycle
command operation is being executed.
002 DWELL DWELL Dwell is being
executed.
003 IN–POSITION CHECK In–position check is being done.
004 FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 0% Feedrate override is 0%.
005 INTERLOCK/START LOCK Interlock or start lock is input.
006 SPINDLE SPEED ARRIVAL CHECK Waiting for spindle speed arrival
signal.
010 PUNCHING Data is being output through
reader/puncher interface.
011 READING Data is being input through
reader/puncher interface.
012 WAITING FOR (UN) CLAMP Waiting for the end of index table
indexing
013 JOG FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 0% Manual feedrate override is 0%.
014 WAITING FOR RESET, ESP,RRW OFF NC is in reset state.
015 EXTERNAL PROGRAM NUMBER SEARCH External Program Number
Search External program
number search is being done
016 BACKGROUND ACTIVE Background is being used.
51
D Cause of the cycle start

LED turned off 020 CUT SPEED UP/DOWN 1 0 0 0 1 0 0
021 RESET BUTTON ON
022 RESET AND REWIND ON 0 0 1 0 0 0 0
023 EMERGENCY STOP ON 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
024 RESET ON
1 0 0 0 0 0 0
025 STOP MOTION OR DWELL
1 1 1 1 0 0 0
1 1 1 1 1 1 0
Input of emergency stop signal

Input of external reset signal
Reset button On of MDI
Input of reset & rewind
Servo alarm generation
Switching to other mode, Feed hold
Single block stop
D State of TH alarm 030 CHARACTER NUMBER TH ALARM Position of the character that
caused TH alarm. The position is
counted from the head.
031 TH DATA Data of the character that caused
TH alarm.
D Screen hard copy status

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 035 ER3 ER2 ER1 ABT END
#0(END): Screen hard copy was completed normally.

#1(ABT): Screen hard copy was discontinued.
#2(ER1): An invalid parameter value was specified for screen hard copy.
#3(ER2): An attempt to use a memory card for screen hard copy failed.
#4(ER3): An error occurred during writing to a memory card for screen hard copy.
52
D C executor status
DGN 045 C executor status
[Data type] Bit

C executor status
0: Normal.
2: Inoperable because of an incorrect FROM content.
3: Inoperable because the power was switched on with the M and 0 keys held
down.
5: Inoperable because of insufficient SRAM area; increase the SRAM area size.
Alternatively, inoperable because of an incorrect C executor library version; use
a new C executor library.
6: Inoperable because of an internal error.
10: Inoperable because of an incorrect C executor library version; use a new C

executor library.
11: Inoperable because of an incorrect FROM content.
D Detail of serial pulse

coder
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 0202 CSA BLA PHA RCA BZA CKA SPH
#6(CSA): Hardware of serial pulse coder is abnormal

#5(BLA): Battery voltage is low (warning)
#4(PHA): Serial pulse coder or feedback cable is erroneous.
#3(RCA): Serial pulse coder is faulty.
Counting of feedback cable is erroneous.
#2(BZA): Battery voltage became 0.
Replace the battery and set the reference position.
#1(CKA): Serial pulse coder is faulty.
Internal block stopped.
#0(SPH): Serial pulse coder or feedback cable is faulty.
Counting of feedback cable is erroneous.
53
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 0203 DTE CRC STB PRM
#7(DTE): Communication failure of serial pulse coder.

There is no response for communication.
#6(CRC): Communication failure of serial pulse coder.
Transferred data is erroneous.
#5(STB): Communication failure of serial pulse coder.
Transferred data is erroneous.
#4(PRM): An invalid parameter is detected on the digital servo side.
D Details of digital servo
alarm #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 0200 OVL LV OVC HCA HVA DCA FBA OFA
#7(OVL): Overload alarm

#6(LV): Insufficient voltage alarm
#5(OVC): Over current alarm
#4(HCA): Abnormal current alarm
#3(HVA): Overvoltage alarm
#2(DCA): Discharge alarm
#1(FBA): Disconnection alarm
#0(OFA): Overflow alarm
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 0201 ALD EXP
Overload 0 – – – Motor overheat

alarm 1 – – – Amplifier overheat
Disconnection 1 – – 0 Built–in pulse coder (hand)
alarm 1 – – 1 Disconnection of separated type pulse
coder (hard)
0 – – 0 Disconnection of pulse coder (software)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 0204 OFS MCC LDA PMS
#6(OFS): Abnormal current value result of A/D conversion of digital

#5(MCC): Contacts of MCC of servo amplifier is melted.
#4(LDA): Serial pulse coder LED is abnormal
#3(PMS): Feedback is not correct due to faulty serial pulse coder C or feedback
cable.
This data indicates the cause of servo alarm No. 417, detected by the NC.
If the alarm is detected by the servo, the PRM bit (bit 4 of DGN No. 0203)
is set to 1.
54
D Details of stand–alone
type serial pulse coder
alarms #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 205 OHA LDA BLA PHA CMA BZA PMA SPH
#7(OHA): Overheat occurred in the stand–alone type pulse coder.

#6(LDA): An LED error occurred in the stand–alone type pulse coder.
#5(BLA): A low battery voltage occurred in the stand–alone type pulse coder.
#4(PHA): A phase data error occurred in the stand–alone type linear scale.
#3(CMA): A count error occurred in the stand–alone type pulse coder.
#2(BZA): The battery voltage for the stand–alone type pulse coder is zero.
#1(PMA): A pulse error occurred in the stand–alone type pulse coder.
#0(SPH): A soft phase data error occurred in the stand–alone type pulse coder.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 206 DTE CRC STB
#7(DTE): A data error occurred in the stand–alone type pulse coder.

#6(CRC): A CRC error occurred in the stand–alone type pulse coder.
#5(STB): A stop bit error occurred in the stand–alone type pulse coder.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0280 AXS DIR PLS PLC MOT
#0 (MOT): The motor type specified in parameter No. 2020 falls outside the
predetermined range.
#2 (PLC): The number of velocity feedback pulses per motor revolution, specified in
parameter No. 2023, is zero or less. The value is invalid.
#3 (PLS): The number of position feedback pulses per motor revolution, specified in
#4 (DIR): The wrong direction of rotation for the motor is specified in parameter No.
2022 (the value is other than 111 or –111).
#6 (AXS): In parameter No. 1023 (servo axis number), a value that falls outside the
range of 1 to the number of controlled axes is specified. (For example, 4 is
specified instead of 3.) Alternatively, the values specified in the
parameter are not consecutive.
D Position error amount
DGN 0300 Position error of an axis in detection unit
Feed rate [mm/min] 1

Position error= ×
60 servo loop gain [1/sec] Detection unit
D Machine position
DGN 0301 Distance from reference position of an axis in detection unit
55
D Reference position shift

function
DGN 302 Distance from the end of the deceleration dog to the first grid point
[Data type] Two–word axis

[Units of data] 0.001 mm (metric output), 0.0001 inch (inch output)
[Valid data range] 0 to "99999999
The cause when an reference position return complete parameter goes
down can be referred to by the following diagnosis.
D Position deviation with

fine acceleration/
deceleration enabled
DGN 303 Position deviation with fine acceleration/deceleration enabled

[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] 99999999 to –99999999
D Reference counter
DGN 304 Reference counter for individual axes

D Displacement detection
DGN 305 Position feedback data between Z phases of individual axes

If displacement detection is enabled, the feedback data between the Z
phases of different axes is represented in the detection unit.
56
D Machine coordinates of
angular axis/orthogonal
axis
DGN 306 Machine coordinates of a slant axis in the Cartesian coordinate system
DGN 307 Machine coordinates of an orthogonal axis in the Cartesian coordinate system
[Data type] Two–word

[Unit of data]
Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit
Metric input 0.01 0.01 0.01 mm
Inch input 0.001 0.001 0.001 inch
Rotation axis 0.01 0.01 0.01 deg
[Valid data range] –99999999 to 99999999

These parameters are updated only when bit 0 (AAC) of parameter No.
8200 is set to 1, and any of the parameters below is set to 1:
D Bit 0 (AOT) of parameter No. 8201
D Bit 1 (AO2) of parameter No. 8201
D Bit 2 (AO3) of parameter No. 8201
D Bit 3 (QSA) of parameter No. 5009 (T series only)
D The interference check option is selected.
D Cause of the APZ bit (bit
4 of parameter 1815)
brought to 0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 310 DTH ALP NOF BZ2 BZ1 PR2 PR1
#0(PR1): The setting of the following parameters has been changed: Parameters
1821, 1850, 1860, 1861.
#1(PR2): The setting of the ATS bit (bit 1 of parameter 8302) has been changed.
#2(BZ1): The detected APC battery voltage is 0 V (Inductosyn).
#3(BZ2): The detected APC battery voltage is 0 V (separate position detector).
#4(NOF): The Inductosyn output no offset data.
#5(ALP): Before the α pulse coder detects a full single rotation, reference position
establishment by parameters was attempted.
#6(DTH): A controlled axis detach signal/parameter was input.
57
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 311 DUA XBZ GSG AL4 AL3 AL2 AL1
#0(AL1): An APC alarm was issued.

#1(AL2): A disconnection was detected.
#2(AL3): The detected APC battery voltage is 0 V (serial pulse coder).
#3(AL4): An abnormal rotation speed (RCAL) was detected.
#4(GSG): The G202 signal was brought from 0 to 1.
#5(XBZ): The detected APC battery voltage is 0 V (serial separate position
detector).
#6(DUA): While the dual position feedback function was being used, the difference
in error between the semi–closed loop side and the closed loop side
became too large.
D FSSB status
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 320 CFE ERR ERP OPN RDY OPP CLS
Indicates the internal status of the FSSBC.

#0(CLS): Closed.
#1(OPP): Running OPEN protocol.
#2(RDY): Open and ready.
#3(OPN): Open.
#4(ERP): Running ERROR protocol.
#5(ERR):
#7(CFE): Encountered configuration error.
(The actual slave type does not match the one specified in the conversion
table.)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 321 XE3 XE2 XE1 XE0 ER3 ER2 ER1 ER0
Indicates the cause of an FSSBC error.

#0(ER0): INFORMED ERROR
#1(ER1): (RESERVE)
#2(ER2): Master port disconnection
#3(ER3): External EMG input
Indicates the cause of an FSSBC error resulting from a request from a slave.
#4(XE0): (RESERVE)
#5(XE1): Slave port disconnection
#6(XE2): Master port disconnection
#7(XE3): External EMG input
58
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 330 EXT DUA ST1 ST0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 332
∼∼ EXT DUA ST1 ST0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 348 EXT DUA ST1 ST0
#0, #1(ST0, ST1): Indicates the type code for an actually connected slave.
ST1 ST0 Type Address
0 0 A Servo amplifier
0 1 (B: RESERVE) (Currently nonexistent)
1 0 C Stand–alone type detector inter-

face unit
1 1 (RESERVE) (Currently nonexistent)
#2(DUA): 0 : The slave of interest is not on the first axis of the two–axis amplifier.
1 : The slave of interest is on the first axis of the two–axis amplifier.
#3(EXT): 0 : The slave of interest does not exist.
1 : The slave of interest exists.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 331 DMA TP1 TP0 HA2 HA1 HA0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
XX
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#0, #1, #2(HA0, HA1, HA2): Indicates the host LSI address specified as a DMA destination.
#3, #4 (TP0, TP1): Indicates the type code of a specified slave.
(See the above descriptions about ST0 and ST1.)
#5(DMA): Indicates a value determining whether to allow DMA to occur.
NOTE
A combination of parameter Nos. 330 and 331 corresponds
to one FSSB slave unit. Up to ten slave units are available.
59
Slave units and the associated diagnosis numbers
Slave unit 00 ³ Diagnosis No. 330, No. 331

D Details of invalid servo

parameter setting alarms
(on the servo side)
DGN 352 Detail number for invalid servo parameter setting alarm
Indicates information that can be used to identify the location (parameter)

and cause of an invalid servo parameter setting alarm (servo alarm No.
417).
This diagnosis information is valid when the following conditions are
satisfied.
D Servo alarm No. 417 has occurred.
D Bit 4 of diagnosis No. 203 (PRM) = 1
See the following table for the displayed detail numbers and the
corresponding causes. For further detail information that could be used
to take measures, refer to FANUC AC Servo Motor αSeries Parameter
Manual (B–65150E).
D Detailed descriptions
about invalid servo
parameter setting alarms
Detail Parameter
Cause Measure
number number
0233 2023 A value specified as the number of veloc- Decrease the value specified as the num-
ity pulses is greater than 13100 when ini- ber of velocity pulses to within 13100.
tialization bit 0 = 1.
0243 2024 A value specified as the number of posi- Decrease the value specified as the num-
tion pulses is greater than 13100 when ber of position pulses to within 13100.
initialization bit 0 = 1.
0434 2043 The internal value of the velocity loop in- Decrease the value specified in the veloc-
0435 tegration gain has overflowed. ity loop integration gain parameter.
0444 2044 The internal value of the velocity loop pro- Use a function for changing the internal for-
0445 portional gain has overflowed. mat of the velocity loop proportional gain.
0474 2047 The internal value of the observer param- Change the setting to: (–1) × (desired
0475 eter (POA1) has overflowed. setting)/10
60
Detail Parameter
Cause Measure
number number
0534 2053 The internal value of the dead zone com- Decrease the setting until the invalid pa-
0535 pensation parameter has overflowed. rameter setting alarm will not occur any
longer.
0544 2054 The internal value of the dead zone com- Decrease the setting until the invalid param-
0545 pensation parameter has overflowed. eter setting alarm will not occur any longer.
0686 2068 The internal value of the feedforward co- Use the position gain magnification func-
0687 efficient has overflowed. tion.
0688
0694 2069 The interval value of the velocity feedfor- Decrease the velocity feedforward coeffi-
0695 ward coefficient has overflowed. cient.
0696
0699
0754 2075 The setting of the parameter listed at the This parameter is presently not in use.
0755 left has overflowed. Specify 0 in it.
0764 2076 The setting of the parameter listed at the This parameter is presently not in use.
0765 left has overflowed. Specify 0 in it.
0783 2078 The conversion coefficient parameter Set a value in this parameter.
listed at the left has not been set up for a
full–closed loop linear motor (for the Se-
ries 9080 only).
0793 2079 The conversion coefficient parameter Set a value in this parameter.
listed at the left has not been set up for a
full–closed loop linear motor (for the Se-
ries 9080 only).
0843 2084 No positive value has been set for the Specify a positive value as the flexible
flexible feed gear numerator. feed gear numerator.
Alternatively, the following condition ex- Alternatively, satisfy the following condi-
ists: Feed gear numerator > denominator tion: Feed gear numerator x denomina-
tor (except for phase A–/B–specific
stand–alone type detector).
0853 2085 No positive value has been set as the Specify a positive value as the flexible
flexible feed gear denominator. feed gear denominator.
0884 2088 The internal value of the machine velocity Decrease the machine velocity feedback
0885 feedback coefficient has overflowed. coefficient.
0886 Alternatively, use the damping control
function, which has an equivalent effect.
0883 2088 A value of 100 or greater was specified in The maximum allowable value for the ma-
the machine velocity feedback coefficient chine velocity feedback coefficient for axes
for an axis with a serial stand–alone type with a serial stand–alone type detector is
detector. 100. Decrease the setting to within 100.
0926 2092 The interval value of the advance feedfor- Use the position gain magnification func-
0927 ward coefficient has overflowed. tion.
0928
0996 2099 The internal value for suppressing N Decrease the setting of the parameter
pulses has overflowed. listed at the left.
61
Detail Parameter
Cause Measure
number number
1123 2112 No value has been entered for the AMR Specify the AMR conversion coefficient.
conversion coefficient parameter when a
linear motor is in use.
1183 2118 No value has been specified in the semi–/ Specify a semi–/full–closed loop error
full–closed loop error threshold parameter threshold value for the parameter listed at
for a full–closed loop linear motor (for the the left.
Series 9080 only).
1284 2128 If the value specified as the number of ve- Decrease the value for the parameter
1285 locity pulses is small, the internal value of listed at the left to within a range where no
the current control parameter overflows. alarm will occur any longer.
1294 2129 If the value specified as the number of ve- Re–set “a” to a smaller value when the
1295 locity pulses is large, the internal value of setting of the parameter listed at the left is
the current control parameter overflows. broken up into: a × 256 + b
1393 2139 The setting of the linear motor AMR offset Decrease the setting of the parameter
has exceeded ±45. listed at the left to within ±45.
1446 2144 The cutting feedforward coefficient for the Use the position gain magnification func-
1447 cutting–/rapid traverse–specific FAD function.
1448 tion has overflowed.
1454 2145 The cutting velocity feedforward coeffi- Decrease the velocity feedforward coeffi-
1455 cient for the cutting–/rapid traverse–spe- cient.
1456 cific FAD function has overflowed.
1459
8213 1821 No positive value has been set in the ref- Specify a positive value in the parameter
erence counter capacity parameter. listed at the left.
8254 1825 The internal value of the position gain has Use the position gain magnification func-
8255 overflowed. tion.
8256
10016 2200 bit 0 The internal value of a parameter used to Do not use the runaway detection func-
10019 detect runaway has overflowed. tion (specify bit 0 = 1).
10043 1815#1 A full–closed loop has been set up for a A full–closed loop cannot be specified for
2010#2 linear motor (except for the Series 9080). linear motors.
10053 2018#0 The scale reverse connection bit has The scale reverse connection bit cannot
been set up for a linear motor. be used for linear motors.
10062 2209#4 The amplifier in use does not support the If you want to use this amplifier, reset the
HC alarm avoidance function. function bit listed at the left to 0.
If you want to use the HC alarm avoidance
function, use an amplifier that supports it.
62
D Error detection
DGN 360 Cumulative command pulse count (NC)

Indicates the cumulative count of movement commands distributed from
the CNC since the power was switched on.
DGN 361 Cumulative compensation pulse count (NC)
[Data type] Word axis

Indicates the cumulative count of compensation pulses (backlash
compensation, pitch error compensation, etc.) distributed from the CNC
since the power was switched on.
DGN 362 Cumulative command pulse count (SV)

Indicates the cumulative count of movement command and compensation
pulses received at the servo section since the power was switched on.
DGN 363 Cumulative feedback pulse count (SV)

Indicates the cumulative count of position feedback pulses received from
the pulse coder by the servo section.
63
D Diagnostic data related

to the Inductosyn
absolute position
detector
DGN 380 Difference between the absolute position of the motor and offset data
M (absolute position of the motor) – S (offset data)

λ(pitch interval)
The remainder resulting from the division is displayed.

[Units of data] Detection units
DGN 381 Offset data from the Inductosyn
Off set data is displayed when CNC calculates the machine position.
[Units of data] Detection units
D State of remote buffer
(protocol A)
DGN 0500 Send command
1: SYN 2: RDY 3: RST 4: ALM

5: SAT 6: GTD 7: RTY 8: SDI
DGN 0501 Receive command
1: SYN 2: RDY 3: ARS 4: AAL

5: CLB 6: SET 7: DAT 8: EOD
9: WAT 10: RTY 11:RDI 12: SDO
DGN 0502 State of remote buffer
0: Not ready
1: Reset state
2: Operation state
3: Alarm state
4: Circuit disconnection
64
D Open CNC
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 510
This data indicates the internal Open CNC information (not available to
general users).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 511
This data indicates the internal Open CNC information (not available to
general users).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 512 PA1 PA0 BNK THH THL PRA
This data indicates the cause of a system alarm that has occurred in Open
CNC.
#0(PRA) 1 : A RAM parity error occurred in shared RAM.
#2(THL) 0 : The temperature of the harddisk of Open CNC is too low.
1 : Normal
#3(THH) 0 : The temperature of the harddisk of Open CNC is too high.
1 : Normal
#4 0 : Normal
1 : An NMI has occurred in HSSB.
#5(BNK) If bit 0 (PRA) is set to 1,
0 : An alarm occurred in the lower half of shared RAM.
1 : An alarm occurred in the upper half of shared RAM.
#6 (PA0) If bit 0 (PRA) is set to 1,
1 : An alarm occurred at an even–numbered address.
#7 (PA1) If bit 0 (PRA) is set to 1,
1 : An alarm occurred at an odd–numbered address.
to simple synchronous
control
DGN 540 Difference in the position error between the master and slave axes in simple
synchronas control
DGN 541 Difference in the position error between the master and slave axes in simple
synchronas control
65
DGN 540 indicates the difference in the position error between the master
and slave axes when a single axis pair is subjected to simple synchronous
control. DGN 541 is used when two or more pairs are subjected to simple
synchronous control. The position error is indicated for the master axis.
DGN 540 and 541 indicate values in detection units. They are displayed
only with the M series.

to the dual position
feedback function
0550 Closed loop error
[Data type] 2–word axis

[Unit of data] Detection units
[Valid data range] –99999999 to +99999999
0551 Semi–closed loop error

0552 Error between semi–closed and closed loops
[Data type] word axis

0553 Amount of dual position compensation

66
The data items displayed on the diagnosis screen are obtained at the
following positions:
Semi–closed loop
error (No. 551)
Motor
Command
+ + +
S Kp Speed Machine
- + control
-
Servo amplifier
Ps
Conversion
coefficients
Closed loop error (Parameters No. 2078 and 2079)

(No. 550) Amount of dual
+ position compensa-
Time
tion (No. 553)
constant
+ - +
S (Parameter No. 2080)
- +
Error between semi–

Pf closed and closed
loops (No. 552)
67
D Laser oscillator state

C series (series B8F1)
900 Laser power command
901 Laser bias command
902 Pulse on time
903 Pulse off time
904 Gas pres. control
905 Laser tube pres.
906 Laser power
907 Trace data
908 Laser sequence
Numbers displayed for No. 908 on the 16i–L diagnosis screen
Number Meaning
10 Package completed
11 Wait for the REV signal at RUN restart
12 Purge in progress
13 Wait for the rotation sensor to be turned on during RUN–OFF
14 75–second wait
16 RUN start in progress
17 Wait for the negative pressure for evacuation completion to reach the
predetermined level
18 Wait for the AR signal to be turned on
20 LRDY state
23 Wait for the gas pressure during laser oscillation to settle down to the
level at discharge start
26 HVON start in progress (discharge start wait)
27 Wait for the reference discharge at the maximum level to settle down to
the predetermined level
28 Power compensation in progress
30 LSTR state
49 Evacuation in progress during RUN–OFF (parameter No. 15256)
50 75–second wait at RUN restart
909 RF voltage 1
910 RF current 1
911 RF voltage 2
912 RF current 2
68
913 RF voltage 3
914 RF current 3
915 RF voltage 4
916 RF current 4
917 RF voltage 5
918 RF current 5
919 RF voltage 6
920 RF current 6
921 RF voltage 7
922 RF current 7
923 RF voltage 8
924 RF current 8
925 DC VOLTAGE 1
926 DC CURRENT 1
927 DC VOLTAGE 2
928 DC CURRENT 2
929 DC VOLTAGE 3
930 DC CURRENT 3
931 DC VOLTAGE 4
932 DC CURRENT 4
933 DC VOLTAGE 5
934 DC CURRENT 5
935 DC VOLTAGE 6
936 DC CURRENT 6
937 DC VOLTAGE 7
938 DC CURRENT 7
939 DC VOLTAGE 8
940 DC CURRENT 8
941 DC POWER 1
69
942 DC POWER 2
943 DC POWER 3
944 DC POWER 4
945 DC POWER 5
946 DC POWER 6
947 DC POWER 7
948 DC POWER 8
954 LCKMD INT. PRES. 1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
960 *SFI *RBT *MGP *AP FRQ *ESAL *ENB
*ENB Intra–IF enable signal

0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
*ESAL Emergency stop signal
0 : Emergency stop
1 : Normal processing
FRQ Power frequency detection
0 : 50Hz
1 : 60Hz
*AP Air pressure sensor
0 : Lower than air pressure
1 : Same as air pressure
*MGP Laser gas pressure
0 : Low
1 : Normal
*RBT Blower temperature
0 : Abnormal
1 : Normal
*SFI Safety interlock
0 : Interlocked
1 : Normal
70
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
961 *ABT *SHT SHOF SHON *RPAL *WT1 *CAT *MVW
*MVW Water amount sensor

0 : Abnormal
1 : Normal
*CAT Chamber temperature sensor
0 : Abnormal
1 : Normal
*WT1 Condensation sensor
0 : Abnormal
1 : Normal
*RPAL Vacuum pump alarm
0 : Abnormal
1 : Normal
SHON Open shutter sensor
The shutter is open when this bit is set to 1.
SHOF Closed shutter sensor
The shutter is closed when this bit is set to 1.
*SHT Shutter temperature sensor
0 : Abnormal
1 : Normal
*ABT Absorber temperature sensor
0 : Abnormal
1 : Normal
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
962 *OH1 *TCA1 *REV1 *VIB1 *AR1 *IAL1
*IAL1 Inverter alarm 1

0 : Abnormal
1 : Normal
*AR1 Frequency signal 1
0 : Mismatch
1 : Match
*VIB1 Vibration sensor 1
0 : Abnormal
1 : Normal
*REV1 Rotation sensor 1
0 : 8000 rpm or more
1 : Less than 8000 rpm
*TCA1 Turbo current sensor 1
0 : Abnormal
1 : Normal
*OH1 Abnormal turbo temperature 1
0 : Abnormal
1 : Normal
71
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

0 : Abnormal
1 : Normal
0 : Mismatch
1 : Match
0 : Abnormal
1 : Normal
0 : Abnormal
1 : Normal
0 : Abnormal
1 : Normal
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

0 : Abnormal
1 : Normal
0 : Mismatch
1 : Match
0 : Abnormal
1 : Normal
0 : Abnormal
1 : Normal
0 : Abnormal
1 : Normal
72
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
966 *PSA08 *PSA07 *PSA06 *PSA05 *PSA04 *PSA03 *PSA02 *PSA01
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
967 *PSA16 *PSA15 *PSA14 *PSA13 *PSA12 *PSA11 *PSA10 *PSA09
No.966 & 967 Power suplly signal alarm

1 : Normal
0 : Abnormal
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
968 ACSI PLS SEL1.4 SEL1.3 SEL1.2 SEL1.1 SEL1.0
SEL1.0 to SEL1.4 Select signals for discharge tube monitor data

PLS Pulse command signal
1 : Filter provided
0 : No filter provided
ACSI Access notice signal
0 : OFF
1 : ON
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
969 HSCST SEP2 SEP1
SEP1 Pressure/power select signal

SEP2 Pressure/power select signal
HSCST High–speed A/D conversion start
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
970 PS08 PS07 PS06 PS05 PS04 PS03 PS02 PS01
971 PS16 PS15 PS14 PS13 PS12 PS11 PS10 PS09
PS01–PS16 Power select signals 1 to 16

0 : Not selected
1 : Selected
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
972 TWV BPV PTL GRDY VEN RPA RBA PUG
PUG Purge valve

0 : Closed
1 : Open
RBA Roots blower activation
0 : Stopped
1 : Activated
RPA Vacuum pump activation
0 : Stopped
1 : Started
73
VEN Air release valve

0 : Closed
1 : Open
GRDY Laser gas supply valve
0 : Closed
1 : Open
PTL Flashing light
0 : Off
1 : On
BPV Bypass valve
0 : Closed
1 : Open
TWV Three–way valve
0 : Air release
1 : Open
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
973 LSCST PCS FW IB *PCL OFS SHOP
SHOP Shutter open command

0 : Closed
1 : Open
OFS Off sequence
0 : OFF
1 : ON
*PCL DC power alarm clear
0 : Clear
1 : Normal
IB Semiconductor laser–on command
0 : OFF
1 : ON
FW Inverter start signal
0 : Stopped
1 : Started
PCS Gas pressure PWM command
LSCST Low speed A/D conversion start
0 : OFF
1 : ON
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
974
RF power unit alarms 1 to 8

0 : Normal
1 : Abnormal
74
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
975
RF power unit alarm 9 to 16

0 : Normal
1 : Abnormal
980 Gas pres. sensor alm
981 A/D conv–1 alm
982 A/D conv–2 alm
983 Voltage down
984 Power down
985 Beam reflection
986 Laser efficiency
987 Bombe change request
988 N2–Gas charge time over
75
1.9
CNC STATE DISPLAY
ACTUAL POSITION (ABSOLUTE) O1000 N00010
X 217.940
Y 363.233
Z 0.000
PART COUNT 5
RUN TIME 0H15M CYCLE TIME 0H 0M38S
ACT.F 3000MM/M S 0 T0000
MEM STRT MTN *** 09:06:35
[ ABS ] [ REL ] [ ALL ] [ HNDL ] [ OPRT ]
· Indicates the current status of the CNC.

· Display example and explanation
(1) (2) (3) (4) (7) (8)
(5)
(1) Mode selection status

MEM: Automatic operation (memory operation)
MDI: Manual data input/MDI operation
EDIT: Program editing
RMT: Remote operation
JOG: Jog feed
REF: Reference position return
INC: Incremental feed mode = step feed (if no manual pulse
generator is available)
HND: Manual handle feed mode
TJOG: Teaching in jog feed mode
THND:Teaching in handle feed mode
(2) Automatic operation status
STRT: Automatic operation has started (and program execution is
under way).
HOLD:Automatic operation has been suspended (execution of a
block has been discontinued, and automatic operation has
stopped).
STOP: Automatic operation has stopped (a block has been finished,
and automatic operation has stopped).
MSTR:The tool is returning or being repositioned when the tool
retract and return function is executed.
****: Other status (when the power is switched on, or automatic
operation has ended)
76
(3) Automatic operation status

MTN: Program–specified axis movement is under way.
DWL: Program–specified dwell command (G04) is being executed.
***: Other status
(4) Auxiliary function status
FIN: The completion signal FIN for an auxiliary function is being
awaited.
***: Other status
(5) Emergency stop and reset status (displayed at the location of items
mentioned in (3) and (4))
––EMG–– : Emergency stop status
–RESET–: CNC reset status (The state in which the reset signal or
the MDI RESET key remains active.)
(6) Alarm status
ALM : An alarm condition has been detected.
BAT : The lithium battery (CNC back–up battery) voltage is low
(the battery is to be replaced).
Blank: Other status
(7) Clock display: Hour:minute:second
(8) Program editing/running status
Input: Data is being input.
Output:Data is being output.
SRCH: A data search is under way.
EDIT: Editing such as insertion or modification is under way.
LSK: Label skip enabled at data input (until valid information is
read).
PTRR: Retract or return/re–positioning is under way when the tool
retrack and return function is used.
HPCC: High–precision contour control mode.
AICC: AI contour control mode.
RVRS: Reversing based on the retrace function.
RTRY: Re–advancing based on the retrace function.
RVED: Reversing based on the retrace function has ended.
Blank: Editing is not under way.
77
1.10 Tuning becomes easier by graphically displaying servo error amount and
torque command, etc. (Graphic option is required).
WAVEFORM
DIAGNOSTIC The following two types of waveform diagnosis functions are supported:
FUNCTION (1) One–shot type
The one–shot type waveform diagnosis function can graphically
display, as a waveform, any variation in those data items listed below.
The start of data sampling can be triggered by the rising or falling edge
of a machine signal. This function facilitates the adjustment of the
servo and spindle motors.
a. Error, pulse distribution amount, torque, speed, current, and
thermal simulation data for the servo motor of each axis
b. Composite speed for the first, second, and third axes
c. Spindle motor speed and load meter value
d. On/off state of a machine signal specified with a signal address
(2) Storage type
The storage type waveform diagnosis function enables the storing
of any variation in the data items listed below and, if a servo alarm
occurs, the graphical display (as a waveform) of the stored data.
The end of data sampling can be triggered by the rising or falling
edge of a machine signal. This function facilitates the estimation
of erroneous locations. Stored data can be output via the
reader/punch interface.
a. Error, pulse distribution amount, torque, speed, current, and
thermal simulation data for the servo motor for each axis
NOTE
1 To output stored waveform data, the optional reader/punch
interface must have been installed.
2 The waveform diagnosis function is enabled when bit 0
(SGD) of parameter No. 3112 is set to 1. Note, however, that
a graphics card is necessary to display waveforms.
1.10.1 (1) Set a parameter to utilize the servo waveform diagnostic function.
Setting Parameters
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3112 SGD
#0(SGD) 0 : Do not display servo waveform (usual graphic display).

1 : Displays servo waveform (usual graphic display function cannot be
used).
(2) Turn off the power once and turn it on again.
3120 Time between servo alarm and sampling stop (storage type)
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] ms
78
1.10.2 1. Press the SYSTEM key to display a system screen such as aparameter.
Waveform Diagnostic
Parameter Screen 2. Press the continuous menu key several times, and the soft key
[W.DGNS] is displayed.
3. Press [W.DGNS], then the parameter screen for the waveform
diagnosis is displayed.
Set the necessary data items. Position the cursor to the item to be set,
enter the corresponding data, then press INPUT . Data items for which
***** is displayed cannot be set. To assist in data setting, the frame on
the right side of the screen displays help information for that data to which
the cursor is positioned. Help information which cannot fit into a single
frame is split into several pages, which the user can scroll through using
the page keys and .
WAVE DIAGNOSE (PARAMETER) O1234 N12345
GRP CONDITION 100 GRP CONDITION
SAMPLING TIME *****MS (ONE–S TYPE)

0:START
TRIGGER ******* 1:START&TRG ↑
2:START&TRG ↓
(CH–1) (CH–2) (MEMORY TYPE)
100: DATA OF
DATA NO. 11 22 MEMORY
UNIT 1000 10 1/3
SIGNAL ******* *******
> S 0 T0000
EDIT **** *** *** 08:20:52
[W.PRM] [W.GRPH] [ W.MEM ] [ ] [ ]
D Waveform diagnosis (1) Display start condition

parameters (one–shot 0 : Starts data sampling upon the [START] key being pressed,
type) samples data for the specified period, then draws a waveform.
1 : Starts data sampling upon the detection of the first rising edge of
the trigger signal after the [START] key is pressed, samples data
for the specified period, then draws a waveform.
2 : Starts data sampling upon the detection of the first falling edge of
the trigger signal after the [START] key is pressed, samples data
for the specified period, then draws a waveform.
(2) Sampling period: Set the period during which data will be sampled.
Valid data range: 10 to 32760
Units: ms
(3) Trigger: Set the PMC address and bit for the signal used to trigger the
start of data sampling, when 1 or 2 is set for the start condition.
Example) G0007.2: ST signal
79
(4) Data number: The table below lists the numbers of the data items for
which a waveform can be displayed (n = 1 to 8).
Data No. Description Units
00 Does not display a waveform. –
0n Servo error (8 ms) for the n–th axis (positional Pulses

deviation) (detection units)
1n Pulse distribution for the n–th axis Pulses

(move command) (input increments)
2n Torque for the n–th axis (actual current) % (relative to

maximum current)

5n Actual speed for the n–th axis min–1
6n Command current for the n–th axis % (relative to

maximum current)
7n Thermal simulation data for the n–th axis % (OVC alarm ratio)
90 Composite speed for the first, second, and Pulses

third axes (input increments)
99 On/off state of a machine signal specified with None

a signal address
10n Actual spindle speed for the n–th axis % (relative to

maximum rotation
speed)
11n Load meter for the spindle for the n–th axis % (relative to
maximum output)
161 Difference in position error calculated on the Pulses

spindle basis (detection unit)
(5) Data units: Weight of data when 1 is specified. The data units are
automatically specified for each data item and need not be set unless
the units must be changed for some reason.
[Unit]0.001
(6) Signal address: PMC address and bit number. Set in the same way as
that for trigger, when the data number is 99.
80
D Waveform diagnosis (1) Display start condition

parameters (storage 100 : Draws a waveform for the stored data.
type)
(2) Sampling period: Invalid
(3) Trigger: Invalid
(4) Data number: The table below lists the numbers of the data items for
which a waveform can be displayed (n = 1 to 8). Numbers for which
no data is stored cannot be specified.
Data No. Description Units
00 Does not display a waveform. –

1n Pulse distribution for the n–th axis (move Pulses

command) (input increments)
2n Torque for the n–th axis (actual current) % (relative to

maximum current)
5n Actual speed for the n–th axis min–1
6n Command current for the n–th axis % (relative to

maximum current)
7n Thermal simulation data for the n–th axis % (OVC alarm ratio)
(5) Data units: Weight of data when 1 is specified. The data units are
automatically specified for each data item and need not be set unless
the units must be changed for some reason.
[Unit]0.001
(6) Signal address: Invalid
81
1.10.3 1. Press soft key [W.GRPH], then graph of waveform diagnosis is

Graphic of Wave displayed.
Diagnosis Data
WAVE DIAGNOSE (GRAPHIC)
CH1 CH2
1.0 1.0
0.5 0.5
0 0
–0. –0.
5 5
–1. –1.
0 0
[START] [TIME³] [²TIME] [H–DOBL] [H–HALF]
2. Press soft key [(OPRT)], then the following soft keys are displayed.
The following three sets of soft keys are displayed by the key.
[START] [TIME³] [²TIME] [H–DOBL] [H–DOBL]
[START] [CH–1°] [CH–1±] [V–DOBL] [V–HALF]
[START] [CH–2°] [CH–2±] [V–DOBL] [V–HALF]
1) [START ] : Starts Graphic data

2) [TIME→] : Shift the waveform of channel 1 and 2 rightward
3) [←TIME] : Shift the waveform of channel and 2 leftward
4) [H–DOBL] : Double the time scale of the waveform of channel 1
and 2
5) [H–HALF] : Half the time scale of the waveform of channel 1 and 2
6) [V–DOBL] : Double the height of waveform of channel 1 and 2
7) [V–HALF] : Half the height of waveform of channel 1 and 2
8) [CH–1↑] : Shift the zero point of channel 1 upward
9) [CH–1↓] : Shift the zero point of channel 1 downward
10) [CH–2↑] : Shift the zero point of channel 2 upward
11) [CH–2↓] : Shift the zero point of channel 2 downward
D Drawing a waveform for The one–shot type waveform diagnosis function draws a waveform for a
one–shot type waveform specified data item in real time as the data is sampled. The sampled data,
diagnosis however, is not stored and thus cannot be output later.
To sample data for one–shot type waveform diagnosis, press the

[START] key on the WAVE DIAGNOS. (GRAPHIC) screen. Then, data
is sampled when the specified start condition is satisfied. Data sampling
continues for the specified period.
82
Pressing the [SATART] soft key starts data sampling. While sampling
is being performed, SAMPLING blinks at the top of the screen. Once data
sampling has been completed, a waveform is automatically displayed.
WAVE DIAGNOS. (GRAPHIC) O1234 N12345
CH1 CH2
EDIT **** ******

D Drawing a waveform for To use storage type waveform diagnosis, set 100 for the display start
storage type waveform condition. The maximum data width for storage type waveform diagnosis
diagnosis is 32760 ms. Data must be sampled before starting drawing. The next
page explains sampling in detail.
Pressing the [START] soft key loads stored data. While the data is being
loaded, SAMPLING blinks at the top of the screen. Once the data has
been loaded, a waveform is displayed. The date on which the data was
stored is displayed at the top left of the screen. If the [START] soft key
is pressed while data is being stored, storage is stopped and the waveform
for the data stored up to that point is displayed. The WAVE DIAGNOS.
(MEMORY) screen indicates whether data is being stored.
WAVE DIAGNOS. (GRAPHIC) O1234 N12345
CH197/01/13 12:15:00 CH2
EDIT **** ******

83
1.10.4 (1) Press the SYSTEM function key. Pressing the menu continuation key [ ]
Data Sampling for displays the [W.DGNS] soft key. Press this soft key to display the
Storage Type WAVE DIAGNOS. (PARAMETER) screen.
Waveform Diagnosis (2) Press the [W.MEM] soft key to display the WAVE DIAGNOS.
(MEMORY) screen. The operation selection soft keys appear.
The configuration of the operation selection soft keys is as follows:
WAVE DIAGNOS. (MEMORY) O1234 N12345
CONDITION: 100 TRIGGER: G0123.4
DATA KINDS SAMPLING AXIS

POS ERROR XYZABCUV
MOTION CMD XYZABCUV
CURRENT (%) XYZABCUV
SPEED (RPM) NONE
TORQUE CMD NONE
HEAT SIMLT XYZABCUV
SMPL TIME : 2. 0SEC
DATE : MEMORY
EDIT **** *** *** 08:20:52

[SELECT] [ ] [ ] [ ] [START]
(3) The configuration of the operation selection soft keys is as

follows:
[W.PRM] [W.GRPH] [ W.MEM ] [ ] [ ]
Press
[SELECT] [ ] [ ] [ ] [START]
[ ] [ ] [PUNCH] [ ] [ ]
Fig. 1.10.4 Soft keys

(4) Using the cursor, set the necessary data items. To set the sampling
axes, position the cursor to the data item to be set, enter the names of
the axes for which data will be sampled for that data item, then press
[SELECT] or INPUT . The axis names are displayed to the right of the
data items.
Example) XYZ + [SELECT] or INPUT
(5) Once the sampling axes have been selected, the sampling period for
each axis is displayed. Subsequently pressing the [START] soft key
starts data sampling.
84
CAUTION
1 Data items for which ***** is displayed cannot be set.
2 To change the sampling axes, enter new axis names then
press the [SELECT] soft key. Pressing the [SLELCT] soft
key without entering an axis name results in no sampling
axis being set.
3 If the sampling axes are changed during data sampling,
data sampling is stopped. In this case, press the [START]
soft key to restart data sampling for the new sampling axes.
4 Initially, no sampling axis is set.
D Storage data parameters (1) Storage stop condition

100: Stops data storage upon the issue of a servo alarm.
101: Stops data storage upon the issue of a servo alarm or the
detection of the rising edge of the trigger signal.
102: Stops data storage upon the issue of a servo alarm or the
detection of the falling edge of the trigger signal.
The maximum stored data width is 32760 ms. If the storage stop
condition is not satisfied within 32760 ms, data is overwritten, starting
with the oldest data.
Parameter No. 3120 can be used to delay data storage being stopped
by a specified period (ms), after the issue of a servo alarm.
(2) Trigger: Set the PMC address and bit for the signal used to trigger the
stopping of data storage, when 101 or 102 is set for the stop condition.
Example) G0007.2: ST signal
(3) Data type: The following table lists the types of data for which a
waveform can be displayed.
Data type Description Units
POS ERROR Servo error (8 ms) for the n–th axis Pulses
(detection units)
MOTION CMD Pulse distribution for the n–th axis Pulses

(input increments)
CURRENT Torque for the n–th axis % (relative to

maximum current)
SPEED Actual speed for the n–th axis min–1
TORQUE CMD Command current for the n–th axis % (relative to

maximum current)
HEAT SIMLT Thermal simulation data for the n–th axis %

(OVC alarm ratio)
(4) Sampling axis: The axes along which data will be sampled are
displayed.
(5) Sampling period: The sampling period for each axis is displayed.
(6) Date of storage: While data is being sampled, MEMORY blinks in this
field. When data sampling stops, the date at that point appears in this
field.
85
1.10.5 Waveform diagnosis data of servo alarm format can be output to an I/O
Outputting Waveform device, as follows:
Diagnosis Data 1) Select EDIT mode.
(Storage Type) 2) Press the SYSTEM key, then display the WAVE DIAGNOS. (MEMORY)
screen.
3) Press the [W.MEM], , [PUNCH], and [EXEC] soft keys, in this
order.
For details of input/output to/from the FANUC Floppy Cassette or FA
Card, see “Output to FANUC Floppy Cassette or FA Card,” below.
WAVE DIAGNOSE (MEMORY) O1234 N12345
CONDIGION: 100 TRIGGER: G0123.4
DATA KINDS SAMPLING AXIS

POS ERROR XYZABCUV
MOTION CMD XYZABCUV
CURRENT (%) XYZABCUV
SPEED (RPM) NONE
TORQUE CMD NONE
HEAT SIMLT XYZABCUV
SMPL TIME : 2.0SEC
DATE : 97/01/13 12:15:00
EDIT **** *** *** 12:15:52

[SELECT] [ ] [ ] [ ] [START]
[ ] [ ] [PUNCH] [ ] [ ]
Press
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ CAN ] [ EXEC ]
Press
D Output to FANUC Floppy 1) Select EDIT mode.

Cassette or FA Card
2) Press the SYSTEM key, then display the WAVE DIAGNOS. (MEMORY)
screen.
3) Open the write protect tab on the floppy disk or card.
4) Press the [W.MEM], , [PUNCH], and [EXEC] soft keys, in this
order.
The waveform diagnosis data is output to a file named WAVE
DIAGNOS, to which the number of the last file is assigned.
If a file named WAVE DIAGNOS already exists in the floppy disk or
on the card, P/S alarm 86 is issued. A floppy disk or card can contain
only one file for waveform diagnosis data. If the existing WAVE
DIAGNOS file contains unnecessary waveform diagnosis data of
servo alarm format, delete that file before attempting to output new
data. The procedure for deleting a file is described later.
86
D Directory display The directory in the cassette or card is displayed by means of the
following procedure:
1) Select EDIT mode.
2) Press the PROG function key to select the program screen.
3) Press the continuous menu key , then press [FLOPPY].
4) Press page key .
The directory is displayed.
D Deleting a file A file stored on a cassette or card is deleted by means of the following
procedure:
1) Select EDIT mode.
2) Press the PROG function key to select the program screen.
3) Set the write protect switch on the cassette or card to enable writing.
4) Press [FLOPPY].
5) Press [DELETE].
6) Enter the file number, then press [F SET].
7) Press [EXEC].
The file corresponding to the specified file number is deleted. The
number of each file subsequent to the deleted file is decremented by
one.
87
D Output format In the servo alarm format, the header, date and time, selected axes, and
waveform diagnosis data are output in this order. Data items are identified
by nine identifier words. Output data other than the identifier words
varies with the data type.
T(identifier word)
T0 : Header
T60 : Positional deviation
T61 : Move command
T62 : Actual current
T63 : Actual speed
T64 : Command current
T65 : Thermal simulation
T68 : Selected axes
T69 : Date and time
1) Header
T 0 C W A V E D I A G N O S ;
C: Data word
2) Data word
T 6 9 D * * * * * * , * * * * * * ;
D *..*: Data Example: 12:14 59 seconds on June 23, 1997
T 6 9 D 1 9 9 2 0 6 2 3 , 1 2 1 4 5 9 ;
3) Selected axes
T 6 8 P * * D * * , * * , X * * ,
P0:Positional deviation
P1:Actual speed
P2:Move command
P3:Command current
P4:Actual current
P5:Thermal simulation
D*.. *: Axis number (1 to 8)
88
4) Waveform diagnosis data
T 6 0 D * * , * * , * * , X * * ,
T 6 1 D * * , * * , * * , X * * ,
T 6 2 D * * , * * , * * , X * * ,
T 6 3 D * * , * * , * * , X * * ,
T 6 4 D * * , * * , * * , X * * ,
T 6 5 D * * , * * , * * , X * * ,
D *..*: Waveform diagnosis data x number of axes
NOTE
1 Records are classified into header records and data
records.
2 “%” is used as an end–of–record code.
3 Each record starts with an identifier and ends with an
end–of–block code.
4 Either the ISO or EIA code system is used.
5 The output code type is specified with parameter ISO (bit 1
of No. 0100). For ISO code, parameter NCR (bit 3 of No.
0100) is used to specify whether the end–of–block code is
<LF> only, or a sequence of <LF> <CR> <CR>.
6 Parameter NFD (bit 7 of No. 01X1, where X is the channel
number) is used to specify whether a feed code is output
before and after the data.
7 No identifier word is output for a data item for which no axis
is selected.
8 The above file corresponds to a paper tape of about 200 m
in length.
1.10.6 (1) Once the storage is full, the oldest data is overwritten.
Notes (2) Stored–type waveform diagnostic data is not lost, even when the
power is turned off.
(3) The waveform diagnostic function is disabled when parameter SGD
(bit 0 of No. 3112) is set to 0.
(4) Set the correct date and time using the setting screen.
89
1.11 Load meter of the servo axis can be displayed.

OPERATING
MONITOR
1.11.1 1. Set a parameter to display operating monitor. (Bit 5 (OPM) of

Display Method parameter No.3111)
2. Press the POS key to display the position display screen.
3. Press continuous menu key , then soft key [MONI] is displayed.

4. Press the soft key [MONI], then the operating monitor screen is
displayed.
OPERATING MONITOR O0001 N00001

(LOAD METER)
X : * * * 80% S1: 201%
Y : * * * * * 0% (SPEED METER RPM)
Z : * * * * * 0% S1: * * * 1500
PART COUNT 5
RUN TIME 0H15M CYCLE TIME 0H 0M38S
ACT.F 3000 MM/M S 0 T 0000

[ [ ABS ] [ REL ] [ ALL ] [ HNDL ] [ OPRT ]
NOTE
1 The bar graph for the load meter shows load up to 200%.
2 The servo axes for their load meters are displayed are set
to parameter No. 3151 to 3. If parameters 3151 to 3153 are
all zero, the load meter of the basic axes are displayed.
3 For color display, the bar of the load meter that exceed
100% shows purple color.
90
1.11.2
Parameters
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
311 OPM
[Data type] Bit

OPM Operating monitor display is:
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
3151 Axis number for which the first servo motor load meter is displayed
3152 Axis number for which the second servo motor load meter is displayed
3153 Axis number for which the third servo motor load meter is displayed
3154 Axis number for which the fourth servo motor load meter is displayed
3155 Axis number for which the fifth servo motor load meter is displayed
3156 Axis number for which the sixth servo motor load meter is displayed
3157 Axis number for which the seventh servo motor load meter is displayed
3158 Axis number for which the eighth servo motor load meter is displayed
[Data type] Byte

[Valid data range] 0, 1, ... number of controlled axes
These parameters specify the numbers of the axes for which load meters
for servo motors are to be displayed. Up to eight load meters can be
displayed. Set 0 for those axes for which no load meter is to be displayed.
91
1.12
LIST OF
OPERATIONS
Reset
Data
Param- Func-
protec-
Function eter Mode tion Operation
tion
write=1 button
key
Resetting run hour [(OPRT)] [RUNPRE]→[EXEC]
– POS
Resetting no. of [(OPRT)] [PTSPRE]→[EXEC]

machined parts – POS
Resetting OT alarm At Pow-

er ON
– P and CAN
Resetting alarm 100

– – CAN and RESET
Registration from MDI

Data
Param- Func-
protec-
tion
write=1 button
key
SYSTEM
Parameter no.→[NO.SRH]→Data→ INPUT
Inputting MDI or
Yes
parameters E.Stop (PA- → PWE =0 → RESET
RAM)
Inputting offset
OFF – OFFSET
SETTING Offset number→[NO.SRH]→Offset value→ INPUT
values
Inputting setting
OFF MDI OFFSET
SETTING Setting no.→[NO.SRH]Data→ INPUT
data
Input of PMC
parameters, counter OFF [PMCPRM]→[COUNTR] or [DATA]→Data→ INPUT
and data table MDI or SYSTEM
Inputting PMC E.Stop

parameters Yes (PMC) [PMCPRM]→[TIMER] or [KEEPRL]→Data→ INPUT
(Timer, keep relay)
POS POS (Display of relative coordinate)<AXIS>→ [ORIGIN]

Tool length
JOG → → →Jog the tool to measuring position
measurement OFFSET
SETTING
OFFSET
SETTING
Offset no.→[NO.SRH]→<AXIS>→[INP.C]
92
Input/Output with FANUC Cassette

Data
Param- Func-
protec-
tion
write=1 button
key
Heading a file EDIT
PROG N →File no.→[ " ]→[F SRH]→[EXEC]
Deleting a file OFF EDIT

PROG N →File no.→[ " ]→[DELETE→[EXEC]
Collating a program EDIT

PROG Heading a file→ O →Program number→[(OPRT)]
→[ " ]→[READ]→[EXEC]
Inputting From FANUC Cassette

Data
Param- Func-
protec-
tion
write=1 button
key
Inputting OFF EDIT or [(OPRT)]→[ " ]→[READ]→[EXEC]
SYSTEM
parameters E.Stop
(PA-
RAM)
Inputting PMC OFF E.Stop
parameters SYSTEM
[ " ]→[I/O]→(CANNEL NO) 1 INPUT →
(PMC) (DEVICE NAME) [FDCAS]→(KIND OF DATA) [PA-
RAM]→[READ]→(FILE NO) File no. INPUT →[EXEC]
Inputting offset OFF EDIT OFFSET

(Heading a file no.)→[(OPRT)]→[ " ]→[READ]→[EXEC]
values SETTING
Registering a OFF EDIT

program PROG
N →File no.→ INPUT →[ " ]→[READ]→[EXEC]
Inputting macro OFF EDIT

variables PROG N →File no.→ INPUT →[ " ]→ O →
Program no. → [READ]→[EXEC]

MEMO <START>
PROG
RY
93
Output to FANUC Cassette

Data
Param- Func-
protec-
tion
write=1 button
key
[(OPRT)]→[ " ]→[PUNCH]→[EXEC]
SYSTEM
Output of
EDIT
parameter (PA-
RAM)
[ " ]→[I/O]→(CANNEL NO) 1 INPUT →(DEVICE

Output of PMC SYSTEM
EDIT NAME) [FDCAS] →(KIND OF DATA) [PARAM] → [WRITE]
parameter
(PMC)
→ (FILE NO) * 1 INPUT →[EXEC]
[(OPRT)]→[ " ]→[PUNCH]→[EXEC]

Output of offset EDIT OFFSET
SETTING
Output of all
EDIT PROG O →–9999→[ " ]→[PUNCH]→[EXEC]
programs
Output of one
EDIT PROG O →Program no.→[ " ]→[PUNCH]→[EXEC]
program
Output of macro [ " ]→[MACRO]→[(OPRT)]→[ " ]→[PUNCH]→[EXEC]

EDIT OFFSET
SETTING
variables
Search
Data
Param- Func-
protec-
tion
write=1 button
key
Searching a MEMO
program number RY PROG O →Program no.→[O SRH]
or EDIT
Searching a MEMO
sequence number PROG Program no. search→ N →Sequence number→[NSRH]
RY
Searching an
address word Data to be searched→[SRH↑] or[SRH↓] or
EDIT PROG
(cursor key)
Searching an
Address to be searched [SRH↑] or[SRH↓] or
address only EDIT PROG
(Cursor key)
Searching an offset Offset no.→[NO.SRH]
number – OFFSET
SETTING
Searching a Diagnostic number→[NO.SRH]

SYSTEM
diagnostic number –
(DGNOS)
Searching a Parameter no.→[NO.SRH]
SYSTEM
parameter number
–
(PA-
RAM)
94
Edit
Data
Param- Func-
protec-
tion
write=1 button
key
Display of memory [LIB]
EDIT PROG
capacity used
Deleting all OFF

EDIT PROG O →–9999→ DELETE
programs
OFF
Deleting a program EDIT PROG O →Program no.→ DELETE
Deleting several N →Sequence no.→ DELETE

OFF EDIT PROG
blocks
(Deleted up to a block with a specified sequence no.)
OFF
Deleting a block EDIT PROG EOB → DELETE
OFF
Deleting a word EDIT PROG Searching a word to be deleted→ DELETE
OFF
Changing a word EDIT PROG Searching a word to be changed→New Data→ ALTER
OFF Searching a word immediately before a word to be

Inserting a word EDIT PROG
searched→New Data→ INSERT
Collation
Data
Param- Func-
protec-
tion
write=1 button
key
ON [(OPRT)]→[ " ]→[READ]→[EXEC]
Collating memory EDIT PROG
Playback
Data
Param- Func-
protec-
tion
write=1 button
key
TEACH
–IN Jog the machine→ X , Y or Z → INSERT
Input of NC data JOG/ PROG

HAN- → NC data → INSERT → EOB → INSERT
DLE
95
Clear
Data
Param- Func-
prote-
ction
write=1 key
key
Memory all clear At
power RESET
AND DELETE
ON
Parameter/offset At
clear f Power RESET
ON
Clearing a program At
f Power DELETE
ON
Program under
edition at power – PROG AND RESET
off(PS101)
PMC RAM * At
Power X AND O
ON
Additional SRAM At
area clear Power O AND DELETE
ON
* PMC ladder program is not cleard in FROM.
Manual operation
KEY PWE Func-
Function Mode Operation
SW =1 tion key
Manual refer-
Turn on Reference point return switch ³ Turn on +X, –X, +Z, or –Z ³
ence point JOG
Reference point return switch LED lit.
return
Turn on +X, –X, +Z, or –Z ³ Use JOG FEEDRATE to set jog feedrate
Jog feed JOG
³ Press Rapid traverse button, if required.
Incremental Use Move distance selection switch to select move distance ³ Turn on
INC
feed +X, –X, +Z, or –Z ³ Press Rapid traverse button, if required.
Use Axis selection switch to select axis to be operated ³ Use Handle

Manual
HND magnification selection to select magnification ³ Turn manual pulse
handle feed
generator.
96
Display
Function KEY PWE Func-
Mode Operation
SW =1 tion key
Amount of
program
EDIT PROG [ DIR ]
memory in
use
Command Command value being executed, and previously specified modal value
value display
[CURRNT]
Command value being executed, and next command value to be

executed
[ NEXT ]
MEM Command value entered from MDI, and previously specified modal
or PROG value
MDI
[ MDI ]
Program in memory being executed
[PRGRM]
Executable blocks in memory and current position
[CHECK]
Current– Representation of the position in the workpiece coordinate system

position
display [ ABS ]
Representation of the position in the relative coordinate system

POS
[ REL ]
General position indication
[ ALL ]
Alarm display
— MESSAGE [ALARM ] when an alarm condition has occurred.
Alarm history
display MESSAGE [HISTRY]
Screen erase
— — Press the CAN and function keys simultaneously. The function key
causes re–display.
Screen
switching
between NC
SHIFT and HELP
and loader
97
Graphics function
Mode Operation
SW =1 tion key
Parameter
setting
GRAPH [PARAM]
Tool path Select a graphics drawing screen.

drawing
[GRAPH]
GRAPH
Begin and end drawing.
During automatic operation or manual operation
Tool path dia-

gram data Press the GRAPH key several times ³ Display “PATH GRAPHIC
setting GRAPH (PARAMETER)” screen ³ [PARAM ] ³ Enter numerals using numeric
keys ³ INPUT
Tool path
drawing Press the GRAPH
key several times ³ Display “PATH GRAPHIC
(PARAMETER)” screen ³ [EXEC] ³ [(OPRT)] ³ [ AUTO ] or [START]
Suspend drawing
[ STOP ]
MEM
GRAPH
Execute.
[START]
Suspend
drawing Draw starting at the top of the program.
[REWIND] ³ [START ]
Enlarging
Press the GRAPH key several times ³ Display “PATH GRAPHIC
part of the
tool path GRAPH (PARAMETER)” screen ³ [SCALE] ³ [(OPRT)][²][³][±][°] ³ P c
drawing
or M # ³ [EXEC]
Current–tool
position mark GRAPH
Press the GRAPH key several times ³ Display “SOLID GRAPHIC
display
(PARAMETER)” screen ³ [ POS ]
Machining
profile Press the GRAPH key several times ³ “SOLID GRAPHIC
drawing data GRAPH
(PARAMETER)” screen ³ Enter numerals using numeric keys
setting
³ INPUT
Blank figure
drawing Press the GRAPH key several times ³ “SOLID GRAPHIC
(PARAMETER)” screen ³ [BLANK ] ³ [(OPRT)] ³ [ ANEW ] ³

GRAPH
[+ ROT][– ROT][+TILT ][–TILT ]
98

Mode Operation
SW =1 tion key
Machining
profile draw- Press the GRAPH key several times ³ “SOLID GRAPHIC
ing (PARAMETER)” screen ³ [EXEC] ³ [(OPRT)] ³ [ A.ST ] or [ F.ST ]
Suspend drawing
[ STOP ]
MEM
GRAPH
Execute.
[ A.ST ] or [ F.ST ]
After drawing
is suspended Display the start of part program.
[REWIND] ³ [ A.ST ] or [ F.ST ]
Re–drawing
of “SOLID
GRAPHIC Press the GRAPH key several times ³ “SOLID GRAPHIC
(PARAME- GRAPH
(PARAMETER)” screen ³ [REVIEW] ³ [(OPRT)] ³ [ ANEW ] ³
TER)” in a
different [+ ROT ][– ROT ][+TILT ][–TILT ]
orientation
3–plane
drawing Press the GRAPH key several times ³ “SOLID GRAPHIC
(PARAMETER)” screen ³ [ "] ³ [3–PLN ] ³ [(OPRT)] ³ [

GRAPH
]
[²][³][°][±]
NOTE
For the small–size MDI, read the GRAPH function key in this
CUSTOM
table as the GRAPH function key.
Help function
KEY PWE Func-
SW =1 tion key
Initial menu
screen dis- HELP HELP
play
Alarm detail
screen dis- HELP [ALARM ] ³ Alarm No. ³ [SELECT]
play
Operation
method
HELP [OPERAT] ³ Operation method item No. ³ [SELECT]
screen dis-
play
Parameter
table–of–con-
HELP [PARAM]
tents screen
display
99
Self–diagnosis function
KEY PWE Func-
SW =1 tion key
[DGNOS ]
Self–diagno- ±
sis screen SYSTEM
1. PAGE page switch keys
display PAGE
2. Diagnosis data No. ³ [NO.SRH]
Boot
KEY PWE Func-
SW =1 tion key
System mon- Pow-

itor screen er–on — and a soft key at its left
display time
Reading file Place the cursor at 1. SYSTEM DATA LOADING on the system monitor
from memory screen ³ [SELECT] ³ Place the cursor at the target file ³ [SELECT]
card ³ [YES]
Listing files in
flash ROM
Place the cursor at 2. SYSTEM DATA CHECK on the system monitor
and display-
screen ³ [SELECT] ³ Place the cursor at the target item ³ [SELECT]
ing detail
screen
Deleting file Place the cursor at 3. SYSTEM DATA DELETE on the system monitor
from flash screen ³ [SELECT] ³ Place the cursor at the target file ³ [SELECT]
ROM ³ [YES]
Outputting
Place the cursor at 4. SYSTEM DATA SAVE on the system monitor
file from flash
screen ³ [SELECT] ³ Place the cursor at the target file ³ [SELECT]
ROM to
³ [YES]
memory card
Place the cursor at 5. SRAM DATA BACKUP on the system monitor

Transferring
screen ³ [SELECT]
contents be-
– Batch output to memory card
tween SRAM
Place the cursor at 1. SRAM BACK UP ³ [SELECT] ³ [YES]
and memory
– Batch input from memory card
card in batch
Place the cursor at 2. RESTORE SRAM ³ [SELECT] ³ [YES]
Deleting file Place the cursor at 6. MEMORY CARD FILE DELETE on the system
from memory monitor screen ³ [SELECT] ³ Place the cursor at the target file ³
card [SELECT] ³ [YES]
Memory card Place the cursor at 7. MEMORY CARD FORMAT on the system moni-
formatting tor screen ³ [SELECT] ³ [YES]
Exiting sys- Place the cursor at 10. END on the system monitor screen
tem monitor ³ [SELECT] ³ [YES]
Reference
If no soft key is available as with a touch panel, use the numeric keys on
the MDI keypad.
± ± ± ± ± ± ±
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
100
P–CODE loader
KEY PWE Func-
SW =1 tion key
Starting Pow-
P–CODE er–on CAN and PROG
loader time
101
1.13
WARNING SCREEN
DISPLAYED WHEN
AN OPTION IS
CHANGED
D Warning screen This CNC displays a warning screen when the configuration of the
options using the SRAM area is changed. The data for the function
indicated on the screen is cleared the next time the system is turned on.
WARNING
YOU SET THE PARAMETER NO.jjjj#j
THE FOLLOWING DATA WILL BE CLEARED.
* PART PROGRAM MEMORY
PLEASE PRESS <DELETE> OR <CAN> KEY.

<DELETE> : CLEAR ALL DATA
<CAN> : CANCEL
NOTE (*1)
Mark* varies with the parameter settings. Two or more
function names may be displayed.
102
D Allocation error screen When an option which uses the SRAM area is added, the system software
may require more SRAM than is currently installed in the system. In this
case, an allocation error screen appears the first time the system is turned
on after the addition of the option, thus restoring the state existing before
the addition.
FILE ALLOCATION ERROR
S–RAM CAPACITY IS NOT SUFFICIENT.

ADDITIONAL S–RAM IS NECESSARY.
PLEASE PRESS <CAN> KEY :

RETURN TO THE STATE BEFORE
OPTION PARAMETER IS CHANGED.
NOTE
When the currently installed SRAM is not sufficient,
additional SRAM can be mounted. Newly installed SRAM
must be cleared before it can be used.
Operation:When turning on the power, hold down the
following keys:
O + DELETE
When installing additional SRAM, however, perform all
clear. ( RESET + DELETE )
103
1.14 System software can be replaced only with compatible system software.
Otherwise, the first time the CNC is turned on after the system software
WARNING SCREEN is replaced, the following screen will be displayed and the system will not
DISPLAYED WHEN be activated:
SYSTEM SOFTWARE
IS REPLACED
(SYSTEM LABEL
CHECK ERROR)
B8H1–01
SYSTEM LABEL CHECK ERROR:

CLEAR ALL SRAM MODULE
NOT READY
In this case, perform memory all clear (by holding down the RESET and
DELETE MDI keys then turning on the power) or reinstall the original system
software.
104
1.15 The maintenance information screen is provided to record the history of

maintenance performed by a service person of FANUC or machine tool
MAINTENANCE builder.
INFORMATION The screen has the following features:
SCREEN D MDI alphabetical input is allowed.
D The recording screen can be scrolled in units of lines.
D Edited maintenance information can be read and punched.
D The screen can be saved in flash ROM.
1.15.1
Screen Display and
Operation
D Screen display 1. Press the SYSTEM function key.
2. Press the continuous menu key several times. [M–INFO] soft

key appears.
3. Press the [M–INFO] soft key. The maintenance information screen
appears.
When selected, the maintenance screen shows the latest information.
The recording screen has an input area of 40 characters by 11 lines.
The status (mode, number of empty character spaces, cursor line, column
number) is displayed at the bottom of the screen.
40 characters
MAINTENANCE INFORM
aaa
bbb
ccc
ddd
11 lines eee
fff
...
nnn
|OVER|EDIT|spaces:2078 33:1
Status display
⋅ OVER/INSERT : OVER : Overwrite mode ;
INSERT: Insert mode
⋅ EDIT/VIEW : EDIT : Editing allowed ;
VIEW : Editing inhi bited
⋅ Number of empty character spaces
⋅ Current cursor line
⋅ Current cursor column
105
D Screen operation The maintenance information screen has view mode and edit mode, which
are selected by pressing the [END] or [EDIT] soft key.
Initially, view mode is selected. To start editing, select edit mode by
pressing the [(OPRT)] and [EDIT] keys. When the editing is completed,
press the [END] key. Then, select [STORE] or [IGNORE]. Unless
[STORE] is selected, the edited data will be lost at next power–up.
To scroll the screen showing the recorded information, press a cursor key
or page key on the MDI panel.
The following keys are used for editing (character input) and viewing:
Operation table
Mode Key Description
View Soft keys Allows editing.
[EDIT] Displays the beginning or the end.
[JUMP]
Cursor key Scrolls the screen up or down.
Page key Scrolls the screen up or down in units of whole screens.
Edit Soft keys
[END] Ends editing. Select whether to store the edited data.
[ALLDEL] Clears all maintenance information. (This key is enabled when the MDC bit (bit 3 of parameter
3118) is set to 1.)
[I/O] Reads or punches the maintenance information.
[JUMP] Moves the cursor to the beginning or end.

Cursor key Moves the cursor position up or down.
Page key Scrolls the screen up or down in units of whole screens.
Alphanumeric/sp Allows alphabetical, numeric, or special character input.
ecial/character
keys
key Selects either insert mode or overwrite mode.

INSERT
key Deletes a single character.

DELETE
key Deletes a single character before the cursor position.

CAN
key Starts a new line.

INPUT
106
Operation of the soft keys
(1) View mode
Edit Jump
(2) (5)
(2) Edit mode
END I/O ALLDEL Jump
(3) (4) (6) (5)
(3) Edit saving

MAINTE-
NANCE IGNORE CANCEL
(1) (1)
(2)
(4) I/O
READ PUNCH CANCEL
(6) (6) (2)
(5) Jump
BEGIN-
END CANCEL
ING
(1) (2) (1) (2) (1) (2)
(6) Execution
EXEC CANCEL
(2) (2)
107
1.15.2 The maintenance information can be read and punched.

Maintenance When the maintenance information is input from or output to a memory
card, a file name MAINTINF.DAT is used.
Information
(1) Format
Input/Output
%%
Data
(2) Reading
When a MAINTINF.DAT file generated in the format shown above is
read, the data is added at the end of the existing maintenance
information.
NOTE
1 A TAB code is converted to one to four blanks, depending
on the input position.
2 80h to 90h and E0h to EBh are assumed as prefix codes of
double–byte characters. Reading these codes alone is
inhibited.
3 Control codes (00H to 1FH) except TAB and LF are
discarded in reading.
4 %% cannot be input.
(3) Punching
All maintenance information is output in the format shown above.
108
1.16 When VGA screen display is selected (NVG bit (bit 7 of parameter 3119)
is set to 0), the color scheme of the VGA screen can be set on the color
COLOR SETTING setting screen.
SCREEN
1.16.1 1. Press the SYSTEM function key.

Screen Display
2. Press the continuous menu key several times. The [COLOR]
soft key appears.
3. Press the [COLOR] soft key. The color setting screen appears.
COLORING O0000N00000
[ 1 ]J ⋅ A LARM 8 J ⋅ SELECT WINDOW BAR

2 J ⋅ TITLE ⋅ SOFT KEY 1 9 J ⋅ NONE
3 J ⋅ INPUT KEY ⋅ O/N NO. 10 J ⋅ TITLE BAR ⋅ INPUT BAR
⋅ STATUS
4 J ⋅ CURSOR 11 J ⋅ WINDOW BACKGROUND
5 J ⋅ RESTART NO. 12 J ⋅ LIGHT
⋅ ABSOLUTE ORDER
6 J ⋅ SUB TITLE ⋅ SOFT KEY 2 13 J ⋅ ALTER POSSIBLE DATA
7 J ⋅ DATA ⋅ TIME 14 J ⋅ SHADOW
15 V ⋅ BACKGROUND
RED 08 GREEN 00 BLUE 00
COLOR SELECT NO. 1(PARAMETER)
[ MEM **** *** *** | *** | 12:34:56 | ]
COLOR MAINTE MAINTE (OPRT)

+
1.16.2
Color Setting
D Changing a color 1. Press the [(OPRT)] soft key. The following operation soft keys appear.
(color palette value)
RED GREEN BLUE BRIGHT DARK +
2. Move the cursor to the color number corresponding to the color palette
value to be changed.
The current color palette values of individual color elements are
displayed.
3. Select a desired color element by pressing the [RED], [GREEN], or
[BLUE] operation soft key.
Two or more color elements can be simultaneously selected.
Each time the [RED], [GREEN], or [BLUE] operation soft key is
pressed, the selection is made or canceled.
(If the [RED], [GREEN], and [BLUE] operation soft keys are not
displayed, press the rightmost soft key.)
109
4. Press the [LIGHT] or [DARK] operation soft key to change the

luminance of the selected color element.
D Storing colors A specified color palette value can be stored.
(color palette values)
STORE CALL COLOR1 COLOR2 COLOR3 +
1. Select a desired storage area by pressing the [COLOR1], [COLOR2],

or [COLOR3] operation soft key.
(If the [COLOR1], [COLOR2], and [COLOR3] operation soft keys
are not displayed, press the rightmost soft key.)
COLOR1 Standard color data parameters (6561 to 6595)
COLOR2 Internal RAM
COLOR3
2. Press the [STORE] operation soft key. The following operation soft
keys appear.
CAN EXEC +
3. To store the current color palette values in the selected area, press the
[EXEC] operation soft key. To cancel the storage, press the [CAN]
operation soft key or the leftmost key.
D Calling colors
(color palette values)
STORE CALL COLOR1 COLOR2 COLOR3 +
1. Select a color palette storage area by pressing the [COLOR1],

[COLOR2], or [COLOR3] operation soft key.
(If the [COLOR1], [COLOR2], and [COLOR3] operation soft keys
are not displayed, press the rightmost soft key.)
2. Press the [CALL] operation soft key. The following operation soft
keys appear.
CAN EXEC +
3. To call the color palette values from the selected area, press the
[EXEC] operation soft key. If no color palette value is stored, this step
cannot be executed.
To stop calling, press the [CAN] operation soft key or the leftmost key.
110
1.16.3
Parameters
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3119 NVG
[Data type] Bit

NVG When a color display unit is used, the VGA screen display is:
0 : Selected.
1 : Not selected. (Conventional display)
6561 Standard color data of graphic color 1
6581 Standard color data of text color 1
111
[Data type] Two–word

[Unit of data] Six–digit number rrggbb (rr: Red component value, gg: Green component
value, bb: Blue component value)
When five digits or less are specified, the missing high–order digits are
assumed as zeros.
[Valid data range] Each color component value: 00 to 15 (Equivalent to the color level on
the color setting screen)
When 16 or a higher value is specified, 15 is assumed.
(Example) When specifying a color having red component value 1, green

component value 2, and blue component value 3, set the
parameter value as 10203.
1.16.4 (1) At power–up, the color scheme of the screen is determined by the
Notes setting in the COLOR1 area (parameters). If no data is stored in the
COLOR1 area, the last color scheme before power–down is applied.
(2) The standard color data specified in parameters must not be changed
by direct MDI key input. When changing the parameter data, set and
store the new data on the color setting screen.
(3) When a wrong value is specified in a standard color data parameter,
the screen may not be displayed. If this occurs, turn the power on
again, while pressing the DELETE and RESET keys. This clears the whole
stored color scheme and restores the FANUC standard color scheme
instead.
112
1.17 Depending on the eye level and the viewing angle of the operator, the LCD
may be hard to read. This problem can be solved by adjusting the contrast.
CONTRAST The contrast of a monochrome LCD can be adjusted.
ADJUSTMENT
1. Press the OFFSET
SETTING function key.
2. Press the [SETTING] chapter selection soft key.

The LCD contrast item is displayed on the setting (handy) screen.
SETTING(HANDY)
PARAMETER WRITE = 1(0:DISABLE 1: ENABLE)
TV CHECK = 0(0:OFF 1:ON)
PUNCH CODE = 0(0:EIA 1:ISO)
INPUT UNIT = 0(0:MM 1:INCH)
I/O CHANNEL = 0(0–3:CHANNEL NO.)
SEQUENCE NO. = 0(0:OFF 1:ON)
TAPE EORMAT = 0(0:NO CNV 1:F15)
SEQUENCE STOP = 0(PROGRAM NO.)
SEQUENCE STOP = 0(SEQUENCE NO.)
[ CONTRAST ]( + = [ ON:1 ] – = [ OFF:0 ])

>_
MDI **** *** *** BAT 00:00:00
[NO.SRH] [ ON:1 ] [OFF:0] [+INPUT] [INPUT]
3. Move the cursor to “CONTRAST”.

4. Adjust the contrast by pressing the operation soft key [ON:1] or
[OFF:0].
113
1.18 When the power mate CNC series is used as an additional axis (slave) of
the CNC, the power motion manager allows the slave data to be displayed
POWER MATE CNC and set by the CNC.
MANAGER The power mate CNC manager enables the following display and setting:
(1) Current position display (absolute/machine coordinates)
(2) Parameter display and setting
(3) Diagnosis display
(4) System configuration screen display
(5) Alarm display
The power mate CNC series that can be used as the slave is a β amplifier
with I/O Link.
1.18.1
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0960 PMN MD2 MD1 SLV
[Data type] Bit

SLV When the power mate CNC manager is selected, the screen shows the data
of:
0 : A single slave.
1 : Up to four slaves by dividing the screen into four segments.
MD1, MD2 The slave parameters are input from and output to the following devices:
MD2 MD1 I/O device
0 0 Part program storage
0 1 Memory card
The parameters are input or output in the program format, no matter which
I/O device is selected.
PMN The power mate CNC manager function is:
0 : Enabled.
1 : Disabled. (Communication with the slave is not performed.)
114
1.18.2 1. Press the SYSTEM

function key.
Screen Display
2. Press the continuous menu key several times. The [PMM] soft
key appears.
3. Press the [PMM] soft key. The system configuration screen, which is
the initial screen of the power motion manager, appears. The screen
has the following soft keys (function selection soft keys).
[ POS ][ ][ ][SYSTEM][ MSG ]
The currently active soft key is displayed in reverse video. Pressing a soft
key enables the corresponding function, as indicated below:
POS: Current position display
SYSTEM: System information
MSG: Alarm list
To select another function after one of the functions listed above is
selected, press the return menu key several times until the soft keys
are displayed as shown above. Then, select the desired function.
4. To terminate the Power Mate CNC manager, repeatedly press the
return menu key until the function selection keys are displayed
as shown above. Then, press the return menu key once more. The
soft keys of the CNC system appear, and the Power Mate CNC
manager terminates. The system configuration screen of this function
is displayed as the termination screen.
Alternative termination method is to select another function while this
function is enabled. To do this, press an MDI function key ( POS , PROG ,
MESSAGE , etc.).
NOTE
After another screen is displayed by pressing a function key,
pressing the function key, restores the initial status
SYSTEM
of this function. That is, the soft keys shown above are
restored. The data that was being input is canceled.
D System configuration This screen displays the system software information of the slave. The
screen screen is displayed first when the Power Mate CNC manager function is
selected. This screen is automatically displayed also at the termination
of the function.
1. Press the [SYSTEM] function selection soft key. The following soft
keys are displayed together with the screen displayed when SYSTEM
was last selected. The currently active soft key is displayed in reverse
video.
[ PARAM ][ DGNOS ][ ][SYSTEM][ ]
115
2. Press the [SYSTEM] soft key again. The system configuration screen
appears. While this screen is displayed, the [SYSTEM] soft key is left
displayed in reverse video.
POWER MOTION MANAGER
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
1.GROUP0 / β
SYSTEM <SERIES/VERSION> 88A1 01
[ PARAM ][ DGNOS ][ ][ SYSTEM ][ ]
Sample screen: Series and edition of the servo unit β series system list
D Parameter screen The parameters necessary for the functions of the slave must be specified
in advance.
keys appear.
2. Press the [PARAM] soft key. The parameter screen appears.

PARAMETER
1.GROUP0 / β
0000 00001000 0010 11110000
0001 00010101 0011 01010000
0002 11111011 0012 00000000
0003 00000000 0013 00000000
0004 00000000 0014 10110001
0005 10100001 0015 00000000
0006 00000000 0016 00000000
0007 10000000 0017 10000010
0008 00000000 0018 00000000
0009 00000000 0019 00000000
[ PARAM ][ DGNOS ][ ][ SYSTEM ][ ]
The screen displays just the bit and decimal data. For details of the
parameters, refer to the connection manual of the corresponding Power
Mate CNC unit.
116
D Searching for a parameter
A search can be made for the parameter to be displayed.
1. Select the active slave.

2. Press the [(OPRT)] soft key. The following soft keys appear.
[ NO.SRC ][ ][ ][ ][ INPUT ]
3. Enter a desired number in the key–in field by using MDI numeric keys.
Then, press the [NO.SRC] soft key. The search starts.
D Setting a parameter
A parameter of a slave Power Mate CNC unit can be directly set from the
CNC.

2. Press the [(OPRT)] soft key. The following soft keys appear:
[ NO.SRC ][ ][ ][ ][ INPUT ]
3. Move the cursor to the parameter to be set.

4. Enter desired data in the key–in buffer by using MDI numeric keys.
Then, press the [INPUT] soft key. Alternatively, press the MDI
INPUT key.
D Diagnosis screen This screen shows the current status of the slave.
keys appear:
2. Press the [DGNOS] soft key. The diagnosis screen appears. The
displayed data is basically the same as the data displayed on the
parameter screen.
For details of the diagnosis information, refer to the connection
manual of the corresponding Power Mate CNC unit.
117
D Current position display The screen shows the current position on the workpiece coordinate
system or machine coordinate system.
1. Press the [POS] function selection soft key. The following soft keys
appear:
[ WORK ][ ][MACHIN][ ][ ]
2. To see the absolute coordinate screen, press the [WORK] soft key. To
see the machine coordinate screen, press the [MACHIN] soft key.
ACTUAL POSITION (MACHINE)
1.GROUP0 / β
1 1267900
F 3500
[ WORK ][ ][ MACHIN ][ ][ ]
1: Coordinate F: Actual speed
D Alarm screen If an alarm is issued during operation, the group number of the slave
causing the alarm is indicated at the right end of the message field on the
screen. Check the details on the alarm screen. For example, (13) means
that the first and third Power Mate CNC units are in the alarm state.
1. Press the [MSG] function selection soft key. Just the error code is
displayed on the screen.
ALARM
1.GROUP0 / β
442 210 232
[ POS ][ ][ ][SYSTEM ][ MSG ]
Up to forty codes can be displayed on the screen.

For details of the alarm, refer to the connection manual of the
corresponding Power Mate CNC unit.
118
D Operating the active The active slave is subjected to the ZOOM function, which will be
slave described later, and parameter overwrite. The title of the active slave is
displayed in a color different from the display color of the other slave
titles.
The active slave can be selected by pressing the [±NEXT] or [°BACK]

soft key, which is displayed after the continuous menu key is
pressed several times.
[±NEXT]: Displays the screen of the Power Mate CNC unit connected
after the currently active slave. The equipment other than
the Power Mate CNC unit is ignored.
[°BACK]: Displays the screen of the Power Mate CNC unit connected
before the currently active slave.
D Single–slave display/ Whether the screen displays the data of just a single unit or of four units
Four–slave display in four segments is specified in the SLV bit (bit 0 of parameter 960).
To switch the four–slave display to the single–slave display, press the

[ZOOM] soft key, which is displayed after the continuous menu key
is pressed several times. The single–slave display shows the data of the
active slave. To switch the single–slave display to the four–slave display
showing the data of four slaves including the active slave, press the
[ZOOM] key.
When five or more slaves are connected, the four–slave display has two
or more pages. To see the slave data that is not displayed on the current
page, press soft key [±NEXT].
POWER MOTION MANAGER/ SYSTEM CONFIGURATION O12345678 N12345

1.GROUP0 / β O12345678 N12345 2.GROUP1 / β
SYSTEM ****## SYSTEM 88A101
3.GROUP2 / β 4.GROUP3 / β
SYSTEM 88A101 SYSTEM 88A101
PARAM DGNOS SYSTEM (OPRT)
The figure above shows a sample four–slave display screen on a display

unit with twelve soft keys. A unit with seven soft keys can also display
the four–slave display screen.
119
POWER MOTION MANAGER O12345678 N12345

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
1.GROUP0 / β
SYSTEM <SERIES/VERSION> 88A101
[ POS ][ DGNOS ][ ][ SYSTEM ][ MSG ]
The figure above shows a sample single–slave display screen on a display

unit with seven soft keys. A unit with twelve soft keys can also display
the single–slave display screen.
D Guidance message While the following soft keys are being displayed, a guidance message
is displayed in the message field.
[ POS ][ ][ ][SYSTEM][ MSG ]
[ WORK ][ ][MACHIN ][ ][ ]
[ PARAM ][ DGNOS ][ ][SYSTEM][(OPRT) ]
When the soft keys are displayed as shown above, “SELECT ACTIVE
SLAVE [>]” is displayed.
[ ± NEXT ][ ° BACK ][ ZOOM ][ ][ ]
When the soft keys are displayed as shown above, “SELECT ACTIVE
SLAVE [↓] [↑]” is displayed.
D Key–in field When the [(OPRT)] soft key is pressed, the message line may turn into a
key–in field as required. The numeric data input by using MDI keys is
displayed after the prompt (>).
On the parameter and diagnosis screens, the key–in field appears when
just a numeric value is input. The soft key [(OPRT)] need not be pressed.
120
1.18.3
Parameter Input/Output
D Saving parameters Parameters can be saved in CNC memory or a memory card as a data file
of program format. Specify the first digit of the registration program
number in parameter 8760. Programs with predetermined numbers are
created for individual slaves. When the parameters are saved in CNC
memory, a program having the specified program number is created.
When the parameters are saved in a memory card, a file is created, to
which the file name consists of the specified program number and an
extension PMM.
Example: When parameter 8760 is set to 8000
The program number for group n is 8000 + n*10.
The group number n is indicated in the title area of each slave.
CAUTION
In case that the parameters are saved in a memory card, If
the specified program number already exists on memory
card, the corresponding program is overwritten with new
data.
Specify a desired input device in the MD1 and MD2 bits (bits 1 and 2 of
parameter 960). Connect a memory card. Alternatively, check the free
area of CNC memory. Then, follow the steps given below:

[ NO.SRC ][ ][ ][ ][ INPUT ]
3. Press the continuous menu key . The following soft keys appear:
[ ][ READ ][ PUNCH ][ ][ ]
4. Press the [READ] soft key. The following soft keys appear:
[ ][ ][ ][CANCEL ][ EXEC ]
5. Press the [EXEC] soft key.

During input, “INPUT” blinks in the message field.
121
D Writing parameters The data file of parameters saved in CNC memory or a memory card as
a program is written into the slave determined by the program number.
The program number and memory device are determined as described in
“Saving parameters.”

[ NO.SRC ][ ][ ][ ][ INPUT ]
3. Press the next–menu key. The following soft keys appear:
[ ][ READ ][ PUNCH ][ ][ ]
4. Press the [PUNCH] soft key. The following soft keys appear:
[ ][ ][ ][CANCEL ][ EXEC ]
5. Press the [EXEC] soft key.
During output, “INPUT” blinks in the message field.
The screen cannot be changed to another screen during parameter

input/output.
When the RESET key is pressed, or when an alarm status is detected in

communication, the input/output stops.
1.18.4
Notes
D Connecting an I/O Link When the power mate CNC series is used as a slave of an I/O Link, the
CNC assigns I/O addresses. The salve data is input and output in units
of 16 bytes. Therefore, 128 input/output points are necessary. Up to eight
slaves can be connected.
The module name is OC021 (16–byte input) or OC020 (16–byte output).

BASE is always 0, and SLOT is always 1.
D Ignoring the power mate After the data necessary for each slave connected is set and checked, the
CNC manager function communication of the power mate CNC manager (PMM) can be stopped
to send a command from the CNC ladder to the slave.
When the PMN bit (bit 3 of parameter 960) is set to 1, all communication
between CNC and the slave via the I/O Link is open to the ladder.
While the bit is held 1, the screen shows just the title, function name, and
other items that are independent of the communication. The following
message appears to indicate that communication has stopped.
COMMUNICATION PROHIBITED BY P960#3
122
D Data input/output by I/O When the power mate CNC manager is used, the function for data
Link input/output by I/O Link cannot be used.
D Alarm (1) CNC

When a CNC alarm status is detected, the screen is automatically
switched to the CNC alarm screen. Check the details of the alarm. If
necessary, display and select the power mate CNC manager screen
again by pressing function key SYSTEM
.
(2) Slave
A guidance message is usually displayed in the message field. If a
slave alarm is detected, the corresponding slave group number is
displayed at the right end.
Display the alarm screen to check the details.
D Data protection key When the data protection key of the CNC is turned on, parameters cannot
be input to CNC memory.
123
2. HARDWARE B–63665EN/01
2 HARDWARE
This chapter describes about the analog input board for the laser.
As for the other print circuit board of CNC control unit, the functions of
the card PCB on the print circuit board, and the replacing of maintenance
parts and so on, see the FANUC Series 16i/18i/160i/180i–MODEL B
Maintenance Manual (B–63525EN).
2.1 ANALOG INPUT BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
124
B–63665EN/01 2. HARDWARE
2.1
ANALOG INPUT
BOARD
D Specification
Name Specification
Analog input board A20B–8001–0750
D Connector mounting
location
F–
BUS
JA6
ANALOG
JA6
10 20
9 19
8 18
7 17
6 0V 16 0V
5 AOUT 15
4 0V 14 0V
3 AIN2 13 AIN3 AIN0 to AIN3:
2 0V 12 0V Analog input
1 AIN0 11 AIN1 AOUT: Analog output
D Card mounting location No card is mounted on the analog input board.
125
3. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B–63665EN/01
3 INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA
After you change a SRAM module, you must set various data again.
This chapter describes the procedures to input and output the parameters,
the part programs and the tool offset values.
3.1 SETTING PARAMETERS FOR

INPUT/OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
3.2 INPUTTING/OUTPUTTING DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
3.3 DATA INPUT/OUTPUT ON THE
ALL IO SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
3.4 DATA INPUT/OUTPUT USING
A MEMORY CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
126
B–63665EN/01 3. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA
3.1
SETTING
PARAMETERS FOR
INPUT/OUTPUT
D Setting procedure of 1. Set to MDI mode or emergency stop state.

parameters
2. Press OFFSET
SETTING key several times or press soft key [SETING] to display
SETTING (HANDY) screen.
3. Set the cursor to PARAMETER WRITE and, press 1 and INPUT
keys in this order. Here alarm 100 will be displayed.

4. Press SYSTEM key several times to display the following screen.
PARAMETER (SETTING) O1234N12345

0000 SEQ INI ISO TVC
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0001 FCV
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0012 RMV MIR
X 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Y 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Z 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
B 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0020 I/O CHANNEL
S 0 T0000
REF **** *** *** 10:15:30

[ F SRH ][ READ ][ PUNCH ][DELETE ][ ]
To make the cursor display in bit unit,

press the cursor key or .
5. Press soft key[(OPRT)] and the following operation menu is

displayed.
1) Soft key [NO. SRH] :Searched by number.
Examination) Parameter number → [NO. SRH].
2) Soft key [ON : 1] : Item with cursor position is set to 1
(bit parameter)
3) Soft key [OFF : 0] : Item with cursor position is set to 0
(bit parameter)
4) Soft key [+INPUT] : Input value is added to the value at cursor
(word type)
5) Soft key [INPUT] : Input value is replaced with the value at
cursor (word type)
6) Soft key [READ] : Parameters are input from reader/puncher
interface.
7) Soft key [PUNCH] : Parameters are output to reader/puncher
interface.
127
6. After the parameters have been input, set PARAMETER WRITE on

the SETTING screen to 0. Press RESET to release alram 100.
7. Convenient method
1) To change parameters in bit unit, press cursor key or ,
then the cursor becomes bit length and you can set parameters bit
by bit (Bit parameter only).
2) To set data consecutively, use EOB key.
(Ex.1) 1 2 3 4 EOB 4 5 6 7 EOB 9
9 9 9 INPUT
This key sequence sets data as follows:

0 1234
0 ⇒ 4567
0 9999
0 0
(Ex.2) 1 2 3 4 EOB EOB 9 9 9 9 INPUT

0 1234
0 ⇒ 0
0 9999
0 0
3) To set the same data sequentially, press = .
(Ex.) 1 2 3 4 EOB a EOB a INPUT

0 1234
0 ⇒ 1234
0 1234
0 0
4) Bit parameters can be set as follows:
(Ex.) 1 1 EOB a EOB a INPUT

0000 0000 00011000
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0⇒ 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0
00000000 0 0 0 11 0 0 0
00000000 00000000
8. After the required parameters are set, set PARAMETER WRITE to
0.
128
3.2 The main CPU memorized the following data.

Outputting the data 1/O device while the CNC is rurnning normally
INPUTTING/
(1) CNC paramter
OUTPUTTING DATA (2) PMC parameter
(3) Pitch error compensation amount
(4) Custom macro variable values
(5) Tool compensation amount
(6) Part program (machining program, custom macro program)
3.2.1 Be sure that data output cannot be done in an alarm status.

Confirming the Parameters required for output are as follows :
Parameters Required
for Data Output #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0000 ISO
#1 (ISO) 0 : Output with EIA code

1 : Output with ISO code (FANUC cassette)
0020 Selection of I/O channel
0 : Channel 1 (JD36A of mother board)

1 : Channel 1 (JD36A of mother board)
2 : Channel 2 (JD36B of mother board)
3 : Channel 3 (JD38A of serial communication board)
* An operation example shown here assumes that data input/output is
performed with an input/output unit connected to the JD36A. (I/O
channel = 0)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0101 NFD ASI SB2
#7 (NFD) 0 : Feed is output when data is output.

1: Feed is not output when data is output.
#3 (ASI)l 0 : EIA or ISO code is used for input/output data.
1: ASCII code is used.
#0 (SB2) 0 : No. of stop bits is 1.
l 1: No. of stop bits is 2.
0102 pecification number of input/output device
0 RS–232–C (for other than the following)

1 FANUC bubble cassette B1/B2
2 FANUC Floppy cassette adapter F1
3 PROGRAM FILE Mate. FANUC FA card adapter ,FANUC
Floppy cassette adapter, FSP–H
4 Not used
5 Portable tape reader
6 FANUC PPR, FSP–G, FSP–H
129
0103 Baud Rate
1: 50 5: 200 9: 2400
2: 100 6: 300 l10: 4800
3: 110 7: 600 11: 9600
4: 150 8: 1200 12: 19200 [BPS]
3.2.2 In case of PPR, steps 2 and 3 are not required.

Outputting CNC 1. Select EDIT mode.
Parameters 2. PROG Press PROG key and soft key PRGRM to select a program text.
3. Press soft key [(OPRT)] and soft key .

And then, put out the head of file by pressing [FSRH] 0 [EXEC].
4. Press SYSTEM key and soft key [PARAM] to display parameter screen.
5. Press soft key [(OPRT)] ,and soft key .

6. Press soft key [PUNCH] and [EXEC],and the parameters are started
to be output.
3.2.3 1. Select MDI mode.

Outputting PMC 2. Press OFFSET
SETTING key then soft key [SETTING] to select a setting screen.
Parameters
3. Set the cursor to PARAMETER WRITE and input 1 and INPUT .
At this time, alarm 100 will be generated.
4. Press SYSTEM key and soft key [PMC].
5. Press soft key [PMCPRM] and soft key [KEEPRL]
6. Set the cursor to K17 and set the first bit to 1.
X X X X X X 1 X INPUT
Where, mark x is a former value

Thus, data input/output screen has been selected.
7. Select EDIT mode.
8. Press soft key then key .
9. Press soft key [I/O] and set the parameters on I/O.
Item selection cursor moves to the following item after data of an item
is set.
10.In CHANNEL NO item, input 1 INPUT to select I/O channel 1.
11.In DEVICE item, press soft key [FDCAS] to select the floppy cassette.
12.In KIND DATA item, press soft key [PARAM].
13.In FUNCTION item, press soft key [WRITE].
130
14.In FILE No item, specify a file name. In this example input as follows:
@ P M C INPUT
15.Press soft key [EXEC]. Then PMC parameters are started to be output.
16.After the PMC parameters have been output, set PARAMETER
WRITE to 0.
17.Press RESET to release alarm 100.
3.2.4 1. Select EDIT mode.

Outputting Pitch Error 2. Press SYSTEM key several times, press soft key [PARAM], and
Compensation Amount [PITCH] to select the SETTING screen for pitch error amount.
3. Press soft key [(OPRT)] and .
4. Press soft key [PUNCH] and [EXEC], then pitch error compensation
amount is started to be output.
3.2.5 When custom macro function is equipped, values of variable no. 500 and
Outputting Custom later are output.
Macro Variable Values 1. Press OFFSET
SETTING key.
2. Press key and soft key [MACRO] to select custom macro

variable screen.
3. Press soft key [(OPRT)] and then key .
4. Press soft key [PUNCH] and [EXEC], then custom macro variable
values are output.
3.2.6 1. Select EDIT mode.

Outputting Tool 2. Press OFFSET
SETTING key and soft key [OFFSET] to display the tool
Compensation Amount compensation amount screen.
3. Press [(OPRT)] key and soft key .
4. Press soft key [PUNCH] an [EXEC] key, and the tool compensation
amount is started to be output.
131
3.2.7 1. Confirm the following parameters. If 1 is set, set to the MDI mode and
Outputting Part set it to 0.
Program
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3202 NE9 NE8
#4 (NE9) l 0 : Programs of 9000s are edited.

1 : Programs of 9000s can be protected.
#0 (NE8) l 0 : Programs of 8000s are edited.
1 : Programs of 8000s can be protected.
2. Select EDIT mode.

3. Press PROG key and press soft key [PRGRM] to display program text.
4. Press [(OPRT)] key and press soft key .

5. Input a program number to be output. To output all programs input as:
O – 9 9 9 9
6. Press [PUNCH] and [EXEC] key, then program output is started.
3.2.8 1. Set to the emergency stop state.

Inputting CNC 2. Confirm that the patameters required to input data is correct.
Parameters 1) Press OFFSET
SETTING key several times, and press [SETING] to display
SETTING screen.
2) Confirm that PARAMETER WRITE=1.
3) Press SYSTEM key to select the parameter screen.
4)
0020 Selectionof I/O channel
l 0: Channel 1 (JD36A of mother board)

1: Channel 1 (JD36A of mother board)
2: Channel 2 (JD36B of mother board)
3: Channel 3 (JD38A of serial communication board)
5)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0101 NFD ASI SB2
#7 (NFD) 0 : Feed is output when punching out.

1 : Feed is not output when punching out.
#3 (ASI) 0 : EIA or ISO code is used.
1 : ASCII code is used.
#0 (SB2) 0 : No. of stop bits is 1.
l 1 : No. of stop bits is 2.
132
6)
0102 Specification number of I/O device

1 FANUC Bubble cassette B1/B2
2 FANUCFloppy cassette F1
3 PROGRAM FILE Mate, FANUC FA Card adapter, FANUC
Floppy casette adapter, FSP–H, FANUC Handy File
4 Not used
6 FANUC PPR, FSP–G, FSP–H
7)
0103 Baud rate
1: 50 5: 200 9: 2400
2: 100 6: 300 l10: 4800
3: 110 7: 600 11: 9600
4: 150 8: 1200 12: 19200 [BPS]
3. Press soft key [(OPRT)] and soft key
4. Press soft key [READ] and [EXEC]. Then input of parameters are
started.
5. Because alarm 300 will generate for the system with absolute pulse
coder, set parameter 1815#5 to 0.
6. Alarm 300 is issued if the system employs an absolute pulse coder.
In such a case, perform reference position return again.
133
3.2.9 Set the emergency stop state.

Inputting PMC Operation of 12 is not required when PPR is used.
Parameters 1. Turn off (KEY4=1) the program protect key.
2. Press OFFSET
SETTING key and soft key [SETTING] to select the SETTING
screen.
3. Confirm that PARAMETER WRITE=1.
4. Press SYSTEM key and soft key [PMC].
5. Press soft key [PMCPRM] and soft key [KEEPRL].
6. Set the cursor to K17 and set bit 1 to 1.
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 INPUT .
7. Press key and key.

8. Press soft key [I/O] and set the parameters required for I/O.
Item selection cursor displays the next item after an item is set.
9. In CHANNEL item , press 1 INPUT to select channel 1.
10.In DEVICE item, press [FDCAS] key to select the floppy cassette.
11.In FUNCTION item, press soft key [READ] to input data
12.In FILE NO item, press 2 INPUT to select file no. 2.
13.Press soft key [EXECT] and the PMC parameters are started to be
input.
14.After data has been read, turn off power and turn it on.
3.2.10 1. Release the emergency stop and select EDIT mode.

Inputting Pitch Error 2. Confirm that PARAMETER WRITE=1 on the setting screen.
Compensation Amount 3. Press PROG key and soft key [PRGRM] to display program contents.
4. Press soft key [(OPRT)], , [F SRH], and 3 [EXEC] to select

the pitch error compensation file.
5. Press SYSTEM key several times, soft key [PARAM], and
[PITCH] to select the screen for pitch error compensation amount.
6. Press soft key [(OPRT)] and key.
7. Press soft key [READ] and [EXEC], then the pitch error
compensation amount is started to be input.
8. After data has been input, press OFFSET
SETTING key twice to display the
SETTING screen and return the PARAMETER WRITE to 0.
134
3.2.11 If the system is equipped with the custom macro fucntion, input the
Inputting Custom variable values.
For PPR, item 4 is not required.
Macro Variable Values
1. Confirm that EDIT mode is selected.
2. Turn off the program protect key (KEY2=1).
3. Press PROG key then soft key [PRGRM] to display program contents.

a file.
5. Press soft key [(OPRT)] and key .
6. Press address O , a program number (0001 for example), soft key

[READ] and [EXEC] key, then custom macro variable values are
started to be input.
Input a program number that is not used.
7. Select MEMORY mode on the machine operator’s panel and press
cycle start button.
When the program is executed, macro variables are set.
8. Press OFFSET
SETTING key, key and soft key [MACRO] to select the custom
macro variable screen.
9. Press 500 and soft key [NO SRH] to display variable number 500 and
confirm the custom macro variables are set correctly.
Of the data displayed, 0 and vacant differ in meaning.
Vacant is an undefined variable. To set vacant, press soft key
[INPUT].
10.Select EDIT mode again.
11.Press PROG key to select the program display screen.
12.Press address O , and a program number (0001 for example) ,then
press DELETE to delete the program.
135
3.2.12 Item 4 is not required for PPR.

Inputting Tool 1. Select the EDIT mode.
Compensation Amount 2. Turn off the program protect (KEY=1).
3. Press PROG key, and press soft key [PRGRM] to display the program
contents screen.
the tool compensation amount file.
5. Press OFFSET
SETTING key, and soft key [OFFSET] to display the tool
compensation amount screen.
6. Press soft key [(OPRT)] and key.
7. Press [READ] key and [EXEC] key and data input is started.
3.2.13 Confirm the following parameters. If 1 is set, set it to 0.

Inputting Part (Change it in MDI mode).
Programs
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3201 NPE RAL
#6 (NPE) When programs are registered in part program storage area, M02, M30
and M99 are:
0 : regarded as the end of program.
l 1 : not regarded as the end of porgram.
#1 (RAL) When programs are registered:
l 0 : All programs are registered.
1 : Only one program is registered.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3202 NE9 NE8
#4 (NE9) l 0 : Programs of 9000s can be edited.

1 : Programs of 9000s are protected.
#0 (NE8) l 0 : Programs of 8000s can be edited.
1 : Programs of 8000s are protected.
For PPR, item 4 is not required.
1. Confirm that mode is EDIT mode.

2. Turn off the program protect (KEY3=1).
3. Press PROG key and press soft key [PRGRM] to select a part program
file.
4. Press soft key [(OPRT)], [F SRH], and 6 [EXEC] to select
a part program file.
5. Press soft key ,[(OPRT)] and key.
6. Press soft key [READ] and [EXEC], then data input is started.
136
3.3 To input/output a particular type of data, the corresponding screen is

usually selected. For example, the parameter screen is used for parameter
DATA INPUT/OUTPUT input from or output to an external input/output unit, while the program
ON THE ALL IO screen is used for program input or output. However, programs,
SCREEN parameters, offset data, and macro variables can all be input and output
using a single common screen, that is, the ALL IO screen.
READ/PUNCH (PROGRAM) O1234 N12345
I/O CHANNEL 3 TV CHECK OFF

DEVICE NUM. 0 PUNCH CODE ISO
BAUDRATE 4800 INPUT CODE ASCII
STOP BIT 2 FEED OUTPUT FEED
NULL INPUT (EIA) NO EOB OUTPUT (ISO) CR
TV CHECK (NOTES) ON BAUDRATE CLK. INNER
CD CHECK (232C) OFF RESET/ALARM ON
PARITY BIT OFF SAT COMMAND HOST
INTERFACE RS422 COM PROTCOL A
END CODE EXT COM CODE ASCII
(0:EIA 1:ISO)>1_
MDI **** *** *** *** 12:34:56
PRGRM PARAM OFFSET MACRO (OPRT)
Fig. 3.3 ALL IO screen (when channel 3 is being used for input/output)
137
3.3.1 Input/output–related parameters can be set on the ALL IO screen.

Setting Parameters can be set, regardless of the mode.
Input/Output–related
Parameters
Setting input/output–related parameters
Procedure 1 Press function key SYSTEM

.
2 Press the rightmost soft key (continuous menu key) several

times.
3 Press soft key [ALL IO] to display the ALL IO screen.
NOTE
1 If program or floppy is selected in EDIT mode, the program
directory or floppy screen is displayed.
2 When the power is first turned on, program is selected by
default.
I/O CHANNEL 3 TV CHECK OFF

DEVICE NUM. 0 PUNCH CODE ISO
BAUDRATE 4800 INPUT CODE ASCII
STOP BIT 2 FEED OUTPUT FEED
NULL INPUT (EIA) NO EOB OUTPUT (ISO) CR
TV CHECK (NOTES) ON BAUDRATE CLK. INNER
CD CHECK (232C) OFF RESET/ALARM ON
PARITY BIT OFF SAT COMMAND HOST
INTERFACE RS422 COM PROTCOL A
END CODE EXT COM CODE ASCII
(0:EIA 1:ISO)>1_
MDI **** *** *** *** 12:34:56
PRGRM PARAM OFFSET MACRO (OPRT)
NOTE
Baud rate clock, CD check (232C), reset/alarm report, and
the parity bit for parameter No. 134, as well as the
communication code, end code, communication protocol,
interface, and SAT command for parameter No. 135 are
displayed only when channel 3 is being used for
input/output.
4 Select the soft key corresponding to the desired type of data (program,
parameter, and so forth).
5 Set the parameters corresponding to the type of input/output unit to be
used. (Parameter setting is possible regardless of the mode.)
138
3.3.2 A program can be input and output using the ALL IO screen.
Inputting and When entering a program using a cassette or card, the user must specify
the input file containing the program (file search).
Outputting Programs
File search
Procedure 1 Press soft key [PRGRM] on the ALL IO screen, described in Section
3.3.1.
2 Select EDIT mode. A program directory is displayed.
3 Press soft key [(OPRT)] . The screen and soft keys change as shown
below.
⋅ A program directory is displayed only in EDIT mode. In all other
modes, the ALL IO screen is displayed.
O0001 N00010
PROGRAM (NUM.) MEMORY (CHAR.)

USED : 60 3321
FREE : 2 429
O0010 O0001 O0003 O0002 O0555 O0999

O0062 O0004 O0005 O1111 O0969 O6666
O0021 O1234 O0588 O0020 O0040
>_
EDIT **** *** *** *** 14:46:09
F SRH READ PUNCH DELETE (OPRT)
4 Enter address N.
5 Enter the number of the file to be found.
⋅ N0
The first floppy file is found.
⋅ One of N1 to N9999
Among the files numbered from 1 to 9999, a specified file is found.
⋅ N–9999
The file immediately after that used most recently is found.
⋅ N–9998
When –9998 is specified, the next file is found. Then, each time
a file input/output operation is performed, N–9999 is automatically
inserted. This means that subsequent files can be sequentially
found automatically.
This state is canceled by specifying N0, N1 to N9999, or N–9999,
or upon a reset.
6 Press soft keys [F SRH] and [EXEC].
CAN EXEC
The specified file is found.
139
Inputting a program
3.3.1.
below.
O0001 N00010

USED : 60 3321
FREE : 2 429
O0010 O0001 O0003 O0002 O0555 O0999

O0062 O0004 O0005 O1111 O0969 O6666
O0021 O1234 O0588 O0020 O0040
>_
EDIT **** *** *** *** 14:46:09
4 To specify a program number to be assigned to an input program,

enter address O, followed by the desired program number.
If no program number is specified, the program number in the file or
on the NC tape is assigned as is.
5 Press soft key [READ], then [EXEC].
STOP CAN EXEC The program is input with the program number specified in step 4
assigned.
To cancel input, press soft key [CAN].
To stop input prior to its completion, press soft key [STOP].
140
Outputting programs
3.3.1.
below.
O0001 N00010

USED : 60 3321
FREE : 2 429
O0010 O0001 O0003 O0002 O0555 O0999

O0062 O0004 O0005 O1111 O0969 O6666
O0021 O1234 O0588 O0020 O0040
>_
EDIT **** *** *** *** 14:46:09
4 Enter address O.
5 Enter a desired program number.
If –9999 is entered, all programs in memory are output.
To output a range of programs, enter O∆∆∆∆, OVVVV.. The
programs numbered from ∆∆∆∆ to VVVV are output.
When bit 4 (SOR) of parameter No. 3107 for sorted display is set to 1
on the program library screen, programs are output in order, starting
from those having the smallest program numbers.
6 Press soft key [PUNCH], then [EXEC].
STOP CAN EXEC
The specified program or programs are output. If steps 4 and 5 are
omitted, the currently selected program is output.
To cancel output, press soft key [CAN].
To stop output prior to its completion, press soft key [STOP].
141
Deleting files
3.3.1.
below.
O0001 N00010

USED : 60 3321
FREE : 2 429
O0010 O0001 O0003 O0002 O0555 O0999

O0062 O0004 O0005 O1111 O0969 O6666
O0021 O1234 O0588 O0020 O0040
>_
EDIT **** *** *** *** 14:46:09
4 Press soft key [DELETE] .

5 Enter a file number, from 1 to 9999, to indicate the file to be deleted.
6 Press soft key [EXEC].
CAN EXEC
The k–th file, specified in step 5, is deleted.
142
3.3.3 Parameters can be input and output using the ALL IO screen.
Inputting and
Outputting Parameters
Inputting parameters
Procedure 1 Press soft key [PARAM] on the ALL IO screen, described in Section
3.3.1.
2 Select EDIT mode.
3 Press soft key [(OPRT)] . Soft keys change as shown below.
READ PUNCH

CAN EXEC The parameters are read, and the “INPUT” indicator blinks at the
lower–right corner of the screen. Upon the completion of input, the
“INPUT” indicator is cleared from the screen.
Outputting parameters
Procedure 1 Press soft key [PARAM] on the ALL IO screen, described in Section
3.3.1.
2 Select EDIT mode.
READ PUNCH

CAN EXEC The parameters are output, and the “OUTPUT” indicator blinks at the
lower–right corner of the screen. Upon the completion of output, the
“OUTPUT” indicator is cleared from the screen.
143
3.3.4 Offset data can be input and output using the ALL IO screen.
Inputting and
Outputting Offset Data
Inputting offset data
Procedure 1 Press soft key [OFFSET] on the ALL IO screen, described in Section
3.3.1.
2 Select EDIT mode.
READ PUNCH

CAN EXEC
The offset data is read, and the “INPUT” indicator blinks at the
lower–right corner of the screen.
Upon the completion of input, the “INPUT” indicator is cleared from
the screen.
Outputting offset data
Procedure 1 Press soft key [OFFSET] on the ALL IO screen, described in Section
3.3.1.
2 Select EDIT mode.
READ PUNCH

CAN EXEC
The offset data is output, and the “OUTPUT” indicator blinks at the
lower–right corner of the screen. Upon the completion of output, the
“OUTPUT” indicator is cleared from the screen.
144
3.3.5 Custom macro common variables can be output using the ALL IO screen.
Outputting Custom
Macro Common
Variables
Outputting custom macro common variables
Procedure 1 Press soft key [MACRO] on the ALL IO screen, described in Section
3.3.1.
2 Select EDIT mode.
READ PUNCH

CAN EXEC The custom macro common variables are output, and the “OUTPUT”
indicator blinks at the lower–right corner of the screen. Upon the
completion of output, the “OUTPUT” indicator is cleared from the
screen.
NOTE
To input a macro variable, read the desired custom macro
statement as a program, then execute the program.
145
3.3.6 The ALL IO screen supports the display of a directory of floppy files, as
Inputting and well as the input and output of floppy files.
Outputting Floppy
Files
Displaying a file directory
Procedure 1 Press the rightmost soft key (continuous menu key) on the ALL
IO screen, described in Section 3.3.1.
2 Press soft key [FLOPPY ].
3 Select EDIT mode. The floppy screen is displayed.
below.
⋅ The floppy screen is displayed only in EDIT mode. In all other
READ/PUNCH (FLOPPY) O1234 N12345
>
MDI **** *** *** *** 12:34:56
F SRH READ PUNCH DELETE
5 Press soft key [F SRH].

6 Enter the number of the desired file, then press soft key [F SET].
F SET CAN EXEC
7 Press soft key [EXEC]. A directory is displayed, with the specified
file uppermost. Subsequent files in the directory can be displayed by
pressing the page key.
146

No. FILE NAME (Meter) VOL
0001 PARAMETER 46.1
0002 ALL.PROGRAM 12.3
0003 O0001 11.9
0004 O0002 11.9
0005 O0003 11.9
0006 O0004
0007 O0005 11.9
0008 O0010 11.9
0009 O0020 11.9
11.9
F SRH
File No.=2
>2_
EDIT * * * * * * * * * * *** 12:34:56
F SRH CAN EXEC
A directory in which the first file is uppermost can be displayed

simply by pressing the page key. (Soft key [F SRH] need not be
pressed.)
147
Inputting a file
2 Press soft key [FLOPPY] .
below.
The floppy screen is displayed only in EDIT mode. In all other
>
MDI **** *** *** *** 12:34:56
5 Press soft key [READ].

6 Enter the number of a file or program to be input.
F SET O SET STOP CAN EXEC
⋅ Setting a file number: Enter the number of the desired file, then
press soft key [F SET].
⋅ Setting a program number: Enter the number of the desired
program, then press soft key [O SET].
The specified file or program is read, and the “INPUT” indicator
blinks at the lower–right corner of the screen. Upon the completion of
input, the “INPUT” indicator is cleared from the screen.
148
Outputting a file
below.
>
MDI **** *** *** *** 12:34:56
5 Press soft key [PUNCH].

6 Enter the number of the program to be output, together with a desired
F SET O SET STOP CAN EXEC
output file number.
⋅ Setting a file number: Enter the number of the desired file, then
press soft key [F SET].
⋅ Setting a program number: Enter the number of the desired
program, then press soft key [O SET].
The specified program is output, and the “OUTPUT” indicator blinks
at the lower–right corner of the screen. Upon the completion of
output, the “OUTPUT” indicator is cleared from the screen.
If no file number is specified, the program is written at the end of the
currently registered files.
149
Deleting a file
below.
>
MDI **** *** *** *** 12:34:56
5 Press soft key [DELETE] .

6 Enter the number of the desired file, then press soft key [F SET].
F SET CAN EXEC
7 Press soft key [EXEC]. The specified file is deleted. After the file has
been deleted, the subsequent files are shifted up.
150
3.4 By setting the I/O channel (parameter No. 20) to 4, files on a memory card
can be referenced, and different types of data such as part programs,
DATA INPUT/OUTPUT parameters, and offset data on a memory card can be input and output in
USING A MEMORY text file format.
CARD The major functions are listed below.
⋅ Displaying a directory of stored files
The files stored on a memory card can be displayed on the directory
screen.
⋅ Searching for a file
A search is made for a file on a memory card and, if found, it is
displayed on the directory screen.
⋅ Reading a file
Text–format files can be read from a memory card.
⋅ Writing a file
Data such as part programs can be stored to a memory card in text file
format.
⋅ Deleting a file
A file can be selected and deleted from a memory card.
CNC
Writing a file
Reading a file
Displaying a directory Memory card

Searching for a file
Deleting a file
151
Displaying a directory of stored files
Procedure 1 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel.
2 Press function key PROG .
3 Press the rightmost soft key (continuous menu key).
4 Press soft key [CARD]. The screen shown below is displayed. Using
page keys and , the screen can be scrolled.
DIRECTORY (M–CARD) O0034 N00045

No. FILE NAME SIZE DATE
0001 O1000 123456 96/07/10
0002 O1001 118458 96/07/30
0003 O0002 113250 96/07/30
0004 O2000 173456 96/07/31
0005 O2001 113444 96/07/31
0006 O3001 118483 96/08/02
0007 O3300 111406 96/08/05
0008 O3400 112420 96/07/31
0009 O3500 117460 96/07/31
~ ~
PROG DIR + (OPRT)
5 Comments relating to each file can be displayed by pressing soft key

[DIR+].

No. FILE NAME COMMENT
0001 O1000 (COMMENT )
0002 O1001 (SUB PROGRAM )
0003 O0002 (12345678 )
0004 O2000 ( )
0005 O2001 ( )
0006 O3001 (SKIP–K )
0007 O3300 (HI–SPEED )
0008 O3400 ( )
0009 O3500 (TEST PROGRAM)
~ ~
PROG DIR + (OPRT)
6 Repeatedly pressing soft key [DIR+] toggles the screen between the
display of comments and the display of sizes and dates.
Any comment described after the O number in the file is displayed.
Up to 18 characters can be displayed on the screen.
152
Searching for a file
4 Press soft key [CARD]. The screen shown below is displayed.

0001 O1000 123456 96/07/10
0002 O1001 118458 96/07/30
0003 O0002 113250 96/07/30
0004 O2000 173456 96/07/31
0005 O2001 113444 96/07/31
0006 O3001 118483 96/08/02
0007 O3300 111406 96/08/05
0008 O3400 112420 96/07/31
0009 O3500 117460 96/07/31
~ ~
PROG DIR + (OPRT)
5 Press soft key [(OPRT)] .

6 Set the number of the desired file number with soft key [F SRH].
F SRH F READ N READ PUNCH DELETE
Then, start the search by pressing soft key [EXEC]. If found, the file is
displayed at the top of the directory screen.
When a search is made for file number 19

0019 O1000 (MAIN PROGRAM)
0020 O1010 (SUBPROGRAM–1)
0021 O1020 (COMMENT )
0022 O1030 (COMMENT )
~ ~
153
Reading a file
4 Press soft key [CARD]. Then, the screen shown below is displayed.

0001 O1000 123456 96/07/10
0002 O1001 118458 96/07/30
0003 O0002 113250 96/07/30
0004 O2000 173456 96/07/31
0005 O2001 113444 96/07/31
0006 O3001 118483 96/08/02
0007 O3300 111406 96/08/05
0008 O3400 112420 96/07/31
0009 O3500 117460 96/07/31
~ ~
PROG DIR + (OPRT)

6 To specify a file number, press soft key [F READ]. The screen shown
below is displayed.

0021 O1030 (COMMENT )
~ ~
READ
FILE NAME=20 PROGRAM No.=120
>
EDIT * * * **** *** **** 15:40:21
F NAME O SET STOP CAN EXEC
7 Enter file number 20 from the MDI panel, then set the file number by
pressing soft key [F SET]. Next, enter program number 120, then set
the program number by pressing soft key [O SET]. Then, press soft
key [EXEC].
⋅ File number 20 is registered as O0120 in the CNC.
⋅ Set a program number to register a read file with a separate O
number. If no program number is set, the O number in the file name
column is registered.
154
8 To specify a file with its file name, press soft key [N READ] in step 6
above. The screen shown below is displayed.

0013 TESTPRO (SUB PROGRAM–1)
0014 O0060 (MACRO PROGRAM)
~ ~
READ FILE NAME =TESTPRO
PROGRAM No. =1230
>
EDIT * * * **** *** **** 15:40:21
9 To register file name TESTPRO as O1230, enter file name TESTPRO

from the MDI panel, then set the file name with soft key [F NAME].
Next, enter program number 1230, then set the program number with
soft key [O SET]. Then, press soft key [EXEC].
155
Writing a file


0001 O1000 123456 96/07/10
0002 O1001 118458 96/07/30
0003 O0002 113250 96/07/30
0004 O2000 173456 96/07/31
0005 O2001 113444 96/07/31
0006 O3001 118483 96/08/02
0007 O3300 111406 96/08/05
0008 O3400 112420 96/07/31
0009 O3500 117460 96/07/31
~ ~
PROG DIR + (OPRT)

6 Press soft key [PUNCH].
7 Enter a desired O number from the MDI panel, then set the program
number with soft key [O SET].
When soft key [EXEC] is pressed after the setting shown below has
been made, for example, the file is written under program number
O1230.
~ ~
PUNCH FILE NAME =
PROGRAM No. =1230
>
EDIT * * * **** *** **** 15:40:21
8 In the same way as for O number setting, enter a desired file name
from the MDI panel, then set the file name with soft key [F SET].
When soft key [EXEC] is pressed after the setting shown below has
been made, for example, the file is written under program number
O1230 and file name ABCD12.
~ ~
PUNCH FILE NAME =ABCD12
PROGRAM No. =1230
>
EDIT * * * **** *** **** 15:40:21
156
Deleting a file

0001 O1000 123456 96/07/10
0002 O1001 118458 96/07/30
0003 O0002 113250 96/07/30
0004 O2000 173456 96/07/31
0005 O2001 113444 96/07/31
0006 O3001 118483 96/08/02
0007 O3300 111406 96/08/05
0008 O3400 112420 96/07/31
0009 O3500 117460 96/07/31
~ ~
PROG DIR + (OPRT)

6 Set the number of the desired file with soft key [DELETE] , then press
soft key [EXEC]. The file is deleted, and the directory screen is
displayed again.
When file number 21 is deleted

0021 O1020 (COMMENT )
0022 O1030 (COMMENT )
~ ~
File name O1020 is deleted.

0021 O1020 (COMMENT )
0022 O1030 (COMMENT )
~ ~
File number 21 is assigned to the next file name.
157
Batch input/output with a memory card
On the ALL IO screen, different types of data including part programs,

parameters, offset data, pitch error data, custom macros, and workpiece
coordinate system data can be input and output using a memory card; the
screen for each type of data need not be displayed for input/output.
Data item name

Part program
Parameter
Offset data
Memory card ² ALL IO screen
Pitch error data
³ Custom macro
Workpiece coordinate system
data
(additional coordinate systems)
2 Press function key SYSTEM

.
3 Press the rightmost soft key (continuous menu key) several

times.
4 Press soft key [ALL IO]. The screen shown below is displayed.

* 0001 O0222 332010 96–04–06
0002 O1003 334450 96–05–04
0003 MACROVAR.DAT 653400 96–05–12
0004 O0002 341205 96–05–13
[PROGRAM]
O0001 O0002 O0003 O0005 O0100 O0020
O0006 O0004 O0110 O0200 O2200 O0441
O0330
>
EDIT * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 10:07:37
PROG PARAM OFFSET (OPRT)
Upper part : Directory of files on the memory card

Lower part : Directory of registered programs
5 With cursor keys and , the user can choose between upper
part scrolling and lower part scrolling. (An asterisk (*) displayed at
the left edge indicates the part for which scrolling is possible.)
: Used for memory card file directory scrolling.
: Used for program directory scrolling.
158
6 With page keys and , scroll through the file directory or

program directory.
7 When this screen is displayed, the program data item is selected. The
soft keys for other screens are displayed by pressing the rightmost soft
key (continuous menu key). Soft key [M–CARD] represents a
separate memory card function for saving and restoring system RAM
data.
MACRO PITCH WORK (OPRT)
M–CARD (OPRT)
When a data item other than program is selected, the screen displays only
a file directory.
A data item is indicated, in parentheses, on the title line.
READ/PUNCH (PARAMETER) O0001 N00001

0001 O0222 332010 96/04/06
0002 O1003 334450 96/05/04
0003 MACROVAR.DAT 653400 96/05/12
0004 O0003 334610 96/05/04
0005 O0001 334254 96/06/04
0006 O0002 333750 96/06/04
0007 CNCPARAM.DAT 334453 96/06/04
~ ~
8 Display the following soft keys with soft key [(OPRT)] .
The operation of each function is the same as on the directory (memory

card) screen. Soft key [O SET], used for program number setting, and the
“PROGRAM NUMBER =” indication are not displayed for data items
other than program.
[F SRH] : Finds a specified file number.
[F READ] : Reads a specified file number.
[PUNCH] : Writes a file.
[N READ] : Reads a file under a specified file name.
[DELETE] : Deletes a specified file number.
NOTE
With a memory card, RMT mode operation and the
subprogram call function (based on the M198 command)
cannot be used.
159
Error codes
Memory card error codes
Code Meaning
102 The memory card does not have sufficient free space.
105 No memory card is mounted.
106 A memory card is already mounted.
110 The specified directory cannot be found.
111 There are too many files under the root directory to allow a
directory to be added.
114 The specified file cannot be found.
115 The specified file is protected.
117 The file has not yet been opened.
118 The file is already open.
119 The file is locked.
122 The specified file name is invalid.
124 The extension of the specified file is invalid.
129 A non–corresponding function was specified.
130 The specification of a device is invalid.
131 The specification of a pathname is invalid.
133 Multiple files are open at the same time.
135 The device is not formatted.
140 The file has the read/write disabled attribute.
160
B–63665EN/01 4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC
4 INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC
This chapter describes the signals between the machine operator’s panel,
magnetics cabinet and the PMC, connection of the signals between PMC
and CNC, and confirmation method of on/off state of these signals.
It also describes system configuration of PMC, parameters of PMC,
ladder and how to display time chart of the signals on the screen.
It also describes a method of inputting/outputting PMC parameters to an
external device.
4.1 GENERAL OF INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

4.2 SPECIFICATION OF PMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
4.3 PMC SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
4.4 LIST OF SIGNALS BY EACH MODE . . . . . . . . . . 203
161
4.1
High–speed processing signal PMCDGN Input Contacts
INTERFACE
*DEC a *ESP, SKIP [0] . . 0V Open GENERAL OF
[1] . . 24V Close
NC DI/DO
PMC MT (Machine Tool builder)
PMCDGN PMCDGN *
ST1 DOOR ST ST1
G X RV
X0.1 X0.0 G007.2 ST2
ST2
4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC
0V
+24E
X5.7
Power
STL STL supply
F0.5 Y0.1 Load +
162
F Y –
PMCDGN PMCDGN * 0V 0V
PMCDGN Tr Output Load

FANUC decides PMC address MTB decides [0] . . . . . . Off 24V Off
addresses addresses
and signals Internal relay and signals [1] . . . . . . On 0V On
correspondence Variable timer
Counter
Data table
Message display
Keep relay
System reserve
area
B–63665EN/01
4.2
SPECIFICATION OF
PMC
4.2.1
Specification
Series 16i–LB
Function
PMC–SA1 (loader control) PMC–SB7
Programmingmethod Ladder Ladder
Number of ladder levels 2 3
1st level execution period 8ms 8ms
Basic instruction execution time 5.0m sec/step 0.0033m sec/step
Program size
D Ladder 12,000 steps max. Approx. 64,000 steps max.(NOTES 1, 2)
D Symbol/comment 1 to 128 KB 1 KB and up (NOTE 2)
D Message 0.1 to 64 KB 8 KB and up (NOTE 2)
Instruction (basic) 12 14
(functional) 48 69
Intemal relay (R) 1,100 bytes 8,500 bytes
Extended relay (E) – 8,000 bytes
Message request (A) 200 requests (25 bytes) 2,000 requests (500 bytes, 2 bits/request)
Nonvolatile memory and so on
D Data table (D) 1,860 bytes 10,000 bytes
D Variable timer (T) 40 units (80 bytes) 250 units (1,000 bytes, 4 bytes/unit)
Fixed timer 100 units 500 units (timer number specification)
D Counter (C) 20 units (80 bytes) 100 units (400 bytes, 4 bytes/unit)
Fixed counter (C) – 100 units (200 bytes, 2 bytes/unit)
D Keep relay (K) 20 bytes 120 bytes
Subprogram (P) – 2,000 programs
Label (L) – 9,999 units
Input/output (I/O Link)
D Input 1,024 points max. 1,792 points max.(NOTE 3)
D Output 1,024 points max. 1,792 points max.(NOTE 3)
Sequence program storage memory Flash ROM Flash ROM
128KB 128 KB (16,000–step option or lower)
256 KB (24,000–step option)
384 KB (32,000/40,000–step option)
163
4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–63665EN/01
NOTE
1 The maximum number of steps assumes programming using basic instructions. The maximum
number of steps varies according to the status of functional instruction use.
2 The total sequence program size (including all of the ladders, symbols/comments, and
messages) must not exceed the capacity of the sequence program storage memory. If the size
of any of the ladders, symbols/comments, or messages is greater, the maximum allowable size
of the others may be limited.
3 The standard specification allows up to 768 input points and up to 768 output points. To use
1,792 input points and 1,792 output points, the I/O Link point extension option is required.
4.2.2
Address
Model
Char-
Signal type Series 16i–LB
acter
PMC–SA1 (loader control) PMC–SB7
X Input signal from the machine to the PMC X0 to X127 X0 to X95
(MT to PMC) X200 to X327(NOTE 1)
X1000 to X1127(NOTE 2)
Y Output signal from the PMC to the machine Y0 to Y127 Y0 to Y95
(PMC to MT) Y200 to Y327(NOTE 1)
Y1000 to Y1127 (NOTE 2)
F Input signal from the NC to the PMC F0 to F255 F0 to F767(NOTE 3)
(NC to PMC) F1000 to F1767(NOTE 4)
F2000 to F2767(NOTE 4)
F3000 to F3767(NOTE 5)
G Output signal from the PMC to the NC (PMC to NC) G0 to G255 G0 to G767(NOTE 3)
G1000 to G1767(NOTE 4)
G2000 to G2767(NOTE 4)
G3000 to G3767(NOTE 5)
R Internal relay R0 to R999 R0 to R7999
R9000 to R9099 R9000 to R9499(NOTE 6)
E Extended relay – E0 to E7999(NOTE 7)
A Message display request signal A0 to A24 A0 to A249
Message display state signal – A9000 to A9249(NOTE 8)
C Counter C0 to C79 C0 to C399
C5000 to C5199(NOTE 9)
K Keep relay K0 to K19 K0 to K99
K900 to K919(NOTE 10)
T Variable timer T0 to T79 T0 to T499
T9000 to T9499(NOTE 11)
D Data table D0 to D1859 D0 to D9999
L Label number – L1 to L9999
P Subprogram number – P1 to P2000
164
NOTE
1 I/O of channel 2 of the I/O Link can be assigned.
This area is usable when the I/O Link point extension option is selected.
2 This area is reserved for the PMC. I/O cannot be assigned to this area. Do not use this area
for sequence programs.
3 This area includes an area reserved for the PMC. The actually usable address range depends
on the CNC system configuration.
4 Use this area when the CNC is a multipath system. This area includes an area reserved for
the PMC. The actually usable address range depends on the CNC system configuration.
5 This area is reserved for the PMC. Do not use this area for sequence programs.
6 This area is a special relay area managed by the PMC system program. When using this area,
follow the description of each signal.
7 In an ordinary system, this area can be used as with the internal relay (R) area. The extended
relay (E) area is volatile, but a signal is input to or output from a memory card as a PMC
parameter. When a PMC parameter is read, the E area is initialized to the state present at the
time of PMC parameter output.
8 Message display state signals corresponding to message display request signals on a
one–to–one basis. This area cannot be written to.
9 This area is used for the fixed counter instruction (CTRB instruction), which specifies a preset
value as a constant.
10 This area is a special relay area for PMC management software. When using this area, follow
the description of each address.
11 This area is reserved for the PMC. Do not use this area for sequence programs.
4.2.3 (1) R9000 (Operation output register for the ADD, SUB, MULB, DIVB,
System Reserve Area and COMPB functional instructions)
of Internal Relay
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
R9000 V N Z Operation result

register
Zero
Sign is minus
Overflow
(2) R9000 (Error output for the EXIN, WINDR, WINDW, MMCWR,
MMCWW, MMC3R, and MMC3W functional instructions)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
R9000
The instruc-
tion ended in
error.
165
(3) R9002 to R9005 (Operation output registers for the DIVB functional
instruction)
The data remaining after the DIVB functional instruction is executed
in output.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
R9002
R9003
Register for
remainder
R9004 (used by DIVB
instruction)
R9005
(4) R9091 (System timer)

4 signals can be used as system timer.
The specifications of every signal are as following.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
R9091
always OFF
always ON
Cyclic signal of 200
ms (104 ms ON, 96
ms OFF)
Cyclic signal of 1 se-

cond. (504 ms ON,
496 ms OFF)
CAUTION
Each signal is initially off. R9091.0 and R9091.1 are set
cyclically at the beginning of the first ladder level.
Each signal (ON–OFF signal) has an accuracy of "8 ms.
166
R9091.5
104ms 96ms
200ms
R9091.6
504ms 496ms
1s
(5) Ladder execution start signal, ladder stop signal, ladder execution
state signal (PMC–SB7)
1 Ladder execution start signal and latter stop signal
With the ladder execution start signal or the ladder stop signal, the
start or stop of a ladder program can be known in the ladder
program.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
R9015
R9015.0: Ladder
execution start sig-
nal (reference only
from the ladder pro-
gram)
R9015.1: Ladder
execution start sig-
nal (reference only
from the ladder pro-
gram)
2 Ladder execution state signal

The state of ladder program execution or PMCC language program
execution can be known by referencing the ladder execution state
signal from an external system or program such as the network
board, C executor program, FOCAS1 Ethernet, and HSSB library.
167
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
R9015
R9091.2: Ladder execution

state signal
0: Ladder stopped
1: Ladder being executed
4.2.4
Execution Period of
PMC
For PMC–SA1
Sequence program
1st level
From NC (High–speed se-
(1) quence)
END1
2nd level
(Normal sequence)
(2)–1
Synchronized
buffer
(2)–2
Head of 2nd level

(2)–n
END2
3rd level
From MT (Display sequence)
(PMC–RC/RC3/
RC4 only)
8msec END3
Period
(1) (1) (1) (1)
1st level
(2)–1 (2)–2 (2)–n (2)–1
2nd level
3rd level
168
For PMC–SB7
CNC (F) 1st level
END1
2nd level
Synchronized
buffer
END2
3rd
END2level
END3
Machine (X)
From NC
Ladder execution time
1st level
Division 1 Division 2 Division n

2nd level
3rd level
8ms 8ms 8ms
The ratio of the 1st level execution time to the 2nd level execution time
is set in a system parameter for ladder execution time.
D For a ladder that uses the 1st level and the 2nd level only, set the upper
limit (150).
169
D For a ladder that uses the 3rd level, the setting of the upper limit (150)
may not ensure full 3rd level operation. In such a case, set this
parameter so that the processing times of the 1st level and 2nd level
are reduced.
The 1st ladder level or the 2nd ladder level processing time is determined
by the following expression:
The 1st ladder level or Ladder execution time
= 5msec
2nd ladder level processing time 100
The 3rd ladder level processing time is determined by the following

expression:
The 3rd ladder level processing time = 7.5 msec – (1st ladder level
and 2nd ladder level
processing times)
170
4.3
PMC SCREEN
4.3.1
PMC Menu Selection
Procedure Using the
Soft Keys
PMC–SA1 screen menu selection procedure
[PMC] [PMCLAD] Ladder diagram display screen

[PMCDGN] [TITLE] Title screen
[STATUS] Signal status screen
[ALARM] Alarm screen
[TRACE] Trace function
[IOCHK] I/O check screen
[PMCPRM] [TIMER] Timer screen
[COUNTR] Counter screen
[KEEPRL] Keep relay screen
[DATA] [G.DATA] Data table screen
[SETING] Setting screen
[RUN]/[STOP] Ladder start/stop
[EDIT] [TITLE] Title editing screen
[LADDER] Ladder diagram editing screen
[SYMBOL] Symbol/comment editing screen
[MESAGE] Message editing screen
[MODULE] I/O unit address setting screen
[CROSS] Cross reference screen
[CLEAR] Clear screen
[I/O] Program/parameter input/output screen
[SYSPRM] System parameter screen
[MONIT] [ONLINE] Online setting screen
171
4.3.2 Screen transitions are made as shown below.

Ladder Diagram
Display/Editing
(PMC–SB7)
PMC main menu
[<] [LADDER DIAGRAM]

Display
(NOTE 1)
Display function Program list
(monitor) display screen
[LIST] [ZOOM] [LIST] [ZOOM]
[SWITCH]
Ladder diagram Selection monitor
display screen screen
[SWITCH]
[<] [EDIT]
[LIST]
Program list
Ladder diagram editing screen
Editing function editing screen
[ZOOM], [<]
[<] [MODIFY], [ADD]
Net editing screen
NOTE
1 When you press the [LADDER DIAGRAM] soft key, the screen previously displayed among the
ladder diagram display screen, selection monitor screen, and program list display screen is
displayed. However, when you press the [LADDER DIAGRAM] soft key for the first time after
turning on the power, the program list display screen is displayed. If a ladder program is
replaced by using the input/output function, the program list display screen is first displayed.
For details, see the description of the program list display screen.
2 The [EDIT] soft key on the ladder diagram display screen is displayed only when the
programmer function is enabled. (To enable the programmer function, specify “YES” for the
setting item “Enable Programmer Function” on the PMC parameter setting screen, or set
K900.1 to 1.) Alternatively, specify “YES” for “Enable Editing” or set K901.6 to 1. While the
online monitor function is enabled, the screen display cannot be switched to the ladder diagram
editing screen. (To disable the online monitor function, set “Not Used” for “RS–232C” and
“High–speed Interface” on the online monitor setting screen.
4.3.2.1
Ladder diagram display D Display subprogram switching [LIST]
screen D Search for addresses [SEARCH]
D Function instruction data table display [TABLE]
172
D Transition to the selection monitor screen [SWITCH]

D Forced input/output function (FORCING mode)
“Number” + ENTER key
Screen manipulation
Soft keys on the ladder diagram display screen
Main soft keys on the ladder diagram display screen
Program list Ladder diagram editing Screen setting
Selection monitor
Data table display
Search soft key Re–search in forward direction

Right coil search Re–search in reverse direction
Start/end Search range switching

Reading into the selection monitor screen
Address/net number search
Function instruction search
(a) Manipulation using soft keys

1 [LIST] Calling the program list display screen
This soft key calls the program list display screen. The program
list display screen enables you to select a subprogram to be
displayed on the ladder diagram display screen.
2 [SEARCH] Search/jump menu
This soft key displays the soft keys for search. To return to the main
soft key display, use the return key [<].
The soft keys for search are described below.
D [TOPBTM] Start/end
This soft key makes a jump to the start of the ladder program.
If the start of the ladder program is already displayed, a jump
is made to the end of the ladder program.
173
D [SEARCH] Address/net number search

This soft key searches for the address or net number
corresponding to an entered character string, and displays the
address on the screen. Both a bit address and a byte address can
be searched for.
When a number is entered, it is assumed to be a net number, and
a jump is made.
When a character string other than numbers is entered, a check
is made to see if the character string is defined as a symbol. If
the character string is defined as a symbol, the address
represented by the symbol is searched for.
If the character string is not defined as a symbol, the character
string is interpreted as a character string representing an
address. If interpretation is performed normally, the address is
searched for.
If an address is searched for without displaying the cursor, the
screen display is moved so that the net including a found relay
is placed at the top of the screen. If an address is searched for
with the cursor displayed, the cursor directly moves to the found
relay.
D [W–SRCH] Right coil search
This soft key searches for the bit address represented by an
entered character string. A search is made only when the
address is used for a right coil. Even if the bit address is used
for an ordinary contact, the address is not searched for.
D [F–SRCH] Function instruction search
This soft key searches for a function instruction when a function
instruction number or function instruction name is entered.
D [PICKUP] Reading of a ladder net into the selection monitor
screen
This soft key reads a ladder net to be monitored into the
selection monitor screen.
D [PREV] Previous candidate
This soft key repeats the previously successful search operation
towards the start.
D [NEXT] Next candidate
This soft key repeats the previously successful search operation
towards the end.
D [GLOBAL]/[LOCAL] Range switching
This soft key switches the search target between the whole
ladder program (whole) and subprogram currently displayed
(local). This soft key is displayed only when a subprogram is
displayed. The current search range is displayed at the right end
of the information display line at the top of the screen.
3 [TABLE] Calling the function instruction data table display screen
This soft key displays the data table of a function instruction with
a data table such as the COD instruction (SUB7) or CODB
instruction (SUB27). This soft key is displayed only when the
cursor is placed on a function instruction with a data table.
174
4 [EDIT] Calling the ladder diagram editing screen

This soft key switches the screen display to the ladder diagram
editing screen. This soft key is displayed only when the
programmer function is enabled. While the online monitor
function is enabled, the screen display can be switched to the ladder
diagram editing screen. If a password is set for the ladder program,
the input of the password is requested. Enter the password required
for editing.
5 [SWITCH] Calling the selection monitor screen
This soft key displays the selection monitor screen.
6 [SETING] Screen setting
This soft key calls the setting screen for the ladder diagram display
screen. Various settings for ladder diagram display can be
modified. To return to the ladder diagram display screen, use the
return key [<]. For details of the setting screen, see “Screen setting”
in the description of the ladder diagram display screen.
4.3.2.2
Program list display Title information (details) Total number of programs
screen
Program subject to manipulation
Key input line
Message display line
List display area
Detail display screen
175
Title information (details) Total number of programs
Program subject to manipulation

List display area
Key input line
Additional information line
Simplified display screen
A choice between the detail display screen and simplified display screen
can be made on the setting screen.
Screen manipulation
Soft keys on the program list screen
Program search
Screen setting
Display of program contents

1 [ZOOM] Display of program contents
display screen. When you press the [ZOOM] soft key without
entering any character string, the program on which the cursor is
placed is displayed on the ladder diagram display screen. When
you press the [ZOOM] soft key after entering a program name
(reference: (c)<1>) or symbol name, the program corresponding to
the entered character string is searched for and displayed on the
ladder diagram display screen.
If the target program is protected so that it cannot be referenced, the
password needs to be released.
2 [SEARCH] Program search
This soft key searches for a program. When you press the
[SEARCH] soft key after entering a program name (reference:
(c)<1>) or symbol name, the program corresponding to the entered
character string is searched for, and the cursor moves to the
program.
176

This soft key calls the setting screen for the program list display
screen. Various settings for program list display can be modified.
To return to the program list display screen, use the return key [<].
For details of the setting screen, see “Screen setting” in the
description of the program list display screen.
4.3.2.3 On the selection monitor screen, only a ladder net including a coil to be
Selection monitor monitored can be specified for ladder net monitoring.
function (PMC–SB7)
Calling the screen The selection monitor screen can be called as described below.
1 Calling the screen from the program list display screen
On the program list screen, move the cursor to the “COLLECT”
program position, then press the [ZOOM] soft key.
Program list display screen

2 Calling the screen from the ladder diagram display screen
On the ladder diagram display screen, press the [SWITCH] soft key.
177
Ladder diagram display screen
Selection monitor screen The selection monitor screen is shown below. Initially, no ladder diagram
is displayed. Ladder nets selected by coil search and read operation are
added step by step. Finally, up to 128 nets can be added on the selection
monitor screen. If more than 128 nets are added, the latest 128 nets added
are displayed.
Selection monitor screen (initial screen)
178
Screen manipulation
Selection monitor screen Jump to a ladder diagram net

Program list screen Selection monitor screen initialization
Erasing one net

Setting for display
Reading a ladder diagram net
Switching to the ladder diagram display screen
Soft keys on the selection monitor screen

1 [LIST] Calling the program list display screen
This soft key calls the program list display screen. The program
list display screen enables you to select a subprogram to be
displayed on the ladder diagram display screen.
2 [PICKUP] Reading a ladder net
With this soft key, a ladder net including a coil to be monitored can
be read into the selection monitor screen.
3 [JUMP] Jump to a ladder net
This soft key searches the ladder diagram display screen for the
ladder net where the cursor is placed on the selection monitor
screen, and makes a jump to the net.
4 [SWITCH] Switching to the ladder diagram display screen
display screen.
5 [ERASE] Erasure of ladder diagram net display (one net)
This soft key erases the display of one ladder net read into the
6 [ERSALL] Erasure of ladder diagram net display (all nets)
This soft key erases the display of all ladder nets read into the
This soft key calls the setting screen for the selection monitor
screen. Various settings for ladder diagram display can be
modified. To return to the selection monitor screen, use the return
key [<].
D Specifying a ladder The methods described below are available to read a ladder net to be
diagram to be monitored monitored on the selection monitor screen.
1 Specifying a ladder net on the selection monitor screen
D Specification of an address
Key in the address used for a coil to read the net.
D Specification of a ladder net on the selection monitor screen
Specify a relay on an already read ladder net with the cursor, and
read the net where the relay address is used for a coil.
2 Specifying a ladder net on the ladder diagram display screen
Specify a net on the ladder diagram display screen to read the net
into the selection monitor screen.
179
D Reading a ladder net on A ladder net can be read from the selection monitor screen. Use the
the selection monitor procedure below to read a ladder net.
screen (a) Specification of an address
1 Enter an address to be monitored. (Example: R14.7)
2 Press the [PICKUP] soft key.
3 The net where the address specified in 1 above is used for a coil
is read into the start of the screen.
(b) Specification of an address from the ladder net on the screen
1 Move the cursor to the relay, in a ladder net, which uses an
address to be monitored.
2 Press the [PICKUP] soft key.
3 The net where the address specified in 1 above is used for a coil
is read into the start of the screen, and the cursor moves to the
coil position.
Selection monitor screen
D Reading a ladder net A ladder net can be read from the ladder diagram display screen. Use the
from the ladder diagram procedure below to read a ladder net.
display screen 1 On the ladder diagram display screen, press the [SEARCH] soft
key to display the soft keys for search.
2 Move the cursor to a ladder net to be read.
3 Press the [PICKUP] soft key to read the net specified in 2 above to
the start of the selection monitor screen.
4 The ladder net read into the selection monitor screen is marked with
F at the left end of the net.
180
Ladder diagram display screen (search soft keys)
4.3.2.4 On the ladder diagram editing screen, a ladder program can be edited, and
Ladder diagram editing its operation can be modified. To display the ladder diagram editing
screen, press the [EDIT] soft key on the ladder diagram display screen.
screen
On the ladder diagram editing screen, the following editing operations
can be performed on a ladder program:
D Net–by–net deletion [DELETE]
D Net–by–net movement [CUT] and [PASTE]
D Net–by–net copy [COPY] and [PASTE]
D Changing the address of a contact or coil
“Bit address” + INPUT key
D Modifying a function instruction parameter
“Numeric value/byte address” + INPUT key
D Adding a new net [CREATE]
D Modifying a net figure [MODIFY]
D Reflecting the results of editing [UPDATE]
D Restoring the pre–editing state [RESTOR]
181
Ladder diagram editing screen
CAUTION
1 A ladder can be edited, regardless of whether operation is
in progress or stopped. Before an edited ladder can be
executed, however, the ladder must be updated. Press the
[UPDATE] soft key or update the ladder when exiting from
the ladder diagram editing screen.
2 If the power is turned off without writing an edited sequence
program to the flash ROM, the results of editing are cleared.
On the input/output screen, write an edited sequence
program to the flash ROM. If you specify “YES” for the
setting item “Save after Edit” on the PMC parameter setting
screen or set K902#0 to 1, a message for confirming
whether to write an edited sequence program to the flash
ROM upon completion of editing is displayed.
182
Screen manipulation
Soft keys on the ladder diagram editing screen
Program list
Net selection Copy
Switching to search soft keys
Addition of a new net Cut Paste

Deletion
Modification of a net
Reflection of modifications
Screen setting
Sequence program start/stop

Discarding modifications
Soft keys on the ladder diagram editing screen

1 [LIST] Calling the program list editing screen
This soft key calls the program list editing screen. The program list
editing screen enables you to select a subprogram to be edited on
the ladder diagram editing screen.
2 [SEARCH] Search/jump menu
This soft key displays the soft keys for search. To return to the main
soft key display, use the return key [<]. The method of using the
soft keys for search is the same as for the ladder diagram display
screen.
3 [MODIFY] Calling the net editing screen
This soft key calls the net editing screen to modify the structure of
a selected net.
4 [CREATE] Creating a new net
This soft key adds a new net at the location where the cursor is
placed. The screen display switches to the net editing screen.
Create a net to be added.
5 [UPDATE] Reflecting modifications
This soft key reflects the results of editing in the ladder being
executed. When all modifications have been reflected normally,
the execution of the edited ladder starts.
WARNING
Use special care when modifying the ladder program being
executed. If the ladder program being executed is modified
incorrectly, the timing for reflecting modifications is
incorrect, or the machine state is improper, the machine
may operate unexpectedly. Before reflecting modifications,
be sure to check that the modifications are correct, that the
machine state is proper, and that there is no person near the
machine.
183
6 [SELECT] Selection of multiple nets

This soft key is used to specify multiple nets when editing such as
deletion, cut, or copy is performed. Determine the start point of a
selection range with the [SELECT] soft key, then specify the end
point of the selection range by moving the cursor or by using the
search function. After net selection, perform editing with editing
soft keys. While multiple nets are selected, the addition
information line displays information about the selection range.
7 [DELETE] Deleting a net
This soft key deletes selected a net. A net deleted with the
[DELETE] soft key is lost. If a net deleted by mistake with the
[DELETE] soft key needs to be restored, the entire ladder program
needs to be restored to the pre–editing state by using the
[RESTORE] soft key.
8 [CUT] Cutting a net
This soft key cuts a selected net. The cut contents are transferred
to the buffer for pasting, and are deleted from the ladder diagram.
The previous contents of the buffer are lost. When moving a net,
use this soft key together with the [PASTE] soft key.
9 [COPY] Copying a net
This soft key transfers a selected net to the buffer for pasting. No
change is made to the ladder diagram. The previous contents of the
buffer for pasting are lost. When copying a net, use this soft key
together with the [PASTE] soft key.
10 [PASTE] Pasting a net
This soft key inserts, at the cursor position, a net that has been
transferred to the buffer for pasting with the [CUT] soft key or the
[COPY] soft key. Press the [PASTE] soft key while a net is selected
with the [SELECT] soft key. The selected net is replaced with the
net held in the buffer for pasting. The contents of the buffer for
pasting are preserved until the power to the NC is turned off.
11 [RESTOR] Discarding modifications
This soft key discards the results of editing performed so far, and
restores the ladder present when the screen display switches to the
ladder diagram editing screen or the last update operation has been
completed. Use this soft key when restoration is difficult because
of incorrect editing.
This soft key calls the setting screen for the ladder diagram editing
screen. Various settings for ladder diagram editing can be
modified. To return to the ladder diagram editing screen, use the
return key [<].
13 [START]/[STOP] Starting and stopping a ladder
These soft keys control ladder program execution. The [START]
soft key starts the execution of a ladder program. The [STOP] soft
key stops the execution of a ladder program. When modifications
have been reflected normally, the execution of the edited ladder
starts.
184
WARNING
Use special care when starting/stopping a ladder program.
If a ladder program is started/stopped when the start/stop
timing is incorrect, or the machine state is improper, the
machine may operate unexpectedly. Moreover, when a
ladder program is stopped, the safety mechanism and
monitoring based on the ladder program are disabled.
When starting/stopping a ladder program, be sure to check
that the machine state is proper, and that there is no person
near the machine.
14 [<] Ending editing

This soft key reflects the modifications made so far in the ladder
being executed, and ends editing. When you press a function key
such as the SYSTEM key during ladder program editing, data
being edited is discarded.
WARNING
Use special care when modifying the ladder program being
executed. If the ladder program being executed is modified
incorrectly, the timing for reflecting modifications is
incorrect, or the machine state is improper, the machine
may operate unexpectedly. Before reflecting modifications,
be sure to check that the modifications are correct, that the
machine state is proper, and that there is no person near the
machine.
4.3.2.5 On the net editing screen, net editing operations such as the creation of
Net editing screen a new net and the modification of an existing net can be performed.
1 Modification to an existing net:
If the net editing screen is displayed with the [MODIFY] soft key,
the mode (modification mode) for modifying the net indicated by
the cursor is set.
2 Addition of a new net:
If the net editing screen is displayed with the [CREATE] soft key,
the mode (creation mode) for creating a new net from a free state
is set.
The net editing screen allows the following editing operations:
D Placing a new contact/coil
“Bit address” [ ],
[ ] and so forth
D Changing the type of a contact/coil
[ ], [ ]and so forth
D Placing a new function instruction [FUNC]
D Changing the type of a function instruction [FUNC]
185
D Deleting a contact/coil function instruction

[ ]
D Adding/deleting a connection line
[ ], [ ], [ ]
D Editing the function instruction data table [TABLE]
D Line/column insertion
[INSLIN], [INSCLM], [APPCLM]
D Changing the address of a contact or coil
“Bit address” + INPUT key
D Changing a function instruction parameter
“Numeric value/byte address” + INPUT key
D Discarding the contents of editing [RESTOR]
Display subprogram Net number being edited Editing mode
Ladder diagram display area

Cursor
Additional information line
Key input line

Screen manipulation
Soft keys on the net editing screen
Horizontal connection line
Contact A Positive coil Deletion To the next net
Contact B Reverse coil Left vertical connection line

Function instruction Right vertical connection line
Set coil Data table Column insertion
Reset coil Line insertion Column addition

Discarding of modifications
Soft keys on the net editing screen
186
4.3.2.6
Signal trace function
(PMC–SB7)
Signal trace screen The signal trace screen is displayed when you press the [TRACE] soft key
(initial screen) on the PMC diagnosis screen.
Signal trace screen (initial screen)
Trace parameter setting When you press the [SETING] soft key on the signal trace screen, the trace
screen parameter setting screen is displayed. The setting screen consists of
multiple pages. Use the page keys to switch between the pages.
Trace parameter setting screen (page 1)
187
(a) Sample/mode
Set a sampling mode.
D Period: A time period is used for sampling.
D Signal transition: A signal transition is used for sampling.
(b) Sampling/resolution
Set the resolution of sampling. The default is 8 ms.
The setting range is 8 ms to 1,000 ms.
An input value is rounded off to a multiple of 8 ms.
(c) Sampling/time
This item is displayed when “period” is selected for the sampling
mode. Set a desired sampling time.
The allowable input value depends on the setting of “resolution” and
the number of sampled signals. An allowable time range is indicated
at the right end.
(d) Sampling/frame
This item is displayed when “signal transition” is selected for the
sampling mode. Set a desired sampling count.
The allowable input value depends on the setting of “resolution” and
the number of sampled signals. An allowable time range is indicated
at the right end.
(e) Stop condition
Set a trace stop condition.
D None: Trace operation is not automatically stopped.
D Buffer full: Trace operation is stopped when the sampling buffer
is full.
D Trigger: Trace operation is stopped by a trigger.
(f) Stop condition/trigger/address
This item becomes settable when “trigger” is selected as the trace stop
condition. Set a trigger address for stopping trace operation.
(g) Stop condition/trigger/mode
condition. Set a trigger mode for stopping trace operation.
D Rising: Trace operation is automatically stopped on a rising
edge of the trigger signal.
D Falling: Trace operation is automatically stopped on a falling
edge of the trigger signal.
D Transition: Trace operation is automatically stopped when the
trigger signal makes a transition.
(h) Stop condition/trigger/position
condition. Set a position in the entire sampling time (or count) where
a stop trigger is initiated, by using a ratio to the sampling time (or
count). Set a proper value as required. For example, set a larger value
when checking the signal before the trigger condition, or set a smaller
value when checking the signal after the trigger condition.
Example: Graph display range when the sampling time is 10 seconds
and the sampling position is 10%
188
Trigger position
<– 1 second –><–––– 9 seconds ––––>
| | |
–1 0 9 (SEC)
(i) Sampling condition

This item becomes settable when “signal transition” is selected as the
trace stop condition. Set a condition for sampling.
D Trigger: Sampling is performed when a sampling trigger
condition is satisfied.
D Transition: Sampling is performed when the signal at the
sampling address makes a transition.
(j) Sampling condition/trigger/address
sampling mode and “trigger” is selected as the sampling condition.
Set a sampling trigger address.
(k) Sampling condition/trigger/mode
sampling mode and “trigger” is selected as the sampling condition.
Set a trigger condition mode.
D Rising: Sampling is performed on a rising edge of the trigger
signal.
D Falling: Sampling is performed on a falling edge of the trigger
signal.
D Transition: Sampling is performed when the trigger makes a
transition.
D On: Sampling is performed when the trigger signal is on.
D Off: Sampling is performed when the trigger signal is off.
189
Sampling address
setting (a) Address setting
On page 2 of the trace parameter setting screen, set the address of a
signal to be sampled.
Trace parameter setting screen (page 2)

Specify a bit address for a signal address. If a byte address is input,
bits 0 to 7 of the input address are input. Up to 32 signal address points
can be set.
NOTE
Depending on the number of points of signal addresses
subject to sampling and the sampling resolution, the
maximum allowable input value for the sampling time or
frame increases or decreases.
If the maximum allowable input value becomes smaller than
an existing sampling time or frame value, the message
below is displayed, and the setting is changed. (In the
messages below, xxx represents a maximum allowable
input value.)
a) When a sampling time is set
“The sampling time has decreased to xxx seconds.”
b) When a sampling frame is set
“The sampling frame has decreased to xxx seconds.”
190
Trace execution After trace parameter setting, press the [START] soft key on the trace
screen. Trace operation is started.
The screens below are examples of execution in the period mode and
signal transition mode.
Signal trace execution screen (time cycle mode)
Signal trace execution screen (signal transition mode)
During trace execution, the results of trace operation are displayed in

real–time mode. When the trace stop condition set in the trace parameter
setting screen is satisfied, trace execution stops. Pressing the [STOP] soft
key also stops trace execution. In the signal transition mode, sampling
is performed when a signal transition is made. So, trace display is not
updated until a trigger signal transition is made.
191
Checking trace results Upon completion of trace execution, trace results can be checked.
Signal trace result screen (time cycle mode)

(a) Automatic selection range calculation display
When you press the [MARK] soft key, the cursor position at that time
is marked, and a mark cursor is displayed. If the mark cursor and the
current position cursor are placed at the same position, the current
position cursor takes priority. At the top of the screen, a mark position
indicating the mark cursor position and range information indicating
the range from the mark cursor position to the current position cursor
are displayed. These values change as the current position cursor
move. To cancel the range selection, press the [MARK] soft key again.
Signal trace result screen (mark cursor display)
192
(b) Enlarged/reduced trace result data display

With the [Z.IN] or [Z.OUT] soft key, the graph can be enlarged or
reduced. This operation changes the scale value of one graph division.
Immediately after trace operation, the graph is enlarged to a maximum
extent. If reduced display disables ON/OFF changes from being
displayed precisely, “X” is used for graph display as shown below.
Reduced display is possible until all trace results are held on one page.
Signal trace result screen (reduced display)
193
4.3.3 Press soft key [PMCDGN] then PMC’s diagnostic screen is displayed.
PMCDGN Screen
D TITLE screen The title data registered when a ladder program is prepared is displayed.
Page number
PMC TITLE DATA #1 MONIT RUN

PMC PROGRAM NO. :
EDITION NO. :
PMC CONTROL PROGRAM
SERIES : 406G EDITION : 08
PMC TYPE CONTROL : SB7 PROGRAM : SB7
MEMORY USED : KB
LADDER : KB
SYMBOL : KB
MESSAGE : KB
SCAN TIME : MSEC
SCAN MAX : 016 MS MIN : 008 MS
TITLE STATUS ALARM TRACE
Other soft keys
M.SRCH ANALYS
ÄÄÄ
ÄÄ
ÄÄÄ
1st page PMC PROGRAM NO. : Set when PMC
ÄÄ ÄÄ
EDITION NO. : is
prepared
ÄÄ ÄÄ
PMC CONTROL PROGRAM
SERIES : EDITION : Series and edition of PMC
ÄÄ
control software
MEMORY USED : KB
LADDER
SYMBOL
MESSAGE
SCAN TIME
ÄÄ
:
ÄÄ
:
:
:
KB
KB
KB
MSEC
Memory used and
execution time is
displayed.
2nd page MACHINE TOOL BUILDER NAME :

MACHINE TOOL NAME :
CNC & PMC TYPE NAME :
PROGRAM DRAWING NO. : Set when PMC
is prepared.
3rd page DATE OF DRAWING :
PROGRAM DESIGNED BY :
ROM WRITTEN BY :
REMARKS :
194
D STATUS screen On/Off state of input/output signals and internal relay is displayed.
PMC SIGNAL STATUS MONIT RUN

ADDRESS 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
ED7 ED6 ED5 ED4 ED3 ED2 ED1 ED0 Signal
name
G0000 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0
ED15 ED14 ED13 ED12 ED11 ED10 ED9 ED8 Signal state
0:Off
G0001 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1:On
ESTB EA6 EA5 EA4 EA3 EA2 EA1 EA0
G0002 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Signal state
reverses for
G0003 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 signals with *.
FIN 0: On
G0004 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1: Off
SEARCH
[Search Method]
• Page key :Forward and Backward by screen
• Cursor key :Forward and Backward by diagnostic number
• To search a specified address or signal name, input an address number
or signal name and press [SEARCH].
D Alarm screen Displays an alarm generated in PMC.
PMC ALARM MESSAGE MONIT RUN

Alarm dis-
play
ER32 NO I/O DEVICE
For details
of alarms,
refer to
Appendix
A List of
Alarms.
ALM Blinked
TITLE STATUS ALARM TRACE
195
D TRACE screen Every time a specified signal changes, the signal status is memorized in
the trace memory. This function is useful for identifying intermittent
troubles.
1 Trace parameter screen
PMC SIGNAL TRACE MONIT RUN

TRACE MODE :
(0:1BYTE/1:2BYTE/2:WORD)
1STTRACE ADDRESS CONDITION
ADDRESS TYPE : (0:PMC/1:PHY)
ADDRESS :
MASK DATA :
2NDTRACE ADDRESS CONDITION
ADDRESS TYPE : (0:PMC/1:PHY)
ADDRESS :
MASK DATA :
T.DISP EXEC
Changes to a trace memory display screen (Screen on

the next page)
Select each item by cursor key
a. TRACE MODE: Select the trace mode

0=Records changes of 1–byte signals
1=Records changes of independent 2–byte signals
2=Records changes of consecutive 2–byte signals
b. ADDRESS TYPE:
0=PMC address is used for tracing address.
1=Physical address is used for tracing address.
(Mainly used for C–language program)
c. ADDRESS:Set a tracing address.
d. MASK DATA: The bits to be traced are specified by a hexadecimal
number (2 digits).
For example, to trace the signals at bit 7, 6, 5 and 0, set E1
(hexadecimal) to MASK DATA.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
E1% 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1
However, even if bit 4, 3, 2 and 1 changes, tracing (memory
registration) cannot be done but signal status is memorized when a
tracing is executed.
[Correspondence of binary and hexadecimal number]
00002 : 016 00012 : 116 00102 : 216 00112 : 316
01002 : 416 01012 : 516 01102 : 616 01112 : 716
10002 : 816 10012 : 916 10102 : A16 10112 : B16
11002 : C16 11012 : D16 11102 : E16 11112 : F16
196
2 Trace memory contents display screen
PMC SIGNAL TRACE MONIT RUN

1ST ADDRESS=X008(E1) 2ND ADDRESS=G000(FF) Trace
address
NO. 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 and mask
0000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . data(in pa-
rentheses)
0001 I * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
0002 I I * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
0003 * I * * * * * * * * * * * * * * Latest status
I mark : 1
0004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . * mark : 0
0005 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0006 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0007 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0008 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRCPRM STOP
a. Soft key [TRCPRM]:Return to the trace parameter setting screen

(screen of previous page)
b. Soft key [EXEC]: Starts tracing.
Trace memory is cleared and each time a
specified signal changes, its status is recorded.
Trace memory is 256 bytes and if tracing is
executed 128 times by 2–byte tracing, tracing
is executed again from the head of memory.
c. Soft key [STOP]: Ends the tracing.
*The tracing parameters are held even if the power is turned off.
#7 #6
ÀÀÀÀ #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
K017
ÀÀÀÀ
#5 0 : Tracing starts by [EXEC].
1 : Tracing starts automatically after power on
197
4.3.4
PMCPRM Screen
D Inputting PMC 1 Set to MDI mode or emergency stop state.

parameters from the MDI 2 Set PARAMETER WRITE (on setting screen) to 1 or set the program
protect signal (KEY4) to 1.
PWE KEY4
Timer f –
Counter f f Either one
Keep relay f –
Data table f f Either one
3 Press a soft key and select a required screen.

[TIMER] :Timer screen
[COUNTR] :Counter screen
[KEEPRL] :Keep relay screen
[DATA] :Data table screen
4 Press cursor key and move the cursor to a desired number.
5 Input a numeric key and press INPUT key and data is input.
6 After the data is input, set PARAMETER WRITE or KEY4 on setting
screen to 0.
D TIMER screen This screen is used for setting timer time of the functional instruction
(SUB 3).
Page no. (screen is scrolled by page key)
Timer no. specified by functional instruction
Address specified by ladder
PMC PARAMETER (TIMER) #001 MONIT RUN
NO.ADDRESS DATA NO.ADDRESS DATA

01 T00 480 11 T20 0 Timer
delay
02 T02 960 12 T22 0
time
03 T04 0 13 T24 0 (msec)
04 T06 0 14 T26 0
05 T08 0 15 T28 0
06 T10 0 16 T30 0
07 T12 0 17 T32 0
08 T14 0 18 T34 0
09 T16 0 19 T36 0
10 T18 0 20 T38 0
TIMER COUNTR KEEPRL DATA
Timer set time : Timer no. 1–8 is max. 1572.8 sec and its accuracy is
48ms.
Timer no. 9 is max. 262.1 sec and its accuracy is 8ms.
198
D COUNTER screen This screen sets and displays max. value of counter and current value of
the counter instruction (SUB 4).
Page no. (screen is scrolled by page key)
Max. value of counter (Minimum
value is specified by counter ins.)
Current value of counter
PMC PARAMETER (COUNTER)#001 MONIT RUN
NO. ADDRESS PRESET CURRENT

01 C00 100 1 PRESET
02 C04 50 2 and CUR-
03 C08 0 0 RENT
can be set
04 C12 0 0 up to
05 C16 0 0 9999, re-
06 C20 0 0 spectively.
07 C24 0 0
08 C28 0 0
09 C32 0 0
10 C36 0 0

Counter number specified by func-
tional instruction
D KEEP RELAY screen

PMC PARAMETER (KEEP REALAY) #001 MONIT RUN
NO.ADDRESS DATA NO.ADDRESS DATA

01 K00 00000000 11 K10 00000000
02 K01 00000000 12 K11 00000000
03 K02 00000000 13 K12 00000000
04 K03 00000000 14 K13 00000000
ÀÀÀÀ
05 K04 00000000 15 K14 00000000
06 K05 00000000 16 K15 00000000
07 K06 00000000 17 K16
ÀÀÀÀ00000000
ÀÀÀÀ
08 K07 00000000 18 K17 00000000
ÀÀÀÀ
09 K08 00000000 19 K18 00000000
10 K09 00000000 20 K19 00000000
ÀÀ

ÀÀ Used by PMC system
ÀÀÀÀÀÀ
1 Nonvolatile memory control
ÀÀÀÀÀÀ
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
K016
#7(MWRTF2) : For checking the writing status in nonvolatile memory

#6(MWRTF1) : Writing status in nonvolatile memory
199
D DATA TABLE screen 1 Data table setting screen

No. of screen
PMC DATA TBL CONTROL #001 MONIT RUN
GROUP TABLE COUNT = 2 No. of

data table
NO. ADDRESS PARAMETER TYPE NO.OF DATA groups
001 D0000 00000000 0 10
002 D0020 00000011 1 20
003
004 No. of
005 data table
Data length
006
Table
007 parameter
008 Data table
head ad-
dress
G.DATA G.CONT NO.SRH INIT
Group no. of
data table
a. Soft key [G.DATA] : Select data display screen of data table.

(Next screen)
b. NO. OF GROUPS [G.CONT]: Set the no. of groups of data table.
c. Group No. [NO.SRH]: Move the cursor to a specified group.
d. Soft key [INIT]: Initializes the setting of data table.
No. of groups is 1, ADDRESS is D0000, PARAMETER is 0000000,
TYPE is 0, NO. OF DATA is 1860.
This operation is done usually when a sequence program is prepared.
When PMC parameters are set, internal parameters are not affected.
PARAMETER
K019
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
#2
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
#1 #0
0 : Binary format
0 : Binary or BCD format 1 : BCD format
(When the bit 0 is enabled)
1 : HEX format 0 : Without protection for input
(When the bit 0 is disabled) 1 : With protection for input
TYPE
0 : 1–byte length 1 : 2–byte length 2 : 4–byte length
PAGE
e. Using the page key / PAGE

, next screen/previous screen can be
selected.
200
2 Data display screen

Group number
Page number
PMC PRM (DATA) 001/001 MONIT RUN

NO. ADDRESS DATA
000 D0000 0
001 D0001 0
002 D0002 0
003 D0003 0
004 D0004 0
005 D0005 0
006 D0006 0
007 D0007 0
008 D0008 0
009 D0009 0
C.DATA G–SRCH SEARCH
a. Soft key [C.DATA] : Returns to the data table setting screen. (Previous
screen)
b. Group No. [G–SRCH] : Head of the specified group is selected.
c. Address [SEARCH] : Searches an address in a group currently

selected.
4.3.5
Setting Screen
PMC–SB7 setting screen
201
D Trace function start (PMC–SB7:K906.5)

Manual (0): The trace function starts trace operation when the
[EXEC] soft key is pressed.
Automatic (1): The trace function starts sampling automatically after
the power is turned on.
D Enable editing (PMC–SB7:K901.6, PMC–SA1:K18.6)
No (0): The editing of a sequence program is disabled.
Yes (1): The editing of a sequence program is enabled.
D Save after editing (PMC–SB7:K902.0, PMC–SA1:K19.0)
No (0): After ladder editing, the F–ROM is not written to
automatically.
Yes (1): After ladder editing, the F–ROM is written to
automatically.
D Enable memory write (PMC–SB7:K900.4, PMC–SA1:K17.4)
No (0): The forcing function and the override function are
disabled.
Yes (1): The forcing function and the override function are
enabled.
D Data table GRP setting display (PMC–SB7:K900.7, PMC–SA1:K17.7)
Yes (0): The PMC parameter data table control screen is
displayed.
No (1): The PMC parameter data table control screen is not
displayed.
D Disable PMC program read (PMC–SB7:K900.0, PMC–SA1:K17.0)
No (0): The reading of a sequence program is enabled.
Yes (1): The reading of a sequence program is disabled.
D PMC program execution (PMC–SB7:K900.2, PMC–SA1:K17.2)
Automatic (0): After the power is turned on, a sequence program is
automatically executed.
Manual (1): A sequence program is executed by pressing the
sequence program execution soft key.
D Enable PMC stop (PMC–SB7:K902.2, PMC–SA1:K19.2)
No (0): The execution/stop operation of a sequence program
is disabled.
Yes (1): The execution/stop operation of a sequence program
is enabled.
D Enable the programmer function (PMC–SB7:K900.1, PMC–SA1:
K17.1)
No (0): The built–in programmer function is not operated.
Yes (1): The built–in programmer function is operated.
202
4.4
LIST OF SIGNALS BY
EACH MODE
D Automatic operation
MODE INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL FEED RATE,
ETC
EDIT [PMC ⇒ CNC]

KEY3(Program protect key)
[PMC ⇒ CNC) [PMC ⇒ CNC]

ST (Cycle start) *FV0 to 7
*SP (Feed hold) (Feed rate
SBK (Single block) override)
A
DRN (Dry run) *AFV0 to 7
U
BDT1 to 9 (Block delete) (2nd feed rate
T
MIα (Mirror image) override)
O
PN1 to 8 (External program no. search) OVC
M
MINP (External program input) (Override
A
DNCI (DNC input mode) cancel)
T
HSα1A to D (Handle interrupt axis select)
I ROV1,ROV2,
AFL (Auxiliary function neglect)
C HROV,
FIN, MFIN2, MFIN3
MEM *HROV0 to 6
(Auxiliary function complete)
O (Rapid
MDI MFIN, SFIN, TFIN, TFIN
P traverse
RMT (High–speed M/S/T function
E override)
complete)
R
A [CNC ⇒ PMC]
T STL (Cycle start LED)
I SPL (Feed hold LED)
O MF, M00 to M31
N MF2, M200 to M215 (Miscellaneous function)
MF3, M300 to M315
SF, S00 to S31 (Spindle speed function)
TF, T00 to T31 (Tool function)
BF, B00 to B31 (2nd miscellaneous func.)
DEN (Distribution end)
OP (Automatic operating)
203
D Manual operation
MODE INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL FEED RATE,
ETC
Handle/ [PMC ⇒ CNC] [PMC ⇒ CNC]

incremental HSnA to D(Axis selection) n:1 to 3(No. of MP1, MP2
M MPGs) (Multiplier)
A +α, –α (Jog feed)
N
JOG [PMC ⇒ CNC] [PMC ⇒ CNC]
U
RT (Rapid traverse) *JV0 to 15
A
(Manual
L
feedrate
[PMC ⇒ CNC] override)
O ZRN(Reference position return mode)
P +α, –α (Manu
E [MT ⇒ CNC] al feed move
R *DECα(Reference position deceleration) command)
Z
A R ROV1, ROV2
T HROV
N [CNC ⇒ PMC]
I *HROV0 to 6
ZPα
O (Rapid
ZP2α, ZP3α, ZP4α
N traverse
(Reference position return completion)
override)
D Others
[PMC ⇒ CNC]
MD1 to 4 (Mode selection)
*ESP (Emergency stop)
KEY1 to 4 (Memory protection key)
MLK,MLKα (All axes/ each axis machine lock)
*IT,*ITα (All axes/ each axis machine lock)
*"MITα (interlock per axis and direction)
*ABSM (Manual absolute)
SVFα (Servo off)
*FLWP (Follow up)
ERS (External reset)
RRW (Reset & Rewind)
Others EXLM (Stored stroke limit external switching)
"LMα, RLSOT (Software limit external setting)
*"Lα (Overtravel limit)
*"EDα (External deceleration of each axis)
[CMC ⇒ PMC]
MA (NC ready)
SA (Servo ready)
AL (NC alarm)
RST (Resetting)
BAL (Battery alarm)
INPα (In–position)
MVα (Axis moving)
204
D Laser oscillator
operation
[PMC³CNC]
RUN Oscillator start
CLRDY Chiller prepared completion
HVON Discharge start completion
AGRDY Assist gas prepared
AGST Assist gas start
SHTON Shutter open
*SHTLC Shutter lock
BEMON Beam on
*BEMLC Beam lock
POV0 to 7 Power override
*DU1 to 16 Pulse duty override
*FOV0 to 7 Pulse frequency override
*AOV0 to 7 Assist gas presure override
PTS Piercing time shortening
PTE Piercing time extension
SCLON Guide light on
PWCTL Power control mode
BCAN Gas cylinder replace
LCAN Leak check start
Laser oscillator
operation [CNC³PMC]
AGSLT Assist gas selection in progress signal
LPRC Laser machining in progress signal
PIRC Piercing in progress signal
PURGE Purge completion
WAIT Oscillator starting
CLON Chiller start request
LRDY Discharge start prepared completion
RFHV Base discharge starting
LSTR Oscillating
AG1, AG2, AG3 Assist gas selection
WKP Process pressure busy
SHTONL Shutter on state
SHTOFL Shutter off state
BEAM Beam outputing
CW, PULSE Mode state output
MWRN Laser power alarm
LARM Laser alarm
PCMD Power control mode in progress
LONC Laser oscillator unconnection
205
D Laser relation
Laser relation [PMC³CNC]
LRCS Constant optical path length control
start signal
GAPG0 to GAPG2 Tracing gain override signal
TBES Teaching box exclusive use signal
RVSLSR Machining resume signal
*TRIL Tracing axis interlock signal
TRMLK Tracing axis machine lock
ZTRM Tracing axis selection
ZAPR Approach feed
TCST Tracing start
TRCKM Tracing check mode
REST2 Program restart
ALNAXS Manual point fxing operation mode
HNDCD Hand coordinate mode
NRSH Proximity point search busy
[CNC³PMC]
TRCL Tracing operation
TRALM Tracing alarm
TRERS Tracing impossible start
LNSR Proximity point search
LCIN Constant optical path length control in
progress signal
CSTP Constant optical path length control
stop request signal
RVSAPV Reverse process finish signal
RVSSKE Skip finish signal
RVSERR Continuous machining disable signal
RVSG08 Advance preview control resume signal
206
B–63665EN/01 5. DIGITAL SERVO
5 DIGITAL SERVO
This chapter describes servo tuning screen required for maintenance of

digital servo and adjustment of reference position.
5.1 INITIAL SETTING SERVO PARAMETERS . . . . . . 208

5.2 SERVO TUNING SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
5.3 ADJUSTING REFERENCE POSITION
(DOG METHOD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
5.4 DOGLESS REFERENCE POSITION SETTING . . . 224
207
5. DIGITAL SERVO B–63665EN/01
5.1 This section describes how to set initial servo parameters, which is used
for field adjustment of machine tool.
INITIAL SETTING
1. Turn on power at the emergency stop condition.
SERVO
2. Set the parameter to display the servo tuning screen.
PARAMETERS
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3111 SVS
#0 (SVS) 0 : Servo tuning screen is not displayed.

1 : Servo tuning screen is displayed.
3. Turn off the power once then turn it on again.

4. Display the servo parameter setting screen by the following
operation: SYSTEM key [SV.PARA].
5. Input data required for initial setting using the cursor and page key.
SERVO SETTING
X AXIS Y AXIS
(1)INITIAL SET BIT 00000000 00000000 PRM2000
(2)MOTOR ID NO. 47 47 PRM2020
(3)amr 00000000 00000000 PRM2001
(4)cmr 2 2 PRM1820
(5)FEED GEAR N 1 1 PRM2084
(6) (N/M) M 125 125 PRM2085
(7)DIRECTION SET 111 111 PRM2022
(8)VELOCITY PULSE NO. 8192 8192 PRM2023
(9)POSITION PULSE NO. 12500 12500 PRM2024
(10)REF.COUNTER 8000 8000 PRM1821
(1) Initial set bit

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
2000 PRMCAL DGPRM PLC01
#3 (PRMCAL) 1 : Turns to 1 when the initial setting is done.

The following parameters are set automatically in accordance with the
no. of pulses of pulse coder:
PRM 2043(PK1V), PRM 2044(PK2V), PRM 2047(POA1),
PRM 2053(PPMAX),PRM 2054(PDDP),
PRM 2056(EMFCMP),
PRM 2057(PVPA), PRM 2059(EMFBAS),
PRM 2074(AALPH),PRM 2076(WKAC)
#1 (DGPRM)l 0 : Initial setting of digital servo parameter is done.
1 : Initial setting of digital servo parameter is not done.
#0 (PLC01) 0 : Values of parameter 2023 and 2024 are used as they are:
1 : Values of parameter 2023 and 2024 are multiplied by 10.
208
(2) Motor number

For a series servo motor
Model name a 0.5 a 1/3000 a 2/2000 a 2.5/3000 a 3/3000
Drawing 0113 0371 0372 0374 0123
number
Format number 13 61 46 84 15
Model name a 6/2000 a 6/3000 a 12/2000 a 12/3000 a 22/1500

Drawing 0127 0128 0142 0143 0146
number
Model name a 22/2000 a 22/3000 a 30/1200 a 30/2000 a 30/3000

Drawing 0147 0148 0151 0152 0153
number
Model name a 40/FAN a 40/2000 a 65 a 100 a 150

Drawing 0158 0157 0331 0332 0333
number
For a L series servo motor

Model name a L3/3000 a L6/2000 a L9/3000 a L25/3000 a L50/2000
Drawing 0561 0562 0564 0571 0572
number
Format number 56 or 68 57 or 69 58 or 70 59 60
For a C series servo motor

Model name a C3/2000 a C6/2000 a C12/2000 a C22/1500
Drawing 0121 0126 0141 0145
number
Format number 7 8 9 10
For a HV series servo motor

Model name a 12HV a 22HV a 30HV
Drawing 0176 0177 0178
number
Format number 3 4 5
For a E and b series servo motor

Model name a 0.5 b 1/3000 b 2/3000 b 3/3000 b 6/2000
a E1/3000 a E2/3000 a E3/3000 a E6/2000
Drawing 0113 0101 0102 0105 0106
number
209
For a M series servo motor

Model name a M2/3000 a M2.5/3000 a M3/3000 a M6/3000
Drawing 0376 0377 0161 0162
number
Model name a M9/3000 a M22/3000 a M30/3000 a M50/3000

Drawing 0163 0165 0166 0169
number
Model name a M6HV a M9HV a M22HV a M30HV

Drawing 0182 0183 0185 0186
number
For linear motor

Model name 1500A 3000B 6000B 9000B
Drawing 0410 0411 0412 0413
number
(3) Arbitrary AMR function (for 5–0S to 3–0S)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
PRM 2001 AMR7 AMR6 AMR5 AMR4 AMR3 AMR2 AMR1 AMR0 For each axis
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Motor model
1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 5–0S
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 4–0S, 3–0S
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 other than above
NOTE
Set “00000000” for serial pulse coder C.
(4) CMR
PRM 1820 Command multiply ratio
1) When CMR is 1/2 to 1/27 Set value= 1 +100

CMR
2) When CMR is 0.5 to 48 Set value=2×CMR
(5) Turn off the power then back on.
210
(6) Feed gear N/M

PRM 2084 n for flexible feed gear
PRM 2085 m for flexible feed gear
1) For serial pulse coder A or B, and serial a pulse coder.
n Number of feedback pulses per revolution of motor

=
m 1000000
NOTE
For serial pulse coder B, use a value not exceeding 250,000
as the number of feedback pulses per revolution.
<<Examples of calculation>>
1/1000 mm 1/10000 mm
One revolution 8mm n=1/m=125 n=2/m=25
of motor 10mm n=1/m=100 n=1/m=10
12mm n=3/m=250 n=3/m=25
(7) Direction of travel

PRM 2022 Rotational direction of motor
111 : Normal (clockwise) –111 : Reverse (counterclockwise)
(8) Number of velocity pulses and position pulses

1) For serial pulse coder A or B, or serial a pulse coder
Increment system : 1/1000mm Increment system : 1/10000mm
Paramter No.
Closed loop Semi–closed loop Closed loop Semi–closed loop
High resolution setting 2000 xxxx xxx 0 xxxx xxx 1
Separate detector 1815 0010 0010 0010 0000 0010 0010 0010 0000
No. of velocity feedback pulses 2023 8192 819
No. of position feedback pulses 2024 NS 12500 NS/10 1250
NOTE
1 NS is the number of position feedback pulses per one
revolution of the motor (multiplied by four)
2 The 5–0S to 3–0S motors have different numbers of poles.
Set parameter 2001.
3 Even if the system employs a closed loop, bit 3 of parameter
2002 is 1 and bit 4 is 0.
(9) Reference counter

PRM 1821 Reference counter capacity for each axis (0 – 99999999)
6. Turn off the power then back on.
211
(10) FSSB display and setting screen

Connecting the CNC control unit to servo amplifiers via a high–speed
serial bus (FANUC Serial Servo Bus, or FSSB), which uses only one
fiber optics cable, can significantly reduce the amount of cabling in
machine tool electrical sections.
Axis settings are calculated automatically according to the
interrelationships between axes and amplifiers entered on the FSSB
setting screen. Parameter Nos. 1023, 1905, 1910 to 1919, 1936, and
1937 are specified automatically according to the results of the
calculation.
D Display The FSSB setting screen displays FSSB–based amplifier and axis
information. This information can also be specified by the operator.
1. Press function key SYSTEM

.
2. To display [FSSB], press continuous menu key several times.

3. Pressing soft key [FSSB] causes the AMP SET screen (or the
previously selected FSSB setting screen) to appear, with the following
soft keys displayed.
AMP AXIS MAINTE (OPRT)
The FSSB setting screens include: AMP SET, AXIS SET, and AMP
MAINTENANCE.
Pressing soft key [AMP] causes the AMP SET screen to appear.
Pressing soft key [AXIS] causes the AXIS SET screen to appear.
Pressing soft key [MAINTE] causes the AMP MAINTENANCE
screen to appear.
1) Amplifier setting screen
The amplifier setting screen consists of two sections: the first section
displays information about the slave, while the second section
displays information about the pulse modules.
AMPLIFIER SETTING O1000 N00001

NO. AMP SERIES UNIT CUR. AXIS NAME
1 A1–L α SVM–HV 40AL 1 X
2 A1–M α SVM 12A 2 Y
3 A2–L β SVM 40A 3 Z
4 A3–L α SVM 20A 4 A
5 A3–M α SVM 40A 5 B
7 A4–L α SVU 240A 6 C
NO. EXTRA TYPE PCB ID

6 M1 A 0000 DETECTOR(8AXES)
8 M2 B 12AB
>_
MDI **** *** *** 13:11:56
[ AMP ][ AXIS ][ MAINTE ][ ][(OPRT)]
212
The amplifier setting screen consists of the following items:

D NO. (slave number)
The numbers of up to ten slaves (up to eight amplifiers and up to two
pulse modules) connected via the FSSB are displayed sequentially,
with the one nearest to the CNC being number 1.
D AMP (amplifier type)
The amplifier type display consists of the letter A, which stands for
“amplifier,” a number that indicates the placing of the amplifier, as
counted from that nearest to the CNC, and a letter such as L (first axis)
or M (second axis) indicating the placing of the axis in the amplifier.
D AXIS NO. (controlled axis number)
The axis number of each controlled axis specified in parameters (Nos.
1920 to 1929) is displayed. If a number specified in these parameters
falls outside the range of between 1 and the maximum number of
controlled axes, 0 is displayed.
D NAME (controlled axis name)
The axis name assigned to a parameter (No. 1020) corresponding to
a particular controlled axis number is displayed. If the controlled axis
number is 0, – is displayed.
D The following items are displayed as amplifier information:
⋅ UNIT (servo amplifier unit type)
⋅ SERIES (servo amplifier series)
⋅ CURRENT (maximum rating)
D The following items are displayed as pulse module information:
⋅ SEPARATE
This display consists of the letter M, which stands for “pulse
module” and a number indicating the placing of the pulse module,
as counted from that nearest to the CNC.
⋅ TYPE
This display is a letter indicating the type of the pulse module.
⋅ PCB ID
This display consists of four digits indicating the pulse module ID
(hexadecimal). The pulse module ID is followed by DETECTOR
(8 AXES) for the eight–axis separate detector module or
DETECTOR (4 AXES) for the four–axis separate detector module.
213
2) Axis setting screen

The axis setting screen displays the information shown below:
AXIS SETTING O1000 N00001

AXIS NAME AMP M1 M2 1–DSF Cs TNDM
1 X A1–L 0 0 0 0 1
2 Y A1–M 1 0 1 0 0
3 Z A2–L 0 0 0 1 0
4 A A3–L 0 0 0 0 2
5 B A3–M 0 0 0 0 0
6 C A4–L 0 0 0 0 0
>_
MDI **** *** *** 13:11:56
[ AMP ][ AXIS ][ MAINTE ][ ][(OPRT)]
This axis setting screen displays the following items:

This item is the placing of the NC controlled axis.
D AMP (type of the amplifier connected to each axis)
D M1 (connector number for pulse module 1)
This item is the number of the connector for pulse module 1, specified
in parameter No. 1931.
This item is the number of the connector for pulse module 2, specified
D TWO AXES
This item is the value specified in bit 0 (parameter 1 DSP) of parameter
No. 1904. It is 1 for an axis (such as a learning control axis, high–speed
current loop axis, or high–speed interface axis) that exclusively uses
a DSP, which is usually shared by two axes.
D TANDEM
This item is the number specified in parameter No. 1934. Consecutive
odd and even numbers are displayed for the master and slave axes for
tandem control.
214
3) Amplifier maintenance screen

The amplifier maintenance screen displays maintenance information
for servo amplifiers. This screen consists of the following two pages,
either of which can be selected by pressing the or key.
AMPLIFIER MAINTENANCE O1000 N00001

AXIS NAME AMP SERIES UNIT AXES CUR.
1 X A1–L α SVM–HV 2 40AL
2 Y A1–M α SVM 2 12A
3 Z A2–L β SVM 1 40A
4 A A3–L α SVM 2 20A
5 B A3–M α SVM 2 40A
6 C A4–L α SVU 1 240A
MDI **** *** *** 13:11:56

[ AMP ][ AXIS ][ MAINTE ][ ][ ]
AMPLIFIER MAINTENANCE O1000 N00001

AXIS NAME EDITION TEST MAINTE–NO.
1 X 01A 970123 01
2 Y 01A 970123 01
3 Z 01A 970123 01
4 A 02B 970123 01
5 B 02B 970123 01
6 C 02B 970123 01
MDI **** *** *** 13:11:56

[ AMP ][ AXIS ][ MAINTE ][ ][ ]
The amplifier maintenance screen displays the following items:

D AMP (type of amplifier connected to each axis)
D SERIES (servo amplifier series of an amplifier connected to each axis)
D UNIT (unit type of a servo amplifier connected to each axis)
D NO. OF AXES (maximum number of axes controlled by an amplifier
connected to each axis)
D CURRENT (maximum rating for amplifiers connected to each axis)
D VERSION (unit version number of an amplifier connected to each
axis)
D TEST DATE (date of test performed on an amplifier connected to each
axis)
Example) 970123 = January 23, 1997
215
D MAINTENANCE NO. (engineering change number for an amplifier

connected to each axis)
D Setting On an FSSB setting screen (other than the amplifier maintenance screen),
pressing soft key [(OPRT)] displays the following soft keys:
SET READ INPUT
To enter data, place the machine in MDI mode or the emergency stop state,
position the cursor to the point where a desired item is to be input, then
enter the desired data and press soft key [INPUT] (or the INPUT key on the
MDI panel).
When soft key [SET] is pressed after data has been entered, a warning
message is displayed if the entered data contains an error. When the data
is satisfactory, the corresponding parameter is set up.
To restore the previous value of a parameter if, for example, an entered
value is incorrect, press soft key [READ].
When the power is turned on, values are read from the parameters and
displayed on the screen.
CAUTION
1 For the parameters to be specified on the FSSB setting
screen, do not attempt to enter values on the parameter
screen using the MDI or a G10 command. Use only the
FSSB screen to enter values for these parameters.
2 If pressing soft key [SET] results in a warning message
being displayed, retry data entry, or press soft key [READ]
to clear the warning message. Note that pressing the reset
key does not clear the warning message.
1) Amplifier setting screen
AMPLIFIER SETTING O1000 N00001

NO. AMP SERIES UNIT CUR. AXIS NAME
7 A4–L α SVU 240A 6 C

8 M2 B 12AB
>_
MDI **** *** *** 13:11:56
[SETTING][ ][ READ ][ ][ INPUT ]
216
The amplifier setting screen displays the following items:

For this item, enter a value of between 1 and the maximum number of
controlled axes. If a number that falls outside this range is entered, the
warning message “INVALID FORMAT” appears. If the entered
controlled axis number is duplicate or 0, the warning message
“SPECIFIED DATA IS OUT OF RANGE” appears when soft key
[SET] is pressed to assert the entered value. In this case, no value can
be entered for the parameter.
2) Axis setting screen
AXIS SETTING O1000 N00001

AXIS NAME AMP M1 M2 1–DSF Cs TNDM
1 X A1–L 0 0 0 0 1
2 Y A1–M 1 0 1 0 0
3 Z A2–L 0 0 0 1 0
4 A A3–L 0 0 0 0 2
5 B A3–M 0 0 0 0 0
6 C A4–L 0 0 0 0 0
>_
MDI **** *** *** 13:11:56
[SETTING][ ][ READ ][ ][ INPUT ]
On the axis setting screen, the following items can be specified:

For an axis that uses pulse module 1, enter a connector number using
a number in the range of between 1 and the maximum number of axes
for pulse module 1. When pulse module 1 need not be used, enter 0.
If a number that falls outside the valid range is entered, the warning
message “INVALID FORMAT” is displayed.
For an axis that uses pulse module 2, enter a connector number using
a number in the range of between 1 and the maximum number of axes
for pulse module 2. When pulse module 2 need not be used, enter 0.
If a number that falls outside the valid range is entered, the warning
message “INVALID FORMAT” is displayed.
D TWO AXES
Enter 1 for the following axes, each of which exclusively uses a DSP,
which is usually shared by two axes. If a number other than 0 or 1 is
entered, the warning message “INVALID FORMAT” is displayed.
⋅ Learning control axis
⋅ High–speed current loop axis
⋅ High–speed interface axis
217
D TANDEM
Enter odd and even numbers for the master and slave axes for tandem
control. These numbers must be consecutive and in the range of
between 1 and 8. If a number that falls outside the valid range is
entered, the warning message “INVALID FORMAT” is displayed.
When soft key [SET] is pressed on the axis setting screen after data entry,
the warning message “SPECIFIED DATA IS OUT OF RANGE” is
displayed if any of the following conditions is satisfied.
D Both M1 and M2 are nonzero for an axis.
D Any two of TWO AXES, Cs, and TANDEM are nonzero for an axis.
D A duplicate value is specified for M1.
D A duplicate value is specified for M2.
D A duplicate value is specified for Cs.
D A duplicate value is specified for TANDEM.
D An invalid master/slave axis pair is specified for TANDEM.
218
5.2
SERVO TUNING
SCREEN
5.2.1 Set a parameter to display the servo tuning screen.
Parameter Setting
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3111 SVS
#0 (SVS) 0 : Servo tuning screen is not displayed.

1 : Servo tuning screen is displayed.
5.2.2 1. Press SYSTEM key and soft key [SV. PARA] in this order.
Displaying Servo
2. Press soft key [SV.TUN] to select the servo tuning screen.
Tuning Screen
SERVO TUNING 01234 N12345
(PAMAMETER) (MONITOR)
(1) FUN.BIT 00000000 ALARM 1 00000000 (9)
(2) LOOP GAIN 3000 ALARM 2 00000000 (10)
(3) TURNING SET. 0 ALARM 3 10000000 (11)
(4) SET PERIOD 50 ALARM 4 00000000 (12)
(5) INT.GAIN 113 ALARM 5 00000000 (13)
(6) PROP.GAIN –1015 LOOP GAIN 2999 (14)
(7) FILER 0 POS ERROR 556 (15)
(8) VELOC.GAIN 125 CURRENT% 10 (16)
SPEED RPM 100 (17)
SV SET SV TUN OPE
(1) Function bit : PRM 2003

(2) Loop gain : PRM 1825
(3) Tuning start : (Used by automatic servo tuning function)
(4) Set period : (Used by automatic servo tuning function)
(5) Integral gain : PRM 2043
(6) Proportional gain : PRM 2044
(7) Filter : PRM 2067
(PRM 2021)+256
(8) Velocity gain Set value= ×100
256
(9) Alarm 1 : DGN 200 (Details of alarm 400 and 414)

(10) Alarm 2 : DGN 201 (Details of disconnection alarm, overload)
(11) Alarm 3 : DGN 202 (Details of alarm 319)
(14) Loop gain : Actual loop gain
(15) Position error : Actual position error(DGN 300)
(16) Current(%) : Indicate current with % to the rated value.
(17) Speed RPM : Number of motor actual rotation
219
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Alarm1 OVL LV OVC HCA HVA DCA FBA OFA
DGN (200) :
#7 (OVL) : Overload alarm
#6 (LV) : Insufficient voltage alarm
#5 (OVC) : Overcurrent alarm
#4 (HCA) : Abnormal current alarm
#3 (HVA) : Excessive voltage alarm
#2 (DCA) : Discharge alarm
#1 (FBA) : Disconnection alarm
#0 (OFA) : Overflow alarm
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Alarm2 ALD EXP
DGN (201) ⇓ ⇓
Overload 0 — — — Amplifier overheat
alarm
1 — — — Motor overheat
Disconnection 1 — — 0 Built–in pulse coder disconnection (Hardware)
alarm
1 — — 1 Separate type pulse coder disconnection
(Hardware)
0 — — 0 Pulse coder disconnection (software)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Alarm3 CSA BLA PHA RCA BZA CKA SPH
DGN (202) :
#6 (CSA) : Hardware of serial pulse coder is abnormal.
#5 (BLA) : Battery voltage is in low (warning).
#4 (PHA) : Serial pulse coder or feedback cable is abnormal.
Counting the feedback signal is in error.
#3 (RCA) : Serial pulse coder is faulty.
Counting is in error.
If the RCA bit is set to 1 when both the FBA bit (bit 1 of alarm 1) and ALD
bit of alarm 2 are set to 1 and the EXP bit of alarm 2 (internal hardware
disconnection) is set to 1, a count miss alarm (CMAL) occurs in the α
pulse coder.
#2 (BZA) : Battery voltage becomes 0.
Replace batteries and set the reference position.
#1 (CKA) : Serial pulse coder is faulty.
Internal block has stopped.
#0 (SPH) : Serial pulse coder or feedback cable is faulty.
Counting the feedback signal is in error.
220
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Alarm4 DTE CRC STB PRM
DGN (203) :
#7 (DTE) : Communication error of serial pulse coder.
There is no response.
#6 (CRC) : Communication error of serial pulse coder.
Transmitted data is in error.
#5 (STB) : Communication error of serial pulse coder.
Transmitted data is in error.
#4 (PRM) : An invalid parameter is detected on the digital servo side.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Alarm3 OFS MCC LDM PMS
DGN (204) :
#6 (OFS) : A/D conversion of current value of digital servo is abnormal.
#5 (MCC) : Contacts of electro–magnetic contactor of servo amplifier is blown
#4 (LDM) : LED of serial pulse coder is abnormal.
#3 (PMS) : No. of feedback pulses are in error because serial pulse coder C or
feedback cable is faulty.
221
5.3
ADJUSTING
REFERENCE
POSITION
(DOG METHOD)
5.3.1
General
Speed
Rapid traverse
(PRM1420α)
FL rate
(PRM1425 α )
Time
Rapid traverse acc./dec. time constant (PRM1620 α )
*DECα
PCZ
Grid
Grid shift amount

Reference counter capacity
(PRM1850)
(PRM1821)
10mm/rev
10000P +
Error Proportion Speed M
CMR f gain
Command counter loop
–
4 (Serial)
Refere
GRID count. FFG PC
10000P/rev
Counter capacity
(Flexible feed gear)
10000P
D Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
PRM 1002 DLZ
#1(DLZ)l 0 : Reference position return method is normal (dog).

1 : Dogless reference position setting is used.
PRM 1821 Reference counter capacity [P]
No. of feedback pulses or its division by an integer is set.
222
PRM 1850 Grid shift amount per axis [P]
When the resolution is 0.0001mm, set the value in the unit ten times the
detection unit.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
PRM 1815 APC APZ OPT
#5(APC) 0 : Position detector is other than absolute pulse coder.

1 : Position detector is absolute pulse coder.
#4(APZ) Zero position of absolute pulse coder is :
0 : Not established
1 : Established
(Turns to 1 after establishment)
To manually change the value of the APZ bit from 0 to 1 without first
returning to the reference position
when using serial pulse coder α , follow this procedure: Back up the
data with the battery and give the motor one or more turns.
Turn the power off then on again, then change the APZ bit setting
from 0 to 1.
#1(OPT) 0 : Position detection is performed by the pulse coder built in the motor.
1 : Separate type pulse coder or linear scale is used.
D Separate Type Pulse

Coder or Linear Scale is
Used
PRM 1821 Reference counter capacity per axis [P]
Normally, the number of feedback pulses per motor revolution is set to

the reference counter capacity.
When plural reference marks are on a linear scale, a quotient of the
distance between the reference marks divided by an interfer may be used
as a reference counter capacity:
Example)
(1µ m)
300mm ⇒ reference counter 30000
20000
15000
10000 etc
223
5.4 When there are no dog nor limit switch for reference position return, this
function enables the tool to return the reference position that is set by
DOGLESS MTB.
REFERENCE When the absolute position detector is used, the reference position once
POSITION SETTING set remains also during power off. When the absolute detector is replaced
or absolute position is lost, perform this setting.
5.4.1
General
Speed
Reference position return

FL rate (PRM 1425)
Time
JOG
ZRN
+Jα
GRID ...............................
ZP α
5.4.2 1 Move the tool near the reference position using a manual operation.
Operation 2 Select the reference position return mode or switch.
3 Press a button for an axis–and–direction–select–signal + or –, and the
machine moves to the next grid, then stops.
(This position is set as the reference position).
* After the reference position has been set, select the reference
position return mode (ZRN signal is 1) and turn on an axis–
and–direction–select signal, then the tool returns to the reference
position.
224
5.4.3
Associated Parameters
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
PRM 1002 DLZ
#1(DLZ) 0 : Dog is used for reference position return

1 : Dogless reference position setting
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
PRM 1006 ZMI
#5(ZMI) 0 : Reference position return and backlash initial direction is +.

1 : Reference position return and backlash initial direction is –.
* After ZRN signal becomes 1, manual feed direction is always the
direction set by this parameter irrespective of an axis selection signal.
225
6. EMBEDDED ETHERNET B–63665EN/01
6 EMBEDDED ETHERNET
6.1 SETTING THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET

FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
6.2 SWITCHING BETWEEN THE EMBEDDED
ETHERNET DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
6.3 EMBEDDED ETHERNET ERROR MESSAGE
SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
6.4 EMBEDDED ETHERNET MAINTENANCE
SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
6.5 TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
6.6 ERROR MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
226
B–63665EN/01 6. EMBEDDED ETHERNET
This chapter explains how to set the embedded Ethernet function for
Series 16i–B.
The embedded Ethernet function can be used by selecting one of two

types of devices: the embedded Ethernet port and PCMCIA Ethernet
card.
The PCMCIA Ethernet card is to be inserted into the memory card slot
to the left of the front LCD for temporary communication.
NOTE
1 Use the PCMCIA Ethernet card for temporary
communication only. Do not use the PCMCIA Ethernet card
for routine communication.
2 The PCMCIA Ethernet card is to be inserted into the
memory card slot to the left of the LCD. This means that
some part of the card is projected. When using the PCMCIA
Ethernet card, be careful not to damage the card by hitting
the card with an object.
After using the PCMCIA Ethernet card, remove the card
immediately to prevent the card from being damaged.
227
6.1 This section describes the setting of the parameters for the embedded
Ethernet function for Series 16i–B.
SETTING THE
EMBEDDED
ETHERNET
FUNCTION
6.1.1 This subsection describes the settings required to operate the

FOCAS1/Ethernet function (or DNC1/Ethernet function) when the
Parameter Setting of
embedded Ethernet function for Series 16i–B is used.
the FOCAS1/Ethernet
Function
6.1.1.1
Notes on using the
FOCAS1/Ethernet
function for the first time CAUTION
When using the embedded Ethernet function for the first
time, make IP address settings and other settings carefully,
and conduct a communication test sufficiently, consulting
with your network manager.
Note that if an incorrect IP address is set, for example, the
entire network can suffer from a communication error. So
special care should be taken.
CAUTION
1 The FOCAS1/Ethernet function allows up to five
FOCAS1/Ethernet clients to be connected to one CNC.
2 If multiple application programs or multiple personal
computers access the CNC simultaneously, the
communication load on the CNC can increase, resulting in
decreased communication speed and degraded CNC
screen display processing.
228
6.1.1.2 On the Ethernet parameter setting screen, set the parameters for operating
FOCAS1/Ethernet the FOCAS1/Ethernet function.
parameter setting screen
Display
Procedure 1 Place the CNC in the MDI mode.
2 Press the SYSTEM

function key.
3 Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display.
4 Press the [ETHPRM] soft key. The Ethernet parameter setting screen
appears. The Ethernet functions currently available is displayed.
ETHERNET PARAMETER
AVAILABLE ETHERNET
⋅ EMBEDDED PORT
⋅ ETHERNET BOARD
[ SETTING ][ ][ EMBEDD ][ PCMCIA ][ SWITCH ]
The upper row indicates the usable embedded Ethernet function

device. The embedded port or PCMCIA card is indicated.
The lower row indicates the usable Ethernet option boards. When no
option board is installed, no information is displayed.
5 By pressing the [EMBEDD] soft key, the parameters for the
embedded Ethernet port can be set.
By pressing the [PCMCIA] soft key, the parameters for the PCMCIA
Ethernet card can be set.
CAUTION
The parameters for the embedded Ethernet port and the
parameters for the PCMCIA Ethernet card are independent
of each other.
229
6 Enter and update data by using the MDI keys and soft keys.
PAGE
7 Switch the screen display with the PAGE
page keys.
When data is already present, it is displayed on the screen.
ETHERNET PARAMETER (EMBEDD)

PAGE : 1/4
MAC ADDRESS 080019020014
(COMMON PARAMETER)
IP ADDRESS 192.168.1.1
SUBNET MASK 255.255.255.0
ROUTER IP ADDRESS 192.168.1.254
[ STRING ][ LOCK ][ INPUT ][ RETURN ][ ]

PAGE : 2/4
(FOCAS1/ETHERNET)
PORT NUMBER(TCP) 8193
PORT NUMBER(UDP) 8192
TIME INTERVAL 100
230
Display and setting items
Display item related to The item related to the embedded Ethernet function is displayed.
the embedded Ethernet
function
Item Description
MAC address Embedded Ethernet MAC address
CNC TCP/IP setting Set the TCP/IP–related items of the CNC.

items
Item Description
IP address Specify the IP address of the CNC.

(Sample specification format: ”192.168.1.1”)
Subnet mask Specify a mask address for the IP addresses of the network.
Router IP address Specify the IP address of the router.

Specify this item when the network has a router.
FOCAS1/Ethernet setting Set the items related to the FOCAS1/Ethernet function.

items
Item Description
TCP port number Specify a port number to be used with the FOCAS1/Ethernet
function. The valid input range is 5001 to 65535.
When using the DNC1/Ethernet function, refer to ”FANUC
Personal Computer FA System Windows NT Version Operator’s
Manual (B–75044EN)”.
UDP port number Specify this item when using the DNC1/Ethernet function.
Specify a UDP port number for transmitting UDP broadcast data.
The valid input range is 5001 to 65535.
For details, refer to ”FANUC Personal Computer FA System
Windows NT Version Operator’s Manual (B–75044EN)”.
When using the FOCAS1/Ethernet function, or when transmitting
no UDP broadcast data, set 0.
Time interval Set this item when using the DNC1/Ethernet function. Specify a
(NOTE) time interval at which UDP broadcast data specified above with a
UDP port number is transmitted.
The unit is 10 ms. The valid input range is 10 to 65535. This
means that a value less than 100 ms cannot be specified.
When using the FOCAS1/Ethernet function or when transmitting
no UDP broadcast data, set 0.
Example:
100: Broadcast data is transmitted at intervals of one second
[1000 ms] (= 100 x 10).
231
NOTE
1 When a small value is set for the item of time interval,
communication load increases, and the performance of the
network can adversely affected.
2 The parameters for the PCMCIA Ethernet card are
factory–set to the following defaults:
IP address : 192.168.1.1
Subnet mask : 255.255.255.0
Router IP address : None
TCP port number : 8193
UDP port number : 0
Time interval : 0
Basic method of data input
The basic method of data input is described below, using an example of

IP address input.

2 Display the Ethernet parameter screen.
3 Place the cursor at a desired input item with the INPUT cursor move
key.
4 Type data with MDI keys.
5 Input the data by pressing the [INPUT] soft key or a function key.
Example: Setting 192.168.1.1 as IP address data

(a) Place the cursor at the IP address item.

PAGE : 1/4
(COMMON PARAMETER)
IP ADDRESS
SUBNET MASK
ROUTER IP ADDRESS
232
(b) Type 192.168.1.1 with the MDI keys.

PAGE : 1/4
(COMMON PARAMETER)
IP ADDRESS
SUBNET MASK
ROUTER IP ADDRESS
> 192.168.1.1
[ ][ ][ INPUT ][ RETURN ][ ]
(c) Press the [INPUT] soft key or function key to input the data.
This stores the parameter in the nonvolatile memory of the CNC.

PAGE : 1/4
(COMMON PARAMETER)
IP ADDRESS 192.168.1.1
SUBNET MASK
ROUTER IP ADDRESS
[ ][ ][ INPUT ][ RETURN ][ ]
(d) To reset the settings of IP address, subnet mask, and router IP

address to the unspecified state, enter spaces.
233
6.1.2 An example of minimum setting required to operate the

Using the FOCAS1/Ethernet function on a small network is provided below.
In this example, one personal computer is connected to two CNCs
FOCAS1/Ethernet through FOCAS1/Ethernet.
Function on a Small
D On personal computer 1, the client of the FOCAS1/Ethernet function
Network operates.
D On CNC 1 and CNC 2, the server of the FOCAS1/Ethernet function
operates.
HUB
10BASE–T or 100BASE–TX
CNC 1 CNC 2 Personal computer 1
CNC 1 CNC 2
IP address 192.168.1.1 192.168.1.2
Subnet mask 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0
Router IP address None None

The Ethernet parameter screen is
TCP port number 8193 8193 used for setting.
UDP port number 0 0
Time interval 0 0
Personal
computer 1
IP address 192.168.1.101
Microsoft TCP/IP property of the
Subnet mask 255.255.255.0 personal computer (Windows
95/98/NT/200) is used for setting.
Default gateway None
CNC 1 NC IP address 192.168.1.1
NC TCP port 8193

number The arguments of the data window
library function CNC_allclibhndl3
CNC 2 NC IP address 192.168.1.2 are used for setting.
NC TCP port 8193

number
234
6.1.3 An example of minimum setting required to operate the DNC1/Ethernet

Using the function on a small network is provided below.
In this example, one personal computer is connected to two CNCs
DNC1/Ethernet through DNC1/Ethernet.
Function on a Small
D On personal computer 1, the client of the DMC1/Ethernet function
Network operates.
D On CNC 1 and CNC 2, the server of the DNC1/Ethernet function
operates.
HUB
10BASE–T or 100BASE–TX
CNC 1 CNC 2 Personal computer 1
CNC 1 CNC 2
IP address 192.168.1.1 192.168.1.2
Subnet mask 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0
Router IP address None None

The Ethernet parameter screen is
TCP port number 8193 8193 used for setting.
UDP port number 8192 8192
Time interval 100 100
235
Personal
computer 1
IP address 192.168.1.101
Microsoft TCP/IP property of the
Subnet mask 255.255.255.0 personal computer (Windows NT)
is used for setting.
Default gateway None
CNC 1 Machine number

1
NC IP address 192.168.1.1
NC TCP port 8193

number Refer to ”FANUMC Personal Com-
puter FA System Windows NT Ver-
CNC 2 Machine number sion Operator’s Manual”.
2
NC IP address 192.168.1.2
NC TCP port 8193

number
6.1.4 When configuring a large network or expanding an existing network,

Configuring a Large consult with your network manager to set an IP address, subnet mask, and
router IP address.
Network
236
6.2 There are two types of embedded Ethernet devices: the embedded
Ethernet port and the PCMCIA Ethernet card.
SWITCHING Screen operation is required to switch between these two devices.
BETWEEN THE
EMBEDDED
ETHERNET DEVICES
2 Press the SYSTEM

function key.
4 Press the [ETHPRM] soft key. The Ethernet parameter setting screen
appears. The Ethernet functions currently available are displayed.
ETHERNET PARAMETER
AVAILABLE ETHERNET
⋅ EMBEDDED PORT
⋅ ETHERNET BOARD
[ ][ ][ ][ EMBEDD ][ ]

5 Press the [SWITCH] soft key. The screen for switching between the
embedded Ethernet port and PCMCIA Ethernet card appears.
237
ETHERNET PARAMETER
CURRENT SELECTED ETHERNET
EMBEDDED PORT
[ RETURN ][ ][ ][ EMBEDD ][ PCMCIA ]
6 Press the [PCMCIA] soft key. A confirmation message appears.

Press the [EXEC] soft key to switch the device.
NOTE
Information about the switched device is stored in the
nonvolatile memory. So, when you turn on the power next
time, the previously selected device can be used directly.
238
6.3 If an error occurs with the FOCAS1/Ethernet function (or DNC1/Ethernet

function), the error message screen for the embedded Ethernet function
EMBEDDED displays an error message.
ETHERNET ERROR
MESSAGE SCREEN
Display
Procedure 1 Press the MESSAGE function key.
3 Press the [ETHLOG] soft key. The Ethernet log screen appears. The
Ethernet functions currently available are displayed.
ETHERNET LOG
AVAILABLE ETHERNET
⋅ EMBEDDED PORT
⋅ ETHERNET BOARD
[ BOARD ][ ][ EMBEDD ][ ][ ]

4 By pressing the [EMBEDD] soft key or the [PCMCIA] soft key, the
error message screen for the embedded Ethernet function can be
displayed. The error message screen does not differ between the
embedded Ethernet port and PCMCIA Ethernet card. The same
screen is shared.
PAGE
page keys.
239
EMB_ETH FOCAS1/ETHER LOG (1/2)

*KIND OF LOG :ERROR PAGE : 3/4
PDU IS INVALID 24101345
[ RETURN ][ ][ ][ ][ ]
[Tip]
The latest error message is displayed at the top of the screen. To the right
of an error message, the date and time data of the occurrence of the error
is indicated. The format of date and time data is ddhhmmss where dd
represents a day, hh represents hours, mm represents minutes, and ss
represents seconds.
Configuration
The embedded Ethernet log screens consist of the following screens:

(1) EMB_ETH MASTER CTRL LOG screen (2 screens)
Log screen for displaying the parameter setting of the embedded
Ethernet function and error messages issued at the time of embedded
Ethernet initialization.
(2) EMB_ETH FOCAS1/ETHER LOG screen (2 screens)
Log screen for displaying error messages of the FOCAS1/Ethernet
function.
240
6.4 With the embedded Ethernet function, a dedicated maintenance screen is

available. The maintenance screen enables operations to be checked
EMBEDDED when the embedded Ethernet function operates abnormally.
ETHERNET
MAINTENANCE
SCREEN
Display
Procedure 1 Press the SYSTEM

function key.
3 Press the [ETHLOG] soft key. The Ethernet log screen appears. The
Ethernet functions currently available are displayed.
ETHERNET MAINTENANCE
AVAILABLE ETHERNET
⋅ EMBEDDED PORT
⋅ ETHERNET BOARD
[ BOARD ][ ][ ][ EMBEDD ][ PCMCIA ]

4 By pressing the [EMBEDD] soft key or the [PCMCIA] soft key, the
maintenance screen for the embedded Ethernet function can be
displayed.
The maintenance screen does not differ between the embedded
Ethernet port and PCMCIA Ethernet card. The same screen is shared.
PAGE
page keys.
6 The screen below is used to check the state of the communication

cable and whether a communication destination exists.
Enter the IP address of a communication destination through MDI
keys, then press the [PING] soft key. Then communication is
performed three times with the specified communication destination,
and the results are displayed.
241
PAGE : 1/4
(CONNECT STATUS)
Reply from 192.168.1.123.
Reply from 192.168.1.123.
Reply from 192.168.1.123.
IP address Error (192.168..100)
Request Timed out 192.168.1.100.
[ RETURN ][ ][ ][ ][ PING ]
Messages displayed:
Reply from IP–address
This message indicates that a response was received from the
specified communication destination and that the specified
communication destination exists on the network.
Request Timed out IP–address.
This message indicates that no response was received from the
specified communication destination and that the specified
communication destination does not exist on the network.
Check if the power to the communication destination
equipment is turned on. Check also the parameter settings and
network installation for errors.
IP address error (IP–address)
The specified IP address is illegal. Check the entered IP
address.
242
7 The screen below is used to check the communication state of the

embedded Ethernet function and the error detection count of the
Ethernet controller.
PAGE : 2/4
(NETWORK STATUS)
BAUDRATE 100MBPS / FULL DUPLEX
NETWORK DEVICE EMBEDDED PORT
(NETWORK STATUS : SEND)

COLLISION 0
CARRIER SENSE LOST 0
DELAY OVER 0
UNDERRUN ERROR 0
SEND PARITY ERROR 0
[ RETURN ][ ][ RESET ][ CLEAR ][ ]
PAGE : 3/4
(NETWORK STATUS)
BAUDRATE 100MBPS / FULL DUPLEX
NETWORK DEVICE EMBEDDED PORT
(NETWORK STATUS : RECIEVE)

ALIGNMENT ERROR 0
ORC ERROR 0
OVERFLOW 0
FRAME LENGTH ERROR 0
RECIEVE PARITY ERROR 0
[ RETURN ][ ][ RESET ][ CLEAR ][ ]
The screen consists of two pages: one page for an error detection
count for transmission, and the other for an error detection count for
reception.
By pressing the [CLEAR] soft key on the first page, the error
detection counters for transmission and reception can be cleared to 0.
By pressing the [RESET] soft key, the current communication device
can be initialized and communication can be performed from the
initial state. Use this key to reset communication based on the
embedded Ethernet function.
8 The screen below is used to check the state of each task of the built–in
Ethernet function.
243
PAGE : 4/4
(TASK STATUS)
MASTER CTRL : DP
FOCAS1 #0 : C
FOCAS1 #1 : CCCCC
FOCAS1 #2 : CCCCC
UDP : D
[ RETURN ][ ][ ][ ][ ]
Symbol Meaning
MASTER CTRL E Ethernet controller being initialized
D Data being processed(NOTE)
W Waiting for data processing(NOTE)
P Waiting for parameter setting
S Parameters being set
FOCAS1 #0 X Waiting for completion of Ethernet

controllerinitialization
E Being activated
C Waiting for connection from the

personal computer
O Connection being processed
N FOCAS1/Ethernet execution
disabled
FOCAS1 #1,#2 X Waiting for completion of Ethernet

controllerinitialization
C Waiting for connection from the

personal computer
UDP X Not executed yet. Waiting for

completion of Ethernet controller
initialization
E Being activated
NOTE
A state change occurs between the states ”Data being
processed” and ”Waiting for data processing” even when
communication is not performed actually.
244
6.5 This section describes troubleshooting and check items associated with
the embedded Ethernet function.
TROUBLESHOOTING
6.5.1
Check Items Related to 1) Is an STP cable used for connection between the hub and embedded
Connection with the Ethernet?
Hub 2) Is the STP cable connected correctly?
In general, a straight cable is used for connection between the hub and
communication device.
3) Is the power to the hub turned on?
4) The PCMCIA Ethernet card is used only with 10BASE–T. Is a hub
for 10BASE–T used when the PCMCIA Ethernet card is used?
5) Is the link LED turned on when the embedded Ethernet port is used?
The link LED is not turned on when the hub is not connected or the
power to the hub is not turned on.
6) Is the LED (for link display) of the connected hub turned on? (Some
hubs are not provided with a link LED.)
The LED is not turned on when the hub is not connected with the
embedded Ethernet or the power to the CNC is not turned on.
6.5.2 This subsection can be ignored when a network is built only with a hub
to which the embedded Ethernet is connected.
Check Items Related to
The general check items are listed below. For network installation,
Connection with a consult with vendors specialized in this area. Install cables away from
Backbone noise sources.
When a 10BASE–5 backbone is used
1) Are transceivers connected to the backbone cable correctly?

D If the transceivers are connected correctly, the resistance between
the backbone shield and central conductor is about 25 ohms (when
terminating resistors are attached).
D A special tool may be required for transceiver installation. (The
special tool varies from one vendor to another. For details, refer to
the relevant manual of each vendor.)
D At a location where a transceiver was once installed, do not install
a transceiver again. (The backbone cable can be damaged.)
2) Are transceivers installed at correct intervals?
D Transceivers need to be spaced from each other by 2.5 m or more.
It is recommended that transceivers be installed at intervals of an
integral multiple of 2.5 m. Usually, installation locations are
marked on a backbone cable.
3) Are terminating resistors attached?
D A terminating resistor (50 ohms) needs to be attached to each end
of the backbone cable.
245
4) Is the length of the backbone cable 500 m or less?

5) Does the cable (transceiver cable) connecting a hub to a transceiver
satisfy the specified length?
D Usually, the maximum allowable length of a transceiver cable is 50
m. However, the maximum allowable length of some thin cables
may be less than 50 m. Check the specification of the cable.
When a 10BASE–2 backbone is used
1) Is the length of one cable 0.5 m or more?

D The minimum allowable span between nodes (devices) is 0.5 m.
2) Is the length of the backbone cable (total length of the cables) 185 mm
or less?
3) Are terminating resistors attached?
D A terminating resistor (50 ohms) needs to be attached to each end
of the backbone cable.
6.5.3 This subsection describes how to check the minimum settings required
Checking the Setting of for communication.
Each Parameter
Checking the settings on the embedded Ethernet side
1) Is the MAC address of the embedded Ethernet indicated?

D The MAC address of a embedded Ethernet port is set for each CNC,
and can be checked on the parameter setting screen.
D A unique MAC address is assigned to each PCMCIA Ethernet card.
When a PCMCIA Ethernet card is selected and inserted, MAC
address display is provided.
2) Is a correct IP address set?
D Check if an IP address already specified for another device is set.
3) Is a correct subnet mask set?
D The subnet mask setting must match the subnet mask setting on the
communication destination device.
4) Is a correct router IP address set when communication via a router is
performed?
246
Checking the settings on the personal computer side
1) Is a correct IP address set?

D Check if an IP address already specified for another device is set.
2) Is a correct subnet mask set?
D The subnet mask setting must match the subnet mask setting of the
communication destination device.
3) Is a correct router IP address set when communication via a router is
performed?
6.5.4 This subsection describes how to check the state of communication

Checking between the CNC and personal computer.
Communication
Checking the connection status and settings
If communication with the CNC is not satisfactory or fails from time to

time, check the communication link by using the method described
below. The ping command is used to check communication.
Checking from the See Step 6 of the procedure described in Section 6.4, ”EMBEDDED
embedded Ethernet side ETHERNET MAINTENANCE SCREEN”.
If no response is received from the personal computer, the cause is

considered to be a hardware connection error and/or software setting
error. Check the hardware connection and software settings.
Checking from the An example is given below, where a personal computer (OS: Windows
personal computer NT 4.0) is used:
Method of checking:
Open the command prompt, and enter ping ”NC–IP–address”. If a
response is received, a normal connection has been established.
The example below supposes that the IP address of the CNC is
192.168.1.1.
247
1) When a response is received (normal)
2) When no response is received (error)
If no response is received from the CNC, the cause is considered to be a

hardware connection error and/or software setting error. Check the
hardware connection and software settings.
248
Checking the influence of noise
The method of checking communication errors caused by noise is

described below. The ping command is used for this checking as well.
The –t option of the ping command is used. Until the Ctrl and C keys are
pressed simultaneously, ping packets are transmitted.
1. Influence of noise from a peripheral machine (device)

1) Turn on the power to the machine with the embedded Ethernet
function for which a noise influence check is to be made, and ensure
that communication is enabled.
2) Press the emergency stop button of the machine to turn off
servo/spindle amplifier activation, then issue a ping command from
the personal computer.
3) Count the number of lost packets (to which no response is returned).
If lost packets occur in this state, there is probably an influence of noise
from a peripheral machine.
Action: Locate the noise source and recheck the cabling to eliminate
the influence of noise.
2. Influence of noise from the installed machine
1) Next, release the emergency stop state of the machine to turn on
servo/spindle amplifier activation, then issue another ping command
from the personal computer.
2) Count the number of lost packets.
If this number is greater than the number of Item 1 above, the cause
is considered to be noise generated by the machine itself. In general,
the grounding of the machine or the grounding of the communication
destination is defective.
Action: Check the grounding of the machine and the communication
destination, and insulate the machine from the communication
backbone.
249
6.6 If an error occurs with the embedded Ethernet function, the log screen of
the embedded Ethernet function displays an error message. This section
ERROR MESSAGES describes error messages displayed on the log screen. The major error
messages are described below.
If an error occurs, display the log screen, and check the error message to
determine the cause of the error.
Multiple error messages may be displayed for an error. So, check the
display times of error messages.
6.6.1
EMB_ETH MASTER
CTRL Log Screen
OWN IP ADDRESS IS NOTHING
The IP address of the local node is not set. Set an IP address correctly.
OWN IP ADDRESS(???) IS INVALID
The setting (???) of the IP address of the local node is incorrect. Correct
the IP address.
SUBNET MASK IS NOTHING
The subnet mask of the local node is not set. Set a correct subnet mask.
SUBNET MASK(???) IS INVALID
The setting (???) of the subnet mask of the local node is incorrect. Correct
the subnet mask.
ROUTER IP ADDRESS(???) IS INVALID
The setting (???) of the IP address of the router is incorrect. Correct the
IP address of the router.
TCP PORT NUMBER(???) IS INVALID
The setting (???) of the TCP port number is incorrect. Correct the TCP
port number.
UDP PORT NUMBER(???) IS INVALID
The setting (???) of the UDP port number is incorrect. Correct the UDP
port number.
UDP INTERVAL TIME(???) IS INVALID
The setting (???) of the time interval for UDP transmission is incorrect.
Correct the time interval.
250
6.6.2
EMB_ETH
FOCAS1/ETHER Log
Screen
TCP PORT NUMBER(???) IS INVALID
The setting (???) of the TCP port number is incorrect. Correct the TCP
port number.
Illegal Broadcast IP ADDRESS
The broadcast address for UDP transmission is incorrect. Correct the
subnet mask and IP address of the local node.
Illegal Power–on Date or Time
The current time setting of the CNC is incorrect. Correct the clock of the
CNC.
ALL TASKS(C1) ARE BUSY
The FOCAS1/Ethernet or DNC1/Ethernet function is already engaged in
communication with five applications. Terminate unnecessary
communication applications on the personal computer.
If the cable is disconnected before communication is completed, the
embedded Ethernet may need to be reset and initialized.
Err accept() [???]
An error occurred when a connection request from the personal computer
is being awaited. The error code is [???]. This error message is output,
for example, when the embedded Ethernet is reset.
Err recv() [???]
An error occurred during data reception. The error code is [???]. This
error message is output, for example, when the embedded Ethernet is reset
before communication is closed.
251
7. TROUBLESHOOTING B–63665EN/01
7 TROUBLESHOOTING
This chapter describes troubleshooting procedure.
7.1 CORRECTIVE ACTION FOR FAILURES . . . . . . 254

7.2 NO MANUAL OPERATION NOR AUTOMATIC
OPERATION CAN BE EXECUTED . . . . . . . . . . . 256
7.3 JOG OPERATION CANNOT BE DONE . . . . . . . . 260
7.4 HANDLE OPERATION CANNOT BE DONE . . . . 263
7.5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION CANNOT BE DONE 266
7.6 CYCLE START LED SIGNAL HAS
TURNED OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
7.7 NOTHING IS DISPLAYED ON THE LCD
WHEN THE POWER IS TURNED ON . . . . . . . . . 274
7.8 THE DISPLAY ON THE LCD UNIT FLASHES . . 278
7.9 INPUT FROM AND OUTPUT TO I/O DEVICES
CANNOT BE PERFORMED INPUT/OUTPUT
CANNOT BE PERFORMED PROPERLY . . . . . . . 279
7.10 IN A CONNECTOR PANEL I/O UNIT, DATA IS
INPUT TO AN UNEXPECTED ADDRESS . . . . . . 281
7.11 IN A CONNECTOR PANEL I/O UNIT, NO DATA IS
OUTPUT TO AN EXPANSION UNIT . . . . . . . . . . 282
7.12 ALARM 85 TO 87
(READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE ALARM) . . . 283
7.13 ALARM 90 (REFERENCE POSITION
RETURN IS ABNORMAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
7.14 ALARM 300 (REQUEST FOR REFERENCE
POSITION RETURN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
7.15 ALARM 401 (V READY OFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
7.16 ALARM 404 (V READY ON) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
7.17 ALARM 462 (SEND CNC DATA FAILED)
ALARM 463 (SEND SLAVE DATA FAILED) . . . . 299
7.18 ALARM 417
(DIGITAL SERVO SYSTEM IS ABNORMAL) . . 302
7.19 ALARM 700 (OVERHEAT: CONTROL UNIT) . . 303
7.20 ALARM 701 (OVERHEAT: FAN MOTOR) . . . . . 304
7.21 ALARM 5134 (FSSB: OPEN READY TIME OUT)
ALARM 5135 (FSSB: ERROR MODE)
ALARM 5137 (FSSB: CONFIGURATION ERROR)
ALARM 5197 (FSSB: OPEN TIME OUT)
ALARM 5198 (FSSB: ID DATA NOT READ) . . . 306
7.22 ALARM 5136
(FSSB: NUMBER OF AMPS IS SMALL) . . . . . . . 310
7.23 ALARM 900 (ROM PARITY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
7.24 ALARMS 910 AND 911 (SRAM PARITY) . . . . . . 315
7.25 ALARMS 912 TO 919 (DRAM PARITY) . . . . . . . 318
7.26 ALARMS 920 AND 921 (SERVO ALARMS) . . . . 320
252
B–63665EN/01 7. TROUBLESHOOTING
7.27 ALARM 926 (FSSB ALARM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324

7.28 ALARM 930 (CPU INTERRUPT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
7.29 ALARM 935 (SRAM ECC ERROR) . . . . . . . . . . . 332
7.30 ALARM 950 (PMC SYSTEM ALARM) . . . . . . . . 334
7.31 ALARM 951 (PMC WATCHDOG ALARM) . . . . . 337
7.32 ALARM 972
(NMI ALARM ON AN OPTION BOARD) . . . . . . 338
7.33 ALARM 973
(NMI ALARM WITH AN UNKNOWN CAUSE) . 339
7.34 ALARM 974 (F–BUS ERROR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
7.35 ALARM 975 (BUS ERROR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
7.36 ALARM 976 (LOCAL BUS ERROR) . . . . . . . . . . 344
7.37 SERVO ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
7.38 SPC ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
253
7.1 When a failure occurs, it is important to correctly grasp what kind of

failure occured and take appropriate action, to promptly recover the
CORRECTIVE machine.
ACTION FOR Check for the failure according to the following procedure :
FAILURES
When? With what What failure?
operation?
Grasp the kind of failure

↓
Appropriate action
↓
Recovery
7.1.1
Investigating the (1) When and how many times (frequency of occurrences)
Conditions under (2) With what operation
which Failure Occurred (3) What failure occurred
1 When did the failure occur?

⋅ Date and time?
⋅ Occurred during operation? (how long was the operation?)
⋅ Occurred when the power was turned on?
⋅ Was there any lightening surge, power failure, or other disturbances
to the power supply?
How many times has it occurred
⋅ Only once?
⋅ Occurred many times ? (How many times per hour, per day, or per
month?)
2 With what operation did it occur ?
⋅ What was the NC mode when the failure occurred?
Jog mode/memory operation mode /MDI mode /reference position
return mode
⋅ If during program operation,
1) Where in the program ?
2) Which program No. and sequence No. ?
3) What program ?
4) Occurred during axial movement ?
5) Occurred during the execution of an M/S/T code ?
6) Failure specific to the program ?
⋅ Does the same operation cause the same failure ?
(Check the repeatability of the failure.)
⋅ Occurred during data input/output ?
<Feed axes>
⋅ For a failure related to feed axis servo
1) Occurred at both low feedrate and high feedrate ?
2) Ocurred only for a certain axis ?
254
3 What failure occurred ?

⋅ Which alarm was displayed on the alarm display screen ?
(Check the axis along which an alarm has occurred for alarms 300
to 599.)
⋅ For alarm 350 : Examine diagnostic 202
For alarm 351 : Examine diagnostic 203
For alarm 414 : What does diagnostic display 200,201,204
indicate ?
⋅ For alarm 751 or 761 : Which spindle alarm is indicated ?
(indicated by AL–XX (XX is a number))
⋅ Is the screen correct ?
⋅ If machining dimensions are incorrect
1) How large is the error ?
2) Is the position display on the CRT correct ?
3) Are the offsets correct ?
4 Other information
⋅ Is there noise origin around machine?
If the failure has not occurred frequently, the cause may be external
noise to the power supply or inductive noise on machinery cables.
Operate other machines connected to the same power line and see
if noise come from the relays or compressors.
⋅ Is it taken any countermeasure for noise in machine side?
⋅ Check the following for the input power supply voltage :
1) Is there variation in the voltage ?
2) Are the voltages different depending on the phase ?
3) Is the standard voltage supplied ?
⋅ How high is the ambient temperature of the control unit?
(0_C to 45_C during operation without PC function, 5_C to 45_C
during with PC function)
Refer to manual about noise.
⋅ Has excessive vibration been applied to the control unit?
(0.5 G or less during operation)
5 When you contact our service center, specify the following items :
1) Name of the CNC unit
2) Name of the machine tool builder and type of machine
3) Software series/version of the CNC
4) Specifications of the servo amplifier and motor
(for a failure related to the servo)
⋅ See the drawing issued by the machine tool builder for the locations
of the CNC unit and servo amplifiers.
⋅ We use the following specification codes :
Servo amplifier : A06B–VVVV–HVVV
Servo motor : A06B–VVVV–BVVV
(V represents a number)
255
7.2
NO MANUAL
OPERATION NOR
AUTOMATIC
OPERATION CAN BE
EXECUTED
Points (1) Execute the following procedure when no manual nor automatic
operation is done
(2) Check whether position display shows correct position
(3) Check CNC status display
(4) Check CNC internal status using diagnostic function
Causes and
Countermeasures
1. Position display (1) Check CNC status display (Refer to Section 1.9 NC STATUS
(relative, absolute, DISPLAY for detail.)
machine coordinate) (a) Emergency stop status (Emergency stop signal is turned on)
does not change
If status display shows EMG the emergency stop signal is input.
Check the following signal using the PMC’s diagnostic function
(PMCDGN).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X1008 *ESP
G0008 *ESP
ESP=0 indicates that emergency stop signal is input.

(b) It is a reset status
When RESET is displayed, any of a reset is functioned. Check the
following signal using the PMC’s diagnostic funciton
(PMCDGN).
1) An input signal from the PMC functions
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0008 ERS RRW
When ERS is 1, external reset signal is input.

When RRW is 1, reset & rewing signal is input.
2) RESET key on the MDI keyboard functions
When the signals in 1) are 0, RESET key may be functioning.
Check the contact of RESET key using a tester.

When it is abnormal, change the keyboard.
256
(c) Confirm the status of modes

Operation mode status is displayed on the lower part of CRT as
follows :
If nothing is displayed, mode select signal is not input. Check mode
select signal using PMC’s diagnostic function (PMCDGN).
For details, refer to section 1.9 CNC STATE DISPLAY.
(Example of display)
JOG : Manual operation (JOG) mode
HND : Manual handle (MPG) mode
MDI : Manual data input (MDI) mode
MEM : Automatic operation (Memory) mode
EDIT : EDIT (Memory edit) mode
<Mode select signal>
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0043 MD4 MD2 MD1
↓ ↓ ↓
Manual operation (JOG) mode 1 0 1
Manual handle (MPG) mode 1 0 0
Manual data input (MDI) mode 0 0 0
Automatic operation (Memory) mode 0 0 1
EDIT (Memory edit) mode 0 1 1
(2) Check diagnostic data 000 to 025 of the CNC Check an item for which
1 is displayed
No. Message Display
000 WAITING FOR FIN SIGNAL :0
001 MOTION :0
002 DWELL :0
a. 003 IN–POSITION CHECK :0
004 FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 0% :0
b. 005 INTERLOCK / START LOCK : 1(Example)
006 SPINDLE SPEED ARRIVAL CHECK :0
010 PUNCHING :0
011 READING :0
012 WAITING FOR (UN) CLAMP :0
c. 013 JOG FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 0% :0
d. 014 WAITING FOR RESET, ESP, RRW OFF :0
015 EXTERNAL PROGRAM NUMBER SEARCH : 0
Items with a to d relate with manual and automatic operation and its
detail is shown below.
257
a. In–position check is It shows that positioning is not yet completed. Check the contents of the
being done following diagnostic number. (It is 1 in the following condition)
DGN 0300 Position Error >PARAM 1826

In–position width
1) Check the parameters according to the parameter list.
1825 Servo loop gain per axis (Normal : 3000)
2) Servo system may be abnormal. Refer to servo alarm 400, 410, and
411.
b. Interlock or start lock There are a plural interlock signals. Check at first which interlock signal
signal is input is used by the machine tool builder at the parameters shown below.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3003 DIT ITX ITL
#0 ITL=0 shows interlock signal *IT is effective. To 1)

#2 ITX=0 shows interlock signal *ITn is effective. To 2)
#3 DIT=0 shows interlock signal "MITn is effective. To 3)
Check state of effective interlock signals using the diagnostic function
(PMCDGN) of the PMC.
1) Interlock signal (*IT) is input.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0008 *IT
*IT=0 shows that interlock signal is input.

2) Axis interlock signal (*ITn) is input.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0130 *IT8 *IT7 *IT6 *IT5 *IT4 *IT3 *IT2 +IT1
*ITn=0 shows interlock signal is input.

3) Interlock signal per axis and direction (+/– MITn) is input.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0132 +MIT4 +MIT3 +MIT2 +MIT1
G0134 –MIT4 –MIT3 –MIT2 –MIT1
"MITn=1 shows interlock signal per axis and direction is input.
258
c. Jog feedrate override is Check the signals using PMC’s diagnostic function (PMCDGN)
0%
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0010 *JV7 *JV6 *JV5 *JV4 *JV3 *JV2 *JV1 *JV0
When the override is 0% all bits of the above address becomes

1111 . . . . . 1111 or 0000 . . . . . 0000.
*JV15 . . . . . . . . . . JV0 Override

1111 1111 1111 1111 0.00%
1111 1111 1111 1110 0.01%
: :
1101 1000 1110 1111 100.00%
: :
0000 0000 0000 0001 655.34%
0000 0000 0000 0000 0.00%
d. NC is in a reset state In this case, RESET is also displayed on the status display. Check it using
the procedure of 1 above.
2. When machine (1) Machine lock signal (MLK) is input.

coordinate value does
not update on position
display
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0044 MLK
G0108 MLK8 MLK7 MLK6 MLK5 MLK4 MLK3 MLK2 MLK1
MLK : All axes machine lock

MLKn : Each axis machine lock
When the signal is 1, the corresponding machine lock signal is input.
259
7.3
JOG OPERATION
CANNOT BE DONE
Points (1) Check whether position display is operating.

(2) Check CNC status display.
(3) Check internal status using Diagnostic funciton.
Causes and Remedies
1. Position display (1) Check mode selection status (JOG mode is not selected).
(relative, absolute, When status display shows JOG, it is normal.
machine cooordinate) When status display does not show JOG, mode select signal is not
does not change selected correctly. Confirm the mode select signal using PMC’s
diagnostic function (PMCDGN).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0043 MD4 MD2 MD1
↓ ↓ ↓
Manual operation (JOG) mode 1 0 1
(2) Feed axis and direction select signal is not input Check the signal using
PMC’s diagnostic function (PMCDGN).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0100 +J8 +J7 +J6 +J5 +J4 +J3 +J2 +J1
G0102 –J8 –J7 –J6 –J5 –J4 –J3 –J2 –J1
Example)
When +X button is pressed on the operator’s panel, signal+J1 turns to
1.
* This signal is effected at its rise. If axis selection signal is input
before JOG mode is selected, axis movement does not occur. Turn
the signal to off, then on.
260
(3) Check CNC’s diagnostic function 000 to 015. Check the items for
which 1 is displayed at right side.
No. Message Display
000 WAITING FOR FIN SIGNAL :0
001 MOTION :0
002 DWELL :0
a. 003 IN–POSITION CHECK :0
004 FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 0% :0
b. 005 INTERLOCK / START LOCK : 1(Example)
006 SPINDLE SPEED ARRIVAL CHECK :0
010 PUNCHING :0
011 READING :0
c. 013 JOG FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 0% :0
d. 014 WAITING FOR RESET, ESP, RRW OFF :0
* Items with a to d relate with manual and automatic operation and
its detail is shown below.
a. In–position check is It shows that positioning is not yet completed. Check the contents of the
being done following diagnostic number. (It is 1 in the following condition)
DGN 0300 Position Error >PARAM 1826 In–position width
1) Check the parameters according to the parameter list.
1825 Servo loop gain per axis (Normal : 3000)
2) Servo system may be abnormal. Refer to servo alarm 400, 410, and
411.
b. Interlock or start lock There are a plural interlock signals. Check at first which interlock signal
signal is input is used by the machine tool builder at the parameters shown below.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3003 DIT ITX ITL
#0 ITL=0 shows interlock signal *IT is effective. To 1)

#2 ITX=0 shows interlock signal *ITn is effective. To 2)
#3 DIT=0 shows interlock signal "MITn is effective. To 3)
Check state of effective interlock signals using the diagnostic function
(PMCDGN) of the PMC.
1) Interlock signal (*IT) is input.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0008 *IT
*IT=0 shows that interlock signal is input.

2) Axis interlock signal (*ITn) is input.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0130 *IT8 *IT7 *IT6 *IT5 *IT4 *IT3 *IT2 +IT1
*ITn=0 shows interlock signal is input.
261
3) Interlock signal per axis and direction (+/– MITn) is input

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
c. Jog feedrate override is Check the signals using PMC’s diagnostic function (PMCDGN)
0%
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
When the override is 0% all bits of the above address becomes

1111 . . . . . 1111 or 0000 . . . . . 0000.
*JV15 . . . . . . . . . . JV0 Override

1111 1111 1111 1111 0.00%
1111 1111 1111 1110 0.01%
: :
1101 1000 1110 1111 100.00%
: :
0000 0000 0000 0001 655.34%
0000 0000 0000 0000 0.00%
d. NC is in a reset state In this case, RESET is also displayed on the status display. Check it using
the procedure of 1 above.
(4) Jog feed rate setting (Parameter) is not correct.
1423 Jog feedrate per axis
262
7.4
HANDLE OPERATION
CANNOT BE DONE
Points (1) Check another manual operation (JOG) is accepted.
(2) Check CNC status display.
Causes and
Countermeasure
1 JOG operation is not Consult with item 8.3 and 8.4.
acceptable, either
2 When only handle (1) Check CNC status display at lower left corner of the CRT.
operation (MPG) cannot (Refer to 1.9 CNC STATE DISPLAY for details)
be done When the status display shows HND, mode selection is correct.
If it is not HND, mode select signal is not input correctly. Check the
mode select signal using the PMC’s diagnostic function (PMCDGN).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0043 MD4 MD2 MD1
↓ ↓ ↓
Manuale handle mode 1 0 0
(2) Manual handle feed axis select signal is not input.

Check the signals using PMC’s diagnostic function (PMCDGN).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0018 HS2D HS2C HS2B HS2A HS1D HS1C HS1B HS1A
G0019 HS3D HS3C HS3B HS3A
When axis select switch for manual handle feed is selected on the
machine operator’s panel, if the signals are input as follows, it is
normal.
Selected axis HSnD HSnC HSnB HSnA
no selection 0 0 0 0
1st axis 0 0 0 1
2nd axis 0 0 1 0
3rd axis 0 0 1 1
4th axis 0 1 0 0
5th axis 0 1 0 1
6th axis 0 1 1 0
7th axis 0 1 1 1
8th axis 1 0 0 0
* In the above table, n is the number of the manual pulse generator

(MPG) and up to 3 MPGs can be used.
A feed axis is selected by 4–bit code of A to D.
263
(3) Manual handle feed multiplication is not correct

Check the following signals using PMC’s PCDGN. Also confirm the
following parameters based on the parameter list.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0019 MP2 MP1
↓ ↓
MP2 MP1 Multiplication
0 0 1
1 0 10
0 1 m
1 1 n
7113 Magnification of handle feed m (1 to 127)
7114 Magnification of handle feed n (1 to 1000)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
7102 HNGx
#0(HNGx) Direction of MPG and travel of machine

0 : same direction
1 : reverse direction
7110 No. of MPGs used (1 to 3)
(4) Checking manual pulse generator

(a) Incorrect of cable
Check disconnection of cable or short circuit.
CNC Distributed I/O module

(motherboard) Operator’s panel I/O module
JA3 #1 First manual

pulse generator
IOLINK JD1B
(JD1A) Second manual
#2 pulse generator
#3 Third manual
pulse generator
264
CNC Distributed I/O module Manual pulse

(motherboard) Operator’s panel I/O module generators
JD1A Shield Shield
JD1B JA3
SIN(01) (03)SOUT HA1(01) HA1
*SIN(02) (04)*SOUT HB1(02) HB1
First
SOUT(03) (01)SIN +5V(09) +5V
*SOUT(04) (02)*SIN 0V(12) 0V
0V(11) (11)0V
0V(12) (12)0V HA2(03) HA2
0V(13) (13)0V HB2(04) HB2
0V(14) (14)0V +5V(18) +5V Second
0V(14) 0V
HA3(05) HA3
HB3(06) HB3
Third
+5V(20) +5V
0V(16) 0V
(b) Manual pulse generator is faulty

When you rotate the MPG, the following signal is output.
Measure the signal with synchroscope at screw terminal on back of
MPG. If no signal is output, measure +5V voltage.
Back of MPG
Screw terminal HA: A phase signal

HB: B phase signal
+5V 0V HA HB
Rotation in plus Rotation in minus

1:1
+5V
HA on off on off
0V
+5V
HB on off on off
0V
1:1
1/4 phase difference 1/4 phase difference
Check on and off ratio and phase difference of HA and HB.
265
7.5
AUTOMATIC
OPERATION CANNOT
BE DONE
Points (1) Check manual operation is possible.
(2) Check the status of cycle start LED on machine operator’s manual.
(3) Check status of CNC.
Causes and Remedies When manual operation is either impossible, perform countermeasure,
based on the previous item “Jog operation cannot be done”.
Confirm that a correct mode is selected according to the mode select status
of CNC status display. Also, by confirming the automatic operation
status it is possible to identify cycle operation, feed hold and cycle stop
state.
1. When cycle operation is “****” is displayed at status display on a screen.

not started (Cycle start (1) Mode select signal is not correct.
LED does not light)
When the mode select signal is input correctly, following status
display is done.
MDI :Manual data input mode (MDI)
MEM :Memory operation mode
RMT :Remote operation mode
If status display does not show a correct status, check the mode signal
with following diagnosis function of PMC side (PMCDGN).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0043 DNCI MD4 MD2 MD1
DNCI MD4 MD2 MD1 Mode select

– 0 0 0 Manual data input mode
0 0 0 1 Memory operation mode
1 0 0 1 Remote operation mode
(2) Cycle start signal is not input

This signal turns 1 when cycle start button is pressed and turns 0 when
it is released. The cycle start actuates when it changes from 1 to 0.
Check the state of the signal using PMC’s diagnostic function
(PMCDGN).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0007 ST
#2 (ST) : Cycle start signal

(3) Feed hold signal is input
Under normal state, the feed hold signal is 1 when the feed hold button
is not pressed.
Check the state of this signal using the PMC’s diagnostic function
(PMCDGN).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0008 *SP
#5 (*SP) : Feed hold signal
266
2. When an automatic CNC’s status display shows “STRT” on the CRT.

operation is in progress (1) Check the contents of diagnostic nos. 000 to 015.
(Cycle start LED is lit)
No. Message Display
a. 000 WAITING FOR FIN SIGNAL : 1(Example)
b. 001 MOTION :0
c. 002 DWELL :0
d. 003 IN–POSITION CHECK :0
e. 004 FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 0% :0
f. 005 INTERLOCK / START LOCK :0
g. 006 SPINDLE SPEED ARRIVAL CHECK :0
010 PUNCHING :0
011 READING :0
h. 013 JOG FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 0% :0
i. 014 WAITING FOR RESET, ESP, RRW OFF :0
* Items with a to i relate with an automatic operation and their details
are as follows :
a. An auxiliary function is An auxiliary function (M/T/B) specified in a program is not ended.
being executed (waiting Check according to the following procedure.
for FIN signal) At first, confirm the kind of interface of an auxiliary function.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3001 HSIF
#7(HSIF) 0 : M/T/B is of normal interface.

1 : M/T/B is of high–speed interface.
1) Normal interface
When the auxiliary function finish signal turns from 1 to 0, the
auxiliary function is supposed to be ended and the next block is read
for operation. Confirm the status of this signal using PMC’s
diagnostic function (PMCDGN).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0004 FIN
#3 (FIN) : Auxiliary function finish signal

2) High–speed interface
The auxiliary function is supposed to be ended when the signals are
in the following state. Confirm it using PMC’s diagnostic function
(PMCDGN).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0005 BFIN TFIN MFIN
#0(MFIN) : M function finish signal

#3(TFIN) : T function finish signal
#4(BFIN) : 2nd auxiliary function finish signal
267
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F0007 BF TF MF
#0(MF) : M function strobe signal

#3(TF) : T function strobe signal
#7(BF) : 2nd auxiliary function strobe signal
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0004 MFIN3 MFIN2
#4(MFIN2) : Second M function completion signal

#5(MFIN3) : Third M function completion signal
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0008 MF3 MF2
#4(MF2) : Second M function strobe signal

#5(MF3) : Third M function strobe signal
* The second and third M functions are enabled only when bit 7 (M3B)
of parameter No. 3404 is set to 1.
Signal End state
Finish signal 0 1
store signal 0 1
b. Travel command is being CNC is reading an axis command (X,Y,Z,...) in a program and giving the
executed command to the axis.
c. A dwell command is CNC is reading a dwell command (G04) in a program and is executing
being executed the dwell command.
d. In–position check Positioning (G00) to a specified position of a specified axis is not

(confirming positioning) completed.
is being done Whether positioning is completed or not is checked as the servo position
error amount. Check it CNC’s diagnostic function as follows:
DGN no.300 Position Error > PARAM 1826 In–position width
Position error amount almost becomes 0, when positioning of an axis
completes and when the amount becomes within the in–posiiton width,
it is assumed that positioning completes and the next block is exected.
If position error amount does not become within the in–position width,
refer to servo alarm 400, 4n0 and 4n1.
268
e. Feedrate override is at Actual feedrate is overridden by the override signals to a programmed

0% feedrate. Check the override signals using the PMC’s diagnostic function
(PMCDGN).
<Normal override signal>
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0012 *FV7 *FV6 *FV5 *FV4 *FV3 *FV2 *FV1 *FV0
*FVn : Feedrate override

<2nd override signal (option)>
Feed rate is overridden more finely using the signals below:
See MTB’s manual whether this feature is equipped.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0013 *AFV7 *AFV6 *AFV5 *AFV4 *AFV3 *AFV2 *AFV1 *AFV0
*AFVn : 2nd feed rate override

<State of override signal>
*FV7@@@@@@@*FV0 *AFV7@@@@@@*AFV0
11 1 1 1 1 1 1 0% 11 1 1 1 1 1 1 0%
11 1 1 1 1 1 0 1% 11 1 1 1 1 1 0 1%
: : : :
10 0 1 1 0 1 1 100% 10 0 1 1 0 1 1 100%
: : : :
00 0 0 0 0 0 1 254% 00 0 0 0 0 0 1 254%
00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0% 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0%
f. Interlock signal or start There are a plural number of interlock functions. Parameters are set by
lock signal is input machine tool builders for which interlock function is used.
Therefore, confirm the following parameters at first:
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3003 DIT ITX ITL
#0 (ITL) 0 : Interlock signal(*IT) is valid.

#2 (ITX) 0 : Interlock signal (*ITn) is valid.
#3 (DIT) 0 : Interlock signal ("MITn) is valid.
Confirm which interlock signal is activated by the PMC’s diagnostic
function (PMCDGN) .
1) Interlock signal (*IT) is input
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0008 *IT
#0 (*IT) : When this bit is 0, interlock signal is input.

2) Interlock signal per each axis (*ITn) is input
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0130 *IT8 *IT7 *IT6 *IT5 *IT4 *IT3 *IT2 *IT1
*ITn When the bit is 0, the corresponding axis’s interlock signal is input.
269
3) Interlock signal per axis and direction(+/– MITn) is input

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
4) Controlled axis detach function is running. A detached axis is

specified for travelling.
*This function is valid when CNC parameter No.1005#7=1. For
whether this function is running or not, confirm the following signal
using PMC’s diagnostic function (PMCDGN). Check the axis
concerned.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F0110 MDTCH8 MDTCH7 MDTCH6 MDTCH5 MDTCH4 MDTCH3 MDTCH2 MDTCH1
When signal MDTHn is “1” ,the axis detach function is in valid.

The control axis detach function becomes valid by the following
signal issued from the PMC or a CNC side parameter. Check as in the
following procedure :
<1> The control axis detach signal (DTCHn) is input.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0124 DTCH8 DTCH7 DTCH6 DTCH5 DTCH4 DTCH3 DTCH2 DTCH1
If it is 1, the corresponding axis is detached.

<2> The following parameter enables the control axis detach function to
the corresponding axis.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0012 RMVx
#7(RMVx) 0 : Controlled axis is connected

1 : Controlled axis is detached
g. Manual feedrate override Normally manual feedrate override function is used for jog feed.
is 0% (dry run) But when DRN(dry run) signal turns on during an auomatic
operation,override values set with these signals become valid to the
following speed set by a parameter.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0046 DRN
#7(DRN) : Dry run signal is input with this signal being 1.
1410 Dry run rate
The rate when the following override value is 100%.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0010 *JV7 *JV6 *JV5 *JV4 +JV3 *JV2 *JV1 *JV0
↓ ↓ ↓
G0011 *JV15 *JV14 *JV13 *JV12 +JV11 *JV10 *JV9 *JV8
When override value is 0%, all bits of the above address is

[1111 . . . . 1111] or [0000 . . . . 0000].
270
*JV15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JV0 Override

1111 1111 1111 1111 0.00%
1111 1111 1111 1110 0.01%
:
1101 1000 1110 1111 100.00%
:
0000 0000 0000 0001 655.34%
0000 0000 0000 0000 0.00%
h. NC is in a reset state In this case, the CNC’s status display shows RESET. Refer to item 1.
(2) Only rapid traverse in positioning (G00) does not function Confirm
the following parameter and signals from the PMC.
(a) Setting value of rapid traverse rate
1420 Rapid traverse rate per axis
(b) Rapid traverse override signals

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0014 ROV2 ROV1
G0096 HROV *HROV6 *HROV5 *HROV4 *HROV3 *HROV2 *HROV1 *HROV0
(HROV–0) (HROV=1)
ROV1 ROV2 Override *HROV6 *HROV0 Override

0 0 100% 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0%
1 1 50% 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1%
0 1 25% : :
1 1 Fo 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 100%
1421 Rapid traverse override F0 rate
(3) Only feed (other than G00) does not function

(a) Maximum feedrate set by parameter is incorrect.
1422 Maximum feedrate
Feedrate is clamped at this upper feedrate.

(b) Feedrate is specified by feed per revolution (mm/rev)
1) Position coder does not rotate
Check the connection between spindle and position coder
The following failure is considered:
⋅ T iming belt is broken
⋅ Key is removed
⋅ Coupling is loose
⋅ Connector of signal cable is loosened
2) Position coder is faulty
271
7.6
CYCLE START LED
SIGNAL HAS
TURNED OFF
Points (1) After cycle operation is started, then stopped, check as follows:
(2) Confirm cycle start LED on machine operator’s panel.
(3) Confirm CNC’s diagnostic function.
Causes and Remedies The reason why cycle start LED signal (STL) has turned off are displayed
on CNC’s diagnostic numbers 020 to 025 as follows:
020 CUT SPEED UP/DOWN 1 0 0 0 1 0 0

021 RESET BUTTON ON 0 0 1 0 0 0 0
022 RESET AND REWIND ON 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
023 EMERGENCY STOP ON 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
024 RESET ON 1 1 1 1 0 0 0
025 STOP MOTION OR DWELL 1 1 1 1 1 1 0
a. Emergency stop signal

b. External reset signal
c. Reset button on MDI
d. Reset & rewind signal
e. Servo alarm
f. Feed hold by switching mode
g. Single block stop
Details of signals a to g are as follows:

Confirm the signals concerned using diagnostic function (PMCDGN).
a. Emergency stop is input
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X1008 *ESP
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0008 *ESP
*ESP=0 : Emergency stop signal is input :

b. External reset signal is
input #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0008 ERS
#7(ERS) : When the bit is 1, external reset signal is input.

* This signal is usually used for a confirmation signal of M02 when an
M02 is specified in a program as the end of a program.
Therefore, when M02 is executed, this signal is input.
c. Reset button on the MDI An automatic operation is put into a reset status when RESET key on the
is pressed MDI panel is pressed.
272
d. Reset & rewind signal is

input #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0008 RRW
#6(RRW) : When this signal is 1, the reset & rewind signal is input.
* This signal is usually used for a confirmation signal of M30 when an
M30 is specified in a program as the end of a program.
Therefore, when M30 is executed, this signal is input.
e. Servo alarm has When any servo alarm has generated, cycle operation is put into the reset
generated state and operation stop.
f. Cycle operation is in a The cycle operation becomes feed hold state in the following cases:
feed hold state 1) Modes are switched from an automatic operation mode to a manual
operation mode.
2) Feed hold signal is input.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0043 MD4 MD2 MD1
memory edit(EDIT) 0 1 1
Automatic Automatic operation (MEM) 0 0 1
operation Manual data input (MDI) 0 0 0
Jog feed (JOG) 1 0 0
Manual Handle/step 1 0 1
operation
TEACH IN HANDLE 1 1 1
TEACH IN JOG 1 1 0
<Feed hold signal>

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0008 *SP
#5(*SP) : When this signal is 0, the feed hold signal is input.

g. It become single block
stop during automatic
operation
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0046 SBK
#1(SBK) When this signal is 1, the single block signal is input.
273
7.7
NOTHING IS
DISPLAYED ON THE
LCD WHEN THE
POWER IS TURNED
ON
Causes and actions If nothing is displayed on the LCD at power–up or if the LCD is locked
with “GRAPHIC IS READY.” or the slot status screen displayed, the
probable causes include the following:
D For the LCD–mounted D The LCD cable or backlight cable is not connected.
type D The necessary software is not installed.
D The motherboard, display control card, CPU card, or inverter board is
defective.
D For the stand–alone type D The LCD unit is not connected to the power supply.
D The LCD cable or backlight cable is not connected.
D The LCD unit is not connected to the CNC with the optical cable or
the cable is broken.
D The necessary software is not installed.
D The main CPU board, display control card, or LCD unit is defective.
If “GRAPHIC IS READY.BOOT START”. is displayed, this indicates

that the display control circuit has started up normally but that the CNC
has not started up.
[For the LCD–mounted

type]
Inverter printed circuit
board
Connector for connecting

the backlight cable
the LCD cable
Motherboard (without a PC)
274
D LCD display Referring to the hardware chapter, check the LCD on/off status of the
motherboard.
If the motherboard has started up normally and the LCD display indicates
normal operation, a probable cause is a fault of the display system, such
as a cable not connected or a defective inverter board.
If the LCD display is locked in the middle of the startup process, the
probable causes include defective hardware (or installation failure) and
the necessary software not installed.
D Connection of the LCD Check that the LCD and backlight cables are connected firmly to the
and backlight cables corresponding connectors.
These cables are connected before shipment from FANUC. This check
is, however, required because the cables may be disconnected during
maintenance.
D The necessary software If necessary software is not stored in the FROM module, the CNC may
is not installed not start up.
D Defective printed circuit If the motherboard or display control card is defective or is not correctly
board installed, the CNC may not start up.
Check that the card PCBs are engaged firmly with the connectors on the
motherboard.
If any of the above actions does not solve the problem, replace the display
control card, CPU card, and motherboard.
D Installation positions of
the display control card,
and CPU card
Display control CPU card

card
Motherboard
275
[For the stand–alone

type]
D Power supply of the LCD Check that the power cable is connected to the connector CP1A of the
unit LCD unit.
Connector for connecting the backlight cable

Inverter printed circuit board

the LCD cable
LCD control printed

circuit board
Optical cable
COP20B
24 V input
CP1A
For 24 V branch
CP1B
D LED display Referring to the hardware chapter, check the LED on/off status of the main
CPU board.
If the main CPU board has started up normally and the LED display
indicates normal operation, a probable cause is a fault of the display
system, such as the cable of the LCD unit not connected or a defective
inverter board.
If the LED display is locked in the middle of the startup process, the
probable causes include defective hardware (or installation failure) and
the necessary software not installed.
D Optical cable Check that the optical cable is free from excessive force and that it is not
excessively bent. Check that the optical cable is connected firmly.
If no problems are found with the connection of the optical cable, replace
the optical cable.
D Connection on the LCD Check that the backlight and LCD cables are connected firmly to the
unit corresponding connectors.
These cables are connected before shipment from FANUC. This check
is, however, required because the cables may be disconnected during
maintenance.
D Display control card Check that the display control card installed on the main CPU board is
engaged with the connector. If it is engaged properly, replace this card.
D LCD unit Replace the LCD unit or the control printed circuit board located at the
rear of the LCD unit
276
D Main CPU board If any of the above actions does not solve the problem, replace the main
CPU board and the CPU card.
the display control card
and the CPU card
CPU card
Display control
card
277
7.8
THE DISPLAY ON
THE LCD UNIT
FLASHES
Causes and actions This situation can occur only with the stand–alone type.
If a break is detected in the optical cable (HSSB) that connects the LCD
unit to the main CPU board, the display on the LCD unit flashes.
The same situation occurs if the main CPU board is turned off while the
power is on.
D Power supply of the The display on the LCD unit flashes if the main CPU board is turned off,
main CPU board with the LCD kept on, while the power is on.
D Break of the optical Check that the optical cable is free from excessive force and that it is not
cable excessively bent.
If no problems are found with the connection of the cable, replace the
optical cable.
D Display control card Replace the display control card installed on the main CPU board.
D LCD unit Replace the LCD unit or the control printed circuit board located at the
rear of the LCD unit
D Installation position of
the display control card
Display control
card
278
7.9
INPUT FROM AND
OUTPUT TO I/O
DEVICES CANNOT
BE PERFORMED
INPUT/
OUTPUT CANNOT BE
PERFORMED
PROPERLY
Causes and actions If the I/O Link is not established, if the signals from an I/O device cannot
be input normally to the CNC, or if the signals from the CNC cannot be
output to an I/O device, the probable causes include the following:
D The I/O device is not turned on, or the power supply is not at the
appropriate voltage.
D The I/O Link cable is not connected correctly or appropriately.
D The input/output signals are not connected correctly.
D I/O Link allocation is not performed, or is not performed properly.
D PMC alarm NO I/O If “NO I/O DEVICE” is displayed on the alarm screen of the PMC, no I/O
DEVICE devices are recognized.
D IOCHK screen of the By selecting [PMCDGN], [IOCHK], and [IOLNK] in this order from the
PMC PMC screen, the I/O devices recognized by the CNC are displayed. From
this screen, the devices that are connected normally can be determined.
Screen display example
GROUP ID KIND OF UNIT00
00 A9 I/O MODULE01
01 A8 OTHER UNIT
This example indicates that the I/O Link is as shown in the figure below.
I/O module for

Control unit connector panel
Group 0
Operator’s panel
I/O module
Group 1
279
D Checking the power Check that the connected I/O devices are connected properly to the power
supplies of the I/O supplies and that the voltages are as prescribed.
devices Check that the power–on sequence is correct.
Time at which an I/O device is to be turned on
Before the CNC is turned on or within 500 ms after the CNC is
turned on
When the CNC is turned off, the I/O devices must also be turned off.
(Otherwise, the I/O Link may not be established the next time the CNC
is turned on.)
D Connection of cables As in the example shown on the previous page, I/O Link cables are used
to connect JD1As and JD1Bs.
JD1A represents an upper unit while JD1B represents a lower unit.
Check that the cables are connected correctly.
D Connection of I/O signals Check that the input/output signals to be connected to each I/O device are
connected correctly.
For operator’s panel I/O modules and for connector panel I/O modules,
also check that the 0 V or +24 V input signal is connected to the common
pin and that the +24 V output signal is connected to the DO common pin.
D I/O Link allocation Check that I/O Link allocation has been performed correctly.
Selecting [EDIT] and then [MODULE] from the PMC screen causes the
allocation edit screen to be displayed.
After editing allocation, write the changes to the FROM on the [I/O]
screen. Otherwise, the changes will be lost when the power is turned off.
The checking of allocation requires a Ladder editing card.
280
7.10
IN A CONNECTOR
PANEL I/O UNIT,
DATA IS INPUT TO
AN UNEXPECTED
ADDRESS If data is input to an invalid address in a connector panel I/O unit (for
example, data that should be input to X004 is actually input to X010 in
a connector panel I/O unit), the most likely causes are as follows:
(1) The I/O Link allocation is wrong.
(2) The unit–to–unit cables (CA52–to–CA53) are not connected
correctly.
If the connection is wrong, expansion unit 1 is allocated the address
of expansion unit 3, as shown below.
→ Connect the unit–to–unit cables as shown below:
Correct connection (the allocation starts with X0)
CA52 CA53 CA52 CA53 CA52 CA53
Basic Expansion 1 Expansion 2 Expansion 3
X0–2 X3–5 X6–8 X9–11

Incorrect connection (the allocation starts with X0)
CA52 CA52 CA53 CA53 CA52 CA53
Basic Expansion 1 Expansion 2 Expansion 3
X0–2 X9–11 X6–8 X3–5
(3) The setting of the rotary switch on an expansion unit is wrong

If the rotary switch is set to 1, one unit number is skipped. If set to 2,
two unit numbers are skipped. Usually, the setting must be 0. (For
those units without a rotary switch, unit numbers cannot be skipped.)
→ See the following example and refer to the “FANUC Series
16i/18i/21i–B Connection Manual (Hardware)” (B–63523EN).
Example)
Rotary switch setting on expansion unit 1=1
CA52 CA53
Basic Expansion 1
X0–2 X6–8 <=X3 to X5 are skipped.
281
7.11 The most likely cause is that power is not being supplied to the expansion
unit.
IN A CONNECTOR
→ Check whether 24–V power is supplied to 18P and 50P of the
PANEL I/O UNIT, NO expansion unit, DI and DO signals are not input and output.
DATA IS OUTPUT TO → Check whether 24–V power is supplied to 1P and 3P of the expansion
AN EXPANSION UNIT unit, when DI signals are input and DO signals are not output.
282
7.12
ALARM 85 TO 87
(START)
(READER/PUNCHER
INTERFACE ALARM)
YES
Alarm 85?
NO · Check baud rate

and other I/O pa
rameters
YES · I/O device is
Alarm 86?
faulty
NO
Is I/O NO
parameter
correct?
YES Set correct parameters
OFF
Is power of I/O ?
ON
Turn on I/O device
Is cable NO
connection right?
YES
Connect the cable
· I/O device is faulty

· I/O interface
module is faulty
Alarm 87
· I/O device is faulty

· I/O interface mod
ule is faulty
Causes (a) Parameters on reader/puncher interface are not correct.

Check the following setting data and parameters.
(b) External I/O device or host computer is faulty.
(c) I/O board is faulty.
(d) Cable between NC and I/O device is faulty.
Countermeasures (a) Parameters on reader/puncher interface are not correct.

Check the following setting data and parameters:
<Setting>
PUNCH CODE=0 OR 1 (0: EIA,1:ISO)
Select ISO or EIA according to the type of I/O device.
If punch code does not match, alarm 86 will generate.
283
<Parameter>
Value of parame-
ter 0020 0 1 2 3
Function
Feed 0101#7 0111#7 0121#7 0131#7
Data input code 0101#3 0111#3 0121#3 0131#3
Stop bit 0101#0 0111#0 0121#0 0131#0
Type of I/O device 102 112 122 132
Baud rate 103 113 123 133
Communi 0135#3 – – – 0 1
cation
method RS–232C RS–422
MOTHER BOARD OPTION–1 BOARD

Connector
JD36A JD36B JD28A JD6A
NOTE
1 Numbers in the table indicate parameters and bit numbers.
Example) 101#7:bit7 of parameter 101.
2 For data communications by RS–422, refer to parameters
134 and 135.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0101 NFD ASI SB2
0111
0121
0131
#7(NFD) 0 : Feed is output before and after data in data output (FANUC PPR)
1 : Feed is not output (standard).
#3(ASI) 0 : Data input code is EIA or ISO (automatic recognition)
1 : Data input code is ASCII.
#0(SB2) 0 : No. of stop bits is 1.
1 : No. of stop bits is 2.
284
0102 Type of I/O device

0112
0122
Value TYPE OF I/O DEVICE
0132
1 FANUC CASSETTE B1/B2 (bubble cassette)
2 FANUC CASSETTE F1 (Old type FLOPPY CASSETTE

ADAPTOR)
3 FANUC PROGRAM FILE Mate,

FANUC FA CARD ADAPTOR
FANUC FLOPPY CASSETTE ADAPTOR,
FANUC SYSTEM P–MODEL H,
FANUC Handy File
4 Not used
6 FANUC PPR, FANUC SYSTEM P–MODEL G,

FANUC SYSTEM P–MODEL H
0103 Baud rete

0113
0123 Value Baud rate 10 4800
0133 7 600 11 9600
8 1200 12 19200
9 2400
When bit#3 of parameter no. 0135=1 (RS–422 interface), the following

setting is also available.
Value Baud rate
13 38400
14 76800
15 86400
Check the following parameters also, when parameter no.0020 is 3.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0134 CLK NCD SYN PRY
#5(CLK) 0 : Internal clock is used for baud rate clock of RS–422 interface.
1 : External clock is used for baud rate clock of RS–422 interface.
#4(NCD) 0 : CD (signal quality detection) of RS–232C interface is checked.
1 : CD (signal quality detection) of RS–232C interface is not checked.
#2(SYN) 0 : In protocol B, NC reset/alarm is not informed to the host.
1 : In protocol B, NC reset/alarm is informed to the host by SYN and
NAK code.
#1(PRY) 0 : No parity bit
1 : With parity bit
285
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0135 RMS R42 PRA ETX ASC
#7(RMS) In protocol A, status of remote / tape operation of SAT command is

0 : Always transmitted by 0.
1 : Transmitted by the contents of remote / tape switching request issued
by SET command from the CNC.
#3(R42) 0 : Interface is of RS–232C.
1 : Interface is of RS–422.
#2(PRA) 0 : Communication protocol is protocol A
1 : Communication protocol is protocol B
#1(ETX) 0 : End code of protocol A or extended protocol A is CR of ASCII/ISO.
1 : End code of protocol A or extended protocol A is ETX of ASCII/ISO.
#0(ASC) 0 : All the communication codes except for NC data is ISO code.
1 : All the communication codes except for NC data is ASCII code.
(b) External I/O device or Host computer is in trouble
(i) Check whether the setting on communication of external I/O
device or host computer is the same as that of the CNC. (baud rate,
stop bits,etc.) If they are not the same, change the setting.
(ii)When spare I/O device presents, check whether it is possible to
realize communication using the spare I/O device.
(c) Spindle module or communication control module is faulty
(i) When parameter no.0020 is 0 or 1 or 2 (JD36A,JD36B of Mother
board) Replace the module since spindle module may be faulty.
(ii)When parameter no. 0020 is 3 (JD28A,JD6A of option 1 board)
Because communication control module (5) may be faulty, replace
the module.
(d) Cable between NC and I/O device is faulty.
Check the cable for disconnection or wrong connection.
<Connection>
Mother board
R232C(JD36A)
Punch panel
R232C(JD36B)
Tape reader
Serial
communication R232C(JD28A)
Host computer
R232C(JD6A)
Host computer
286
< Cable connection>
R232C (JD36A)
Punch panel
R232C (JD36B)
RD (01) (03) RD
0V (02)
DR (03) (06) DR
0V (04)
CS (05) (05) CS
0V (06)
CD (07) (08) CD
0V (08)
(09)
+24V (10)
SD (11) (02) SD
0V (12)
ER (13) (20) ER
0V (14)
RS (15) (04) RS
0V (16) (07) SG
(17)
(18)
+24V (19) (25) +24V
(20) (01) FG
Shield
G G Connector :DBM–25S
Connector : Half–pitch 20–pins (PCR)
R232C (JD28A) Host computer
RD (01) (02) SD
0V (02)
DR (03) (20) ER
0V (04)
CS (05) (04) RS
0V (06)
CD (07) (08) CD
0V (08)
(09)
+24V (10)
SD (11) (03) RD
0V (12)
ER (13) (06) DR
0V (14)
RS (15) (05) CS
0V (16) (07) SG
(17)
(18)
+24V (19) (25) +24V
(20) (01) FG
Shield
G Connector D–SUB 25 pins
Connector : Half–pitch 20–pins (PCR)
287
CAUTION
1 When CS is not used, connect it to RS.
2 For protocol A or extended protocol A: When DR is not used,
connect it to ER. Always connect CD to ER.
RS422(JD6A) Host computer
RD (01) (04) RD
*RD (02) (22) *RD
RT (03) (17) TT
*RT (04) (35) *TT
CS (05) (07) RS
*CS (06) (25) *RS
DM (07) (12) TR
Note) *DM (09) (30) *TR
0V (08) (19) SG
(+24V) (10)
SD (11) (06) RD
*SD (12) (24) *RD
TT (13) (08) RT
*TT (14) (26) *RT
RS (15) (09) CS
*RS (16) (27) *CS
TR (17) (11) DM
*TR (18) (29) *DM
(+24V) (19)
(20) (01) FG
Shield
G
Connector : Half–pitch 20 pins (PCR) Connector : D–SUB 25 pins
CAUTION
Always use a twisted pair cable.
288
7.13
ALARM 90
(REFERENCE
POSITION RETURN
IS ABNORMAL)
Contents Reference position return was executed when the following condition is
not satisfied:
The CNC received one rotation signal at least one time when the axis is
moving to the reference position at a speed higher than a speed equivalent
to 128 pulses of position error amount (DGN300).
Countermeasures
(START)
Position error
Check whether position gain is greater than 128 pulses amount : 300
(DGN 300) before or during reference position return.
YES
128 or more (1) Next page
NO
Raise the speed

Check feed rate command:
PRM 1420 F : Rapid traverse rate (mm/min)
PRM 1424 Manual rapid traverse rate (mm/min)
PRM 1825 G : Servo loop gain (0.01sec–1)
F 5000/3
Position error=
G detection unit[µm/PLUSE]
Detection unit : Move amount to a command pulse (usually 1µm)
In metric machine, if the no. of digits below decimal point is 4 on the position
display screen, detection unit is 0.1 mm.
Check rapid traverse override signals :

ROV1 DGN 014.0 ROV1 ROV2 Override
1014.0 (For TT series)
ROV2 DGN 014.1 0 0 100%
1014.1 (For TT series) 0 1 50%
PRM 1421 Fo rate 1 0 25%
1 1 Fo rate
Check reference position return deceleration signal

DEC1 DEC8 DGN 009.0 to 009.7
When reference position return is started from deceleration signal 0, feed rate
becomes FL rate.
PRM 1425 FL rate
289
(1)
Check whether the motor ratated more than one rota-

tion (one rotation signal is issued ) at faster than 128
pulses of position error amount.
NO Return start position is too close

Rotated ?
· Chagne the return start position.
YES · Move the machine at faster that 128
pulses for more than one rotation to
wards RP.
Check that voltage of pulse coder is higher than 4.75 V.

To measure pulse coder voltage, remove the motor cover and measure on
pulse coder PCB at across + and – or +5V and 0V terminals.
NO
More than 4.75V
YES
Hardware failure Pulse coder power voltage is low
· Pulse coder is faulty

Change pulse coder or motor
CAUTION
After the pulse coder or motor is exchanged, reference
position or machine’s standard point may be different from
former one. Please set it correctly.
D Reference A speed more than 128 pulses is required because if speed is lower that
this, one–rotation signal does not function stably, causing improper
position detection.
If bit 0 of parameter No. 2000 is set to 1, a speed corresponding to a
positional deviation of 1280 pulses or more is required.
Parameter No. 1836 can be set to 128 or less, as the minimum positional
deviation with which reference position return is possible. (If the
parameter is set to 0, 128 is assumed as the minimum positional deviation.
If bit 0 of parameter No. 2000 is set to 1, a value equal to ten times the
set value is used for checking.)
290
7.14 Absolute position data in the serial pulse coder was lost.
(This alarm will be generated when serial pulse coder is exchanged or
ALARM 300 position feedback signal cable of the serial pulse coder is disconnected).
(REQUEST FOR
REFERENCE
POSITION RETURN)
Remedies Machine position must be memorized using the following method:
D When reference position (1) Execute manual reference position return only for an axis for which
return function is this alarm was generated.When manual reference position return
present cannot be executed because of an another alarm, set parameter 1815#5
to 0 and release the alarm and perform manual operation.
(2) Press RESET key at the end of reference position return to release the
alarm.
D When reference position Execute dogless reference position setting to memorize the reference
return function is not position.
present
D When serial pulse coder Since the reference position is different from the former one, change the
is changed grid shift value (PRM 1850) to correct the position.
Related parameters
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1815 APC x APZx
#5(APCx) 0 : Position detector is incremental pulse coder.

1 : Position detector is absolute pulse coder.
#4(APZx) Reference position of absolute pulse coder is :
0 : not established
1 : established
291
7.15
ALARM 401
(V READY OFF)
Causes and actions This alarm is issued if the servo ready signal (VRDY) of a servo amplifier
does not turn on or if the signal turns off during operation.
There are cases in which this alarm is issued because another servo alarm
is issued. If this occurs, first take the action for the first alarm.
Check the power magnetic circuit around the amplifier. The servo
amplifier or the axis control cards on the CNC may be defective.
D VRDY
CNC Servo amplifier

(main CPU board)
MCON: From the CNC to the servo amplifier
(sub–CPU board) (Turn MCC on to request the activation of the
servo motor)
VRDY: From the servo amplifier to

the CNC
(Notifies that the servo is ready)
The exchange of this information is performed via the FSSB (optical

cable).
292
D Example of connection
around the amplifier
(Typical example)
(servo (servo
amplifier) amplifier) Control
power
supply
Emergency stop
circuit
Serial spindle
Servo Servo Spindle

motor motor motor
3–phase
Breaker AC
reactor
Single–
phase
Breaker
Check items
D Is the PSM control power supply on?
D Has an emergency stop been canceled?
D Is a terminating connector connected to the JX1B connector of the
terminating amplifier?
D Is MCC on? If there is an external MCC sequence in addition to the
MCC contact of the PSM, check that sequence also.
D Is the power for driving MCC supplied?
D Is the breaker on?
D Has some alarm been issued in the PSM or SPM?
D Replacing the servo If no problem is found in the power magnetic circuit around the amplifier,
amplifier replace the servo amplifier.
D Replacing the axis If the above action does not solve the problem, replace the axis control
control cards cards.
293
the axis control cards
[For the LCD–mounted type]
Axis control card
Motherboard
Axis control card
Sub–CPU board
Axis control card
Loader control board
294

type]
Axis control card Axis control card
Main CPU board Sub CPU board
Axis control card
Loarder control board
295
7.16
ALARM 404
(V READY ON)
Causes and actions This alarm is issued if the servo ready signal (VRDY) of a servo amplifier
remains on.
The servo amplifier or the axis control cards on the CNC may be
defective.
D VRDY
CNC Servo amplifier

(main CPU board)
MCON: From the CNC to the servo amplifier
(sub–CPU board) (Turn MCC on to request the activation of the
servo motor)
VRDY: From the servo amplifier to

the CNC
(Notifies that the servo is ready)
The exchange of this information is performed via the FSSB (optical

cable).
This alarm is issued if VRDY remains on when the CNC turns MCON
off or if VRDY turns on before the CNC turns MCON on.
D Replacing the servo The servo amplifier may be defective. Replace the servo amplifier.
amplifier
D Replacing the axis If replacing the servo amplifier does not solve the problem, replace the
control cards axis control cards.
296
Axis control card
Motherboard
Axis control card
Sub–CPU board
Axis control card
297

type]
Axis control card
298
7.17
ALARM 462
(SEND CNC DATA
FAILED)
ALARM 463
(SEND SLAVE DATA
FAILED)
Causes and actions Alarm 462 is issued if a slave (servo amplifier) cannot receive correct data
due to an FSSB communication error.
Alarm 463 is issued if the CNC cannot receive correct data due to an FSSB
communication error.
If these alarms are issued, the alarm message indicates the number of the
defective axis (axis name).
D Servo amplifier or optical Any of the optical cables between the CNC control unit and the amplifier
cable corresponding to the axis number indicated in the alarm message may be
defective.
Or, any of the first amplifier to the amplifier corresponding to that axis
number may be defective.
D Axis control cards The axis control cards installed on the CNC may be defective.
299
Axis control card
Motherboard
Axis control card
Sub–CPU board
Axis control card
300

type]
Axis control card
301
7.18 Digital servo parameters are abnormal.

(Digital servo parameters are set incorrectly.)
ALARM 417
(DIGITAL SERVO
SYSTEM IS
ABNORMAL)
D Causes 1 Confirm the setting value of the following parameters:

PRM 2020 : Motor format number
PRM 2022 : Motor rotation direction
PRM 2023 : Number of pulses of velocity feedbacks
PRM 2024 : Number of pulses of position feedback
PRM 1023 : Servo axis number
PRM 2084 : Flexible feed gear ratio
PRM 2085 : Flexible feed gear ratio
Confirm the details with diagnosis function of CNC side.
2 Change the setting of this parameter to 0.
PRM 2047 : Observer parameter
3 Perform initial setting of digital servo parameters.
Refer to setcion 5.1 “Initial Setting of Servo Parameters” .
This data indicates the cause of servo alarm No. 417, detected by the NC.
If the alarm is detected by the servo, the PRM bit (bit 4 of DGN No. 0203)
is set to 1.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0280 AXS DIR PLS PLC MOT
#0(MOT) : The motor type specified in parameter No. 2020 falls outside the
predetermined range.
#2(PLC) : The number of velocity feedback pulses per motor revolution, specified in
#3(PLS) : The number of position feedback pulses per motor revolution, specified in
#4(DIR) : The wrong direction of rotation for the motor is specified in parameter No.
2022 (the value is other than 111 or –111).
#6(AXS) : In parameter No. 1023 (servo axis number), a value that falls outside the
range of 1 to the number of controlled axes is specified. (For example, 4 is
specified instead of 3.) Alternatively, the values specified in the
parameter are not consecutive.
302
7.19
ALARM 700
(OVERHEAT:
CONTROL UNIT)
Causes and actions This alarm is issued if the ambient temperature of the CNC control unit
is abnormally high. As an installation condition, the ambient temperature
of the CNC must not exceed 58°C.
D Ambient temperature A temperature monitoring circuit is installed on the motherboard (main

CPU board), and causes this alarm to be issued if the ambient temperature
is abnormally high.
Take appropriate action to the cabinet that houses the CNC control unit
so that the temperature falls within the proper temperature range (0 to
58°C).
If it is obvious that the ambient temperature is not abnormal, the
motherboard (main CPU board) may be defective.
303
7.20
ALARM 701
(OVERHEAT: FAN
MOTOR)
Causes and actions This alarm is issued if a fault occurs in any of the fan motors, such as the
stoppage of a fan motor during the operation of the CNC.
D Fan motors Fan motors are installed in the uppermost portion of the CNC control unit.
Each fan motor is attached with an alarm detector circuit, which notifies
the CNC of a fault such as the stoppage of the fan motor, thereby issuing
this alarm.
If this alarm is issued, replace the fan motor.
For units without option slots
Fan motor
Specifications of fan motors
Ordering Quantity
information required
Unit without option slots A02B–0236–K120 Two
Unit with two option slots A02B–0281–K121 Two
Unit with three option slots A02B–0281–K121 Two
A02B–0236–K122 Two
Unit with four option slots A02B–0281–K121 Four
304
[For the stand–alone type] For the stand–alone type, a fan can be replaced together with its case.
Fan motor for Fan motor for

2–slot track 1–slot track
Specifications of fan motors

Ordering information
For 1–slot track A02B–0265–C101
For 2–slot track A02B–0260–C021
305
7.21
ALARM 5134
(FSSB: OPEN
READY TIME OUT)
ALARM 5135 (FSSB:

ERROR MODE)
ALARM 5137 (FSSB:

CONFIGURATION
ERROR)
ALARM 5197 (FSSB:

OPEN TIME OUT)
ALARM 5198 (FSSB:

ID DATA NOT READ)
Causes and actions These alarms are issued if any of the axis control cards and the slaves
(such as servo amplifiers) and optical cables connected to the FSSB is
defective.
No. Message Description
5134 FSSB: OPEN READY TIME The FSSB did not become ready to
OUT open during initialization.
5135 FSSB: ERROR MODE The FSSB entered an error mode.
5137 FSSB: CONFIGURATION The FSSB detected a configuration er-

ERROR ror.
5197 FSSB: OPEN TIME OUT The FSSB did not open when the CNC
had allowed the FSSB to open.
5198 FSSB: ID DATA NOT READ The initial ID information for the amplifi-
er cannot be read because of a failure
in the temporary assignment.
D Processing of the FSSB The processing of the FSSB at power on is as described below:
at power on 1 The CNC initializes the FSSB and the servo.
2 The servo returns the first ready signal.
3 The first ITP interrupt is generated.
4 The CNC waits for the FSSB to become ready to open.
5 The CNC checks that the FSSB did not detect a configuration error.
6 The CNC allows the FSSB to open.
7 The CNC checks that the FSSB has opened.
8 The servo returns the second ready signal.
9 Normal operation
306
If the FSSB does not become ready to open in 4, alarm 5134 is issued.
If an error is detected in 5, alarm 5137 is issued.
If the FSSB does not open within a fixed period of time, alarm 5197 is
issued.
If the ready signal is not returned within a fixed period of time, alarm 5198
is issued.
D Checking the parameter Check that the FSSB–related parameters are set correctly.
settings
D Power supplies of the Check the power supplies of the servo amplifiers connected to the FSSB.
servo amplifiers
D Replacing the axis Replace the axis control cards on the CNC.
control cards, optical Replace the optical cables and servo amplifiers connected to the FSSB,
cables, and servo one at a time, to identify the defective item.
amplifiers
307
Axis control card
Motherboard
Axis control card
Sub–CPU board
Axis control card
308

type]
Axis control card
309
7.22
ALARM 5136
(FSSB: NUMBER OF
AMPS IS SMALL)
Causes and actions The number of servo amplifiers recognized by the FSSB is insufficient,
compared with the number of controlled axes.
D FSSB setting screen If this alarm is issued, display the amplifier setting screen from the FSSB
setting screen. Only the servo amplifiers recognized on the FSSB are
displayed.
D Optical cable or servo The optical cable that connects together the last recognized amplifier and
amplifier the next one may be defective.
Or, either of the amplifiers connected together with that optical cable may
be defective. Check the power supplies of the amplifiers.
D Power fault of a servo This alarm may be issued if a power fault occurs in a servo amplifier. A
amplifier power fault occurs if the amplifier control power supply voltage drops,
if the +5 V conductor of the pulse coder cable is ground, or for other
reasons.
D Axis control cards The axis control cards installed on the CNC may be defective.
310
Axis control card
Motherboard
Axis control card
Sub–CPU board
Axis control card
311

type]
Axis control card
312
7.23
ALARM 900
(ROM PARITY)
Causes and actions A ROM parity error occurred.
The software including the CNC system software, servo software, PMC
management software, and PMC Ladder is stored in the flash memory on
the FROM/SRAM module. It starts execution after being loaded into the
RAM of the DRAM module or servo card at power on.
A ROM parity error occurs if the software stored in the FROM/SRAM
module is destroyed.
D Rewriting the software On the screen, the series of the software in which a fault was detected is
component displayed. Rewrite the software using the boot system.
The software stored in the FROM/SRAM module includes a variety of
FANUC software components, as well as those created by the MTB, such
as the PMC Ladder.
D Replacing the Replace the FROM/SRAM module
FROM/SRAM module After replacement, all the software that was once stored must be written.
Because the replacement clears the contents of the SRAM memory, the
memory contents must be restored. For this operation, use the boot
system.
D Replacing the If any of the above actions does not solve the problem, replace the
motherboard motherboard.
the FROM/SRAM module
FROM/SRAM module
313
[For the stand–alone type]
FROM/SRAM module The FROM/SRAM module

is installed under the axis
control card.
Main CPU board
314
7.24
ALARMS 910 AND
911 (SRAM PARITY)
Causes and actions A parity error occurred in the SRAM used to store data such as parameters
and machining programs.
This alarm is issued if the battery has run down or if the data in the SRAM
is destroyed due to some external cause. Or, the SRAM module,
motherboard, and option PCB may be defective.
D Checking the battery The battery is rated 3 V. A battery alarm is issued and “BAT” flashes on
the screen if the voltage of the battery drops to 2.6 V.
If a battery alarm is issued, replace the battery with a new one promptly.
D Performing memory all Perform a memory all clear operation, then start up the CNC.
clear Alternatively, if a backup of the data in the SRAM has been made, use the
backup to restore the data. To back up and restore the data in the SRAM,
use the boot system.
D Replacing the If memory all clear or the restoration of the data with a backup does not
FROM/SRAM module solve the problem, replace the FROM/SRAM module.
After replacing the FROM/SRAM module, perform a memory all clear
operation and start up the CNC. All the data must be re–loaded.
If a backup is available, restore the data using the backup, then start up
the CNC.
D Motherboard If any of the above actions does not solve the problem, replace the
motherboard.
315
FROM/SRAM module

control card.
Main CPU board
316
D SRAM parity on the If alarm 972 is issued, indicating on the screen that an SRAM parity error
loader control board occurred on the loader, take appropriate action on the loader control
board.
The SRAM for the loader control board is installed on the boards
themselves.
SYSTEM ALARM
972 NMI OCCURRED IN OTHER MODULE
SLOT 01
910 SRAM PARITY : (BYTE 0) <LC
317
7.25
ALARMS 912 TO 919
(DRAM PARITY)
Causes and actions The management software for the CNC is loaded from the FROM to the
DRAM at power on, so that it is executed on the DRAM.
A parity error occurred on this DRAM.
These alarms occur if the data on the DRAM is destroyed due to some
external cause or if the CPU card is defective.
D Replacing the CPU card. Replace the CPU card.
the CPU card
CPU card
318
CPU card
Main CPU board
D DRAM parity on an If alarm 972 is issued, indicating on the screen that a DRAM parity error
option board occurred on an option board, take appropriate action on the option board
on which the DRAM parity error occurred.
Some option boards have a circuit equivalent to the CPU card installed
on the boards themselves. See the hardware chapter for details.
SYSTEM ALARM
SLOT 01
DRAM PARITY : (BYTE 0) <SUB
319
7.26
ALARMS 920 AND
921 (SERVO
ALARMS)
Causes and actions A watchdog error or RAM parity error occurred in the circuit on an axis
control card.
Alarm 920 indicates that either of the above errors occurred in the control
circuit for axes 1 to 4. Alarm 921 indicates that either of the above errors
occurred in the control circuit for axes 5 to 8.
The optical cable, axis control cards, CPU card, or motherboard may be
defective.
D Watchdog error The servo control circuit monitors the operation of the main CPU. If a
fault occurs in the CPU or its peripheral circuit, so that the watchdog timer
is not reset, a watchdog error occurs.
D Replacing the optical Replace the optical cable. A defective optical cable may cause this
cable problem.
D Replacing the axis Replace the axis control cards.
control cards
D Replacing the CPU card Replace the CPU card.
D Replacing the If any of the above actions does not solve the problem, replace the
motherboard (main CPU motherboard.
board)
each card
Axis control CPU card

card
320
CPU card
Axis control card
Main CPU board
321
D Servo alarm on the If alarm 972 is issued, indicating on the screen that a servo alarm occurred
sub–CPU board or loader on the sub–CPU or loader, take appropriate action on the sub–CPU board
control board or loader control board.
SYSTEM ALARM
SLOT 01
920 SERVO ALARM <SUB
CPU card
Axis control card
Sub–CPU board
Axis control card CPU card
322
CPU card
CPU card
Axis control card
Axis control card
Sub CPU board Loarder control board
323
7.27
ALARM 926 (FSSB ALARM)
Causes and actions A fault occurred on the FSSB (serial servo bus) that connects servo
amplifiers to the CNC.
This alarm is issued if a fault occurs in any of the axis control cards
making up the FSSB, optical cables, and servo amplifiers.
D Identifying the defective Use the LEDs on the servo amplifiers.
location Using the 7–segment LEDs installed on the servo amplifiers, the
defective location can be identified.
FSSB connection
example
Amplifier Amplifier Amplifier Amplifier Amplifier Amplifier

CNC 0 1 2 3 4 5
B A
If portion A, indicated by dotted line, contains the defective location, the

LEDs on the servo amplifiers will be as shown in the table below.
Amplifier Amplifier Amplifier Amplifier Amplifier Amplifier Amplifier
No. 0 1 2 3 4 5
“L”
LED
“–” “–” or “U” “U” “U”
display
“–”
In this case, any of the following locations may be defective:

(1) Optical cable connecting together the servo amplifier whose LED is
“L” or “–” and that whose LED is “U”. In the above figure, the optical
cable in portion A may be defective.
(2) Either of the servo amplifier whose LED is “L” or “–” and that whose
LED is “U”. In the above figure, either amplifier 2 or 3 may be
defective.
If portion B, indicated by dotted line, contains the defective location, the
LEDs on the servo amplifiers will be as follows:
Amplifier Amplifier Amplifier Amplifier Amplifier Amplifier Amplifier
No. 0 1 2 3 4 5
LED
“–” or “U”
display
In this case, any of the following locations may be defective:

(1) Optical cable connected to the CNC. In the above figure, the optical
cable in portion B may be defective.
(2) Any of the axis control cards in the CNC
(3) First servo amplifier connected. In the above figure, amplifier 0 may
be defective.
324
D Identifying the defective Use the display on the CNC screen

location If alarm 926 is issued, information such as the following is displayed at
the bottom of the CNC screen. It can be used to identify the defective
location.
MODE STATUS
information information
Bits Bits
Bits 12 to 15 of the MODE information indicate the number of the slave

in which the alarm occurred. The unit nearest the CNC (such as a servo
amplifier) is assigned a slave number of “0”. For a 2–axis amplifier, for
example, one number is assigned for the first axis, and the next number
is assigned for the second.
Details of the MODE information

Bit 15 14 13 12 11 0
De- Number of the slave in No meaning

scrip- which the alarm oc-
tion curred
0000: Indicates that the alarm occurred in slave 0.

0001: Indicates that the alarm occurred in slave 1.
:
:
Indicates that the alarm occurred in slave 9.
Using the bits of the STATUS information, the fault can be estimated.
Details of the STATUS information

Bit 15 12 11 10 9 87 6 5 4 3 0
No meaning
Broken master port
No meaning
No meaning
No meaning
External alarm
Broken master port
Broken slave port

Description
Error on slave
A xxxx 0 0 0 xxx 1 x 0 xxxx
A xxxx 0 1 0 xxx 0 x 1 xxxx
B xxxx 0 0 1 xxx 0 x 1 xxxx
C xxxx 1 0 0 xxx 0 x 1 xxxx
The STATUS information matches any of the patterns A, B, and C.

(x indicates a bit that may be either 0 or 1.)
325
If the pattern of the STATUS information is A

(1) The optical cable that connects together the slave corresponding to bits
12 to 15 of the MODE information and the preceding slave may be
defective. Or, either of the slaves connected together with that optical
cable may be defective.
(2) The voltage of the power supplied to the slave amplifier dropped, or
a power fault occurred in the amplifier.
(3) Any of the axis control cards in the CNC may be defective.
If the pattern of the STATUS information is B
(1) The optical cable that connects together the slave corresponding to bits
12 to 15 of the MODE information and the preceding slave may be
defective. Or, either of the slaves connected together with that optical
cable may be defective.
If the pattern of the STATUS information is C
(1) The slave corresponding to bits 12 to 15 of the MODE information
may be defective.
D Power fault in a servo If a power fault occurs in a servo amplifier, the FSSB alarm is issued. A
amplifier power fault occurs, causing the FSSB alarm to be issued, if the amplifier
control power supply voltage drops, if the +5 V conductor of the pulse
coder cable is ground, or for other reasons.
D Replacing the axis If any of the axis control cards are found defective because of the above
control card diagnosis, replace the axis control card on the motherboard (main CPU
board).
326
the axis control card
Axis control card
Motherboard
Axis control card
Main CPU board
327
D FSSB alarm on the If alarm 972 is issued, indicating on the screen that an FSSB alarm
sub–CPU board or loader occurred on the sub–CPU or loader, take appropriate action on the
control board sub–CPU board or loader control board.
SYSTEM ALARM
SLOT 01
926 FSSB ALARM <SUB
Axis control card
Sub–CPU board
Axis control card
Loader control card
328
Axis control card
Axis control card
Sub CPU board Loarder control board
329
7.28
ALARM 930
(CPU INTERRUPT)
Causes and actions An interrupt that can never be generated during normal operation was
generated.
The cause of the fault cannot be identified, but the fault may have occurred
in the peripheral circuit of the CPU.
If the problem is solved by turning the power off and then on again, the
problem may be attributable to noise.
D Replacing the CPU card,

motherboard
each card
CPU card
330
CPU card
Main CPU board
D Examining the noise See the section on the measures against noise, examine the noise
environment environment of the CNC.
D CPU interrupt on an If alarm 972 is issued, indicating on the screen that a CPU interrupt was
option board generated on an option board, take appropriate action on the option board
on which the CPU interrupt was generated.
SYSTEM ALARM
SLOT 01
930 CPU INTERRUPT <SUB
331
7.29
ALARM 935
(SRAM ECC ERROR)
Causes and actions An ECC error occurred in the SRAM used to store data such as parameters
and machining programs.
This alarm is issued if the battery has run down or if the data in the SRAM
is destroyed due to some external cause. Or, the FROM/SRAM module
or motherboard may be defective.
D ECC check This is the method of checking the data stored in the SRAM. It has been
employed instead of the conventional parity check.
With the ECC check method, 8–bit correction data is provided for 16–bit
data, so that if a data error occurs in one of these 16 bits, the error is
automatically corrected with the correction data, allowing the CNC to
continue operation. This alarm is issued if a data error occurs in two or
more bits.
With the conventional parity check method, a system alarm is issued if a
data error occurs even in one bit.
D Checking the battery The battery is rated 3 V. A battery alarm is issued and “BAT” flashes on
the screen if the voltage of the battery drops to 2.6 V.
If a battery alarm is issued, replace the battery with a new one promptly.
D Performing memory all Perform a memory all clear operation, then start up the CNC.
clear Alternatively, if a backup of the data in the SRAM has been made, use the
backup to restore the data. To back up and restore the data in the SRAM,
use the boot system.
D Replacing the If memory all clear or the restoration of the data with a backup does not
FROM/SRAM module solve the problem, replace the FROM/SRAM module. Take a backup
copy in advance. All the software must be restored after the replacement.
After replacing the FROM/SRAM module, perform a memory all clear
operation and start up the CNC. All the data must be re–loaded.
If a backup is available, restore the data using the backup, then start up
the CNC.
D Motherboard If any of the above actions does not solve the problem, replace the
motherboard.
332
FROM/SRAM module

control card.
Main CPU board
333
7.30
ALARM 950
(PMC SYSTEM
ALARM)
Causes and actions This alarm is issued if a fault is detected in the PMC.
The probable causes include an I/O link communication error and a
defective PMC control circuit
D Connecting the I/O Link The I/O Link is a serial interface that connects the CNC to various I/O
devices and allows transfers of I/O signals between devices at high speed.
When multiple devices are connected using the I/O Link, there forms a
relationship that a certain device is a master and the other devices are
slaves. The states of the input signals from the slaves are transferred to
the master at fixed intervals. The output signals from the master are
transferred to the slaves at fixed intervals. In a CNC system, the master
is the CNC (motherboard or main CPU board).
The I/O signals transferred via the I/O link can be used with the PMC
Ladder.
Master station (CNC) Slave station #0

Group 0
Slave station #1
Group 1
Up to 16 groups
D I/O Link communication If alarm 950 is issued, displaying “PC050” on the screen, an I/O link
error PC050 communication error may have occurred.

SYSTEM ALARM
950 PMC SYSTEM ALARM

PC050 NMI SLCxx:yy
In this screen display example, the cause of the alarm can be estimated
using xx:yy. xx and yy are hexadecimal representations.
334
1) If bit 0 of the binary representation of xx is “1”, this indicates that the

master station (CNC) received invalid communication data. For
example, assume that the following is displayed on the screen:
SYSTEM ALARM

PC050 NMI SLC 41:42
xx is equal to 41, or “01000001” in binary notation. Bit 0, which is

the lowest (rightmost) bit, is “1”.
In this case, check the following:
(1) Noise environment of the I/O Link cable
Noise may disturb the data on the I/O Link and may result in a
problem.
(2) Contact of the I/O Link cable
Check that the I/O link cable is in contact. Check that the cable is
not loose and is latched firmly.
(3) Cable failure
Check that the I/O Link cable is connected properly.
(4) Device failure
The motherboard or any of the I/O devices connected to the I/O
Link may be defective. Replace the devices, one at a time, to
identify the defective device.
Refer to 2) if bit 1 (second bit from the right) is also “1”.
2) If bit 1 of the binary representation of xx is “1”, this indicates that an
error was detected on a slave station (I/O device). For example,
assume that the following is displayed on the screen:
SYSTEM ALARM

PC050 NMI SLC 43:82
xx is equal to 43, or “01000011” in binary notation. Bit 1 (second bit

from the right) is “1”.
In this case, yy indicates the following:
Number equal to the number indicated by bits 0 to 4 of yy minus 1:
Group number of the slave station on which an error was detected
Bit 5 of yy:
Invalid communication data was detected on the slave.
Bit 6 of yy:
Another error was detected on the slave.
Bit 7 of yy:
A watchdog or parity error was detected on the slave.
In the example shown in the figure above, yy is equal to 82, or
“10000010” in binary notation. Bits 0 to 4 are “00010” (2 in decimal
notation). The number “1”, which is equal to that number minus 1, is
the group number of the slave station on which an error was detected.
Bit 7 is “1”. Thus, a watchdog or parity error was detected on the slave
station in group 1.
335

(1) If bit 5 of yy is “1”
Perform examination with the same procedure as that in 1).
(2) If bit 6 of yy is “1” or if bit 7 of yy is “1”
First, replace the device of the slave station of the indicated group
number.
If the problem is not solved, perform examination with the same
procedure as that in 1) to identify the defective location.
3) If bit 2 of the binary representation of xx is “1”, this indicates that the
link between the master station (CNC) and the slave station was
canceled. For example, assume that the following is displayed on the
screen:
SYSTEM ALARM

PC050 NMI SLC 84:00
xx is equal to 84, or “1000100” in binary notation. Bit 2, which is the

third bit from the right, is “1”.
(1) Disconnection of the slave station from the power supply
Check that the slave station is not turned off, that there are no
instantaneous power failures, and that the capacity of the power
supply is enough.
(2) Disconnection of the I/O link cable
Check that the I/O link cable has not fallen off or has not been
disconnected.
(3) If the problem is not solved, perform a check with the same
procedure as that in 1).
4) If bit 3 or 4 of the binary representation of xx is “1”, this indicates that
a parity error occurred in the PMC control circuit on the motherboard.
In this case, replace the motherboard (main CPU board).
D Other cases The motherboard may be defective. Replace the motherboard.
D PMC system alarm on For sequence control on the loader control board, a PMC control circuit
the loader control board is installed on the loader control board.
If alarm 972 is issued, indicating on the screen that a PMC system alarm
occurred on the loader, take appropriate action on the loader control
board.
SYSTEM ALARM
SLOT 01
950 PMC SYSTEM ALARM >LC
336
7.31
ALARM 951
(PMC WATCHDOG
ALARM)
Causes and actions This alarm is issued if a fault (watchdog alarm) is detected in the PMC.
A probable cause is that the MC control circuit is defective.
D Replacing the The PMC control circuit is installed on the motherboard. Replace the
motherboard motherboard.
D PMC watchdog alarm on For sequence control on the loader control board, a PMC control circuit
the loader control board is installed on the loader control board.
If alarm 972 is issued, indicating on the screen that a PMC watchdog
alarm occurred on the loader, take appropriate action on the loader control
board.
SYSTEM ALARM
SLOT 01
951 PMC WATCH DOG ALARM >LC
337
7.32
ALARM 972
(NMI ALARM ON AN
OPTION BOARD)
Causes and actions This alarm indicates that an error was detected on an option board, not on
the main CPU board.
D Screen display If alarm 972 is issued, the following is displayed on the screen:
SYSTEM ALARM
SLOT 02
930 CPU INTERRUPT <SUB
“SLOT” indicates the number of the slot into which the option board is
inserted. Alternatively, it may indicate the number of the alarm that
occurred on the option board. Take the action related to that alarm to the
option board. In the above example, alarm 930 occurred on the sub–CPU
board.
D Slot number The slot number of each option slot is as shown in the figure below.
D Replacing the option Replace the option board inserted into the slot with the indicated slot
board number.
338
7.33
ALARM 973
(NMI ALARM WITH
AN UNKNOWN
CAUSE)
Causes and actions An error that can never occur during normal operation occurred. The
cause of the error cannot be identified.
D Replacing printed circuit Replace all the printed circuit boards installed (including cards, modules,
boards and the back panel), one at a time, to identify the defective printed circuit
board.
Replace the CPU card, motherboard, and other printed circuit boards, one
at a time.
339
7.34
ALARM 974
(F–BUS ERROR)
Causes and actions A bus error occurred on the FANUC–BUS connecting each option board.
This alarm indicates that a fault occurred during the exchange of data
between the main CPU and an option board.
D Replacing the CPU card Replace the CPU card on the motherboard.
D Replacing the Replace the motherboard.

motherboard
D Replacing the option Replace the installed option boards, one at a time.
boards
D Replacing the back panel Replace the back panel.
340
the CPU card
CPU card
Motherboard
CPU card
Main CPU board
341
D F–BUS error on an If alarm 972 is issued, indicating on the screen that an F–BUS error
option board occurred on an option board, replace the CPU card on the option board
on which the F–BUS error occurred or the option board itself.
In this case, the back panel or motherboard may be defective. Take the
actions described on the previous page.
SYSTEM ALARM
SLOT 01
974 FĆBUS ERROR <SUB
342
7.35
ALARM 975
(BUS ERROR)
Causes and actions A bus error occurred on the motherboard. This alarm indicates that an
error occurred during the exchange of data within the motherboard.
D Replacing the CPU card Replace the CPU card on the motherboard.
D Replacing other cards Replace the display control card, axis control cards, and FROM/SRAM
and modules module, one at time.

motherboard
D BUS error on an option If alarm 972 is issued, indicating on the screen that a BUS error occurred
board on an option board, replace the CPU card on the option card, DRAM
module, axis control cards, and option card, one at a time.
SYSTEM ALARM
SLOT 01
975 FĆBUS ERROR <SUB
343
7.36
ALARM 976
(LOCAL BUS ERROR)
Causes and actions A bus error occurred on the local bus on the motherboard.
This alarm indicates that an error occurred during the exchange of data
within the motherboard.
D Replacing the CPU card Replace the CPU card on the motherboard (main CPU board).
D Replacing other cards Replace the display control card, axis control cards, and FROM/SRAM
and modules module, one at a time.

motherboard
D Local BUS error on an If alarm 972 is issued, indicating on the screen that a local BUS error
option board occurred on an option board, replace the CPU card on the option card,
DRAM module, axis control cards, and option card, one at a time.
SYSTEM ALARM
SLOT 01
976 LĆBUS ERROR <SUB
344
7.37 For an explanation of the following servo alarms, refer to the FANUC
SERVO MOTOR α Series Maintenance Manual (B–65165E).
SERVO ALARMS
Number Message Contents
417 n–TH AXIS–PARAMETER INCORRECT The setting of a servo–related parameter is incorrect.
430 n AXIS: SV. MOTOR OVERHEAT A servo motor overheat occurred.
431 n AXIS: CNV. OVERLAOD PSM: Overheat occurred.
432 n AXIS: CNV. LOWVOLT CON./ PSM: Phase missing occurred in the input voltage.
POWERFAULT PSMR: The control power supply voltage has dropped.
433 n AXIS: CNV. LOW VOLT DC LINK PSM: The DC link voltage has dropped.
PSMR: The DC link voltage has dropped.
434 n AXIS: INV. LOW VOLT CONTROL SVM: The control power supply voltage has dropped.
435 n AXIS: INV. LOW VOLT DC LINK SVM: The DC link voltage has dropped.
436 n AXIS: SOFTTHERMAL (OVC) The digital servo software detected the soft thermal state (OVC).
437 n AXIS: CNV. OVERCURRENT POWER PSM: Overcurrent flowed into the input circuit.
438 n AXIS: INV. ABNORMAL CURRENT SVM: The motor current is too high.
439 n AXIS: CNV. OVERVOLT POWER PSM: The DC link voltage is too high.
440 n AXIS: CNV. EX DECELERATION POW. PSMR: The regenerative discharge amount is too large.
441 n AXIS: ABNORMAL CURRENT OFFSET The digital servo software detected an abnormality in the motor
current detection circuit.
442 n AXIS: CNV. CHARGE FAULT/INV. DB PSM: The spare discharge circuit of the DC link is abnormal.
PSMR: The spare discharge circuit of the DC link is abnormal.
443 n AXIS: CONV. COOLING FAN FAILURE PSM: The internal stirring fan failed.
PSMR: The internal stirring fan failed.
444 n AXIS: INV. COOLING FAN FAILURE SVM: The internal stirring fan failed.
445 n AXIS: SOFT DISCONNECT ALARM The digital servo software detected a broken wire in the pulse
coder.
446 n AXIS: HARD DISCONNECT ALARM A broken wire in the built–in pulse coder was detected by
hardware.
If the hardware on the CNC is suspected to be defective as a result of

examination, replace the axis control cards.
345
Axis control card
Motherboard
Axis control card
Sub–CPU board
Axis control card
Loader control card
346
Axis control card
347
7.38 For an explanation of the following SPC alarms (serial pulse coder
alarms), refer to the FANUC SERVO MOTOR α Series Maintenance
SPC ALARMS Manual (B–65165E).
360 n AXIS: ABNORMAL CHECKSUM (INT) A checksum error occurred in the built–in pulse coder.
361 n AXIS: ABNORMAL PHASE DATA (INT) A phase data error occurred in the built–in pulse coder.
362 n AXIS: ABNORMAL REV. DATA (INT) A rotation speed count error occurred in the built–in pulse coder.
363 n AXIS: ABNOMAL CLOCK (INT) A clock error occurred in the built–in pulse coder.
364 n AXIS: SOFT PHASE ALARM (INT) The digital servo software detected invalid data in the built–in
pulse coder.
365 n AXIS: BROKEN LED (INT) An LED error occurred in the built–in pulse coder.
366 n AXIS: PULSE MISS (INT) An LED error occurred in the built–in pulse coder.
367 n AXIS: COUNT MISS (INT) A count error occurred in the built–in pulse coder.
368 n AXIS: SERIAL DATA ERROR (INT) Communication data from the built–in pulse coder cannot be
received.
369 n AXIS: DATA TRANS. ERROR (INT) A CRC or stop bit error occurred in the communication data being
received from the built–in pulse coder.
348
APPENDIX
B–63665EN/01 APPENDIX A. ALARM LIST
A ALARM LIST
A.1 LIST OF ALARM CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352

A.2 LIST OF ALARMS (PMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
A.3 ALARM LIST (SERIAL SPINDLE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
A.4 ERROR CODES (SERIAL SPINDLE) . . . . . . . . . . . 396
351
A. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–63665EN/01
A.1
LIST OF ALARM
CODES
1) Program errors (P/S alarm)
000 PLEASE TURN OFF POWER A parameter which requires the power off was input, turn off power.
001 TH PARITY ALARM TH alarm (A character with incorrect parity was input). Correct the tape.
002 TV PARITY ALARM TV alarm (The number of characters in a block is odd). This alarm will
be generated only when the TV check is effective.
003 TOO MANY DIGITS Data exceeding the maximum allowable number of digits was input.
(Refer to the item of max. programmable dimensions.)
004 ADDRESS NOT FOUND A numeral or the sign “ – ” was input without an address at the beginning
of a block. Modify the program .
005 NO DATA AFTER ADDRESS The address was not followed by the appropriate data but was followed
by another address or EOB code. Modify the program.
006 ILLEGAL USE OF NEGATIVE SIGN Sign “ .” input error (Sign “ – ” was input after an address with which it
cannot be used. Or two or more “ – ” signs were input.)
Modify the program.
007 ILLEGAL USE OF DECIMAL POINT Decimal point “ – ” input error (A decimal point was input after an address
with which it can not be used. Or two decimal points were input.)
Modify the program.
009 ILLEGAL ADDRESS INPUT Unusable character was input in significant area.
Modify the program.
010 IMPROPER G–CODE An unusable G code or G code corresponding to the function not pro-
vided is specified. Modify the program.
011 NO FEEDRATE COMMANDED Feedrate was not commanded to a cutting feed or the feedrate was in-
adequate. Modify the program.
015 TOO MANY AXES COMMANDED The number of the commanded axes exceeded that of simultaneously
controlled axes.
020 OVER TOLERANCE OF RADIUS In circular interpolation (G02 or G03), difference of the distance between
the start point and the center of an arc and that between the end point
and the center of the arc exceeded the value specified in parameter No.
3410.
021 ILLEGAL PLANE AXIS COMMAN- An axis not included in the selected plane (by using G17, G18, G19) was
DED commanded in circular interpolation. Modify the program.
022 NO CIRCULAR RADIUS When circular interpolation is specified, neither R (specifying an arc ra-
dius), nor I, J, and K (specifying the distance from a start point to the cen-
ter) is specified.
025 CANNOT COMMAND F0 IN F0 (fast feed) was instructed by F1 –digit column feed in circular inter-
G02/G03 polation. Modify the program.
028 ILLEGAL PLANE SELECT In the plane selection command, two or more axes in the same direction
are commanded.
Modify the program.
029 ILLEGAL OFFSET VALUE The offset values specified by H code is too large.
Modify the program.
030 ILLEGAL OFFSET NUMBER The offset number specified by D/H code for cutter compensation is too
large. Alternatively, the number of the additional workpiece coordinate
system specified by a P code is too large. Modify the program.
031 ILLEGAL P COMMAND IN G10 In setting an offset amount by G10, the offset number following address
P was excessive or it was not specified.
Modify the program.
032 ILLEGAL OFFSET VALUE IN G10 In setting an offset amount by G10 or in writing an offset amount by sys-
tem variables, the offset amount was excessive.
033 NO SOLUTION AT CRC A point of intersection cannot be determined for cutter compensation C.
Modify the program.
034 NO CIRC ALLOWED IN ST–UP / The start up or cancel was going to be performed in the G02 or G03
EXT BLK mode in cutter compensation C. Modify the program.
352

036 CAN NOT COMMANDED G31 Skip cutting (G31) was specified in cutter compensation mode.
Modify the program.
037 CAN NOT CHANGE PLANE IN CRC The plane selected by using G17, G18 or G19 is changed in cutter com-
pensation C mode. Modify the program.
038 INTERFERENCE IN CIRCULAR Overcutting will occur in cutter compensation C because the arc start
BLOCK point or end point coincides with the arc center.
Modify the program.
041 INTERFERENCE IN CRC Overcutting will occur in cutter compensation C. Two or more blocks
are consecutively specified in which functions such as the auxiliary
function and dwell functions are performed without movement in the cut-
ter compensation mode. Modify the program.
042 G45/G48 NOT ALLOWED IN CRC Tool offset (G45 to G48) is commanded in cutter compensation. Modify
the program.
046 ILLEGAL REFERENCE RETURN Other than P2, P3 and P4 are commanded for 2nd, 3rd and 4th refer-
COMMAND ence position return command.
051 MISSING MOVE AFTER CHF/CNR Improper movement or the move distance was specified in the block
next to the chamfering or corner R block.
Modify the program.
052 CODE IS NOT G01 AFTER CHF/ The block next to the chamfering or corner R block is not G01,G02,or
CNR G03. Modify the program.
053 TOO MANY ADDRESS COM- For systems without the arbitary angle chamfering or corner R cutting,
MANDS a comma was specified. For systems with this feature, a comma was fol-
lowed by something other than R or C Correct the program.
055 MISSING MOVE VALUE IN CHF/ In the arbitrary angle chamfering or corner R block, the move distance
CNR is less than chamfer or corner R amount.
Alternatively, an arc end–point command has been omitted.
058 END POINT NOT FOUND In a arbitrary angle chamfering or corner R cutting block, a specified axis
is not in the selected plane. Correct the program.
059 PROGRAM NUMBER NOT FOUND In an external program number search, a specified program number
was not found. Otherwise, a program specified for searching is being
edited in background processing. Check the program number and ex-
ternal signal. Or discontinue the background eiting.
060 SEQUENCE NUMBER NOT FOUND Commanded sequence number was not found in the sequence number
search. Check the sequence number.
070 NO PROGRAM SPACE IN The memory area is insufficient.
MEMORY Delete any unnecessary programs, then retry.
071 DATA NOT FOUND The address to be searched was not found. Or the program with speci-
fied program number was not found in program number search.
Check the data.
072 TOO MANY PROGRAMS The number of programs to be stored exceeded 125 (basic), 200 (op-
tion), 400 (option), or 1000 (option). Delete unnecessary programs and
execute program registeration again.
073 PROGRAM NUMBER ALREADY IN The commanded program number has already been used.
USE Change the program number or delete unnecessary programs and
execute program registeration again.
074 ILLEGAL PROGRAM NUMBER The program number is other than 1 to 9999.
Modify the program number.
075 PROTECT An attempt was made to register a program whose number was pro-
tected.
076 ADDRESS P NOT DEFINED Address P (program number) was not commanded in the block which
includes an M98, G65, or G66 command. Modify the program.
077 SUB PROGRAM NESTING ERROR The subprogram was called in five folds. Modify the program.
078 NUMBER NOT FOUND A program number or a sequence number which was specified by ad-
dress P in the block which includes an M98, M99, M65 or G66 was not
found. The sequence number specified by a GOTO statement was not
found. Otherwise, a called program is being edited in background pro-
cessing. Correct the program, or discontinue the background editing.
079 PROGRAM VERIFY ERROR In memory or program collation,a program in memory does not agree
with that read from an external I/O device. Check both the programs in
memory and those from the external device.
353

085 COMMUNICATION ERROR When entering data in the memory by using Reader / Puncher interface,
an overrun, parity or framing error was generated. The number of bits
of input data or setting of baud rate or specification No. of I/O unit is in-
correct.
086 DR SIGNAL OFF When entering data in the memory by using Reader / Puncher interface,
the ready signal (DR) of reader / puncher was off.
Power supply of I/O unit is off or cable is not connected or a P.C.B. is de-
fective.
087 BUFFER OVERFLOW When entering data in the memory by using Reader / Puncher interface,
though the read terminate command is specified, input is not interrupted
after 10 characters read. I/O unit or P.C.B. is defective.
088 LAN FILE TRANS ERROR File data transfer over the OSI–Ethernet was terminated as a result of
(CHANNEL–1) a transfer error.
089 LAN FILE TRANS ERROR File data transfer over the OSI–Ethernet was terminated as a result of
(CHANNEL–2) a transfer error.
090 REFERENCE RETURN INCOM- The reference position return cannot be performed normally because
PLETE the reference position return start point is too close to the reference posi-
tion or the speed is too slow. Separate the start point far enough from
the reference position, or specify a sufficiently fast speed for reference
position return.
091 REFERENCE RETURN INCOM- In the automatic operation halt state, manual reference position return
PLETE cannot be performed.
092 AXES NOT ON THE REFERENCE The commanded axis by G27 (Reference position return check) did not
POINT return to the reference position.
094 P TYPE NOT ALLOWED (COORD P type cannot be specified when the program is restarted. (After the au-
CHG) tomatic operation was interrupted, the coordinate system setting opera-
tion was performed.) Perform the correct operation according to th oper-
ator’s manual.
095 P TYPE NOT ALLOWED (EXT OFS P type cannot be specified when the program is restarted. (After the
CHG) automatic operation was interrupted, the external workpiece offset
amount changed.)
096 P TYPE NOT ALLOWED (WRK OFS P type cannot be specified when the program is restarted. (After the au-
CHG) tomatic operation was interrupted, the workpiece offset amount
changed.)
097 P TYPE NOT ALLOWED (AUTO P type cannot be directed when the program is restarted. (After power
EXEC) ON, after emergency stop or P/S alarm 94 to 97 were reset, no
automatic operation is performed.) Perform automatic operation.
098 G28 FOUND IN SEQUENCE RE- A command of the program restart was specified without the reference
TURN position return operation after power ON or emergency stop, and G28
was found during search. Perform the reference position return.
099 MDI EXEC NOT ALLOWED AFT. After completion of search in program restart, a move command is given
SEARCH with MDI.
100 PARAMETER WRITE ENABLE On the PARAMETER(SETTING) screen, PWE(parameter writing en-
abled) is set to 1. Set it to 0, then reset the system.
101 PLEASE CLEAR MEMORY The power turned off while rewriting the memory by program edit opera-
tion. If this alarm has occurred, press <RESET> while pressing
<PROG>, and only the program being edited will be deleted.
Register the deleted program.
109 FORMAT ERROR IN G08 A value other than 0 or 1 was specified after P in the G08 code, or no
value was specified.
110 DATA OVERFLOW The absolute value of fixed decimal point display data exceeds the al-
lowable range. Modify the program.
111 CALCULATED DATA OVERFLOW The result of calculation is out of the allowable range (–1047 to –10–29,
0, and 10–29 to 1047).
112 DIVIDED BY ZERO Division by zero was specified. (including tan 90°)
113 IMPROPER COMMAND A function which cannot be used in custom macro is commanded.
Modify the program.
114 FORMAT ERROR IN MACRO There is an error in other formats than <Formula>.
Modify the program.
354

115 ILLEGAL VARIABLE NUMBER A value not defined as a variable number is designated in the custom
macro or in high–speed cycle cutting.
The header contents are improper in a high–speed cycle cutting. This
alarm is given in the following cases:
1. The header corresponding to the specified machining cycle number
called is not found.
2. The cycle connection data value is out of the allowable range
(0 – 999).
3. The number of data in the header is out of the allowable range
(0 – 32767).
4. The start data variable number of executable format data is out of
the allowable range (#20000 – #85535).
5. The storing data variable number of executable format data is out of
the allowable range (#85535).
6. The storing start data variable number of executable format datais
overlapped with the variable number used in the header.
Modify the program.
116 WRITE PROTECTED VARIABLE The left side of substitution statement is a variable whose substitution
is inhibited. Modify the program.
118 PARENTHESIS NESTING ERROR The nesting of bracket exceeds the upper limit (quintuple).
Modify the program.
119 ILLEGAL ARGUMENT The SQRT argument is negative, BCD argument is negative, or other
values than 0 to 9 are present on each line of BIN argument.
Modify the program.
122 QUADRUPLICATE MACRO A total of four macro calls and macro modal calls are nested. Correct
MODAL–CALL the program.
123 CAN NOT USE MACRO COMMAND Macro control command is used during DNC operation.
IN DNC Modify the program.
124 MISSING END STATEMENT DO – END does not correspond to 1 : 1. Modify the program.
125 FORMAT ERROR IN MACRO <Formula> format is erroneous. Modify the program.
126 ILLEGAL LOOP NUMBER In DOn, 1x n x3 is not established. Modify the program.
127 NC, MACRO STATEMENT IN SAME NC and custom macro commands coexist.
BLOCK Modify the program.
128 ILLEGAL MACRO SEQUENCE The sequence number specified in the branch command was not 0 to
NUMBER 9999. Or, it cannot be searched. Modify the program.
129 ILLEGAL ARGUMENT ADDRESS An address which is not allowed in <Argument Designation > is used.
Modify the program.
130 ILLEGAL AXIS OPERATION An axis control command was given by PMC to an axis controlled by
CNC. Or an axis control command was given by CNC to an axis con-
trolled by PMC. Modify the program.
131 TOO MANY EXTERNAL ALARM Five or more alarms have generated in external alarm message.
MESSAGES Consult the PMC ladder diagram to find the cause.
132 ALARM NUMBER NOT FOUND No alarm No. concerned exists in external alarm message clear.
Check the PMC ladder diagram.
133 ILLEGAL DATA IN EXT. ALARM Small section data is erroneous in external alarm message or external
MSG operator message. Check the PMC ladder diagram.
138 SUPERIMPOSED DATA In PMC–based axis control, the increment for pulse distribution on the
OVERFLOW CNC and PMC side are too large when the superimposed control ex-
tended function is used.
139 CAN NOT CHANGE PMC CON- An axis is selected in commanding by PMC axis control.
TROL AXIS Modify the program.
141 CAN NOT COMMAND G51 IN CRC G51 (Scaling ON) is commanded in the tool offset mode.
Modify the program.
142 ILLEGAL SCALE RATE Scaling magnification is commanded in other than 1 – 999999.
Correct the scaling magnification setting (G51 Pp . . or parameter
5411 or 5421).
143 SCALED MOTION DATA OVER- The scaling results, move distance, coordinate value and circular radius
FLOW exceed the maximum command value. Correct the program or scaling
mangification.
355

144 ILLEGAL PLANE SELECTED The coordinate rotation plane and arc or cutter compensation C plane
must be the same. Modify the program.
145 ILLEGAL CONDITIONS IN POLAR The conditions are incorrect when the polar coordinate interpolation
COORDINATE INTERPOLATION starts or it is canceled.
1) In modes other than G40, G12.1/G13.1 was specified.
2) An error is found in the plane selection. Parameters No. 5460 and
No. 5461 are incorrectly specified.
Modify the value of program or parameter.
146 IMPROPER G CODE G codes which cannot be specified in the polar coordinate interpolation
mode was specified. See section polar coordinate interpolation and
modify the program.
148 ILLEGAL SETTING DATA Automatic corner override deceleration rate is out of the settable range
of judgement angle. Modify the parameters (No.1710 to No.1714)
160 G72.1 NESTING ERROR Code G72.1 was specified in a sub–program after the same code had
already been specified for copying with rotation.
161 G72.2 NESTING ERROR Code G72.2 was specified in a sub–program after the same code had
already been specified for parallel copying.
175 ILLEGAL G107 COMMAND Conditions when performing cylindrical interpolation start or cancel not
correct. To change the mode to the cylindrical interpolation mode, spec-
ify the command in a format of “G07.1 rotation–axis name radius of cylin-
der.”
176 IMPROPER G–CODE IN G107 Any of the following G codes which cannot be specified in the cylindrical
interpolation mode was specified.
1) G codes for positioning, such as G28 including the codes specifying
the rapid traverse cycle
2) G codes for setting a coordinate system: G52,G92,
3) G code for selecting coordinate system: G53 G54–G59
Modify the program.
177 CHECK SUM ERROR Check sum error
(G05 MODE) Modify the program.
178 G05 COMMANDED IN G41/G42 G05 was commanded in the G41/G42 mode.
MODE Correct the program.
179 PARAM. (PRM NO. 7510) SETTING The number of controlled axes set by the parameter 7510 exceeds the
ERROR maximum number. Modify the parameter setting value.
180 COMMUNICATION ERROR Remote buffer connection alarm has generated. Confirm the number of
(REMOTE BUF) cables, parameters and I/O device.
199 MACRO WORD UNDEFINED Undefined macro word was used. Modify the custom macro.
210 CAN NOT COMAND M198/M99 1) M198 and M99 are executed in the schedule operation. Or M198
is executed in the DNC operation.
2) In a multiple repetitive pocketing canned cycle, an interrupt macro
was specified, and M99 was executed.
212 ILLEGAL PLANE SELECT The arbitrary angle chamfering or a corner R is commanded or the plane
including an additional axis. Correct the program.
213 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN SYN- Any of the following alarms occurred in the operation with the simple
CHRO–MODE synchronization control.
1) The program issued the move command to the slave axis.
2) The program issued the manual continuous feed/manual handle
feed/incremental feed command to the slave axis.
3) The program issued the automatic reference position return com-
mand without executing the manual reference position return after
the power was turned on.
4) The difference between the position error amount of the master and
slave axes exceeded the value specified in parameter No. 8313.
214 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN SYN- Coordinate system is set or cutter compensation of the shift type is
CHRO–MODE executed in the synchronous control. Correct the program.
222 DNC OP. NOT ALLOWED IN BG.– Input and output are executed at a time in the background edition.
EDIT Execute a correct operation.
224 RETURN TO REFERENCE POINT Reference position return has not been performed before the automatic
operation starts. Perform reference position return only when parameter
ZRNX (No.1005#0) is 0.
356

231 ILLEGAL FORMAT IN G10 OR L50 Any of the following errors occurred in the specified format at the
programmable–parameter input.
1) Address N or R was not entered.
2) A number not specified for a parameter was entered.
3) The axis number was too large.
4) An axis number was not specified in the axis–type parameter.
5) An axis number was specified in the parameter which is not an axis
type.
6) An attempt was made to reset bit 4 of parameter 3202 (NE9) or
change parameter 3210 (PSSWD) when they are protected by a
password. Correct the program.
232 TOO MANY HELICAL AXIS COM- Three or more axes (in the normal direction control mode two or more
MANDS axes) were specified as helical axes in the helical interpolation mode.
233 DEVICE BUSY When an attempt was made to use a unit such as that connected via the
RS–232–C interface, other users were using it.
239 BP/S ALARM While punching was being performed with the function for controlling ex-
ternal I/O units ,background editing was performed.
240 BP/S ALARM Background editing was performed during MDI operation.
4000 P/S ALARM Although the end of a record is reached, the near point is not found
during near point search. ”END OF RECORD” was read during pro-
gram restart (laser specification).
4001 P/S ALARM The Z–axis is specified as the tracing axis during near point search or
program restart (laser specification).
4002 G CODE UNAVAILABLE DURING G53 is specified in independent axis mode (bit 3 of PRM. 15600, MIA
SEARCH = 1) during near point search or program restart (laser specification).
4004 THREE–DIMENSIONAL COORDI- One or two of the I, J, and K commands are not specified or a com-
NATE CONVERSION ALARM mand for the X, Y, Z, 4, or 5 axis is not specified.
4005 THREE–DIMENSIONAL COORDI- G27, G28, or G29 was issued during three–dimensional coordinate
NATE CONVERSION ALARM conversion.
4006 THREE–DIMENSIONAL COORDI- G68 was issued again during three–dimensional coordinate conver-
NATE CONVERSION ALARM sion.
4007 THREE–DIMENSIONAL COORDI- G12 (spatial circular interpolation) was issued during three–dimen-
NATE CONVERSION ALARM sional coordinate conversion.
4008 THREE–DIMENSIONAL COORDI- Scaling or coordinate rotation was specified during three–dimension-
NATE CONVERSION ALARM al coordinate conversion.
4010 THREE–DIMENSIONAL TRANS- The G98 command format is invalid.
FORM FORMAT ERROR
4011 MATRIX TRANSFORM ERROR No matrix can be created during G98 processing.
4012 COORDINATE CONVERSION ER- Coordinate conversion cannot be performed for G98.
ROR
4016 P/S ALARM The value of arc radius R specified in G33 mode is too large.
4017 P/S ALARM A G code in group 01 other than G01 was issued in G33 mode. Cut-
ter compensation was specified in G33 mode.
4021 P/S ALARM A negative value is specified as the length of the nozzle. The nozzle
length falls outside the specification range. The total of the second
arm length and nozzle length must be a maximum of 500 mm
(19.685 inches).
4025 P/S ALARM The spatial arc or spatial corner rounding command specifies axis
movement for an axis other than the first to fifth axes.
4700 PROGRAM ERROR (OT +) The value specified in the X-axis move command exceeded the posi-
tive value of stored stroke limit 1. (Advance check)
4701 PROGRAM ERROR (OT –) The value specified in the X-axis move command exceeded the neg-
ative value of stored stroke limit 1. (Advance check)
4702 PROGRAM ERROR (OT +) The value specified in the Y-axis move command exceeded the posi-
357

4703 PROGRAM ERROR (OT –) The value specified in the Y-axis move command exceeded the neg-
4704 PROGRAM ERROR (OT +) The value specified in the Z-axis move command exceeded the posi-
4705 PROGRAM ERROR (OT –) The value specified in the Z-axis move command exceeded the neg-
5000 ILLEGAL COMMAND CODE The specified code was incorrect in the high–precision contour con-
trol (HPCC) mode.
(HPCC: High–precision contour control)
5003 ILLEGAL PARAMETER (HPCC) The parameter setting is incorrect.
5004 HPCC NOT READY High–precision contour control is not ready.
5006 TOO MANY WORD IN ONE BLOCK The number of words specified in a block exceeded 26 in the HPCC
mode.
5007 TOO LARGE DISTANCE In the HPCC mode, the machine moved beyond the limit.
5009 PARAMETER ZERO (DRY RUN) The maximum feedrate (parameter No. 1422) or the feedrate in dry
run (parameter No. 1410) is 0 in the HPCC mode.
5010 END OF RECORD The end of record (%) was specified.
5011 PARAMETER ZERO(CUT MAX) The maximum cutting feedrate (parameter No. 1422) is 0.
5012 G05 P10000 ILLEGAL START UP G05 P10000 has been specified in a mode from which HPCC mode
(HPCC) cannot be entered.
5013 HPCC:CRC OFS REMAIN AT G05P0 has been specified in G41/G42 mode or before cancellation
CANCEL axis is not found.
5014 TRACE DATA NOT FOUND Trace data is not available, preventing transfer from being performed.
5016 ILLEGAL COMBINATION OF M M codes which belonged to the same group were specified in a
CODE block. Alternatively,an M code which must be specified without other
M codes in the block was specified in a block with other M codes.
5020 PARAMETER OF RESTART The parameter for specifying program restart is not set correctly.
ERROR
5046 ILLEGAL PARAMETER (ST.COMP) An illegal parameter has been specified for straightness compensa-
tion.
Possible reasons are as follows:
1 There is no axis corresponding to the axis number specified in the
move axis or compensation axis parameter.
2 More than 128 pitch error compensation points are not sequentially
numbered.
3 The straightness compensation points are not sequentially num-
bered.
4 A specified straightness compensation point is outside the range
between the pitch error compensation points having the maximum
positive and negative coordinates.
5 The compensation value specified for each compensation point is
too large or too small.
5051 M–NET CODE ERROR When the chopping function is used, a move command was specified
for a chopping axis in chopping mode (during reciprocation between
a top dead point and bottom dead point).
5052 M–NET ETX ERROR “ETX” code is abnormal.
5053 M–NET CONNECT ERROR Connection time supervision error (parameter No.175)
5054 M–NET RECEIVE ERROR Boring time supervision error (parameter No.176)
5055 M–NET PRT/FRM ERROR Vertical parity or framing error detection
358

5057 M–NET BOARD SYSTEM DOWN Transmit time–out error (parameter No. 177)
ROM parity error
CPU interruption detection of not listed above
5059 RADIUS VALUE OUTSIDE ALLOW- When the center of the arc was specified by I, J, and K for circular
ABLE RANGE interpolation, the length of the radius value exceeded nine digits.
5063 IS NOT PRESET AFTER REF. This message is output when the position counter has not been
preset before the start of plate thickness measurement. This alarm is
issued in one of the cases below.
1) When an attempt was made to perform measurement before a refer-
ence position had been established.
2) When, after manual reference position return, an attempt was made
to start measurement without first setting the position counter.
5064 DIFFERRENT AXIS UNIT Circular interpolation was specified for a plane formed by axes using
(IS–B, IS–C) different increment systems.
5065 DIFFERRENT AXIS UNIT In PMC–based axis control, axes using different increment systems
(PMC AXIS) are specified for the same DI/DO group. Modify parameter No. 8010.
5068 G31 P90 FORMAT ERROR No axis is specified for movement.
Two or more axes were specified for movement.
5073 NO DECIMAL POINT A decimal point is not specified for a command for which a decimal
point must be specified.
5074 ADDRESS DUPLICATION ERROR The same address appears more than once in a block. Alternatively,
a block contains two or more G codes belonging to the same group.
5082 DATA SERVER ERROR Details are displayed on the data server message screen.
5110 IMPROPER G–CODE An illegal G code was specified in AI contour control mode.
(G05.1 G1 MODE)
5111 IMPROPER MODAL G–CODE An illegal G code is left modal when AI contour control mode was speci-
(G05.1 G1) fied.
5112 G08 CAN NOT BE COMMANDED Look–ahead control (G08) was specified in AI contour control mode.
(G05.1 G1)
5113 CAN NOT ERROR IN MDI MODE AI contour control (G05.1) was specified in MDI mode.
(G05.1)
5114 NOT STOP POSITION At the time of restart after manual intervention, the coordinates at which
(G05.1 Q1) the manual intervention occurred have not been restored.
5134 FSSB : OPEN READY TIME OUT Initialization did not place FSSB in the open ready state.
5135 FSSB : ERROR MODE FSSB has entered error mode.
5136 FSSB : NUMBER OF AMPS IS In comparison with the number of controlled axes, the number of amplifi-
SMALL ers recognized by FSSB is not enough.
5137 FSSB : CONFIGURATION ERROR FSSB detected a configuration error.
5138 FSSB : AXIS SETTING NOT COM- In automatic setting mode, axis setting has not been made yet.
PLETE Perform axis setting on the FSSB setting screen.
5139 FSSB : ERROR Servo initialization did not terminate normally.
The optical cable may be defective, or there may be an error in connec-
tion to the amplifier or another module.
Check the optical cable and the connection status.
5156 ILLEGAL AXIS OPERATION In AICC mode, the controlled axis selection signal (PMC axis control)
(AICC) changes.
In AICC mode, the simple synchronous axis selection signal changes.
(AICC: AI contour control)
5157 PARAMETER ZERO (AICC) Zero is set in the parameter for the maximum cutting feedrate (parame-
ter No. 1422 or 1432).
Zero is set in the parameter for the acceleration/deceleration before in-
terpolation (parameter No. 1770 or 1771).
Set the parameter correctly.
(AICC: AI contour control)
359

5196 ILLEGAL OPERATION (HPCC) Detach operation was performed in HPCC mode. (If detach operation
is performed in HPCC mode, this alarm is issued after the currently
executed block terminates.)
5197 FSSB : OPEN TIME OUT The CNC permitted FSSB to open, but FSSB was not opened.
5198 FSSB : ID DATA NOT READ Temporary assignment failed, so amplifier initial ID information could not
be read.
5199 FINE TORQUE SENSING PARAME- A parameter related to the fine torque sensing function is illegal.
TER · The storage interval is invalid.
· An invalid axis number is set as the target axis.
Correct the parameter.
5212 SCREEN COPY : PARAMETER ER- There is a parameter setting error. Check that 4 is set as the I/O channel.
ROR
5213 SCREEN COPY : COMMUNICA- The memory card cannot be used. Check the memory card. (Check
TION ERROR whether the memory card is write–protected or defective.)
5214 SCREEN COPY : DATA TRANSFER Data transfer to the memory card failed.
ERROR Check whether the memory card space is insufficient and whether the
memory card was removed during data transfer.
5218 ILLEGAL PARAMETER (INCL. There is an inclination compensation parameter setting error.
COMP) Cause:
1. The number of pitch error compensation points between the nega-
tive (–) end and positive (+) end exceeds 128.
2. The relationship in magnitude among the inclination compensation
point numbers is incorrect.
3. An inclination compensation point is not located between the nega-
tive (–) end and positive (+) end of the pitch error compensation
points.
4. The amount of compensation per compensation point is too large or
too small.
Correct the parameter.
5220 REFERENCE POINT ADJUST- A parameter for automatically set a reference position is set. (Bit 2 of
MENT MODE parameter No. 1819 = 1)
Perform automatic setting.
(Position the machine at the reference position manually, then perform
manual reference position return.)
Supplementary: Automatic setting sets bit 2 of parameter No. 1819 to
0.
5222 SRAM CORRECTABLE ERROR The SRAM correctable error cannot be corrected.
Cause:
A memory problem occurred during memory initialization.
Action:
Replace the master printed circuit board (SRAM module).
5227 FILE NOT FOUND A specified file is not found during communication with the built–in
Handy File.
5228 SAME NAME USED There are duplicate file names in the built–in Handy File.
5229 WRITE PROTECTED A floppy disk in the built–in Handy File is write protected.
5231 TOO MANY FILES The number of files exceeds the limit during communication with the
built–in Handy File.
5232 DATA OVER–FLOW There is not enough floppy disk space in the built–in Handy File.
5235 COMMUNICATION ERROR A communication error occurred during communication with the built–in
Handy File.
360

5237 READ ERROR A floppy disk in the built–in Handy File cannot be read from. The floppy
disk may be defective, or the head may be dirty. Alternatively, the Handy
File is defective.
5238 WRITE ERROR A floppy disk in the built–in Handy File cannot be written to. The floppy
disk may be defective, or the head may be dirty. Alternatively, the Handy
File is defective.
5242 ILLEGAL AXIS NUMBER The axis number of the synchronous master axis or slave axis is incor-
(M series) rect. (This alarm is issued when flexible synchronization is turned on.)
Alternatively, the axis number of the slave axis is smaller than that of the
master axis.
5303 TOUCH PANEL ERROR A touch panel error occurred.
Cause:
1. The touch panel is kept pressed.
2. The touch panel was pressed when power was turned on.
Remove the above causes, and turn on the power again.
5307 INTERNAL DATA OVER FLOW In the following function, internal data exceeds the allowable range.
1) Improvement of the rotation axis feedrate
2) Background edit alarm

??? BP/S alarm BP/S alarm occurs in the same number as the P/S alarm that occurs in
ordinary program edit.
(P/S alarm No. 070, 071, 072, 073, 074, 085 to 087)
Modify the program.
140 BP/S alarm It was attempted to select or delete in the background a program being
selected in the foreground. (NOTE)
Use background editing correctly.
NOTE
Alarm in background edit is displayed in the key input line of the background edit screen instead
of the ordinary alarm screen and is resettable by any of the MDI key operation.
3) Absolute pulse coder (APC) alarm

300 nth–axis origin return Manual reference position return is required for the nth–axis (n=1 to 8).
301 APC alarm: nth–axis communication nth–axis (n=1 to 8) APC communication error. Failure in data transmis-
sion
Possible causes include a faulty APC, cable, or servo interface module.
302 APC alarm: nth–axis over time nth–axis (n=1 to 8) APC overtime error.
Failure in data transmission.
303 APC alarm: nth–axis framing nth–axis (n=1 to 8) APC framing error. Failure in data transmission.
304 APC alarm: nth–axis parity nth–axis (n=1 to 8) APC parity error.
Failure in data transmission.
305 APC alarm: nth–axis pulse error nth–axis (n=1 to 8) APC pulse error alarm.
APC alarm.APC or cable may be faulty.
306 APC alarm: nth–axis battery voltage nth–axis (n=1 to 8) APC battery voltage has decreased to a low level so
0 that the data cannot be held.
APC alarm. Battery or cable may be faulty.
361

307 APC alarm: nth–axis battery low 1 nth–axis (n=1 to 8) axis APC battery voltage reaches a level where the
battery must be renewed.
APC alarm. Replace the battery.
308 APC alarm: nth–axis battery low 2 nth–axis (n=1 to 8) APC battery voltage has reached a level where the
battery must be renewed (including when power is OFF).
APC alarm .Replace battery.
309 APC ALARM : n AXIS ZRN An attempt was made to perform reference position return without rotat-
IMPOSSIBL ing the motor through one or more turns. Rotate the motor through one
or more turns, turn off the power then on again, then perform reference
position return.
4) Serial pulse coder (SPC) alarms

When either of the following alarms is issued, a possible cause is a faulty serial pulse coder or cable.
Number Message Description
360 n AXIS : ABNORMAL CHECKSUM A checksum error occurred in the built–in pulse coder.
(INT)
361 n AXIS : ABNORMAL PHASE DATA A phase data error occurred in the built–in pulse coder.
(INT)
362 n AXIS : ABNORMAL REV.DATA A rotation speed count error occurred in the built–in pulse coder.
(INT)
363 n AXIS : ABNORMAL CLOCK (INT) A clock error occurred in the built–in pulse coder.
364 n AXIS : SOFT PHASE ALARM (INT) The digital servo software detected invalid data in the built–in pulse
coder.
365 n AXIS : BROKEN LED (INT) An LED error occurred in the built–in pulse coder.
366 n AXIS : PULSE MISS (INT) A pulse error occurred in the built–in pulse coder.
367 n AXIS : COUNT MISS (INT) A count error occurred in the built–in pulse coder.
368 n AXIS : SERIAL DATA ERROR Communication data from the built–in pulse coder cannot be re-
(INT) ceived.
369 n AXIS : DATA TRANS. ERROR A CRC or stop bit error occurred in the communication data being
(INT) received from the built–in pulse coder.
380 n AXIS : BROKEN LED (EXT) The separate detector is erroneous.
381 n AXIS : ABNORMAL PHASE A phase data error occurred in the separate linear scale.
(EXT LIN)
382 n AXIS : COUNT MISS (EXT) A pulse error occurred in the separate detector.
383 n AXIS : PULSE MISS (EXT) A count error occurred in the separate detector.
384 n AXIS : SOFT PHASE ALARM The digital servo software detected invalid data in the separate de-
(EXT) tector.
385 n AXIS : SERIAL DATA ERROR Communication data from the separate detector cannot be received.
(EXT)
386 n AXIS : DATA TRANS. ERROR A CRC or stop bit error occurred in the communication data being
(EXT) received from the separate detector.
387 n AXIS : ABNORMAL ENCODER An error occurs in the separate detector. For details, contact the
(EXT) manufacturer of the scale.
362
D The details of serial The details of serial pulse coder alarm No. 350 (pulse coder alarm) are
pulse coder alarm displayed in the diagnosis display (No. 202) as shown below.
No.350 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
202 CSA BLA PHA PCA BZA CKA SPH
SPH : The serial pulse coder or feedback cable is defective. Replace

the serial pulse coder or cable.
CKA: The serial pulse coder is defective. Replace it.
BZA : The pulse coder was supplied with power for the first time.
Make sure that the batteries are connected.
Turn the power off, then turn it on again and perform a reference
position return. This alarm has nothing to do with alarm No. 350
(serial pulse coder alarm).
PCA : The serial pulse coder is defective. Replace it.
PHA : The serial pulse coder or feedback cable is defective. replace the
serial pulse coder or cable.
BLA : The battery voltage is low. Replace the batteries. This alarm
has nothing to do with alarm No. 350 (serial pulse coder alarm).
CSA : The serial pulse coder is defective. Replace it.
D The details of serial The details of serial pulse coder alarm No. 351 (communication alarm)
pulse coder alarm are displayed in the diagnosis display (No. 203) as shown below.
No.351 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
203 DTE CRC STB PRM
PRM: An invalid parameter was found. Alarm No. 417 (invalid servo
parameter) is also issued.
STB : the serial pulse coder encountered a communication error.
The pulse coder, feedback cable, or feedback receiver circuit
is defective.
Replace the pulse coder, feedback cable, or NC–axis board.
CRC : The serial pulse coder encountered a communication error.
The pulse coder, feedback cable, or feedback receiver circuit
is defective. Replace the pulse coder, feedback cable, or
NC–axis board.
DTE : The serial pulse coder encountered a communication error.
The pulse coder, feedbak cable, or feedback receiver circuit
is defective. Replace the pulse coder, feedback cable, or
NC–axis board
5) Servo alarms
401 SERVO ALARM: n–TH AXIS VRDY The n–th axis (axis 1 to 8) servo amplifier READY signal (DRDY) went off.
OFF Refer to procedure of trouble shooting.
402 SERVO ALARM: SV CARD NOT EX- The axis control card is not provided.
IST
403 SERVO ALARM: CARD/SOFT MIS- The combination of the axis control card and servo software is illegal.
MATCH The possible causes are as follows:
· A correct axis control card is not provided.
· Correct servo software is not installed on flash memory.
404 SERVO ALARM: n–TH AXIS VRDY Even though the n–th axis (axis 1 to 8) READY signal (MCON) went off,
ON the servo amplifier READY signal (DRDY) is still on. Or, when the power
was turned on, DRDY went on even though MCON was off.
Check that the servo interface module and servo amp are connected.
363

405 SERVO ALARM: (ZERO POINT RE- Position control system fault. Due to an NC or servo system fault in the
TURN FAULT) reference position return, there is the possibility that reference position
return could not be executed correctly. Try again from the manual refer-
ence position return.
407 SERVO ALARM: EXCESS ERROR The following failure occurred during simplified synchronization control.
1) The difference in synchronous axis position deviation exceeded the
value set in parameter No. 8314.
409 SERVO ALARM: n AXIS TORQUE Abnormal servo motor load has been detected.
ALM
410 SERVO ALARM: n–TH AXIS – EX- Either of the following failures occurred.
CESS ERROR 1) The position deviation when the n axis stops exceeded the value set
2) The amount of compensation for synchronization exceeded the val-
ue set in parameter No. 8325 during simplified synchronization con-
trol.
This alarm can be generated only for the slave axis.
411 SERVO ALARM: n–TH AXIS – EX- The position deviation value when the n–th axis (axis 1 to 8) moves is
CESS ERROR larger than the set value.
413 SERVO ALARM: n–th AXIS – LSI The contents of the error register for the n–th axis (axis 1 to 8) exceeded
OVERFLOW "231 power. This error usually occurs as the result of an improperly set
parameters.
415 SERVO ALARM: n–TH AXIS – EX- A speed higher than 524288000 units/s was attempted to be set in the
CESS SHIFT n–th axis (axis 1 to 8). This error occurs as the result of improperly set
CMR.
417 SERVO ALARM: n–TH AXIS – PA- This alarm occurs when the n–th axis (axis 1 to 8) is in one of the condi-
RAMETER INCORRECT tions listed below. (Digital servo system alarm)
1) The value set in Parameter No. 2020 (motor form) is out of the speci-
fied limit.
2) A proper value (111 or –111) is not set in parameter No.2022 (motor
revolution direction).
3) Illegal data (a value below 0, etc.) was set in parameter No. 2023
(number of speed feedback pulses per motor revolution).
4) Illegal data (a value below 0, etc.) was set in parameter No. 2024
(number of position feedback pulses per motor revolution).
5) Parameters No. 2084 and No. 2085 (flexible field gear rate) have not
been set.
6) A value outside the limit of {1 to the number of control axes} or a non–
continuous value (Parameter 1023 (servo axis number) contains a
value out of the range from 1 to the number of axes, or an isolated
value (for example, 4 not prceded by 3).was set in parameter No.
1023 (servo axisnumber).
7) A parameter is set incorrectly for PMC axis torque control. (The
torque constant parameter is set to 0.)
420 SERVO ALARM: n AXIS SYNC During simple synchronous control, the difference between the torque
TORQUE commands for the master and slave axes exceeded the value set in pa-
(M series) rameter No. 2031.
421 SERVO ALARM: n AXIS EXCESS The difference between the errors in the semi–closed loop and closed
ER (D) loop has become excessive during dual position feedback. Check the
values of the dual position conversion coefficients in parameters No.
2078 and 2079.
422 SERVO ALARM: n AXIS In torque control of PMC axis control, a specified allowable speed
has been exceeded.
423 SERVO ALARM: n AXIS In torque control of PMC axis control, the parameter–set allowable
cumulative travel distance has been exceeded.
430 n AXIS : SV. MOTOR OVERHEAT A servo motor overheat occurred.
431 n AXIS : CNV. OVERLOAD 1) PSM: Overheat occurred.
2) β series SVU: Overheat occurred.
432 n AXIS : CNV. LOWVOLT CON./ 1) PSM: Phase missing occurred in the input voltage.
POWFAULT 2) PSMR: The control power supply voltage has dropped.
3) α series SVU: The control power supply voltage has dropped.
364

433 n AXIS : CNV. LOW VOLT DC LINK 1) PSM: The DC link voltage has dropped.
2) PSMR: The DC link voltage has dropped.
3) α series SVU: The DC link voltage has dropped.
4) β series SVU: The DC link voltage has dropped.
434 n AXIS : INV. LOW VOLT CONTROL SVM: The control power supply voltage has dropped.
435 n AXIS : INV. LOW VOLT DC LINK SVM: The DC link voltage has dropped.
436 n AXIS : SOFTTHERMAL (OVC) The digital servo software detected the soft thermal state (OVC).
437 n AXIS : CNV. OVERCURRENT PSM: Overcurrent flowed into the input circuit.
POWER
438 n AXIS : INV. ABNORMAL CUR- 1) SVM: The motor current is too high.
RENT 2) α series SVU: The motor current is too high.
3) β series SVU: The motor current is too high.
439 n AXIS : CNV. OVERVOLT POWER 1) PSM: The DC link voltage is too high.
2) PSMR: The DC link voltage is too high.
3) α series SVU: The C link voltage is too high.
4) β series SVU: The link voltage is too high.
440 n AXIS : CNV. EX DECELERATION 1) PSMR: The regenerative discharge amount is too large.
POW. 2) α series SVU: The regenerative discharge amount is too large. Al-
ternatively, the regenerative discharge circuit is abnormal.
441 n AXIS : ABNORMAL CURRENT The digital servo software detected an abnormality in the motor cur-
OFFSET rent detection circuit.
442 n AXIS : CNV. CHARGE FAULT/INV. 1) PSM: The spare discharge circuit of the DC link is abnormal.
DB 2) PSMR: The spare discharge circuit of the DC link is abnormal.
3) α series SVU: The dynamic brake circuit is abnormal.
443 n AXIS : CNV. COOLING FAN FAIL- 1) PSM: The internal stirring fan failed.
URE 2) PSMR: The internal stirring fan failed.
3) β series SVU: The internal stirring fan failed.
444 n AXIS : INV. COOLING FAN FAIL- SVM: The internal stirring fan failed.
URE
445 n AXIS : SOFT DISCONNECT The digital servo software detected a broken wire in the pulse coder.
ALARM
446 n AXIS : HARD DISCONNECT A broken wire in the built–in pulse coder was detected by hardware.
ALARM
447 n AXIS : HARD DISCONNECT (EXT) A broken wire in the separate detector was detected by hardware.
448 n AXIS : UNMATCHED FEEDBACK The sign of feedback data from the built–in pulse coder differs from
ALARM that of feedback data from the separate detector.
449 n AXIS : INV. IPM ALARM 1) SVM: IPM (intelligent power module) detected an alarm.
2) α series SVU: IPM (intelligent power module) detected an alarm.
453 n AXIS : SPC SOFT DISCONNECT Software disconnection alarm of the α pulse coder.
ALARM Turn off the power to the CNC, then remove and insert the pulse cod-
er cable. If this alarm is issued again, replace the pulse coder.
460 n AXIS : FSSB DISCONNECT FSSB communication was disconnected suddenly. The possible
causes are as follows:
1) The FSSB communication cable was disconnected or broken.
2) The power to the amplifier was turned off suddenly.
3) A low–voltage alarm was issued by the amplifier.
461 n AXIS : ILLEGAL AMP INTERFACE The axes of the 2–axis amplifier were assigned to the fast type interface.
462 n AXIS : SEND CNC DATA FAILED Because of an FSSB communication error, a slave could not receive
correct data.
365

463 n AXIS : SEND SLAVE DATA Because of an FSSB communication error, the servo system could
FAILED not receive correct data.
464 n AXIS : WRITE ID DATA FAILED An attempt was made to write maintenance information on the ampli-
fier maintenance screen, but it failed.
465 n AXIS : READ ID DATA FAILED At power–up, amplifier initial ID information could not be read.
466 n AXIS : MOTOR/AMP COMBINA- The maximum current rating for the amplifier does not match that for
TION the motor.
467 n AXIS : ILLEGAL SETTING OF The servo function for the following has not been enabled when an
AXIS axis occupying a single DSP (corresponding to two ordinary axes) is
specified on the axis setting screen.
1. Learning control (bit 5 of parameter No. 2008 = 1)
2. High–speed current loop (bit 0 of parameter No. 2004 = 1)
3. High–speed interface axis (bit 4 of parameter No. 2005 = 1)
D Details of servo The details of servo alarm No. 414 are displayed in the diagnosis display
alarm No.414 (No. 200, No. 201, and No.204) as shown below.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
200 OVL LV OVC HCA HVA DCA FBA OFA
OFA : An overflow alarm is being generated inside of digital servo.

FBA : A disconnection alarm is being generated.
(This bit causes servo alarm No.416.The details are indicated
in diagnostic data No. 201)
DCA : A regenerative discharge circuit alarm is being generated in
servo amp.
Check LED.
HVA : An overvoltage alarm is being generated in servo amp.
Check LED.
HCA: An abnormal current alarm is being generated in servo amp.
Check LED.
OVC: A overcurrent alarm is being generated inside of digital servo.
LV : A low voltage alarm is being generated in servo amp.
Check LED.
OVL : An overload alarm is being generated.
(This bit causes servo alarm No. 400. The details are indicated
in diagnostic data No.201).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
201 ALD EXP
When OVL equal 1 in diagnostic data No.200

ALD 0 : Motor overheating
1 : Amplifier overheating
When FBA equal 1 in diagnostic data No.200

ALD EXP Alarm details
1 0 Built–in pulse coder disconnection (hardware)
1 1 Separately installed pulse coder disconnection
(hardware)
0 0 Pulse coder is not connected due to software.
366
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
204 OFS MCC LDA PMS
PMS : A feedback pulse error has occured because the feedback cable
is defective.
LDA : The LED indicates that serial pulse coder C is defective
MCC : A magnetic contactor contact in the servo amplifier has
welded.
OFS : A current conversion error has occured in the digital servo.
6) Over travel alarms

500 OVER TRAVEL : +n Exceeded the n–th axis + side stored stroke limit I.
(Parameter No.1320 or 1326 NOTE)
501 OVER TRAVEL : –n Exceeded the n–th axis – side stored stroke limit I.
(Parameter No.1321 or 1327 NOTE)
502 OVER TRAVEL : +n Exceeded the n–th axis + side stored stroke limit II.
(Parameter No.1322 )
503 OVER TRAVEL : –n Exceeded the n–th axis – side stored stroke limit II.
(Parameter No.1323)
504 OVER TRAVEL : +n Exceeded the n–th axis – side stored stroke limit III.
(Parameter No.1324)
505 OVER TRAVEL : –n Exceeded the n–th axis – side stored stroke limit III.
(Parameter No.1325)
506 OVER TRAVEL : +n Exceeded the n–th axis + side hardware OT.
507 OVER TRAVEL : –n Exceeded the n–th axis – side hardware OT.
510 OVER TRAVEL : +n A stroke limit check, made before starting movement, found that the end
point of a block falls within the plus (+) side inhibited area along the n–
axis defined by a stroke limit. Correct the program.
511 OVER TRAVEL : –n A stroke limit check, made before starting movement, found that the end
point of a block falls within the minus (–) side inhibited area along the
N–axis defined by a stroke limit. Correct the program.
NOTE
Parameters 1326 and 1327 are effective when EXLM (stroke limit switch signal) is on.
7) Overheat alarms
700 OVERHEAT: CONTROL UNIT Control unit overheat
Check that the fan motor operates normally, and clean the air filter.
701 OVERHEAT: FAN MOTOR The fan motor on the top of the cabinet for the contorl unit is overheated.
Check the operation of the fan motor and replace the motor if necessary.
367
8) Laser alarms
4050 CONTOUR DATA ERROR In the interpolation mode, the value of S, P, or Q is out of command range.
4051 ASSIST GAS DATA ERR. In the assist gas command, the value of P or Q is out of command range.
4052 TRACE DATA ERROR In the gap control command, the value of P is out of command range.
4053 PIERCING DATA ERROR In the piercing mode, the value of S, P, Q or R is out of command range.
4054 E CODE DATA ERROR The value of E is out of command range.
4055 E CODE NOT COMMANDED The laser cannot be output because E code is not commanded.
4056 OPT. PATH NOT SET The optical path cannot be compensated.
Please return the reference point.
4060 TRACE ERROR EXCESS Excessive error in the gap control axis
4061 A/D CONVERTER–1 Failure in A/D converter 1
4063 RF POWER SUPPLY Failure in RF power supply
4065 SHUTTER ACTION Abnormal operation of the shutter
4066 DISCHARGING A discharge tube does not work.
4067 LASER CABINET OH Internal cabinet temperature too high
4068 BEAM REFLECTION The laser beam returns to inside the resonator.
4069 LASER IF PCB Failure in the power supply for laser IF PCB.
4070 CHILLER NOT READY The chiller unit is not ready.
4071 ASSIST GAS NOT READY Assist gas is not ready.
4072 CHILL FLOW Insufficient cooling water
4073 LASER GAS PRES. Pressure of mixed gas too low
4074 ROOTS BLOWER TEMP. The Roots blower overheated.
4075 CHILL TEMP. Cooling water temperature too low
4076 LASER POWER DOWN Laser power too low
4077 ABSORBER TEMP. The beam absorber overheated.
4078 LASER TUBE PRES. Abnormal pressure of mixed gas in discharge tube
4079 PUSH RESET KEY The emergency stop button is pressed.
4080 LASER TUBE EXHAUST Gas leak in discharge tubes or gas tubing
4081 GAS PRES. CONTROL The gas pressure control was performed, but the gas did not reach the
specified pressure within the specified time.
4082 TUBE PRES. SENSOR Failure in the pressure sensor
4083 SHUTTER NOT OPEN The shutter does not open when laser is output.
4085 MIRROR CLEANING The mirrors are dirty.
4087 SHUTTER OH The shutter overheated.
4088 LASER VOLTAGE DOWN The voltage of the discharge tubes is decreasing.
4089 ASSIST GAS NO SELECT Assist gas is not output when laser is output.
4090 LASER NOT GENERATE The laser is not oscillated when laser is output.
4091 INVERTER Abnormal inverter
4093 BLOWER GREASE Grease up for turbo–blower.
The vibration occurs for turbo–blower.
4094 VANE PUMP Abnormal operating of the vacuum pump
4096 UNDER TRACING Changing the gap control axis select signal during the gap control mode.
4097 TRACE AXIS SELECT The gap control axis select signal is not commanded correctly.
4098 TRACE AXIS & PLANE The gap control axis is selected for cutting plane.
368

4099 GAS PRES. NOT REACH Laser gas pressure is not reached the specified pressure at the base
discharge state.
4100 INVERTER 1 Abnormal operation of the inverter 1 for blower.
4101 OUT OF FREQUENCY 1 Inverter frequency is not reached the specified frequency within 120sec
after start the blower 1.
4102 OUT OF VIBRATION1 Vibration occurs for turbo–blower 1.
4103 T.B NOT STOPPING 1 Rotation of turbo–blower 1 does not drop within 120 sec after RUN–OFF.
4104 TURBO OVER CURRENT 1 Over current for turbo–blower 1
4105 TURBO TEMP. 1 Turbo–blower 1 overheated
4106 BLOWER OIL SHORTAGE Blower oil is shortage.
4107 MIRROR NOT INSTALLED The mirror is not installed.
4110 INVERTER 2 Abnormal operation of the inverter 2 for blower.
4111 OUT OF FREQUENCY 2 Inverter frequency is not reached the specified frequency within 120 sec
after start the blower 2.
4112 OUT OF VIBRATION 2 Vibration occurs for turbo–blower 2.
4113 T. B NOT STOPPING 2 Rotation of turbo–blower 2 does not drop within 120 sec after RUN–
OFF.
4114 TURBO OVER CURRENT 2 Over current for turbo–blower 2
4115 TURBO TEMP. 2 Turbo–blower 2 overheated
4130 STEP TIME NOT SET Step time is not specified for high speed pierce
4131 INCORRECT STEP DISTANCE The distance to travel has become shorter than the ramp–down dis-
SETTING tance under step control before the end of the ramp–up distance. Alter-
natively, the ramp–up distance has not ended with in one block.
4132 PARAMETER WAS CHANGED. Parameter No. 15223, 15242, or 15243 was changed.
4136 INTERNAL PRESSURE TOO HIGH The pressure inside the mixer is too high (1MPa).
4137 MIXER POWER FAILURE A power failure occurred on the relay printed circuit board in the mixer.
4138 INSUFFICIENT DEGREE OF VAC- The specified degree of vacuum is not reached within the specified time
UUM during evacuation of the mixer.
4139 MIXER PRESSURE SWITCH ER- Although the laser gas supply pressure is reduced, the tank supply
ROR pressure is not reduced.
369
9) System alarms
(These alarms cannot be reset with reset key.)
900 ROM PARITY A parity error occurred in the CNC, macro, or servo ROM. Correct
the contents of the flash ROM having the displayed number.
910 SRAM PARITY : (BYTE 0) A RAM parity error occurred in the part program storage RAM. Clear
the RAM, or replace the SRAM module or motherboard. Subse-
911 SRAM PARITY : (BYTE 1) quently, re–set the parameters and all other data.
912 DRAM PARITY : (BYTE 0) A RAM parity error occurred in the DRAM module. Replace the
DRAM module.
913 DRAM PARITY : (BYTE 1)
920 SERVO ALARM (1–4 AXIS) Servo alarm (first to fourth axis). A watchdog alarm condition oc-
curred, or a RAM parity error occurred in the axis control card.
Replace the axis control card.
921 SERVO ALARM (5–8 AXIS) Servo alarm (fifth to eighth axis). A watchdog alarm condition oc-
curred, or a RAM parity error occurred in the axis control card.
926 FSSB ALARM FSSB alarm.
930 CPU INTERRUPT CPU error (abnormal interrupt).
The motherboard or CPU card may be faulty.
935 SRAM ECC ERROR An error occurred in RAM for part program storage.
Action:
Replace the master printed circuit board (SRAM module), perform
all–clear operation, and set all parameter and other data again.
950 PMC SYSTEM ALARM An error occurred in the PMC.
The PMC control circuit on the motherboard may be faulty.
951 PMC WATCH DOG ALARM An error occurred in the PMC.
(Watchdog alarm)
The motherboard may be faulty.
972 NMI OCCURRED IN OTHER MOD- An NMI occurred on a board other than the motherboard.
ULE The option board may be faulty.
973 NON MASK INTERRUPT An NMI occurred as a result of an unknown cause.
974 F–BUS ERROR A bus error occurred on the FANUC bus.
The motherboard or option board may be faulty.
975 BUS ERROR A bus error occurred on the motherboard.
976 L–BUS ERROR A bus error occurred on the local bus.
370
A.2
LIST OF ALARMS
(PMC)
(1) Alarm messages (PMC)
Message Contents and solution
ALARM NOTHING Normal status
ER01 PROGRAM DATA The sequence program in the ROM is not written correctly.
ERROR (solution) Re–input the sequence program.
ER02 PROGRAM SIZE OVER The size of sequence program exceeds the maximum size of LADDER(PMC–SC
only).
(solution) Please change MAX LADDER AREA SIZE at the SYSPRM screen and
restart the system.
ER03 PROGRAM SIZE The size of sequence program exceeds the option specification size.
ERROR(OPTION) (solution) Please increase the option specification size.
Or, reduce the size of sequence program.
ER04 PMC TYPE UNMATCH The PMC model setting of the sequence program is not corresponding to an actual
model.
(solution) Please change the PMC model setting by the offline programmer.
ER05 PMC MODULE TYPE The module type of the PMC engine is not correct.
ERROR
(solution) Please exchange the module of PMC engine for a correct one.
ER06 PMC CONTROL SOFT– The combination of CNC system configuration and PMC type is invalid.
WARE TYPE UNMATCH PMC–SB6 is used for a 3–path CNC system.
(solution) Contact FANUC.
ER07 NO OPTION There is no step number option of LADDER.

(LADDER STEP)
ER10 OPTION AREA NOTHING The management software for the PMC–SB has not been transferred.
(series name) (solution) The software installation is not consistent with the order. Contact FANUC.
ER11 OPTION AREA NOTHING The management software for the PMC C board has not been transferred.
(series name) (solution) The software installation is not consistent with the order. Contact FANUC.
ER12 OPTION AREA ERROR The series of the management software for the PMC–RB differs between BASIC and
(series name) OPTION.
ER13 OPTION AREA ERROR The series of the management software for the PMC C board differs between BASIC
(series name) and OPTION.
ER14 OPTION AREA VERSIION The edition of the management software for the PMC–RB differs between BASIC
ERROR (series name) and OPTION.
ER15 OPTION AREA VERSIION The edition of the management software for the PMC C board differs between BASIC
ERROR (series name) and OPTION.
ER16 RAM CHECK ERROR The debugging RAM cannot be read/written normally.
(PROGRAM RAM) (solution) Please exchange the debugging RAM.
371

ER17 PROGRAM PARITY The parity error occurred on ROM for sequence program or the debugging RAM.
(solution) ROM: The deterioration of ROM may be deteriorated
Please exchange ROM for the sequence program
RAM: Please edit the sequence program once on PMC
Still the error occurs, exchange the debugging RAM.
ER18 PROGRAM DATA ERROR Transferring the sequence program from offline programmer was interrupted by the
BY I/O power off etc.
(solution) Please clear the sequence program and transfer the sequence program
again.
ER19 LADDER DATA ERROR Editing the LADDER was interrupted by the power off or by the switch to the CNC
screen by the function key etc.
(solution) Please edit LADDER once on PMC.
Or, please input LADDER again.
ER20 SYMBOL/COMMENT Editing the symbol and comment was interrupted by the power off or by the switch to
DATA ERROR the CNC screen by the function key etc.
(solution) Please edit symbol and comment once on PMC.
Or, please input symbol and comment again.
ER21 MESSAGE DATA ERROR Editing the message data was interrupted by the power off or the switch to the CNC
screen by the function key etc.
(solution) Please edit message data once on PMC.
Or, please input message data again.
ER22 PROGRAM NOTHING There is no sequence program
ER23 PLEASE TURN OFF POW- There is a change in setting LADDER MAX AREA SIZE etc.
ER (solution) Please restart the system to make the change effective.
ER24 LADDER, LANGUAGE The C program area overlaps the ladder program area.
AREA OVERLAP (solution) Adjust the address range assigned to C programs.
ER25 SOFTWARE VERSION The PMC–SB management software editions are inconsistent.
ERROR (PMCAOPT) (solution) Contact FANUC.
ER26 SOFTWARE VERSION The PMC–SB management software cannot be initialized.

ERROR (PMCAOPT) (solution) Contact FANUC.
ER27 LADDER FUNC. PRM IS The parameter number for function instruction TMR, TMRB, CTR, DIFU, or DIFD is
OUT OF RANGE not in the range.
(solution) Correct the number so that it is within the range.
*When ER00 to ER27 occur, sequence program is not available.

ER32 NO I/O DEVICE Any DI/DO unit of I/O Unit or the connection unit etc. is not connected. When built–in
I/O card is connected, this message is not displayed.
(solution) When built–in I/O card is used:
Please confirm whether the built–in I/O card is certainly connected with.
When I/O Link is used:
Please confirm whether the DI/DO units turning on. Or please confirm
the connection of the cable.
ER33 SLC ERROR The LSI for I/O Link is defective.

(solution) Please exchange the module of PMC engine.
372

ER34 SLC ERROR(xx) The communication with the DI/DO units of the xx group failed.
(solution) Please confirm the connection of the cable connected to the DI/DO
units of the xx group.
Please confirm whether the DI/DO units turned on earlier than CNC and
PMC. Or, please exchange the module of PMC engine on the DI/DO
units of the xx group
ER35 TOO MUCH OUTPUT The number of the output data in the xx group exceeded the max. The data, which
DATA IN GROUP(xx) exceed 32 bytes, become ineffective.
(solution) Please refer to the following for the number of the data for each group.
“FANUC I/O Unit–MODEL A connecting and maintenance manual”
(B–61813E)
“FANUC I/O Unit–MODEL B connecting manual”(B–62163E)
ER36 TOO MUCH INPUT DATA The number of the input data in the xx group exceeded the max. The data, which
IN GROUP(xx) exceed 32 bytes, become ineffective.
(solution) Please refer to the following for the number of the data for each group.
“FANUC I/O Unit–MODEL A connecting and maintenance manual”
(B–61813E)
“FANUC I/O Unit–MODEL B connecting manual”(B–62163E)
ER38 MAX SETTING OUTPUT The assignment data for a group exceeds 128 bytes.
DATA OVER(xx) (The assignment data of output side of xx group or later become ineffective.)
(solution) Please reduce the assignment data to 128 bytes or less for the number
of
the output data of each group.
ER39 MAX SETTING INPUT The assignment data for a group exceeds 128 bytes.
DATA OVER(xx) (The assignment data of input side of xx group or later become infective.)
(Solution) Please reduce the assignment data to 128 bytes or less for the number
of
the input data of each goup.
ER98 ILLEGAL LASER CON- An I/O unit for the laser and assigned data do not match.
NECTION (solution) Check that the ladder assignment data and actual I/O units match.
ER99 X, Y96–127 ARE ALLO- When the laser I/O link is provided, ladder I/O is assigned to X96–X127 and
CATED Y96–Y127.
(solution) Delete the data assigned to X96–X127 and Y96–Y127.
WN02 OPERATE PANEL The address setting data of the operator’s panel for FS–0 is illegal.
ADDRESS ERROR (solution) Please correct the address setting data.
WN03 ABORT NC–WINDOW/ LADDER was stopped while CNC and PMC were communicating.
EXIN The functional instruction WINDR, WINDW, EXIN, DISPB, and etc. may not work nor-
mally.
(solution) When restarting the system, this alarm will be released. Execute the
sequence program(Press RUN key) after confirming whether there is a
problem in LADDER or not.
WN04 UNAVAIL EDIT MODULE The LADDER editing module cannot be recognized.(PMC–SAx/SBxx=1 to 3)
(solution) Please confirm the slot position installed.
Please confirm the installed module.
WN05 PMC TYPE NO CONVER- A ladder program for the PMC–SA3/SA5 was transferred to the PMC–SB5.
SION (solution) Correct the ladder type.
WN06 TASK STOPPED BY DE- Some user tasks are stopped by break point of the debugging function.
BUG FUNC
WN07 LADDER SP ERROR When functional instruction CALL(SUB65) or CALLU(SUB66) was executed, the stack
(STACK) of the LADDER overflowed.
(solution) Please reduce the nesting of the subprogram to 8 or less.
373

WN17 NO OPTION (LANGUAGE) There is no C language option.
WN18 ORIGIN ADDRESS The LANGUAGE ORIGIN address of the system parameter is wrong
ERROR (solution) Please set the address of symbol RC_CTLB_INIT in the map file to the
LANGUAGE ORIGIN of the system parameter.
WN19 GDT ERROR The value of BASE, LIMIT or ENTRY of user defined GDT is illegal.
(BASE,LIMIT) (solution) Please correct the address in link control statement and build file.
WN20 COMMON MEM. COUNT The number of common memories exceeds 8.

OVER (solution) Please reduce the number of common memories to 8 or less. It is
necessary to correct a link control statement,build file and the source file
for the common memory.
WN21 COMMON MEM. ENTRY GDT ENTRY of the common memory is out of range.
ERROR (solution) Please correct the address of GDT ENTRY of the common memory in the
link control statement.
WN22 LADDER 3 PRIORITY The priority of LADDER LEVEL 3 is out of range.

ERROR (solution) Please correct the value of LADDER LEVEL 3 in the link control statement
within the range of 0 or 10–99 or –1.
WN23 TASK COUNT OVER The number of user tasks exceeds 16.
(solution) Please confirm TASK COUNT in the link control statement. When the
number of tasks is changed, it is necessary to correct the link control
statement, build file and the composition of the files to be linked.
WN24 TASK ENTRY ADDR The selector of the entry address to the user task is out of range.
ERROR (solution) Please correct the table of GDT in build file to the value within
32(20H)–95(5FH).
WN25 DATA SEG ENTRY The entry address of the data segment is out of range.
ERROR (solution) Please correct DATA SEGMENT GDT ENTRY in the link control statement
and the table of GDT in build file within 32(20H)–95(5FH).
WN26 USER TASK PRIORITY The priority of the user task is out of range.
ERROR (solution) Please correct the TASK LEVEL in link control statement within the
range of 10–99 or –1.
Note: Only one task can have TASK LEVEL –1 (including LADDER
LEVEL 3).
WN27 CODE SEG TYPE ERROR The code segment type is illegal. The code segment of RENAMESEG in the binding
control file is wrong.
(solution) Please correct the entry of the code segment in the link control statement
to correspond to the entry in the build file.
WN28 DATA SEG TYPE ERROR The data segment type is illegal. The data segment of RENAMESEG in the binding con-
trol file is wrong.
(solution) Please correct the entry of the code segment in the link control statement
WN29 COMMON MEM SEG The segment type of common memory is illegal. The segment of RENAMESEG in the
TYPE ERROR building control file of the common memory is wrong.
(solution) Please correct the entry of common memory in the link control statement
WN30 IMPOSSIBLE ALLOCATE The memories for the data and stack etc. cannot be allocated.
MEM. (solution) Please confirm whether the value of code segment in build file and USER
GDT ADDRESS in link control statement is correct or not.
Or please reduce the value of MAX LADDER AREA SIZE of the system
parameter and the size of the stack in link control statement at the least
374

WN31 IMPOSSIBLE EXECUTE The library function cannot be executed.
LIBRARY (solution) Please confirm the object model of the library.
Or, system ROM of PMC must be replaced with one of later version.
WN32 LNK CONTROL DATA ER- Link control statement data is illegal.
ROR (solution) Please confirm whether the address of symbol RC_ CTLB_INIT in map file
is set to LANGUAGE ORIGIN of the system parameter. Or, please make
the link control statement again.
WN33 LNK CONTROL VER. ER- A link control statement data version error occurred.
ROR (Solution) Correct the link control statement in the C program.
WN34 LOAD MODULE COUNT The number of independent load modules exceeds eight.
OVER (solution) Decrease the number of independent load modules to eight or small
er.
WN35 CODE AREA OUT OF The specified code area is beyond the address range.
RANGE (solution) Correct the C program.
WN36 LANGUAGE SIZE ERROR The size of a C program exceeds the option size.
(OPTION) (solution) Decrease the size of the C program.
WN37 PROGRAM DATA ERROR A C program is destroyed.

(LANG.) (solution) Transfer the C program again.
WN38 RAM CHECK ERROR A C program is destroyed.

WN39 PROGRAM PARITY A parity mismatch occurred in a C program.

WN40 PROGRAM DATA ERROR Transfer of a C program was interrupted by, for example, a power failure.
BY I/O (LANG.) (solution) Clear the C program, then transfer the C program again.
WN41 LANGUAGE TYPE A C program type mismatch occurred.

UNMATCH (solution) Correct the C program.
WN42 UNDEFINE LANGUAGE No language origin address is set.

ORIGIN ADDRESS (solution) Set the language origin address.
NOTE
Alarms WN17 to WN42 indicate errors related to PMC user
C programs.
375
(2) System alarm messages (PMC–SB7)

1 PC004 CPU ERR A CPU error occurred in the PMC.
xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy xxxxxxxx and yyyyyyyy indicate internal error code.
PC006 CPU ERR
xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy If this error occurs, the motherboard may be faulty.
PC009 CPU ERR
xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy Replace the motherboard, then check whether the error recurs. If the error still
PC010 CPU ERR occurs even after the replacement of the motherboard, report the conditions un-
xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy der which the error occurred (system configuration, operation, time and frequen-
cy of error occurrences, etc.) to FANUC.
2 PC030 RAM PARITY aa:bb A RAM parity error occurred in the PMC.
aa and bb indicate internal error code.
If this error occurs, the motherboard may be faulty.
Solution)
Replace the motherboard, then check whether the error recurs. If the error still
occurs even after the replacement of the motherboard, report the conditions un-
der which the error occurred (system configuration, operation, time and frequen-
cy of error occurrences, etc.) and the indicated internal error code to FANUC.
3 PC050 NMI SLC aa:bb A communication error occurred in the I/O Link.
aa and bb indicate internal error code.
If this error occurs, the possible causes are as follows:

(1) Although the base expansion is assigned when the I/O Unit A is used, the
base is not connected.
(2) A cable is not connected securely.
(3) Cabling is faulty.
(4) I/O equipment (I/O unit, Power Mate, etc.) is faulty.
(5) The power to the master or slave unit of the I/O Link is disconnected.
(6) A DO–pin short–circuit occurred in an I/O device.
(7) The motherboard is faulty.
Solution)
(1) Check whether the I/O assignment data and the actual I/O equipment con-
nection match.
(2) Check whether the cables are connected correctly.
(3) According to “FANUC I/O Unit–MODEL A Connection and Maintenance
Manual” (B–61813E) or “FANUC I/O Unit–MODEL B Connection manual”
(B–62163E), check for an error in the cable specifications.
(4) Replace the I/O unit interface module, cable, or motherboard. Then, check
whether the error still occurs.
4 PC060 FBUS A bus error occurred in the PMC.

xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy aa, xxxxxxxx, and yyyyyyyy indicate internal error code.
PC061 FL–R
xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy If this error occurs, the hardware may be faulty.
PC062 FL–W
aa: xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy Solution)
Report the conditions under which the error occurred (system configuration, op-
eration, time and frequency of error occurrences, tc.), the indicated internal error
code, and the LED status on each board to FANUC.
376

5 PC070 SUB65 CALL (STACK) A stack error occurred during execution of ladder function instruction
CALL/CALLU.
Solution)
Check the correspondence between the CALL/CALLU instruction and SPE
instruction. If the error cannot be located, report the conditions under which the
error occurred and the ladder program to FANUC.
6 PC080 SYS EMG A system alarm was caused by another software.

xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy
PC081 FL EMG Solution)
xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy Report the conditions under which the error occurred (system configuration, op-
eration, time and frequency of error occurrences, etc.), the indicated internal er-
ror code, and the LED status on each board to FANUC.
7 PC097 PARITY ERR A parity error occurred in the PMC system.

(LADDER)
PC098 PARITY ERR (DRAM) If this error occurred, the motherboard may be faulty.
Solution)
Replace the motherboard, then check whether the error recurs. If the error still
occurs even after the replacement of the motherboard, report the conditions un-
der which the error occurred (system configuration, operation, time and frequen-
cy of error occurrences, etc.) to FANUC.
(3) System alarm messages (for the C language board)

1 PC1nn CPU INTERRT CPU error (abnormal interrupt)
xxxxyyyyyy nn : Exception code
Exception code of the i80486. For details, refer to the relevant
manual that describes the CPU.
00 Division error. For example, the divisor in a division instruction is 0.
12 Stack exception caused by, for example, stack segment limit viola
tion
13 General protection exception generated when, for example, a seg
ment limit is exceeded
xxxx : Segment selector where the system error occurred
A value 0103 to 02FB indicates the C execution area.
yyyyyy : Offset address at which the system error occurred
(Solution)
If a C program is not used, or if the cause of the error cannot be determined
STATUS LED lL even by checking the C program, contact FANUC.
2 PC130 RAM PRTY aa A parity error occurred in user RAM or DRAM on the C language board.
xxxxyyyyyy aa : RAM parity error occurrence information
xxxx : Segment selector where the system error occurred
STATUS LED jL yyyyyy : Offset address at which the system error occurred
5 PC160 F–BUS ERROR A bus error occurred on the C language board.

xxxxyyyyyy xxxx : Segment selector where the system error occurred
PC161 F–BUS ERROR
xxxxyyyyyy yyyyyy : Offset address at which the system error occurred
PC162 F–BUS ERROR
xxxxyyyyyy
STATUS LED Lj
377

6 PC170 F–BUS ERROR A bus error occurred on the C language board.
xxxxyyyyyy xxxx : Segment selector where the system error occurred
PC171 F–BUS ERROR
xxxxyyyyyy yyyyyy : Offset address at which the system error occurred
PC172 F–BUS ERROR
xxxxyyyyyy
STATUS LED Lj
7 PC199 ROM PARITY eeeeeeee A parity error occurred in system ROM on the C language board.
STATUS LED Ll eeeeeeee : ROM parity error information
STATUS LED (green)

j : Off J : On lL : Blink
(4) Alarm messages (For EDIT 1)

ADDRESS BIT NOTHING The address of the relay/coil is not set.
FUNCTION NOT FOUND There is no functional instruction of the input number.
COM FUNCTION MISSING The funcitonal instruction COM (SUB9) is not correctly dealt with.
Correspondence of COM and COME (SUB29) is incorrect.
Or, the number of coil controlled by COM is specified by the model which the number
cannot be specified.
EDIT BUFFER OVER There in no empty area of the buffer for the editing.
(solution) Please reduce NET under editing.
END FUNCTION MISSING Functional instruction END1,END2,END3 and END do not exist. Or, there are error net
in END1,END2,END3,END.
Or, order of END1,END2,END3, and END is not correct.
ERROR NET FOUND There is an error net.
ILLEGAL FUNCTION NO. The wrong number of the functional instruction is searched.
FUNCTION LINE ILLEGAL The functional instruction is not correctly connected.
HORIZONTAL LINE ILLEGAL The horizontal line of the net is not connected.
ILLEGAL NET CLEARED Because the power had been turn off while editing LADDER, some net under editing
was cleared.
ILLEGAL OPERATION Operation is not correct.

The value is not specified and only INPUT key was pushed.
The address data is not correctly inputted.
Because the space to display the instruction on screen is not enough, the functional
instruction cannot be made.
SYMBOL UNDEFINED The symbol which was inputted is not defined.
INPUT INVALID There is an incorrect input data.

Non–numerical value was inputted with COPY, INSLIN,C–UP,C–DOWN etc.
The input address was specified for write coil.
An illegal character was specified for the data table.
NET TOO LARGE The input net is larger than the editing buffer.
(solution) Please reduce the net under editing.
378

JUMP FUNCTION MISSING The functional instruction JMP(SUB10) is not correctly dealt with.
Correspondence of JMP and JMPE(SUB30) is incorrect.
The number of coil to jump is specified by the model which the number of coil cannot
specified. (It is possible to specify the coil number only on PMC–RB/RC.)
LADDER BROKEN LADDER is broken.
LADDER ILLEGAL There is an incorrect LADDER.
IMPOSSIBLE WRITE You try to edit sequence program on the ROM.
OBJECT BUFFER OVER The sequence program area was filled.

(solution) Please reduce the LADDER.
PARAMETER NOTHING There is no parameter of the functional instruction.
PLEASE COMPLETE NET The error net was found in LADDER.

(solution) After correcting the error net, please continue operating.
PLEASE KEY IN SUB NO. Please input the number of the functional instruction.
(solution) If you do not input the functional instruction, please push soft key “FUNC”
again.
PROGRAM MODULE NOTHING You tried to edit though there was neither RAM for debugging nor ROM for sequence
program.
RELAY COIL FORBIT There is an unnecessary relay or coil.
RELAY OR COIL NOTHING The relay or the coil does not suffice.
PLEASE CLEAR ALL It is impossible to recover the sequence program.

(solution) Please clear the all data.
SYMBOL DATA DUPLICATE The same symbol name is defined in other place.
COMMENT DATA OVERFLOW The comment data area was filled.

(solution) Please reduce the number of the commnet.
SYMBOL DATA OVERFLOW The symbol data area was filled.

(solution) Please reduce the number of the symbol.
VERTICAL LINE ILLEGAL There is an incorrect vertical line of the net.
MESSAGE DATA OVERFLOW The message data area was filled.

(solution) Please reduce the number of the message.
1ST LEVEL EXECUTE TIME The 1st level of LADDER is too large to complete execution in time.
OVER (solution) Please reduce the 1st level of LADDER.
PARA NO. RANGE ERR: The parameter number for a function instruction is not in the range.
(solution) Correct the number so that it is within the range.
PARA NO. DUPLICATE: The parameter number for a function instruction is used more than once.
(solution) If the duplicate numbers pose the problem of simultaneous operation,
change the parameter number to an unused number.
379
(5) Error Messages (at Automatic Write to Flash ROM after Ladder Editing)
Error message Contents and solution
PROGRAM ALREADY EXISTS A program already exists on flash ROM. (At BLANK)
PROGRAM ALREADY EXISTS A program already exists on flash ROM.

(EXEC?) (Remedy) When the message is displayed, pressing the EXEC key again causes
write or erasure operation. (At write or erasure)
PROGRAM NOTHING There is no program on flash ROM.
ERASE ERROR Flash ROM is abnormal. Replacement is required.

F–ROM WRITE ERROR 13 Ask FANUC Service Representative for replacement.
F–ROM WRITE ERROR 28
WRITE ERROR
READ ERROR
ANOTHER USED Flash ROM is used by other than PMC.

MUST BE IN EMG STOP The CNC is not in the emergency stop state.
NOT EMG STOP
NO OPTION There is no ROM cassette option.
SIZE ERROR The sequence program is larger than the flash ROM size. (At write)
IMPOSSIBLE WRITE (SIZE (Remedy) Try the condense function. (EDIT/CLEAR screen) If the same phenome-
OVER) non is still observed, the flash ROM size must be enlarged.
NO SPACE The sequence program to be read is larger than the RAM size. (At read)
F–ROM WRITE ERROR 1 (Remedy) RAM must be enlarged.
380
(6) Error Messages (at Assignment Data Editing)

ERR: GROUP NO. (0—15) The group number must be 0 to 15.
ERR: BASE NO. (0—1) The base number must be 0 or 1.
WARN: BASE NO. MUST BE 0 For I/O Unit–B, the base number must be 0. The base number was set to 0 forcibly.
ERR: SLOT NO. (1—10) For I/O Unit–A, the slot number must be 1 to 10.
ERR: SLOT NO. (0, 1—30) For I/O Unit–B, the slot number must be 0 or a number 1 to 30.
ERR: SLOT NO. MUST BE 0 When power on/off information for I/O Unit–B is set, the slot number must be 0.
ERR: ILLEGAL NAME The input assignment name is illegal or not supported. Enter a correct name.
INPUT INVALID The input character string is illegal. Enter a character string in a correct input format
again.
IMPOSSIBLE WRITE An attempt was made to edit ROM data. ROM data cannot be edited.
ERR: ADDRESS ALREADY The specified address is already assigned. Assign another address. Alternatively, de-
ASSIGNED lete the existing data, then set the address again.
ERR: ADDRESS OVER A set address exceeds the maximum value (X127, Y127). Check the addresses dedi-
cated to the unit to be set.
ERR: SLOT ALREADY DEFINED The specified slot is already assigned. Check the existing data.
WARN: SLOT ALREADY The specified slot is already assigned. Check the existing data.
DEFINED
ERR: UNIT TYPE MISMATCH An output module cannot be allocated to an X address, or an input module cannot be
(IN OR OUT) allocated to a Y address.
ERR: UNIT TYPE MISMATCH I/O Unit–A and I/O Unit–B are assigned to the same group. These units cannot exist
(MODEL) together within the same group.
381
(7) Alarm messages (For I/O)

PROGRAM ALREADY EXISTS A program already exists on flash ROM. (At BLANK)
PROGRAM ALREADY EXISTS A program already exists on flash ROM.

(EXEC ?) Remedy) When the message is displayed, pressing the EXEC key again
causes write or erasure operation. (At write or erasure)
PROGRAM NOTHING There is no program on flash ROM.
ERASE ERROR Flash ROM is abnormal. Replacement is required. Ask FANUC Service
F Representative for replacement.
L WRITE ERROR
A
S READ ERROR
H
ANOTHER USED Flash ROM is used by other than PMC.
R
O MUST BE IN EMG STOP The CNC is not in the emergency stop state.
M NOT EMG STOP
NO OPTION There is no ROM cassette option.
SIZE ERROR The sequence program is larger than the flash ROM size. (At write)
Remedy) Try the condense function. (EDIT/CLEAR screen) If the same
phenomenon is still observed, the flash ROM size must be en-
larged.
The sequence program to be read is larger than the RAM size. (At read)
Remedy) RAM must be enlarged.
I/O OPEN ERROR nn nn = –1: RS–232C is used by other than PMC.

Remedy) Check whether RS–232C is used by other than PMC.
On the online setting screen (see Section 8.5.1 in III), check
that “NOT USE” is indicated for RS–232C.
nn = 6: The RS–232C option is not found.
nn = 20: RS–232C connection is incorrect.
Remedy) Check whether channel setting, connection, baud rate, and
H other settings are correct.
O
I/O WRITE ERROR nn nn = 20: RS–232C connection is incorrect.
S
T
other settings are correct.
·
F nn = 22: Communication cannot be performed correctly.
D Remedy) Check whether the cable is broken.
C
I/O READ ERROR nn nn = 20: RS–232C connection is incorrect.
A
S
other settings are correct.
·
O nn = 22: Communication cannot be performed correctly.
T Remedy) Check whether the cable is broken.
H
ADDRESS IS OUT OF RANGE Data for other than the PMC debugging RAM area was transferred.
E
(xxxxxx) xxxxxx: Indicates the transfer address.
R
S DATA ERROR Illegal data was read.
Remedy) Check the cable and setting (speed).
When a program in C was being read into the 16i/18i/21i:
Remedy) Press soft keys [EDIT], [CLEAR], [CLRLNG], then [EXEC] to
clear the C area.
PROGRAM DATA ERROR An attempt was made to output data, but the data was illegal.
Remedy) Check the alarm on the alarm screen.
382

CREATE ERROR The specified file name is illegal.
Remedy) Specify a file name in the MS–DOS form. (See 7.2 (5))
NO MORE SPACE or WRITE ERROR There is not enough free space on the memory card.
Remedy) Delete files to create free space.
NOT READY No memory card is installed.

Remedy) Check whether a memory card is installed.
MOUNT ERROR Unformatted.

Remedy) Perform formatting. (See 7.3.4 (a))
WRITE PROTECT The memory card is protected.

Remedy) Set the protect switch of the memory card to OFF.
BATTERY ALARM The battery for the memory card is too weak.
Remedy) Replace the memory card battery.
M
E FILE NOT FOUND The specified file number or file name is not found.
M Remedy) With LIST, check the file name or file number.
O
R DELETE ERROR The file cannot be deleted.
C Remedy) Change the file attribute.
A
R PROGRAM ALREADY EXISTS There are duplicate file names.
D Remedy) Use another file name.
I/O WRITE ERROR nn nn = 30: No memory card is installed.

I/O READ ERROR nn Remedy) Check whether a memory card is installed.
I/O COMPARE ERROR nn nn = 31: The memory card cannot be written to.
I/O DELETE ERROR nn Remedy) Set the protect switch of the memory card to OFF.
I/O LIST ERROR nn Replace the memory card with an S–RAM card.
I/O FORMAT ERROR nn nn = 32: The battery for the memory card is too weak.
Remedy) Replace the memory card battery.
nn = 102: There is not enough free space on the memory card.
Remedy) Delete files to create free space.
nn = 135: The memory card is unformatted.
nn = 105: The memory card is unformatted.
Remedy) Format the memory card.
nn = 114: The specified file is not found.
Remedy) With LIST, check the file name or file number.
nn = 115: The specified file is protected.
Remedy) Check the file attribute.
COMPARE ERR XXXXXX=AA : BB Data differs between the device and PMC.
CONT? (Y/N) XXXXXX: Address
aa: Data on the PMC
bb: Data on the device
C Remedy) To continue operation, enter Y; otherwise, enter N. Then, press
O the INPUT key.
M
DATA ERROR Illegal data has been read.
M
Remedy) Check the cable and setting (speed).
O
When a program in C was being read into the 16i/18i/21i:
N
Remedy) Press soft keys [EDIT], [CLEAR], [CLRLNG], then [EXEC] to
clear the C area.
PROGRAM DATA ERROR An attempt was made to output data, but the data was illegal.
Remedy) Check the alarm on the alarm screen.
383
A.3
ALARM LIST When a serial spindle alarm occurs, the following number is displayed on
(SERIAL SPINDLE) the CNC. n is a number corresponding to the spindle on which an alarm
occurs. (n = 1: First spindle; n = 2: Second spindle; etc.)
NOTE*1
Note that the meanings of the SPM indications differ
depending on which LED, the red or yellow LED, is on.
When the red LED is on, the SPM indicates a 2–digit alarm
number. When the yellow LED is on, the SPM indicates an
error number that designates a sequence problem (for
example, when a rotation command is entered with the
emergency stop state not released).
³ See Appendix A.4, “Error Codes (Serial Spindle).”
Alarm Numbers and Alarms Displayed on the α Series Spindle Amplifier
SPM in-
No. Message dica- Faulty location and remedy Description
tion(*1)
(750) SPINDLE SERIAL LINK A0 1 Replace the ROM on the SPM The program does not start normally.
ERROR A control printed circuit board. ROM series error or hardware ab-
2 Replace the SPM control printed normality on the SPM control printed
circuit board. circuit board
(749) S–SPINDLE LSI ERROR A1 Replace the SPM control printed cir- An abnormality was detected in the
cuit board. CPU peripheral circuit of the SPM
control circuit.
7n01 SPN_n_ : MOTOR OVER- 01 1 Check and correct the peripheral The thermostat embedded in the mo-
HEAT temperature and load status. tor winding operated.
2 If the cooling fan stops, replace it. The internal temperature of the motor
exceeds the specified level.
The motor is used in excess of the
continuous rating, or the cooling com-
ponent is abnormal.
7n02 SPN_n_ : EX SPEED ER- 02 1 Check and correct the cutting The motor speed cannot follow a spe-
ROR conditions to decrease the load. cified speed.
2 Correct parameter No. 4082. An excessive motor load torque is de-
tected.
The acceleration/deceleration time in
parameter No. 4082 is insufficient.
7n03 SPN_n_ : FUSE ON DC 03 1 Replace the SPM unit. The PSM becomes ready (00 is indi-
LINK BLOWN 2 Check the motor insulation status. cated), but the DC link voltage is too
3 Replace the interface cable. low in the SPM.
The fuse in the DC link section in the
SPM is blown. (The power device is
damaged or the motor is ground–
fault.)
The JX1A/JX1B connection cable is
abnormal.
7n04 SPN_n_ : INPUT FUSE/ 04 Check the state of the input power The PSM found a missing power sup-
POWER FAULT supply to the PSM. ply phase. (PSM alarm 5)
384
SPM in-
tion(*1)
7n06 SPN_n_ : THERMAL 06 1 Check and correct the parameter. The temperature sensor of the motor
SENSOR DIS- 2 Replace the feedback cable. is disconnected.
CONNECT
7n07 SPN_n_ : OVERSPEED 07 Check for a sequence error. (For ex- The motor speed has exceeded
ample, check whether spindle syn- 115% of its rated speed.
chronization was specified when the When the spindle axis was in position
spindle could not be turned.) control mode, positional deviations
were accumulated excessively (SFR
and SRV were turned off during
spindle synchronization.)
7n09 SPN_n_ : OVERHEAT 09 1 Improve the heat sink cooling sta- Abnormal temperature rise of the
MAIN CIRCUIT tus. power transistor radiator
2 If the heat sink cooling fan stops,
replace the SPM unit.
7n11 SPN_n_ : OVERVOLT 11 1 Check the selected PSM. Overvoltage of the DC link section of
POW CIRCUIT 2 Check the input power voltage and the PSM was detected. (PSM alarm
change in power during motor de- indication: 7)
celeration. If the voltage exceeds PSM selection error. (The maximum
253 VAC (for the 200–V system) or output specification of the PSM is ex-
530 VAC (for the 400–V system), ceeded.)
improve the power supply imped-
ance.
7n12 SPN_n_ : OVERCUR- 12 1 Check the motor insulation status. The motor output current is abnormal-
RENT POW 2 Check the spindle parameters. ly high.
CIRCUIT 3 Replace the SPM unit. A motor–specific parameter does not
match the motor model.
Poor motor insulation
7n15 SPN_n_ : SP SWITCH 15 1 Check and correct the ladder se- The switch sequence in spindle
CONTROL quence. switch/output switch operation is ab-
ALARM 2 Replace the switching MC. normal.
The switching MC contact status
check signal and command do not
match.
7n16 SPN_n_ : RAM FAULT 16 Replace the SPM control printed cir- Abnormality in an SPM control circuit
cuit board. component is detected. (RAM for ex-
ternal data is abnormal.)
7n18 SPN_n_ : SUMCHECK 18 Replace the SPM control printed cir- Abnormality in an SPM control circuit
ERROR PGM cuit board. component is detected. (Program
DATA ROM data is abnormal.)
7n19 SPN_n_ : EX OFFSET 19 Replace the SPM unit. Abnormality in an SPM component is
CURRENT U detected. (The initial value for the U
phase current detection circuit is ab-
normal.)
7n20 SPN_n_ : EX OFFSET 20 Replace the SPM unit. Abnormality in an SPM component is
CURRENT V detected. (The initial value of the V
normal.)
7n21 SPN_n_ : POS SENSOR 21 Check and correct the parameters. The polarity parameter setting of the
POLARITY ER- (No. 4000#0, 4001#4) position sensor is wrong.
ROR
385
SPM in-
tion(*1)
7n24 SPN_n_ : SERIAL 24 1 Place the CNC–to–spindle cable The CNC power is turned off (normal
TRANSFER away from the power cable. power–off or broken cable).
ERROR 2 Replace the cable. An error is detected in communica-
tion data transferred to the CNC.
7n26 SPN_n_ : DISCONNECT 26 1 Replace the cable. The signal amplitude of the detection
C–VELO DE- 2 Re–adjust the pre–amplifier. signal (connector JY2) on the Cs con-
TECT tour control motor side is abnormal.
(Unconnected cable, adjustment er-
ror, etc.)
7n27 SPN_n_ : DISCONNECT 27 1 Replace the cable. 1 The spindle position coder (con-
POS–CODER 2 Re–adjust the BZ sensor signal. nector JY4) signal is abnormal.
2 The signal amplitude (connector
JY2) of the MZ or BZ sensor is ab-
normal.
(Unconnected cable, adjustment
error, etc.)
7n28 SPN_n_ : DISCONNECT 28 1 Replace the cable The position detection signal (con-
C–POS DE- 2 Re–adjust the pre–amplifier. nector JY5) for Cs contour control is
TECT abnormal.
ror, etc.)
7n29 SPN_n_ : SHORTTIME 29 Check and correct the load status. Excessive load has been applied
OVERLOAD continuously for a certain period of
time. (This alarm is issued also when
the motor shaft has been locked in the
excitation state.)
7n30 SPN_n_ : OVERCUR- 30 Check and correct the power supply Overcurrent is detected in PSM main
RENT POW voltage. circuit input. (PSM alarm indication:
CIRCUIT 1)
Unbalanced power supply.
PSM selection error (The maximum
PSM output specification is exceed-
ed.)
7n31 SPN_n_ : MOTOR LOCK 31 1 Check and correct the load status. The motor cannot rotate at a specified
OR V–SIG LOS 2 Replace the motor sensor cable speed. (A level not exceeding the
(JY2 or JY5). SST level for the rotation command
has existed continuously.)
Abnormality in the speed detection
signal.
7n32 SPN_n_ : RAM FAULT 32 Replace the SPM control printed cir- Abnormality in an SPM control circuit
SERIAL LSI cuit board. component is detected. (The LSI de-
vice for serial transfer is abnormal.)
7n33 SPN_n_ : SHORTAGE 33 1 Check and correct the power sup- Charging of direct current power sup-
POWER ply voltage. ply voltage in the power circuit section
CHARGE 2 Replace the PSM unit. is insufficient when the magnetic con-
tractor in the amplifier is turned on
(such as open phase and defective
charging resistor).
386
SPM in-
tion(*1)
7n34 SPN_n_ : PARAMETER 34 Correct a parameter value according Parameter data exceeding the allow-
SETTING ER- to the manual. able limit is set.
ROR If the parameter number is unknown,
connect the spindle check board, and
check the indicated parameter.
7n35 SPN_n_ : EX SETTING 35 Correct the value according to the pa- Gear ratio data exceeding the allow-
GEAR RATIO rameter manual. able limit is set.
7n36 SPN_n_ : OVERFLOW 36 Check whether the position gain val- An error counter overflow occurred.
ERROR ue is too large, and correct the value.
COUNTER
7n37 SPN_n_ : SPEED DE- 37 Correct the value according to the pa- The setting of the parameter for the
TECT PAR. ER- rameter manual. number of pulses in the speed detec-
ROR tor is incorrect.
7n39 SPN_n_ : 1–ROT Cs SIG- 39 1 Adjust the 1–rotation signal in the An incorrect relationship between the
NAL ERROR pre–amplifier. 1–rotation signal and the number of
2 Check the cable shield status. AB phase pulses was detected dur-
3 Replace the cable. ing Cs contour control.
7n40 SPN_n_ : NO 1–ROT Cs 40 1 Adjust the 1–rotation signal in the The 1–rotation signal is not gener-
SIGNAL DE- pre–amplifier. ated during Cs contour control.
TECT 2 Check the cable shield status.
3 Replace the cable.
7n41 SPN_n_ : 1–ROT POS– 41 1 Check and correct the parameter. 1 The 1–rotation signal of the
CODER ER- 2 Replace the cable. spindle position coder (connector
ROR 3 Re–adjust the BZ sensor signal. JY4) is abnormal.
2 The 1–rotation signal (connector
normal.
3 Parameter setting error
7n42 SPN_n_ : NO 1–ROT. 42 1 Replace the cable. 1 The 1–rotation signal of the
POS–CODER 2 Re–adjust the BZ sensor signal. spindle position coder (connector
DETECT JY4) is disconnected.
JY2) of the MZ or BZ sensor is dis-
connected.
7n43 SPN_n_ : DISCON. PC 43 Replace the cable. The differential speed position coder
FOR DIF. SP. signal (connector JY8) in SPM type 3
MODE is abnormal.
7n44 SPN_n_ : CONTROL 44 Replace the SPM control printed cir- Abnormality in an SPM control circuit
CIRCUIT(AD) cuit board. component was detected (A/D con-
ERROR verter abnormality).
7n46 SPN_n_ : SCREW 46 1 Check and correct the parameter. An abnormality equivalent to alarm
1–ROT POS– 2 Replace the cable. 41 was detected during thread cutting
COD. ALARM 3 Re–adjust the BZ sensor signal. operation.
387
SPM in-
tion(*1)
7n47 SPN_n_ : POS–CODER 47 1 Replace the cable. 1 The A/B phase signal of the
SIGNAL AB- 2 Re–adjust the BZ sensor signal. spindle position coder (connector
NORMAL 3 Correct the cable layout (vicinity of JY4) is abnormal.
the power line). 2 The A/B phase signal (connector
normal.
The relationship between the A/B
phase and 1–rotation signal is incor-
rect (Pulse interval mismatch).
7n49 SPN_n_ : HIGH CONV. 49 Check whether the calculated differ- In differential speed mode, the speed
DIF. SPEED ential speed value exceeds the maxi- of the other spindle converted to the
mum motor speed. speed of the local spindle has ex-
ceeded the allowable limit (the differ-
ential speed is calculated by multiply-
ing the speed of the other spindle by
the gear ratio).
7n50 SPN_n_ : SPNDL CON- 50 Check whether the calculated value In spindle synchronization, the speed
TROL OVER- exceeds the maximum motor speed. command calculation value exceed-
SPEED ed the allowable limit (the motor
speed is calculated by multiplying the
specified spindle speed by the gear
ratio).
7n51 SPN_n_ : LOW VOLT DC 51 1 Check and correct the power sup- Input voltage drop was detected.
LINK ply voltage. (PSM alarm indication: 4) (Momen-
2 Replace the MC. tary power failure or poor MC contact)
7n52 SPN_n_ : ITP SIGNAL 52 1 Replace the SPM control printed NC interface abnormality was de-
ABNORMAL I circuit board. tected (the ITP signal stopped).
2 Replace the spindle interface
printed circuit board in the CNC.
7n53 SPN_n_ : ITP SIGNAL 53 1 Replace the SPM control printed NC interface abnormality was de-
ABNORMAL II circuit board. tected (the ITP signal stopped).
7n54 SPN_n_ : OVERLOAD 54 Review the load state. An overload current was detected.
CURRENT
7n55 SPN_n_ : POWER LINE 55 1 Replace the magnetic contactor. The power line state signal of the
SWITCH ER- 2 Check and correct the sequence. magnetic contactor for selecting a
ROR spindle or output is abnormal.
7n56 SPN_n_ : INNER COOL- 56 Replace the SPM unit. The cooling fan in the SPM control cir-
ING FAN STOP cuit stopped.
7n57 SPN_n_ : EX DECEL- 57 1 Decrease the acceleration/decel- An overload was detected in the re-
ERATION eration duty. generative resistance. (PSMR alarm
POWER 2 Check the cooling condition (pe- indication: 8)
ripheral temperature). Thermostat operation or short–time
3 If the cooling fan stops, replace the overload was detected.
resistor. The regenerative resistor was dis-
4 If the resistance is abnormal, re- connected, or an abnormal resis-
place the resistor. tance was detected.
388
SPM in-
tion(*1)
7n58 SPN_n_ : OVERLOAD IN 58 1 Check the PSM cooling status. The temperature of the radiator of the
PSM 2 Replace the PSM unit. PSM has increased abnormally.
(PSM alarm indication: 3)
7n59 SPN_n_ : COOLING FAN 59 Replace the SPM unit. The cooling fan in the PSM stopped.
STOP IN PSM (PSM alarm indication: 2)
7n62 SPN_n_ : MOTOR VCMD 62 Check and correct the parameters. The specified motor speed is too
OVERFLOWED (No. 4021, 4056 to 4059) large.
7n66 SPN_n_ : AMP MODULE 66 1 Replace the cable. An error was found in communication
COMMUNICA- 2 Check and correct the connection. between amplifiers.
TION
7n73 SPN_n_ : MOTOR SEN- 73 1 Replace the feedback cable. The motor sensor feedback signal is
SOR DISCON- 2 Check the shield processing. not present.
NECTED 3 Check and correct the connection.
4 Adjust the sensor.
7n74 SPN_n_ : CPU TEST ER- 74 Replace the SPM control printed–cir- An error was detected in a CPU test.
ROR cuit board.
7n75 SPN_n_ : CRC ERROR 75 Replace the SPM control printed–cir- An error was detected in a CRC test.
cuit board.
7n79 SPN_n_ : INITIAL TEST 79 Replace the SPM control printed–cir- An error was detected in an initial test
ERROR cuit board. operation.
7n81 SPN_n_ : 1–ROT MO- 81 1 Check and correct the parameter. The one–rotation signal of the motor
TOR SENSOR 2 Replace the feedback cable. sensor cannot be correctly detected.
ERROR 3 Adjust the sensor.
7n82 SPN_n_ : NO 1–ROT 82 1 Replace the feedback cable. The one–rotation signal of the motor
MOTOR SEN- 2 Adjust the sensor. sensor is not generated.
SOR
7n83 SPN_n_ : MOTOR SEN- 83 1 Replace the feedback cable. An irregularity was detected in a mo-
SOR SIGNAL 2 Adjust the sensor. tor sensor feedback signal.
ERROR
7n84 SPN_n_ : SPNDL SEN- 84 1 Replace the feedback cable. The spindle sensor feedback signal is
4 Check and correct the parameter.
7n85 SPN_n_ : 1–ROT SPNDL 85 1 Check and correct the parameter. The one–rotation signal of the spindle
SENSOR ER- 2 Replace the feedback cable. sensor cannot be correctly detected.
ROR 3 Adjust the sensor.
7n86 SPN_n_ : NO 1–ROT 86 1 Replace the feedback cable. The one–rotation signal of the spindle
SPNDL SEN- 2 Adjust the sensor. sensor is not generated.
SOR ERROR
7n87 SPN_n_ : SPNDL SEN- 87 The one–rotation signal of the spindle An irregularity was detected in a
SOR SIGNAL sensor is not generated. spindle sensor feedback signal.
ERROR
389
SPM in-
tion(*1)
7n88 SPN_n_ : COOLING RA- 88 Replace the SPM external cooling The external cooling fan stopped.
DIFAN FAIL- fan.
URE
7n97 SPN_n_ : OTHER 97 Replace the SPM. Another irregularity was detected.
SPINDLE
ALARM
7n98 SPN_n_ : OTHER CON- 98 Check the PSM alarm display. A PSM alarm was detected.
VERTER
ALARM
SPM in-
tion(*1)
9001 SPN_n_ : MOTOR OVER- 01 1 Check and correct the peripheral The thermostat embedded in the mo-
HEAT temperature and load status. tor winding operated.
2 If the cooling fan stops, replace it. The internal temperature of the motor
exceeds the specified level.
The motor is used in excess of the
continuous rating, or the cooling com-
ponent is abnormal.
9002 SPN_n_ : EX SPEED ER- 02 1 Check and correct the cutting The motor speed cannot follow a spe-
ROR conditions to decrease the load. cified speed.
2 Correct parameter No. 4082. An excessive motor load torque is de-
tected.
The acceleration/deceleration time in
parameter No. 4082 is insufficient.
9003 SPN_n_ : FUSE ON DC 03 1 Replace the SPM unit. The PSM becomes ready (00 is indi-
LINK BLOWN 2 Check the motor insulation status. cated), but the DC link voltage is too
3 Replace the interface cable. low in the SPM.
The fuse in the DC link section in the
SPM is blown. (The power device is
damaged or the motor is ground–
fault.)
The JX1A/JX1B connection cable is
abnormal.
9004 SPN_n_ : INPUT FUSE/ 04 Check the state of the input power The PSM found a missing power sup-
POWER FAULT supply to the PSM. ply phase. (PSM alarm 5)
9006 SPN_n_ : THERMAL 06 1 Check and correct the parameter. The temperature sensor of the motor
SENSOR DIS- 2 Replace the feedback cable. is disconnected.
CONNECT
9007 SPN_n_ : OVERSPEED 07 Check for a sequence error. (For ex- The motor speed has exceeded
ample, check whether spindle syn- 115% of its rated speed.
chronization was specified when the When the spindle axis was in position
spindle could not be turned.) control mode, positional deviations
were accumulated excessively (SFR
and SRV were turned off during
spindle synchronization.)
390
SPM in-
tion(*1)
9009 SPN_n_ : OVERHEAT 09 1 Improve the heat sink cooling sta- Abnormal temperature rise of the
MAIN CIRCUIT tus. power transistor radiator
2 If the heat sink cooling fan stops,
replace the SPM unit.
9011 SPN_n_ : OVERVOLT 11 1 Check the selected PSM. Overvoltage of the DC link section of
POW CIRCUIT 2 Check the input power voltage and the PSM was detected. (PSM alarm
change in power during motor de- indication: 7)
celeration. If the voltage exceeds PSM selection error. (The maximum
253 VAC (for the 200–V system) or output specification of the PSM is ex-
530 VAC (for the 400–V system), ceeded.)
improve the power supply imped-
ance.
9012 SPN_n_ : OVERCUR- 12 1 Check the motor insulation status. The motor output current is abnormal-
RENT POW 2 Check the spindle parameters. ly high.
CIRCUIT 3 Replace the SPM unit. A motor–specific parameter does not
match the motor model.
Poor motor insulation
9015 SPN_n_ : SP SWITCH 15 1 Check and correct the ladder se- The switch sequence in spindle
CONTROL quence. switch/output switch operation is ab-
ALARM 2 Replace the switching MC. normal.
The switching MC contact status
check signal and command do not
match.
9016 SPN_n_ : RAM FAULT 16 Replace the SPM control printed cir- Abnormality in an SPM control circuit
cuit board. component is detected. (RAM for ex-
ternal data is abnormal.)
9018 SPN_n_ : SUMCHECK 18 Replace the SPM control printed cir- Abnormality in an SPM control circuit
ERROR PGM cuit board. component is detected. (Program
DATA ROM data is abnormal.)
9019 SPN_n_ : EX OFFSET 19 Replace the SPM unit. Abnormality in an SPM component is
CURRENT U detected. (The initial value for the U
normal.)
9020 SPN_n_ : EX OFFSET 20 Replace the SPM unit. Abnormality in an SPM component is
CURRENT V detected. (The initial value of the V
normal.)
9021 SPN_n_ : POS SENSOR 21 Check and correct the parameters. The polarity parameter setting of the
POLARITY ER- (No. 4000#0, 4001#4) position sensor is wrong.
ROR
9024 SPN_n_ : SERIAL 24 1 Place the CNC–to–spindle cable The CNC power is turned off (normal
TRANSFER away from the power cable. power–off or broken cable).
ERROR 2 Replace the cable. An error is detected in communica-
tion data transferred to the CNC.
9026 SPN_n_ : DISCONNECT 26 1 Replace the cable. The signal amplitude of the detection
C–VELO DE- 2 Re–adjust the pre–amplifier. signal (connector JY2) on the Cs con-
TECT tour control motor side is abnormal.
ror, etc.)
391
SPM in-
tion(*1)
9027 SPN_n_ : DISCONNECT 27 1 Replace the cable. 1 The spindle position coder (con-
POS–CODER 2 Re–adjust the BZ sensor signal. nector JY4) signal is abnormal.
2 The signal amplitude (connector
normal.
(Unconnected cable, adjustment
error, etc.)
9028 SPN_n_ : DISCONNECT 28 1 Replace the cable The position detection signal (con-
C–POS DE- 2 Re–adjust the pre–amplifier. nector JY5) for Cs contour control is
TECT abnormal.
ror, etc.)
9029 SPN_n_ : SHORTTIME 29 Check and correct the load status. Excessive load has been applied
OVERLOAD continuously for a certain period of
time. (This alarm is issued also when
the motor shaft has been locked in the
excitation state.)
9030 SPN_n_ : OVERCUR- 30 Check and correct the power supply Overcurrent is detected in PSM main
RENT POW voltage. circuit input. (PSM alarm indication:
CIRCUIT 1)
Unbalanced power supply.
PSM selection error (The maximum
PSM output specification is exceed-
ed.)
9031 SPN_n_ : MOTOR LOCK 31 1 Check and correct the load status. The motor cannot rotate at a specified
OR V–SIG LOS 2 Replace the motor sensor cable speed. (A level not exceeding the
(JY2 or JY5). SST level for the rotation command
has existed continuously.)
Abnormality in the speed detection
signal.
9032 SPN_n_ : RAM FAULT 32 Replace the SPM control printed cir- Abnormality in an SPM control circuit
SERIAL LSI cuit board. component is detected. (The LSI de-
vice for serial transfer is abnormal.)
9033 SPN_n_ : SHORTAGE 33 1 Check and correct the power sup- Charging of direct current power sup-
POWER ply voltage. ply voltage in the power circuit section
CHARGE 2 Replace the PSM unit. is insufficient when the magnetic con-
tractor in the amplifier is turned on
(such as open phase and defective
charging resistor).
9034 SPN_n_ : PARAMETER 34 Correct a parameter value according Parameter data exceeding the allow-
SETTING ER- to the manual. able limit is set.
ROR If the parameter number is unknown,
connect the spindle check board, and
check the indicated parameter.
9035 SPN_n_ : EX SETTING 35 Correct the value according to the pa- Gear ratio data exceeding the allow-
GEAR RATIO rameter manual. able limit is set.
9036 SPN_n_ : OVERFLOW 36 Check whether the position gain val- An error counter overflow occurred.
ERROR ue is too large, and correct the value.
COUNTER
392
SPM in-
tion(*1)
9037 SPN_n_ : SPEED DE- 37 Correct the value according to the pa- The setting of the parameter for the
TECT PAR. ER- rameter manual. number of pulses in the speed detec-
ROR tor is incorrect.
9039 SPN_n_ : 1–ROT Cs SIG- 39 1 Adjust the 1–rotation signal in the An incorrect relationship between the
NAL ERROR pre–amplifier. 1–rotation signal and the number of
2 Check the cable shield status. AB phase pulses was detected dur-
3 Replace the cable. ing Cs contour control.
9040 SPN_n_ : NO 1–ROT Cs 40 1 Adjust the 1–rotation signal in the The 1–rotation signal is not gener-
SIGNAL DE- pre–amplifier. ated during Cs contour control.
TECT 2 Check the cable shield status.
3 Replace the cable.
9041 SPN_n_ : 1–ROT POS– 41 1 Check and correct the parameter. 1 The 1–rotation signal of the
CODER ER- 2 Replace the cable. spindle position coder (connector
ROR 3 Re–adjust the BZ sensor signal. JY4) is abnormal.
normal.
3 Parameter setting error
9042 SPN_n_ : NO 1–ROT. 42 1 Replace the cable. 1 The 1–rotation signal of the
POS–CODER 2 Re–adjust the BZ sensor signal. spindle position coder (connector
DETECT JY4) is disconnected.
JY2) of the MZ or BZ sensor is dis-
connected.
9043 SPN_n_ : DISCON. PC 43 Replace the cable. The differential speed position coder
FOR DIF. SP. signal (connector JY8) in SPM type 3
MODE is abnormal.
9044 SPN_n_ : CONTROL 44 Replace the SPM control printed cir- Abnormality in an SPM control circuit
CIRCUIT(AD) cuit board. component was detected (A/D con-
ERROR verter abnormality).
9046 SPN_n_ : SCREW 46 1 Check and correct the parameter. An abnormality equivalent to alarm
1–ROT POS– 2 Replace the cable. 41 was detected during thread cutting
COD. ALARM 3 Re–adjust the BZ sensor signal. operation.
9047 SPN_n_ : POS–CODER 47 1 Replace the cable. 1 The A/B phase signal of the
SIGNAL AB- 2 Re–adjust the BZ sensor signal. spindle position coder (connector
NORMAL 3 Correct the cable layout (vicinity of JY4) is abnormal.
the power line). 2 The A/B phase signal (connector
normal.
The relationship between the A/B
phase and 1–rotation signal is incor-
rect (Pulse interval mismatch).
9049 SPN_n_ : HIGH CONV. 49 Check whether the calculated differ- In differential speed mode, the speed
DIF. SPEED ential speed value exceeds the maxi- of the other spindle converted to the
mum motor speed. speed of the local spindle has ex-
ceeded the allowable limit (the differ-
ential speed is calculated by multiply-
ing the speed of the other spindle by
the gear ratio).
393
SPM in-
tion(*1)
9050 SPN_n_ : SPNDL CON- 50 Check whether the calculated value In spindle synchronization, the speed
TROL OVER- exceeds the maximum motor speed. command calculation value exceed-
SPEED ed the allowable limit (the motor
speed is calculated by multiplying the
specified spindle speed by the gear
ratio).
9051 SPN_n_ : LOW VOLT DC 51 1 Check and correct the power sup- Input voltage drop was detected.
LINK ply voltage. (PSM alarm indication: 4) (Momen-
2 Replace the MC. tary power failure or poor MC contact)
9052 SPN_n_ : ITP SIGNAL 52 1 Replace the SPM control printed NC interface abnormality was de-
ABNORMAL I circuit board. tected (the ITP signal stopped).
9053 SPN_n_ : ITP SIGNAL 53 1 Replace the SPM control printed NC interface abnormality was de-
ABNORMAL II circuit board. tected (the ITP signal stopped).
9054 SPN_n_ : OVERLOAD 54 Review the load state. An overload current was detected.
CURRENT
9055 SPN_n_ : POWER LINE 55 1 Replace the magnetic contactor. The power line state signal of the
SWITCH ER- 2 Check and correct the sequence. magnetic contactor for selecting a
ROR spindle or output is abnormal.
9056 SPN_n_ : INNER COOL- 56 Replace the SPM unit. The cooling fan in the SPM control cir-
ING FAN STOP cuit stopped.
9057 SPN_n_ : EX DECEL- 57 1 Decrease the acceleration/decel- An overload was detected in the re-
ERATION eration duty. generative resistance. (PSMR alarm
POWER 2 Check the cooling condition (pe- indication: 8)
ripheral temperature). Thermostat operation or short–time
3 If the cooling fan stops, replace the overload was detected.
resistor. The regenerative resistor was dis-
4 If the resistance is abnormal, re- connected, or an abnormal resis-
place the resistor. tance was detected.
9058 SPN_n_ : OVERLOAD IN 58 1 Check the PSM cooling status. The temperature of the radiator of the
PSM 2 Replace the PSM unit. PSM has increased abnormally.
(PSM alarm indication: 3)
9059 SPN_n_ : COOLING FAN 59 Replace the SPM unit. The cooling fan in the PSM stopped.
STOP IN PSM (PSM alarm indication: 2)
9062 SPN_n_ : MOTOR VCMD 62 Check and correct the parameters. The specified motor speed is too
OVERFLOWED (No. 4021, 4056~4059) large.
9066 SPN_n_ : AMP MODULE 66 1 Replace the cable. An error was found in communication
COMMUNICA- 2 Check and correct the connection. between amplifiers.
TION
9073 SPN_n_ : MOTOR SEN- 73 1 Replace the feedback cable. The motor sensor feedback signal is
394
SPM in-
tion(*1)
9074 SPN_n_ : CPU TEST ER- 74 Replace the SPM control printed–cir- An error was detected in a CPU test.
ROR cuit board.
9075 SPN_n_ : CRC ERROR 75 Replace the SPM control printed–cir- An error was detected in a CRC test.
cuit board.
9079 SPN_n_ : INITIAL TEST 79 Replace the SPM control printed–cir- An error was detected in an initial test
ERROR cuit board. operation.
9081 SPN_n_ : 1–ROT MO- 81 1 Check and correct the parameter. The one–rotation signal of the motor
TOR SENSOR 2 Replace the feedback cable. sensor cannot be correctly detected.
ERROR 3 Adjust the sensor.
9082 SPN_n_ : NO 1–ROT 82 1 Replace the feedback cable. The one–rotation signal of the motor
MOTOR SEN- 2 Adjust the sensor. sensor is not generated.
SOR
9083 SPN_n_ : MOTOR SEN- 83 1 Replace the feedback cable. An irregularity was detected in a mo-
SOR SIGNAL 2 Adjust the sensor. tor sensor feedback signal.
ERROR
9084 SPN_n_ : SPNDL SEN- 84 1 Replace the feedback cable. The spindle sensor feedback signal is
4 Check and correct the parameter.
9085 SPN_n_ : 1–ROT SPNDL 85 1 Check and correct the parameter. The one–rotation signal of the spindle
SENSOR ER- 2 Replace the feedback cable. sensor cannot be correctly detected.
ROR 3 Adjust the sensor.
9086 SPN_n_ : NO 1–ROT 86 1 Replace the feedback cable. The one–rotation signal of the spindle
SPNDL SEN- 2 Adjust the sensor. sensor cannot be correctly detected.
SOR ERROR
9087 SPN_n_ : SPNDL SEN- 87 The one–rotation signal of the spindle An irregularity was detected in a
SOR SIGNAL sensor is not generated. spindle sensor feedback signal.
ERROR
9088 SPN_n_ : COOLING RA- 88 Replace the SPM external cooling The external cooling fan stopped.
DIFAN FAIL- fan.
URE
395
A.4
ERROR CODES
(SERIAL SPINDLE) NOTE*1
Note that the meanings of the SPM indications differ
depending on which LED, the red or yellow LED, is on.
When the yellow LED is on, an error code is indicated with
a 2–digit number. The error code is not displayed on the
CNC screen.
When the red LED is on, the SPM indicates the number of
an alarm generated in the serial spindle.
³ See Appendix A.3, “Alarms (Serial Spindle).”
Errors Displayed on the α Series Spindle Amplifier

SPM
indica- Faulty location and remedy Description
tion(*1)
01 Check the *ESP and MRDY sequence. (For MRDY, pay Although neither *ESP (emergency stop signal; there
attention to the parameter setting regarding the use of the are two types of signals including the PMC signal and
MRDY signal (bit 0 of parameter No. 4001).) PSM contact signal(*2)) nor MRDY (machine ready sig-
nal) is input, SFR (forward rotation signal)/SRF (reverse
rotation signal)/ORCM (orientation command) is input.
02 Check the spindle motor speed detector parameter (bits When the spindle motor has a high–resolution magnet-
2, 1, and 0 of parameter No. 4011). ic pulse coder (Cs sensor) (bits 6 and 5 of parameter
No. 4001 are set to 0 and 1, respectively), 128 /rev is
to be set for the speed detector (bits 2, 1, and 0 of pa-
rameter No. 4011 are set to 0, 0, and 1, respectively).
However, a value other than 128 /rev is set. In this
case, the motor is not excited.
03 Check the parameters for the detector for Cs contour Although use of a high–resolution magnetic pulse cod-
control (bit 5 of parameter No. 4001 and bit 4 of parame- er (bit 5 of parameter No. 4001 = 1) or use of the Cs con-
ter No. 4018). tour control function by the sensor (bit 4 of parameter
No. 4018 = 1) is not set, a Cs control command is input.
In this case, the motor is not excited.
04 Check the position coder signal parameter (bit 2 of pa- Although use of the position coder signal (bit 2 of pa-
rameter No. 4001). rameter No. 4001 = 1) is not set, a servo mode (rigid tap-
ping, spindle positioning) or spindle synchronization
command is input. In this case, the motor is not excited.
05 Check the orientation software option. Although the orientation option is not set, an orientation
command (ORCM) is input.
06 Check the spindle output switching software option and Although the output switching option is not set, the low–
power line status signal (RCH). speed winding is selected (RCH = 1).
07 Check the sequence (CON, SFR, SRV). Although the Cs contour control mode is specified,
SFR/SRV is not input.
08 Check the sequence (SFR, SRV). Although the servo mode (rigid tapping, spindle posi-
tioning) is specified, SFR/SRV is not input.
09 Check the sequence (SPSYC, SFR, SRV) Although spindle synchronization mode is specified,
SFR/SRV is not input.
10 During execution of the C–axis control command, do not Although Cs contour control mode is set, another op-
specify another operation mode. Before entering anoth- eration mode (servo mode, spindle synchronization, or
er mode, cancel the Cs contour control command. orientation) is specified.
11 During execution of the servo mode command, do not Although servo mode (rigid tapping, or spindle position-
specify another operation mode. Before entering anoth- ing) is set, another operation mode (Cs contour control,
er mode, cancel the servo mode. spindle synchronization, or orientation) is specified.
396
SPM
indica- Faulty location and remedy Description
tion(*1)
12 During execution of the spindle synchronization com- Although spindle synchronization is being performed,
mand, do not specify another operation mode. Before another operation mode (Cs contour control, servo
entering another mode, cancel the spindle synchroniza- mode, or orientation) is specified.
tion command.
13 During execution of the orientation command, do not Although the orientation command is being executed,
specify another operation mode. Before entering anoth- another operation mode (Cs contour control, servo
er mode, cancel the orientation command. mode, or synchronization) is specified.
14 Input the SFT or SRV signal. The SFT and SRV signals are both input at the same
time.
15 Check bit 5 of parameter No. 4000 and PMC signal When bit 5 of parameter No. 4000 is set to 1 to indicate
(CON). the presence of the differential speed mode function,
Cs contour control is specified.
16 Check bit 5 of parameter No. 4000 and PMC signal When bit 5 of parameter No. 4000 is set to 0 to indicate
(DEFMD). the absence of the differential speed mode function, the
differential speed mode command (DEFMD) is input.
17 Check bits 2, 1, and 0 of parameter No. 4011. Setting of the speed detector parameter (bits 2, 1, and
0 of parameter No. 4011) is invalid. (The corresponding
speed detector is not present.)
18 Check bit 2 of parameter No. 4001 and PMC signal Although bits 2 of parameter No. 4001 is set to 0 not to
(ORCM). use the position coder signal, a command for orienta-
tion by a position coder (ORCMA) is input.
19 During execution of the orientation command, do not Although orientation by a magnetic sensor is being per-
specify another operation mode. Before entering anoth- formed, another operation mode is specified.
er mode, cancel the orientation command.
20 Check bit 5 of parameter No. 4001, bit 5 of parameter No. When the use of the slave operation mode function is
4014, and bit 4 of parameter No. 4018. set (bit 5 of parameter No. 4014 = 1), the use of a high–
resolution magnetic pulse coder (bit 5 of parameter No.
4001 = 1) or the use of the Cs contour control function
by the sensor (bit 4 of parameter No. 4018 = 1) is speci-
fied. These items cannot be set at the same time.
21 Input the slave operation mode command (SLV) in nor- Although position control (such as servo mode or
mal operation mode. orientation) is being performed, a slave operation mode
command (SLV) is input.
22 Input the position control command in normal operation Although slave operation mode is set (SLVS = 1), a
mode position control command (such as servo mode or
orientation) is input.
23 Check bit 5 of parameter No. 4014 and PMC signal Although bit 5 of parameter No. 4014 is set to 0 not to
(SLV). use the slave operation mode function, a slave opera-
tion mode command (SLV) is input.
24 Check the PMC signal (INCMD). Perform orientation by Orientation is performed in incremental operation mode
specifying an absolute position first. (INCMD = 1) first, then the absolute position command
(INCMD = 0) is input.
25 Check the spindle amplifier specifications and parameter Although the spindle amplifier SPM type 4 is not used,
setting (bit 4 of parameter No. 4018). the use of the Cs contour control function by the sensor
is set (bit 4 of parameter No. 4018 = 1).
NOTE*2
PSM contact signal
Between ESP1 and ESP2 on the PSM Contact open: Emergency stop
Contact closed: Normal operation
397
B. LIST OF MAINTENANCE PARTS APPENDIX B–63665EN/01
B LIST OF MAINTENANCE PARTS
Item Ordering information Remarks
Fuse Stand–alone type control A02B–0265–K100

unit
Stand–alone type LCD unit A02B–0265–K101
LCD–mounted type control A02B–0236–K100

unit (without PC)
Separate detector interface A60L–0001–0290#LM20 Rated at 2 A

unit
I/O module for operator’s A03B–0815–K001

panel
Connector panel I/O module A03B–0815–K002
Distributed I/O machine op- A60L–0001–0290#LM10

erator’s panel
Interface unit of machine op- A02B–0120–K107

erator’s panel
Connection unit of operator’s A02B–0163–K111

panel
Battery For control unit memory A02B–0200–K102

backup
Fan motor For control unit with no ex- A02B–0236–K120

for LCD– pansion slot
mounted
type For control unit with expan- A02B–0281–K121
sion slot
For control unit with three A02B–0236–K122

expansion slots
Backlight For 7.2″ LCD A02B–0236–K112
For 8.4″ LCD A02B–0236–K119
For 9.5″ LCD A02B–0281–K114
For 10.4″ LCD A02B–0236–K116
Touch panel protection sheet A02B–0236–K110
Pen for touch panel A02B–0236–K111
398
B–63665EN/01 APPENDIX C. BOOT SYSTEM
C BOOT SYSTEM
C.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400

C.2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND OPERATING
PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
C.3 ERROR MESSAGES AND REQUIRED
ACTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
399
C. BOOT SYSTEM APPENDIX B–63665EN/01
C.1 The boot system load the CNC system software (flash RAM→DRAM),
then starts it so that software can be executed.
OVERVIEW The boot system provides the following maintenance functions for the
CNC:
(1) Registering a file in flash ROM
⋅ Reads a file from a memory card, in FAT format, into flash ROM.
(2) Checking a file (series and edition) in flash ROM
(3) Deleting a file from flash ROM
(4) Batch saving and restoration of files of parameters and programs
backed up by battery (SRAM area), to and from a memory card
(5) Saving a file in flash ROM to a memory card
(6) Formatting of a memory card
(7) Deleting a file from a memory card
This manual describes the activation of the boot system, as well as the
screen displays and operation for the functions listed above.
CAUTION
This control unit supports the use of a memory card as an
input/output device. When a flash card is used, however,
data can be written to a FANUC–recommended card only.
Data can be read in the same way as with an ordinary SRAM
card, provided the data has been saved in FAT format. Note
that, when a flash card is used, the card capacity is reduced
by 128KB.
See the order list for details of the supported memory card
types.
C.1.1 In ordinary system activation, the boot system automatically transfers

Starting the Boot files from flash ROM to DRAM in the background.
The user is not aware of this operation. However, the boot system must
System be operated manually, from menu screen, when maintenance is to be
carried out or when the flash ROM does not contain a required file.
1 In system maintenance, for example, to replace a file in ROM
Operation : Turn the power on by simultaneously pressing the two soft
keys at the right end.
Hold down the two keys until the boot system screen appears.
If soft keys are not provided (for example, when a touch pad is being
used), use the MDI numeric keys. Hold down the 6 and 7
keys until the boot system screen appears.
± ± ± ± ± ± ±
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
400
2 When the flash memory does not contain a file required to start the
CNC
Immediately after the CNC is turned on, the boot system starts
transferring files from flash ROM to DRAM. If, for some reason, a
file required to start the CNC (NC basic) is not in flash ROM or has
been destroyed, the boot system is automatically started.
C.1.2 The boot system organizes files in flash ROM into two main groups :
System Files and User system files and user files. These two file types have the following
characteristics :
Files
D System files CNC and servo control software provided by FANUC
D User files PMC sequence program (ladder), P–CODE macro program, and other
user–created files
C.1.3 When CAP–II board or LCB (loader control board) is mounted on the
Boot Slot CNC, we have to access to SRAM that mounted on additional board. So,
the boot system displays BOOT SLOT CONFIGURATION screen that
Configuration Screen to select a access board.
D Screen configuration
(1) BOOT SLOT CONFIGURATION 60M5–01
NO. BOARD F–ROM SRAM

(2) 0. MAIN 16MB 1.0MB
1. PMC–RE 6MB 256KB
2. CAP–II 512KB
3. LCB 512KB
*** MESSAGE ***

(3) SELECT SLOT AND HIT SELECT KEY.
[ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]
(1) : Screen title.

(2) : Flash memory size and SRAM size of each board.
(3) : Message
D Operation Press the [ UP ] or [DOWN] soft key to move the cursor, and select board
to press the [SELECT] soft key.
401
C.2 When the boot system is first started, the MAIN MENU screen is
displayed. This screen is described below :
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION
AND OPERATING
PROCEDURE
D MAIN MENU screen
(1) SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU 60M5-01
(2) 1. SYSTEM DATA LOADING

(3) 2. SYSTEM DATA CHECK
(4) 3. SYSTEM DATA DELETE
(5) 4. SYSTEM DATA SAVE
(6) 5. SRAM DATA BACKUP
(7) 6. MEMORY CARD FILE DELETE
(8) 7. MEMORY CARD FORMAT
(9) 10.END
*** MESSAGE ***

(10) SELECT MENU AND HIT SELECT KEY.
(1) : Screen title. The series and edition of the boot system appear at
the right end.
(2) : Function for writing data to flash ROM.
(3) : Function for checing the edition of a file in ROM.
(4) : Function for deleting a file from flash ROM.
(5) : Function for making a backup copy of the data stored on the memory
card.
(6) : Function for making a backup copy of the data in SRAM.
(7) : Function for deleting a file from a memory card.
(8) : Function for formatting a memory card.
(9) : Function for terminating the boot system and starting the CNC.
(10) : Condensed guidance or error message
D Operating procedure Press the [UP] or [DOWN] soft key to select the desired function. After
positioning the cursor to the desired function, press the [SELECT] soft
key. Before executing a function, the system my request confirmation
from the operator by having him/her press the [YES] or [NO] soft key.
D Basic operation
Position the Select a Check the

cursor. function selection Execute
[UP] → [SELECT] → [YES] → the → Select END
[DOWN] [NO] function
→ Return to
original state
402
C.2.1
System Data Loading
Screen
D Description This screen is used to read a system or user file from a memory card into
flash ROM.
(1) SYSTEM DATA LOADING 1/1
FILE DIRECTORY
(2) B1H1A_B1.MEM
B1H1A_AI.MEM
(3) END
*** MESSAGE ***

(4) SELECT FILE AND HIT SELECT KEY.
(1) : Screen title. The page number (n) and total number of pages (m)
are displayed, in n/m format, at the right end.
(2) : Files on the memory card
(3) : Option for returning to previous menu Message
(4) : Message
D Operating procedure 1 Position the cursor to the file to be read from the memory card and
written to flash ROM. Then, press the [SELECT] soft key.
A single page can list up to eight file names. If the memory card
contains nine or more files, the remaining files are displayed on
another page.
To display the next page, press the soft key.
To display the previous page, press the soft key. The END option
is displayed on the last page.
The END option is displayed on the last page.
2 After a file has been slected, the system asks whether that file is to be
loaded.
*** MESSAGE ***

LOADING OK ? HIT YES OR NO.
403
3 To start loading, press the [YES] soft key. To cancel, press the [NO]
key.
*** MESSAGE ***

LOADING FROM MEMORY CARD.
4 When loading terminates normally, the system displays the following

message. Press the [SELECT] soft key. If an error occurs, see C.3
*** MESSAGE ***

LOADING COMPELETE. HIT SELECT KEY.
D Others 1 Counter display while a file is being loaded

While a file is being loaded, the address of the data currently being
accessed is displayed.
*** MESSAGE ***

LOADING FROM MEMORY CARD.
ADDRESS 001: ² The counter appears under the
(1) message fild.
(1) : Number of 128–KB management unit in flash ROM

2 File name in flash ROM
The boot system identifies a file in flash ROM by the first four
characters of the ID in the header. If flash ROM has a file of the same
type as a file to be read from the memory card, the file in flash ROM
is deleted before the file on the memory card is read. The following
table lists the IDs in the header and the contents. Note that these IDs
are subject to change without prior notice.
File name Contents File type
NC BASIC Basic 1 System file

NC 2BSIC Basic 2 System file
DGB0SRVO Servo System file
GRAPHIC Graphic System file
NCj OPTN Optionalj System file
PSj**** PMC control software, etc. System file
ETH2 EMB Embedded ethernet System file
PCD **** P–CODE macro file/ OMM User file
CEX **** C–language executor User file
PMC - **** Ladder software User file
PMC@**** Ladder software for the loader User file
V : A numeric character, * : An alphabetic character
404
C.2.2
System Data Check
Screen
D Description This screen is used to list files in flash ROM, together with the
corresponding numbers of 128–KB management units in each file and the
series and edition of the software.
(1) SYSTEM DATA CHECK 1/1

(2) [BOARD:MAIN]
FILE DIRECTORY (FLASH ROM : 16MB)
(3) 1 NC BASIC ( 10)
2 NC2 BSIC ( 8)
3 DGB0SRVO ( 2)
4 PS0B406G ( 8)
5 PS1B406G ( 4)
(4) 6 PS2B406G ( 4)
7 ETH2 EMB ( 8)
END
(5)
*** MESSAGE ***
SELECT FILE AND HIT SELECT KEY.
(1) : Screen title

(2) : Names of accessing board
(3) : Names of files in flash ROM The number of management units
constituting each file appears in parentheses to the right of the file
name.
(4) : Returning to the previous menu
(5) : Message
405
D Operating procedure 1 Select the file whose details are required. For example, select “1 NC
BASIC (10).”
2 The numbers of management units in the selected file are listed,
together with the series and edition of the software in each
management unit. After checking the listed data, select the
[SELECT] soft key to return to the file selection screen.
ROM FILE CHECK

NC BASIC
0 B1H1 801A 000

1 B1H1 821A 001 0 B1H1 801A 000
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
2 B1H1 841A 002
3 B1H1 861A 003
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
4 B1H1 881A 004 Internal management–unit
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
5 B1H1 8A1A 005 number
6 B1H1 8C1A 006 ROM number and edition
7 B1H1 8E1A 007 Series
*** MESSAGE ***

HIT SELECT KEY.
D Others Parity information for the system file and user file
The NC BASIC, DGB0SRVO, and other system files in flash ROM
contain parity information in each management unit. If the file name field
or parity field on the check screen contains a non–ASC II character or an
“@” , the flash ROM may have been destroyed or a damaged file may
have been read. Re–read the data from the memory card.
The PMC–SB, PCD 0.5M, and other user files do not contain parity
information in each management unit. A non–ASCII character or an “@”
may appear in the series/edition information. In this case, it does not
indicate that the file has been damaged.
406
C.2.3
System Data Delete
Screen
D Description This screen is used to delete a user file from flash ROM.
(1) SYSTEM DATA CHECK 1/1

(2) [BOARD:MAIN]
(3) 1 NC BASIC ( 10)
2 NC2 BSIC ( 8)
3 DGB0SRVO ( 2)
4 PS0B406G ( 8)
5 PS1B406G ( 4)
(4) 6 PS2B406G ( 4)
7 ETH2 EMB ( 8)
END
(5)
*** MESSAGE ***

(1) : Screen title

(3) : Names of files in flash ROM The number of management units
name.
If flash ROM contains many files, END is sometimes not displayed.
In this case, press the continuous menu key ( ) of the soft key
display several times. Then, END appears at the end of files.
(5) : Message
D Operating procedure 1 Position the cursor to the name of the file to be deleted. Press the
[SELECT] soft key.
2 The system displays the following confirmation message :
*** MESSAGE ***

DELETE OK ? HIT YES OR NO.
3 To start the deletion, press the [YES] key. To cancel, press [NO].
*** MESSAGE ***

DELETING ROM FILE IN FLASH MEMORY.
407
4 When deletion terminates normally, the system displays the following

message. Press the [SELECT] key.
*** MESSAGE ***

DELETING COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY.
D Others 1 System files and user files on SYSTEM DATA DELETE screen
The system files are protected from accidental deletion. User files,
however, are not protected. Protected system files can be
overwritten from the SYSTEM DATA LOADING screen.
C.2.4
SYSTEM DATA SAVE
Screen
D Description This screen is used to write a user file in flash ROM to a memory card.
Only user files can be saved from flash ROM to a memory card. System
files cannot be saved.
(1) SYSTEM DATA SAVE

(2) [BOARD:MAIN]
(3) 1 NC BASIC ( 10)
2 NC2 BSIC ( 8)
3 DGB0SRVO ( 2)
4 PS0B406G ( 8)
5 PS1B406G ( 4)
(4) 6 PS2B406G ( 4)
7 ETH2 EMB ( 8)
END
(5)
*** MESSAGE ***
(1) : Screen title

(3) : Names of files in flash memory The number of management units
name.
If flash ROM contains many files, END is sometimes not displayed.
In this case, press the continuous menu key ( ) of the soft key
display several times. Then, END appears at the end of files.
(5) : Message
408
D Operating procedure 1 Position the cursor to the name of the file to be deleted. Press the
[SELECT] soft key.
2 The system displays the following confirmation message :
*** MESSAGE ***

SAVE OK ? HIT YES OR NO.
3 To start saving, press the [YES] key. To cancel, press [NO].
*** MESSAGE ***

WRITING FLASH ROM FILE TO MEMORY CARD.
SAVE FILE NAME : PMC_RB.000
4 When saving terminates normally, the system displays the

following message. Press the [SELECT] key. The names of files
written to the memory card are listed. Check the file names by, for
example, making a note of the list.
*** MESSAGE ***

FILE SAVE COMPELETE. HIT SELECT KEY.
SAVE FILE NAME : PMC_RB.000
D Others 1 System files and user files on SYSTEM DATA SAVE screen
The SYSTEM DATA SAVE function provides a safeguard against free
copying of the system files.
User files, however, are not protected.
2 Names of saved files
Files saved from flash ROM to a memory card have the following
names :
Flash ROM File name in
Memory card
PMC–SB ³ PMC_SB. XXX

PMC 0.5M ³ PCD_0.5M.XXX
PMC 1.0M ³ PCD_10M.XXX
PMC 1.5M ³ PCD_15M.XXX
CEX1.0M ³ CEX_10M.XXX
CEX 2.0M ³ CEX_20M.XXX
XXX corresponds to the file extension of MS–DOS format files. A

number from 000 to 031 is specified for XXX. For example, if the
PMC–RB file in flash ROM is saved to a memory card that does not yet
contain a file whose name begins with “PMC–RB”, the saved file is
named PMC–RB.000. If, however, that file is saved to a memory card that
already contains a file named PMC–RB.000, the saved file is named
PMC–RB.001. As files are added, the extension is incremented up to a
maximum of PMC–RB.031. Any no–longer used numbers in the
sequence of the extension numbers are used in as cending order. If two
or more files having identical names but different extension numbers are
normally saved to the memory card, check the file names displayed
subsequently.
409
C.2.5
SRAM DATA BACKUP
Screen
D Description This screen is used to collectively save and restore parameters, programs,
and other data, retained after the CNC power in SRAM is turned off, to
and from a memory card.
D Screen configuration Select “4 SRAM DATA BACKUP” on the SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN
MENU screen. The following screen is displayed.
(1) SRAM DATA BACKUP

(2) [BOARD:MAIN]
(3) 1. SRAM BACKUP (CNC ³ MEMORY CARD)
2. RESTORE SRAM (MEMORY CARD ³ CNC)
(4) END
(5) SRAM SIZE : 256K (BASIC)

(6) FILE NAME : SRAM256A. FDB
*** MESSAGE ***

(7) SELECT MENU AND HIT SELECT KEY.
(1) : Screen title

(3) : Menu
(5) : Size of SRAM mounted on the CNC
(6) : File name
(7) : Message
410
D Operating procedure
[Backing up data] 1 Select “1. SRAM BACKUP.” The following confirmation message is
displayed. The backup file name may be displayed according to the
SRAM capacity.
2 Press [YES] to start backup.
*** MESSAGE ***

BACKUP SRAM DATA OK ? HIT YES OR NO.
3 If a backup file is already on the memory card, you will be prompted

to confirm whether to permit overwriting.
4 The name of the file being written to the memory card is displayed in
the FILE NAME: field.
SRAM SIZE : 0.5MB (BASIC)

FILE NAME : SRAM0_5A.FDB ³ MEMORY CARD
Name of the file being

*** MESSAGE *** saved
SRAM DATA WRITING TO MEMORY CARD.
5 Upon terminating normally, the system displays the following

message. Press the [SELECT] soft key.
*** MESSAGE ***

SRAM BACKUP COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY.
[Restoring the data] 1 Select “2. RESTORE SRAM.” The system displays the following
message. Press the [YES] key.
*** MESSAGE ***

RESTORE SRAM DATA OK ? HIT YES OR NO.
2 The system displays the following message during restoration.
*** MESSAGE ***

RESTORE SRAM DATA FROM MEMORY CARD.
3 Upon terminating normally, the system displays the following

message. Press the [SELECT] soft key.
*** MESSAGE ***

RESTORE COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY.
411
D Others 1 Name of backup file

The name of the backup file written to the memory card by the SRAM
backup function depends on the size of the SRAM installed in the
CNC.
When the size of SRAM is 1MB or larger, backup files are created in
units of 512 KB.
Number 1 2 3 4 5 6
of
SRAM files
size
256KB SRAM256A.FDB
0.5MB SRAM0_5A.FDB
1.0MB SRAM1_0A.FDB SRAM1_0B.FDB
2.0MB SRAM2_0A.FDB SRAM2_0B.FDB SRAM2_0C.FDB SRAM2_0D.FDB
3.0MB SRAM3_0A.FDB SRAM3_0B.FDB SRAM3_0C.FDB SRAM3_0D.FDB SRAM3_0E.FDB SRAM3_0F.FDB
The backup file for SRAM on the PMC–RE, CAPII, or LCB board
will have the following extension:
Board MAIN PMC–RE CAPII LCB
Extension FDB PMC CAP LCB
CAUTION
If data such as parameters was restored from a memory
card to SRAM in a system using an absolute pulse coder,
set bit 4 (APZ) of parameter No. 1815 to 0, and set the
reference point again.
412
C.2.6
MEMORY CARD FILE
DELETE Screen
D Description This screen is used to delete a file from a memory card.
(1) SRAM DATA LOADING 1/1

FILE DIRECTORY
(2) B1H1A_B1.MEM
B1H1A_A1.MEM
(3) END
*** MESSAGE ***

(4) SELECT FILE AND HIT SELECT KEY.
(1) : Screen title. Tlhe current page number (n) and the total number
of pages (m) are displayed, in n/m format, at the right end.
(2) : Files on the memory card
(3) : Option for returning to the previous menu
(4) : Message
D Operating procedure 1 Press the [SELECT] key to select the name of the file to be deleted
from the memory card.
2 The system displays the following confirmation message. Press the
[YES] key.
*** MESSAGE ***

DELETE OK ? HIT YES OR NO.
3 When a file has been deleted normally, display the following message.
Press the [SELECT] key.
*** MESSAGE ***

DELETE COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY.
413
C.2.7
MEMORY CARD
FORMAT Function
D Description This function is used to format a memory card. Memory cards must be
formatted before they can be used for the first time or before they can be
re–used after their data has been destroyed or lost because of, for example,
battery failure.
D Operating procedure 1 From the SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU screen, select “7.
MEMORY CARD FORMAT.”
2 The system displays the following confirmation message.
Press the [YES] key.
*** MESSAGE ***

MEMORY CARD FORMAT OK ? HIT YES OR NO.
3 The system displays the following message during formatting :
*** MESSAGE ***

FORMATTING MEMORY CARD.
4 When a card has been formatted normally, the system display the
⋅ following message.
⋅ Press the [SELECT] key.
*** MESSAGE ***

FORMAT COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY.
414
C.2.8
LOAD BASIC SYSTEM
Function
D Description The function is used to terminate the boot system and activate the CNC.
D Operating procedure From the MAIN MENU screen, select “9. END.” The system displays
the “ARE YOU SURE? HIT YES OR NO” message. To terminate the
boot system and activate the CNC, press the [YES] soft key. Press the
[NO] soft key, and you will be brought back to the main menu.
*** MESSAGE ***

ARE YOU SURE ? HIT YES OR NO.
1 After pressing the [YES] soft key

The system checks the NC BASIC system file in the flash ROM. The
system displays the following message :
*** MESSAGE ***

CHECK CNC BASIC SYSTEM.
When the NC BASIC system file is found to be normal, the system

sends the system file to DRAM and starts the NC basic system. During
loading, the system blinks the following message.
*** MESSAGE ***

LOADING BASIC TO DRAM
If the contents of the NC BASIC SYSTEM file are found to have been
damaged or destroyed, the system returns to the processing selection
state, in exactly the same way as when the [NO] soft key is pressed.
415
2 If the [NO] soft key is pressed, the system returns to the processing
selection state as shown below :
SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU 60M5-01
1. SYSTEM DATA LOADING

2. SYSTEM DATA CHECK
3. SYSTEM DATA DELETE
4. SYSTEM DATA SAVE
5. SRAM DATA BACKUP
6. MEMORY CARD FILE DELETE
7. MEMORY CARD FORMAT
10.END
*** MESSAGE ***

SELECT MENU AND HIT SELECT KEY.
416
C.3 The following table lists and explains error messages in alphabetical
order.
ERROR MESSAGES
AND REQUIRED
ACTIONS
Message Description and required action
B BOOT ROM PARITY. The contents of flash memory containing boot software was de-
PLEASE POWER OFF. stroyed. Replace the CPU card.
C CHANGE MEMORY CARD. The memory card becomes full in the middle of SRAM backup op-
AND HIT YES OR NO. eration. Replace the card with a memory card containing enough
free space.
D DELETE ERROR. An attempt to delete a file from flash ROM was unsuccessful. Retry the
HIT SELECT KEY. deletion. If the second attempt also fails, the flash ROM may have
been damaged or destroyed. Replace the flash ROM module.
DEVICE ERROR (CNC x) An attempt to write data to flash ROM was unsuccessful. Retry the
write operation. If the second attempt also fails, the flash ROM may
have been damaged or destroyed. Repalce the flash ROM module.
F FILE SAVE ERROR. An attempt to write a file to a memory card was unsuccessful. Check
HIT SELECT KEY. that the memory card is not damaged.
Note) Check that the memory card’s battery is not exhusted, that its
circuitry has not been damaged, and that it is securely inserted
into its slot.
FLASH MEMORY NO SPACE There is insufficient free flash ROM to store the selected file. Delete
any unnecessary files from flash ROM.
FLASH ROM MODULE NOT EXIST. The flash ROM module is not mounted on that CNC system. Put the
HIT SELECT. flash ROM module on the board.
G GRAPHIC SOFT IS NOT FOUND. Graphic software is required. Load appropriate graphic software for
BOOT STOP. the hardware in flash ROM.
I ILLEGAL FORMAT FILE The selected file cannot be read into flash memory. The selected file
or the header information for flash ROM may have been damaged or
destroyed.
ILLEGAL FROM MODULE. The flash ROM module ID is illegal. Check the drawing No. of the flash
HIT SELECT KEY. ROM module.
ILLEGAL SRAM MODULE. The SRAM module ID is illegal. Check the drawing No. of the SRAM
HIT SELECT KEY. module.
L LOADING ERROR. An error occurred while loading data into flash ROM.
HIT SELECT KEY. Do not touch the memory card while loading data.
417
Message Description and required action
M MAX EXTENSION OVER. The extension number added to a file name exceeds 031. Delete any
HIT SELECT KEY. unnecessary backup files from the memory card.
MEMORY CARD BATTERY ALARM. The memory card’s battery is exhausted. Replace the battery.
HIT SELECT.
MEMORY CARD FULL. The memory card is full. Delete any unnecessary files from the
HIT SELECT KEY. memory card. Alternatively, replace the memory card with another
card having sufficient free space.
MEMORY CARD IS NOT The use of this memory card is not supported. Use only FANUC–
AVAILABLE. HIT SEL. recommended memory cards, as described in the order list.
MEMORY CARD MOUNT ERROR. The memory card could not be accessed. Check that the memory card
HIT SELECT KEY is normal.
MEMORY CARD NOT EXIST. The memory card is not inserted into its slot. Check that the memory
HIT SELECT KEY. card is pushed fully home.
MEMORY CARD PROTECTED.HIT Although writing to the memory card was selected, the write inhibit
SELECT KEY. switch is set. Disable the write inhibit switch.
into its slot.
MEMORY CARD TYPE IS NOT Write has been attempted to an incompatible flash memory card. Use
AVAILABLE. only the flash ROM cards recommended by FANUC. Recommended
flash ROM cards are listed in the ordering list.
MEMORY CARD RESET ERROR. Access to a memory card failed. The memory card’s battery may have
HIT SELECT KEY. gone dead, the memory card may have been damaged electrically, or
the memory card may not be inserted in the slot securely.
MEMORY CARD WRITE ERROR. Access to the memory card has failed. Check whether the memory
HIT SELECT KEY. card is defective.
into its slot.
N NMI OCCURRED. A hardware or software error occurred. Determine the procedure

PLEASE POWER OFF. which causes the error, and report it to FANUC together with the series
and edition of the boot software.
P PLEASE FORMAT FLASH TYPE It is not possible to delete only specific files from a flash ROM card, due
CARD.HIT SEL. to the characteristics of the memory used. To delete a file it is neces-
sary to delete all files on the card, by using the FORMAT function.
R ROM PARITY ERROR: The NC BASIC is parity error. Check whether NC BASIC is in flash
NC BASIC. HIT SELECT. ROM, using SYSTEM DATA CHECK.
S SRAM DATA BACKUP ERROR. An attempt to write a backup file to a memory card failed.
HIT SELECT KEY. Check that the memory card is normal.
into its slot.
SRAM PARITY OCCURRED. A parity error was detected during backup operation of SRAM (Cau-
PLEASE POWER OFF. tion).
418
CAUTION
1 Action to be taken when an SRAM parity error is detected during backup of SRAM in the boot
system
The SRAM area of each CNC shipped from the factory is cleared and is free of parity errors.
However, shock applied to the CNC during transportation may cause a parity error in the SRAM
area. A parity error may also occur in the SRAM area when the CNC was kept switched off for
one year or longer, and the battery has been exhausted. If a parity error occurs in the SRAM
area, the data held in the SRAM area is not guaranteed. However, the CNC does not always
use the entire SRAM area. A parity error is not detected by hardware unless the part containing
the error is read. Therefore, if a parity error occurs in an area not accessed by the CNC, the
CNC may operate normally. The SRAM backup function of the boot system reads the entire
SRAM area. So, a parity error may occur in the middle of backup operation even when the CNC
has operated normally. In this case, the SRAM data of the CNC is not guaranteed, and the data
cannot be backed up using the SRAM backup function of the boot system. Nevertheless, the
CNC may operate normally. So, it is recommended that necessary data be backed up using
the Floppy Cassette or Handy File, data all clear operation be performed, then the backed up
data be restored in the CNC. Once all clear operation is performed, the parity error can be
removed. Then, the SRAM backup function of the boot system can be used.
419
D. MEMORY CARD SLOT APPENDIX B–63665EN/01
D MEMRY CARD SLOT
D.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421

D.2 MEMORY CARD TYPES (FUNCTIONS) . . . . . . . . 422
D.3 HARDWARE CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
420
B–63665EN/01 APPENDIX D. MEMORY CARD SLOT
D.1 Whether a memory card slot is provided or not depends on the hardware
configuration. See the following table:
OVERVIEW
Hardware Card slot on LCD unit Card slot on control unit
Type 1 Provided No card slot
Type 2 Provided Provided

Type 6 (This slot, however, cannot be
used.)
Type 3 No card slot Provided
Type 4 No card slot Provided

Type 5 (See NOTE given below.)
(Supplementary)
– Types 1 to 6 indicate hardware configuration. See Section D.3.
– When both the LCD unit and control unit have a memory card slot,
only the memory card slot on the LCD unit can be used.
NOTE
Software write operation and other operations are
implemented by open CNC functions.
421
D.2 SRAM memory card

FROM memory card Data I/O
MEMORY CARD Flash ATA card
TYPES (FUNCTIONS) Modem card (for remote diagnosis)
NOTE
For details of the types of usable memory cards, see the
ordering list.
422
B–63665EN/01 APPENDIX D. MEMORY CARD SLOT
D.3
HARDWARE
CONFIGURATION
D Type 1 LCD–mounted type
LCD
MDI
Card slot on
LCD unit
Control unit (LCD–mounted type)
D Type 2 Stand–alone type (with an LCD unit)
Card slot on Optical cable LCD

control unit LCD MDI
link
card
Card slot on
LCD unit LCD unit for stand–
alone type
Control unit
D Type 3 Stand–alone type (with a CRT/MDI unit)
Card slot on CRT

CRT Electrical wire
control unit
link
card
CRT/MDI unit
(The CRT/MDI unit for the Power
Control unit Mate i series is usable.)
423
D Type 4 Stand–alone type (with an PANEL i and FA keyboard)
Card slot on
control unit
PC
Optical cable
FA keyboard
HSSB
board
PANEL i or personal
Control unit computer
D Type 5 Stand–alone type (with an PANEL i and FA keyboard)
Card slot on
MDI Electric wire Standard
control unit
card MDI
Optical cable
HSSB PC
board
Control unit
PANEL i or personal
computer
D Type 6 Stand–alone type (with an LCD unit and MDI, and an PANEL i and FA
keyboard)
Card slot on
LCD unit
LCD
Card slot on Optical cable
control unit LCD MDI
link
card LCD unit for stand–
alone type
HSSB Optical cable

board
PC
Control unit FA keyboard
PANEL i or personal computer
424
E. LED DISPLAY AND MAINTENANCE
B–63665EN/01 APPENDIX OF STAND–ALONE TYPE UNIT
E LED DISPLAY AND MAINTENANCE OF STAND–ALONE

TYPE UNIT
E.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426

E.2 LAYOUT OF THE 7–SEGMENT LED AND
SWITCHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
E.3 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
425
OF STAND–ALONE TYPE UNIT APPENDIX B–63665EN/01
E.1 FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i (referred to as FS16i hereinafter) of

stand–alone type is equipped with a 7–segment LED, rotary switch, and
OVERVIEW push switch.
When no MDI is included in the system configuration or when the MDI
becomes defective and cannot be used, battery backed–up data can be
saved and restored by using the rotary switch and push switch.
When the MDI can be used, use these switches for maintenance of the
boot function.
426
E.2 The 7–segment LED, rotary switch, and push switch are located as shown
below.
LAYOUT OF THE
7–SEGMENT LED
AND SWITCHES
7–segment LED (STATUS)
Rotary switch (MTSW)
Push switch (PSW)
427
E.3
OPERATION
E.3.1 Before turning on the power, select a function number by using the rotary
Operation Before switch. When the power is turned on after the selection with the rotary
switch, the number corresponding to the selected function number is
Power–On indicated on the LED. The indication blinks at intervals of about one
second.
E.3.2 Each function is assigned a number. This number is called a function

Function Number number hereinafter in this manual. The function numbers that can be
selected with the rotary switch are listed below. Do not set the reserved
function numbers. (If a reserved function number is set, the system
operates as if function number 0 were selected.)
Function
Explanation Remarks
number
0 Normal state. After terminating maintenance operation,

always set this number.
1 Reserved
2 Sets a device number for the display link function.
3 Reserved
4 Maintenance switch
5 Memory all clear
6 Reserved
7 Reserved
8 Saves battery backed–up main board data in a memory

card at a time.
9 Reserved
A Restores battery backed–up main board data from a

memory card at a time.
B Reserved
C Reserved
D Reserved
E Reserved
F Reserved
428
E.3.3
Seven–Segment LED
Display
E.3.3.1
NC status display Number displayed on LED Blink/not blink Description
Not blink Automatic operation is

paused, stopped, or reset.
(Rotation of character ) Not blink Automatic operation start

signal
When STL (F000#5) = 1
Number ( X ) Blink System alarm status
Number ( X ) Not blink Status change at power–on
E.3.3.2
LED display during LED indication Description
automatic operation
Automatic operation start signal
When STL (F000#5) = 1
E.3.3.3
LED display when the Number displayed on LED Blink/not blink Description
push switch is pressed
Not blink The push switch has been
pressed normally.
429
E.3.3.4 When a system alarm is issued, a number blinks on the 7–segment LED.
LED display when a Number on LED System alarm
Type of system alarm
system alarm is issued (blinking) number
In the 900’s ROM PARITY
In the 910’s SRAM PARITY,

DRAM PARITY
In the 920’s SERVO ALARM
In the 930’s CPU INTERRUPT,

SRAM ECC ERROR
In the 950’s PMC SYSTEM ALARM
In the 970’s NON MASK INTERRUPT,

BUS ERROR
Others Other system alarms
430
E.3.3.5
Display on the Number displayed On/off status of
Meaning
7–segment LED at on LED 4 LEDs
power–on
jjjj Power is not on.
JJJJ Power is turned on, but the CPU

does not yet start.
JJJJ NC system loading is started by the

boot system.
jJJJ The NC system has started, and

RAM initialization has terminated.
JjJJ Wait for ID setting for each board
jjJJ ID setting for each board has termi-

nated, and CRT initialization has ter-
minated.
JJjJ FANUC bus initialization has termi-

nated.
jJjJ Loading from F–ROM has termi-

nated, PMC initialization has termi-
nated, and the series/edition screen
is displayed.
JjjJ Hardware configuration information

setting for each module has com-
pleted.
jjjJ PMC ladder initialization has com-

pleted.
jJJj Wait for digital servo and spindle ini-

tialization
JJJj Digital servo and spindle initialization

has completed.
Jjjj Initialization has completed. In nor-

mal operation state.
j : Off J : On
431
E.3.4
Operation of Each
Function
D Function number 2 This function sets a device number for the display link function.
(1) Check that number 2 blinks on the LED, and press the push switch.
(2) Number 2 is displayed on the LED. Press the push switch.
(3) Sixteen numbers from 0 to F are displayed on the LED one by one at
intervals of about one second. When the device number you want to
set appears on the LED, press the push switch.
(4) The selected device number blinks on the LED. Press the push switch.
(5) The device number used for the display link function is displayed on
the LED.
D Function number 4 This function allows the maintenance switches to be used to display data
without using any display unit.
(1) Check that number 4 blinks on the LED. Press the push switch.
(4) Numbers 0 and 2 are displayed alternately on the LED at intervals of
about one second. When 2 is displayed, press the push switch.
(5) The device number used for the display link function is displayed on
the LED.
D Function number 5 This function clears all the battery backed–up SRAM data. The device
number for the display link function is also cleared. Once the device
number has been cleared, the device number is set to 0.
(1) Check that number 5 blinks on the LED. Press the push switch.
(3) The display on the LED changes from – to F to 9 to 8 to 7 to 6 to 5 to
4 to 3 to 2 to 1 to 0 in this order.
(4) After all–clear operation terminates normally, the LED display stops
changing at number 0.
(5) Turn off the power, set the rotary switch to 0 (normal state), then turn
on the power again.
432
D Function number 8 This function saves battery backed–up main board data in a memory card
at a time. The data saved using this function can be restored at a time by
performing the operation for function number A or by using the
SRAMDATABACKUP function of the boot function.
(1) In the memory card slot (MEMORY CARD CNM1B) of the control
unit, insert a formatted memory card having at least 512 KB of
available space.
(2) Check that number 8 blinks on the LED, and press the push switch.
(3) While data is being saved in the memory card, the LED indication
turns clockwise.
(4) If the data cannot fit in one memory card, number 3 blinks. Replace
the memory card with another one, and press the push switch.
(5) If the protect switch of the memory card is not released or if the battery
capacity of the memory card is insufficient, number 2 blinks on the
LED. Replace the memory card with another one, and press the push
switch.
(6) When the data has been saved normally, number 0 is displayed on the
LED. If the data cannot be saved normally, number 1 is displayed on
the LED.
(7) If SRAM PARITY occurs during data save operation, number 1 blinks
on the LED. In this case, it is impossible to save the data at a time.
Back up individual data items one by one, then perform all–clear
operation.
D Function number A This function restores battery backed–up main board data from a memory
card at a time.
(1) Insert the memory card in the memory card slot (MEMORY CARD
CNM1B) of the control unit.
(2) Check that A blinks on the LED, and press the push switch.
(3) While data is being restored from the memory card, the LED
indication turns counterclockwise.
(4) If the entire data cannot be restored from the single memory card,
number 3 blinks. Replace the memory card with the next memory
card, and press the push switch.
(5) If the memory card cannot be recognized correctly, number 2 blinks
on the LED. Check the memory card status, and press the push switch.
(6) When the data has been restored normally, number 0 is displayed on
the LED. If the data cannot be restored normally, number 1 is
displayed on the LED.
433
F. MAINTENANCE OF OPEN CNC
(BOOT–UP AND IPL) APPENDIX B–63665EN/01
F MAINTENANCE OF OPEN CNC (BOOT–UP AND IPL)
F.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435

F.2 CHANGING START SEQUENCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
F.3 EXPLANATION OF SCREENS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
F.3.1 Boot Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
F.3.2 IPL Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
F.4 OTHER SCREENS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
F.4.1 CNC Alarm Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
F.4.2 Status Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
F.4.3 Option Setting Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
434
B–63665EN/01 APPENDIX (BOOT–UP AND IPL)
F.1 Ncboot32.exe provides the following functions:

OVERVIEW S BOOT screen (for CNC system data maintenance, SRAM backup, and
so forth)
S IPL screen (for clearing SRAM, and so forth)
S Display of the CNC power–on screen
S Display of CNC alarm screen
S Re–connection in case of the occurrence of a communication error
S Start of a registered application program
In the open CNC, CNC maintenance can be performed with
Ncboot32.exe. Ncboot32.exe is copied in the System folder of Windows
(System32 folder in Windows NT) at driver installation. At the start of
Windows, Ncboot32.exe starts automatically, and resides in the system
tray.
(Icon at the center)
Supplementary 1: Multi–connection
Ncboot32.exe supports HSSB multi–connection. The CNCs connected
by HSSB are managed as nodes. The boot, IPL, and system alarm screens
are displayed in windows that are opened independently for each node.
Supplementary 2: Termination method

Normally, Ncboot32.exe need not be terminated. However, to terminate
Ncboot32.exe, right–click the icon in the system tray, and click End in the
popup menu. When the Ncboot32.exe window is open, End cannot be
selected.
435
F.2 With the rotary switch on the HSSB board on the CNC side (when the
CNC does not have the PC function) or on the motherboard of the CNC
CHANGING START (when the CNC has the PC function), the start sequence can be changed.
SEQUENCES
Position 0 can be selected as required to perform maintenance using the
boot and IPL screens.
Position 0 (maintenance)
1. Wait until communication with the CNC is established.
2. Display the boot screen.
3. Display the IPL screen.
4. Display the CNC power–on screen.
5. Initialize the work area for the data window library.
6. Start a registered application program.
7. Perform monitoring for communication errors and CNC system
alarms.
Position 1 (normal operation)
1. Wait until communication with the CNC is established.
alarms.
Position 2 (asynchronous start)
1. The CNC starts without waiting for communication to be established.
2. After communication is established, the PC performs initialization
described below.
alarms.
436
D Rotary switch position D 160i/180i/210i motherboard with the PC function

A20B–8100–014x
Rear of the unit
Rotary switch
A20B–8100–046x
Rear of the unit
Rotary switch
437
D 160is/180is/210is motherboard with PC function

A20B–8100–054x
Rear of the unit
Rotary switch
D HSSB interface board of 160i/180i/210i of LCD–mounted type
Rotary switch
D HSSB interface board of 160i/180i/210i of stand–alone type
Rotary switch
438
F.3
EXPLANATION OF
NOTE
SCREENS
A mouse is required to display Ncboot32.exe screens.
F.3.1
Boot Screen
When the sub–board is provided, select a board in the [Board] list.

The area where the file is to be placed can be changed by using the
[Setting...] button.
Select the memory card on the CNC or a PC folder. The file location may
be changed at any time.
439
F.3.1.1 The following screen is used for manipulating system data (including
System data control software and ladder programs) on the NC.
manipulation
[Load...] opens the file selection screen. Specify a file to be loaded.

[Save] saves the selected NC system data in a file.
[Check] checks the selected NC system data.
[Delete] deletes the selected NC system data.
440
F.3.1.2 This screen is used to store and restore NC SRAM data.

SRAM operation
[Backup] stores SRAM data, and [Restore] restores SRAM data. In the
center of the screen, the progress status is displayed. As with the NC, the
backup file name is determined automatically from the SRAM size, and
cannot be renamed.
441
F.3.1.3 The following screen is used for operating files on a memory card in the
File operation CNC or in a folder of the PC.
[Delete] deletes a selected file.

[Format] formats the memory card. This button is valid when the memory
card is selected by [Setting...]
[Refresh] updates the file list to the latest state. After changing memory
cards or floppy disks, click this button.
442
F.3.2
IPL Screen
NOTE
The contents of the IPL screen vary depending on the CNC
model. Follow the instructions displayed in the menu.
The CNC allows functions to be performed according to the key status set
at power–on.
The open CNC does not allow this operation. On the IPL screen, however,
equivalent functions can be executed.
For details of the menu on the IPL screen and supported functions, see the
table given in Section F.3.2.1.
443
F.3.2.1
Functions on the IPL Corresponding MDI
screen key operation at
Title on IPL screen power–on
(Operation with a
standard CNC)
0. EXIT
1. 0. CANCEL
MEMORY
CLEAR 1. ALL MEMORY 0. CANCEL
1. ALL <DELETE> + <RESET>
2. SUB <CAM> + <2>
3. LOADER <CAN> + <5>
2. PARAMETER AND 0. CANCEL

OFFSET 1. MAIN <RESET>
2. SUB <RESET> + <2>
3. LOADER <RESET> + <5>
3. ALL PROGRAM 0. CANCEL

1. ALL <DELETE>
2. MAIN <DELETE> + <1>
3. SUB <DELETE> + <2>
4. LOADER <DELETE> + <5>
4. ADDITIONAL SRAM 0. CANCEL

1. ALL <O> + <DELETE>
2. MAIN <O> + <1>
3. SUB <O> + <2>
5. PMC 0. CANCEL
1. 0. CANCEL
PARAMETER 1. CNC <Z> + <O>
2. LOADER <Z> + <5>
2. PROGRAM 0. CANCEL
1. CNC <Z> + <O>
2. LOADER <Z> + <5>
6. CAP–II 0. CANCEL
1. SUB <SP>
MEMORY
2. <I>
CONVERSATIO
NNAL
DATA
444
Corresponding MDI
key operation at
Title on IPL screen power–on
(Operation with a
standard CNC)
2. 0. CANCEL
SETTING
1. IGNORE OVER 0. CANCEL
TRAVEL ALARM 1. CNC <CAN> + <P>
2. LOADER <CAN> + <L>
2. START WITHOUT 0. CANCEL

LADDER 1. CNC SIDE <CAN> + <Z>
2.
LOADER SIDE < . > + <5>
3. CLANGUAGE 0. CANCEL
EXECUTOR 1. MAKE VOID <M> + <0>
C–EXEC
2. BOOTS UP <M> + <3>
C–EXEC APL
9. 0. CANCEL
OTHERS
1. P–CODE LOADER <CAN> + <PROG>
445
F.4
OTHER SCREENS
F.4.1
CNC Alarm Screen
This screen appears when a system alarm is issued in the CNC. (The
above screen is an example. The displayed information varies depending
on the system alarm issued in the CNC.)
446
F.4.2 To open the status screen, double–click the icon in the system tray.
Status Screen Alternatively, in the menu popped up by right–clicking, click OPEN.
Node: Node number

Name: Node name. (Define the node name in advance by using the
device manager in Windows 95/98 or the HSSB applet on the
control panel in Windows NT.)
Bus: Hardware communication status (0: Communication error, 1:
Communication established)
Status: Status (in hexadecimal)
Bit 1: Rotary switch position 1
Bit 2: End of boot processing
Bit 3: End of IPL processing
Bit 4: Rotary switch position 2
Bit 8: CNC system alarm
Pop up this window on communication error: By checking this item,
this screen is opened automatically when a communication error
occurs.
Clicking the [Close] button closes the screen.
Clicking the [Setting...] button opens the option setting screen.
Clicking the [About...] button opens the version information screen.
447
F.4.3 On the option setting screen, application programs can be registered.

Option Setting Screen When a program uses the data window library, the program does not run
unless it is started after the work area for the data window library is
initialized. By registering such a program in Ncboot32.exe, it can be
executed after the initialization of the work area for the data window
library.
Application programs are registered for each node.
[Node] selects a node. In the list box in the center of the screen, the
programs registered for the selected node are displayed.
[New...] registers a new program. When a blank character is included in
the path, it is enclosed with double quotation marks.
[Remove] deletes a selected line.
[Edit] allows editing of a selected line. This button is used to edit
arguments. The character string %d in the command line is replaced by
a node number. To represent % itself, describe %%.
Example: To start basic operation package 1 after initialization of the

work area for the data window library of the node, describe the
following:
”C:\Program Files\Basic Operation Package 1\WinBOP32.exe”

/Node=%d
448
G. FSSB START–UP PROCEDURE/
B–63665EN/01 APPENDIX MATERIALS
G FSSB START–UP PROCEDURE/MATERIALS
G.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450

G.2 SLAVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
G.3 AUTOMATIC SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
G.3.1 [Sample Setting 1] General
Configuration (Semi–Closed Loop) . . . . . . . . . . 454
G.3.2 [Sample Setting 2] General
Configuration (Closed Loop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
G.3.3 [Sample Setting 3] When
the C–axis is a Cs Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
G.3.4 [Sample Setting 4] Tandem
Control Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
G.3.5 [Sample Setting 5] When the Simple
Electronic Gear Box (EGB)
Function is Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
G.4 MANUAL SETTING 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
G.5 MANUAL SETTING 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
G.6 ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
G.7 ACTIONS FOR TROUBLE ENCOUNTERED
AT START–UP TIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
G.8 EXAMPLES OF SETTINGS USING
OTHER CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
G.8.1 Example 1: Learning Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
G.8.2 Example 2: When a 2–axis Amplifier is Shared
by Two Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
G.9 FSSB DATA DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
G.9.1 Amplifier Setting Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
G.9.2 Axis Setting Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
G.9.3 Amplifier Maintenance Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
449
MATERIALS APPENDIX B–63665EN/01
G.1 With a system that uses the FSSB, the parameters below need to be set for
axis setting. (Set other parameters as usually done.)
OVERVIEW
D No. 1023
D No. 1905
D No. 1910 to 1919
D No. 1936, 1937
For setting of these parameters, three methods are available.
1. Automatic setting
By entering data including the relationship between axes and
amplifiers on the FSSB setting screen, a calculation for axis setting is
made automatically, and parameter Nos. 1023, 1905, 1910 through
1919, 1936, and 1937 are automatically set.
2. Manual setting 2
Enter desired values directly in all of parameter Nos. 1023, 1905, 1910
through 1919, 1936, and 1937.
Before setting the parameters, fully understand the functions of the
parameters.
3. Manual setting 1(NOTE)
Based on the setting of No. 1023, default axis setting is performed.
Parameter Nos. 1905, 1910 through 1919, 1936, and 1937 need not be
set. Automatic setting is not performed.
NOTE
With manual setting 1, usable functions are limited. So,
when starting up the FSSB, use automatic setting or manual
setting 2 whenever possible.
450
G.2 In a system using the FSSB, the CNC, servo amplifiers, and separate
detector interface units are connected with each other via optical cables.
SLAVE These amplifiers and pulse modules are referred to as slaves. Assume that
a 2–axis amplifier consists of two slaves, and a 3–axis amplifier consists
of three slaves. Slave numbers (1, 2, 3, ..., 10) are assigned to the slaves
in ascending order; a younger number is assigned to a slave that is closer
to the CNC.
Slave
No.
Control Program
axis axis name
No. No. 1020 1 axis AMP
L–axis
2 axis AMP
M–axis
L–axis
2 axis AMP
M–axis
M1
1 axis AMP
M2
Note) M1/M2: Separate detector interface unit 1st/2nd
451
G.3 When the following parameters are set, automatic setting can be
performed using the FSSB setting screen:
AUTOMATIC
Bit 0 of No. 1902 = 0
SETTING Bit 1 of No. 1902 = 0
For automatic setting on the FSSB setting screen, use the procedure
below.
1 Set a servo axis number in No. 1023.
Be sure to match an axis number set in No. 1023 with the total number
of axes of the servo amplifiers connected via optical cables.
2 On the servo initialization screen, initialize the servo parameters.
3 Turn off then on the power to the CNC.

.
5 Pressing the continuous menu key several times displays

[FSSB].
6 Pressing soft key [FSSB] switches the screen display to the amplifier
setting screen (or the FSSB setting screen selected previously), and
displays the following soft keys:
[ ][ ][ ][ ][ ]
7 Press soft key [AMP].

8 On the amplifier setting screen, set a controlled axis number connected
to each amplifier.
The amplifier setting screen lists the slaves in ascending order of slave
numbers from top to bottom. So, when setting controlled axis
numbers, consider which amplifier axis is to be connected to which
CNC axis, sequentially, starting with the amplifier axis closest to the
NC. On this setting screen, 0 and duplicate numbers cannot be entered.
No. AMP SERIES UNIT CUR. [AXIS] NAME

1 A1–L α SVM 40AL [ 1 ] X
2 A1–M α SVM 12A [ 2 ] Y
3 A2–L β SVU 20A [ 3 ] Z
4 A3–L α SVM 40A [ 4 ] A
5 A3–M α SVM 80A [ 5 ] B
7 A4–L α SVM 40AS [ 6 ] C
NO. EXTRA PCB ID

>
MDI **** *** *** 13:11:56
[ AMP ][ AXIS ][ MAINT ][ ][ (OPRT) ]
9 Press soft key [SETING]. (This soft key appears when a value is
entered.)

.
452

[FSSB].
setting screen, and displays the following soft keys:
13 Press soft key [AXIS].

14 On the axis setting screen, set information on each axis.
15 The axis setting screen lists the CNC axes in ascending order of axis
numbers from top to bottom.
When any of the following is to be performed for each axis, the setting
of this screen is required:
S Use of a separate detector
S Exclusive use of a DSP (CPU for servo control) by one axis (for use
of a current loop period of 125 µs or learning control, for example)
S Use of a CS axis controlled axis
S Use of tandem control
(AXIS SETTING)
AXIS NAME AMP M1 M2 IDSP Cs TNDM
1 X A1–L 1 0 0 0 0
2 Y A1–M 0 1 0 0 0
3 Z A2–L 0 0 0 0 0
4 A A3–L 2 0 0 0 0
5 B A3–M 0 2 0 0 0
6 C A4–L 0 0 0 0 0
>
MDI **** *** *** 13:11:56
16 Press soft key [SETING]. (This soft key appears when a value is
entered.)
This operation starts an automatic calculation, and parameter Nos. 1023,
1905, 1910 through 1919, 1936, and 1937 are automatically set.
Bit 1 of parameter No. 1902 is set to 1 to indicate that each of these
parameters has been set. When the power is turned off then back on, axis
settings are made according to each parameter.
D Notes on using the simple electronic gear box (EGB) function
When using the simple electronic gear box (EGB) function, perform
EGB axis setting (parameter No. 7771) before automatic setting using
the FSSB setting screen. Without EGB axis setting, correct values
cannot be set by automatic setting using the FSSB setting screen.
453
G.3.1
[Sample Setting 1]
General Configuration
(Semi–Closed Loop)
Z–axis
A–axis
X–axis
Y–axis
Step 1 Set the following with parameter No. 1023:

X:1
Y:2
Z:3
A:4
Step 2 Initialize the servo parameters for each axis.
Step 3 Turn on then off the power to the CNC.
Step 4 Enter the axis numbers on the amplifier setting screen.
(AMPLIFIER SETTING)
1 A1–L α SVM 40A [ 2 ] Y
2 A2–L α SVM 40A [ 1 ] X
3 A3–L α SVM 40A [ 4 ] A
4 A3–M α SVM 80A [ 3 ] Z
>
MDI **** *** *** 13:11:56
Step 5 Press soft key [SETING]. (This soft key appears when a value
is entered.)
Step 6 Press function key SYSTEM
.
454
Step 7 Pressing the continuous menu key several times displays

[FSSB].
Step 8 Pressing soft key [FSSB] switches the screen display to the
amplifier setting screen, and displays the following soft keys:
Step 9 Press soft key [AXIS].

Step 10 Press soft key [(OPRT)] without entering any data, then press soft
key [SETING].
Step 11 Turn off then on the power to the CNC. This completes the
setting.
G.3.2
[Sample Setting 2]
General Configuration
(Closed Loop)
Connector 1 (CN1)
Connector 2 (CN2)
Separate detector
interface unit
Z–axis
A–axis scale
X–axis
scale
Y–axis
Machine side

X:1
Y:2
Z:3
A:4
455
(Amplifier setting)
1 A1–L α SVM 40A [ 2 ] Y
2 A2–L α SVM 40A [ 1 ] X
3 A3–L α SVM 40A [ 4 ] A
4 A3–M α SVM 80A [ 3 ] Z
>
MDI **** *** *** 13:11:56
is entered.)

.

[FSSB].

Step 10 Set the separate detector on the axis setting screen. (Separate
detector interface unit: M1/M2)
(AXIS SETTING)
AXIS NAME AMP M1 M2 1DSP Cs TNDM
1 X A2–L 0 0 0 0 0
2 Y A1–L 1 0 0 0 0
3 Z A3–M 0 0 0 0 0
4 A A3–L 2 0 0 0 0
>
MDI **** *** *** 13:11:56
Step 11 Press soft key [SETING]. (This soft key is displayed when a
value is entered.)
Step 12 Set bit 1 of parameter No. 1815 to 1 for the Y–axis and A–axis.
setting.
456
G.3.3
[Sample Setting 3]
When the C–Axis is a
Cs Axis
Z–axis
A–axis
X–axis
Y–axis
C–axis
1 Spindle Amplifiers Cs contour control axis

X:1
Z:2
C : –1
Y:3
A:4
Step 3 Initialize the spindle parameters for the spindle.
457
(AMPLIFIER SETTING)
1 A1–L α SVM 40A [ 2 ] Z
2 A2–L α SVM 40A [ 1 ] X
3 A3–L α SVM 40A [ 4 ] A
4 A3–M α SVM 80A [ 3 ] Y
>
MDI **** *** *** 13:11:56
is entered.)

.

[FSSB].

Step 11 Set the Cs contour axis on the axis setting screen. (Cs)
(AXIS SETTING)
1 X A2–L 0 0 0 0 0
2 Z A1–L 0 0 0 0 0
3 C – 0 0 0 1 0
4 Y A3–M 0 0 0 0 0
5 A A3–L 0 0 0 0 0
>
MDI **** *** *** 13:11:56
is entered.)
setting.
458
G.3.4 The following two pairs of axes are tandem axes:

[Sample Setting 4] [The X–axis is a master axis, and the A–axis is a slave axis.]
Tandem Control [The Y–axis is a master axis, and the B–axis is a slave axis.]
Configuration
4 servo amplifiers B–axis
Z–axis
A–axis
X–axis
Y–axis
Machine side

X:1
Y:3
Z:5
A:2
B:4
No.1010=3
No.1817#6=1 (X axis, A axis, Y axis, B axis)
Tandem control option
459
(AMPLIFIER SETTING)
1 A1–L α SVM 40A [ 2 ] Y
2 A2–L α SVM 40A [ 1 ] X
3 A3–L α SVM 40A [ 4 ] A
4 A3–M α SVM 80A [ 3 ] Z
5 A4–L α SVM 40A [ 5 ] B
>
MDI **** *** *** 13:11:56
is entered.)

.

[FSSB].

Step 10 Set the tandem axes on the axis setting screen. (TNDM)
(AXIS SETTING)
1 X A2–L 0 0 0 0 1
2 Y A1–L 0 0 0 0 3
3 Z A3–M 0 0 0 0 0
4 A A3–L 0 0 0 0 2
5 B A4–L 0 0 0 0 4
>
MDI **** *** *** 13:11:56
is entered.)
setting.
460
G.3.5 [EGB workpiece axis: A–axis, EGB dummy axis: B–axis (No. 7771 =
[Sample Setting 5] 5)]
When the Simple
Electronic Gear Box
(EGB) Function is Used
Connector 1 (CN1)
3 Servo Amplifiers
B–axis
scale
Z–axis
A–axis
X–axis
Y–axis Machine side

X:1
Y:2
Z:5
A:3
B:4
No.7771=5
No.7772, No.7773
No.2011#0=1 (A axis, B axis)
Option parameter
461
(AMPLIFIER SETTING)
1 A1–L α SVM 40A [ 2 ] Y
2 A2–L α SVM 40A [ 1 ] X
3 A3–L α SVM 40A [ 4 ] A
4 A3–M α SVM 80A [ 3 ] Z
>
MDI **** *** *** 13:11:56
is entered.)

.

[FSSB].

Step 10 Set the EGB dummy axis on the axis setting screen. (M1)
(AXIS SETTING)
1 X A2–L 0 0 0 0 0
2 Y A1–L 0 0 0 0 0
3 Z A3–M 0 0 0 0 0
4 A A3–L 0 0 0 0 0
5 B –– 1 0 0 0 0
>
MDI **** *** *** 13:11:56
is entered.)
setting.
462
G.4 When the following parameters are set, each axis can be set manually:
MANUAL SETTING 2 No.1902#0=1
No.1902#1=0
When performing manual setting, set parameter Nos. 1023, 1905, 1910
through 1919, 1936, and 1937, fully understanding their functions.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1902 ASE FMD
[Data type] Bit

#0 (FMD) The FSSB setting mode is:
0 : Automatic setting mode. (When data including the relationship
between axes and amplifiers is set on the FSSB setting screen,
parameter Nos. 1023, 1905, 1910 through 1919, 1936, and 1937 are
automatically set.)
1 : Manual setting 2 mode. (Parameter Nos. 1023, 1905, 1910 through
1919, 1936, and 1937 are set manually.)
#1 (ASE) When the FSSB setting mode is the automatic setting mode (when bit 0 of
parameter No. 1902 = 0), automatic setting is:
0 : Not completed.
1 : Completed.
(This bit is automatically set to 1 when automatic setting is
completed.)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1905 PM2 PM1 FSL
[Data type] Bit axis

#0 (FSL) The type of interface between servo amplifiers and servo software is:
0 : Fast type.
1 : Slow type.
Two servo data transfer interface types are available: the fast type and
slow type.
Set this bit so that the following conditions are satisfied:
D When a 1–axis amplifier is used, both of the fast and slow types can
be used.
D When a 2–axis amplifier is used, the fast type must not be used for
both axes. The slow type can be used for both axes.
D When a 3–axis amplifier is used, the first and second axes must
satisfy the condition for a 2–axis amplifier, and the third axis must
satisfy the condition for a one–axis amplifier.
D With an axis for which an odd number is set in parameter No. 1023,
the fast type must be used. The slow type can also be used,
however, for an EGB workpiece axis, learning–control axis,
high–speed current loop axis, and high–speed interface axis.
D Only the slow type can be used with an axis for which an even
number is set in parameter No. 1023. (Be sure to set this bit to 1).
463
Con- Program Servo Interface

trolled axis name axis No. type
axis No. No.1020 No.1023 Fast/Slow
2–axis AMP
1–axis AMP
2–axis AMP
1–axis AMP
#6 (PM1) The first separate detector interface unit is:

0 : Not used.
1 : Used.
#7 (PM2) The second separate detector interface unit is:
0 : Not used.
1 : Used.
This parameter is automatically set by data input on the FSSB setting
screen when the FSSB setting mode is the automatic setting mode (when
bit 0 of parameter No. 1902 = 0). When the manual setting 2 mode is used
(when bit 0 of parameter No. 1902 = 1), be sure to enter necessary data
directly.
When a separate detector interface unit is used, connector numbers
(parameter Nos. 1936 and 1937) need to be set.
PRM 1910 Address conversion table value for slave 1 (ATR)
[Data type] Byte

[Valid data range] 0 to 7, 16, 40, 48
Set an address conversion table value for each of slave 1 through 10.
464
The slave is the generic name of a servo amplifier or separate detector

interface unit connected to the CNC via an FSSB optical cable. The
numbers from 1 to 10 are assigned to the slaves in ascending order; a
younger number is assigned to a slave that is closer to the CNC. A 2–axis
amplifier consists of two slaves, and a 3–axis amplifier consists of three
slaves. Set each of the parameters as described below according to which
of the three cases is applicable: the slave is an amplifier, the slave is a
separate detector interface unit, or there is no slave.
` When the slave is an amplifier:
Set a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the setting of parameter No.
1023 for the axis to which the amplifier is assigned.
` When the slave is a separate detector interface unit:
S For the first separate detector interface unit (closest to the CNC),
set 16.
S For the second separate detector interface unit (farthest from the
CNC), set 48.
` When there is no slave:
Set 40.
When using the simple electronic gear box (EGB) function, observe the
note below.
NOTE
When using the simple electronic gear (EGB) function
An EGB axis (axis set in parameter No. 7771) actually
requires no amplifier. However, make a setting, assuming
that the EGB axis is connected to a dummy amplifier. That
is, as the address conversion table value for a nonexistent
slave, set a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the setting
of parameter No. 1023 for the EGB axis instead of 40.
These parameters are automatically set by data input on the FSSB setting
directly.
465
` Axis configuration and example of parameter setting
Slave ATR
No. No.1910 AXIS
Control Axis Name Servo
to 1919
No. No.1020 Axis No.
No.1023 1 axis AMP
L–axis
2 axis AMP
M–axis
L–axis
2 axis AMP
M–axis
M1
1 axis AMP
M2
M1/M2 : Separate detector interface

unit 1st/2nd
Slave ATR
No. No.1910 AXIS
Control Axis Name Servo
to 1919
No. No.1020 Axis No.
No.1023 1 axis AMP
L–axis
2 axis AMP
M–axis
L–axis
2 axis AMP
M–axis
M1
1 axis AMP
M2

unit 1st/2nd
466
` Axis configuration and example of parameter setting when the simple

electronic gear box (EGB) function is used
(EGB workpiece axis: A–axis, EGB axis: B–axis (parameter No.
7771 = 5))
Slave ATR
No. No.1910 AXIS
Control Axis Name Servo to 1919
Axis No. No.1020 Axis No.
No.1023
1 axis AMP
L–axis
2 axis AMP
M–axis
L–axis
2 axis AMP
M–axis
M1
M2

unit 1st/2nd
PRM 1936 Connector number for the first separate detector interface unit
PRM 1937 Connector number for the second separate detector interface unit
[Data type] Byte axis

When using a pulse module, set a value obtained by subtracting 1 from
the pulse module connector number for each axis. That is, for connector
numbers 1 to 8, set the values 0 to 7. Moreover, set bits 6 and 7 of
parameter No. 1905. Set 0 for an axis for which no pulse module is used.
The user can freely determine which connector to use for which axis. Use
connector numbers, starting with younger numbers. For example,
connector number 4 cannot be used without using connector number 3.
467
Example:
Con- First con- Second No.1936 No.1937 No.1905
trolled nector connector (#7,#6)
axis number number
X 1 Not used 0 0 0,1
Y Not used 2 0 1 1,0
Z Not used 1 0 0 1,0
A Not used Not used 0 0 0,0
B 2 Not used 1 0 0,1
C Not used 3 0 2 1,0
These parameters are automatically set by data input on the FSSB setting
directly.
` Axis configuration and example of parameter setting in the manual
setting 2 mode
AXIS
Control Axis Name Pulse Module

Axis No. No.1020 Connector
1 axis AMP
L–axis
2 axis AMP
M–axis
L–axis
2 axis AMP
M–axis
M1
1 axis AMP
M2

unit 1st/2nd
No. 1902#0
FSBMD
468
No. 1910 1911 1912 1913 1914 1915 1916 1917 1918 1919
0 1 2 3 4 16 5 48 40 40
No. 1023 1905#0 1905#6 1905#7 1936 1937

FSBSL FSBM1 FSBM2
X 1 0 1 0 0 0
Y 3 0 0 1 0 1
Z 4 1 0 1 0 0
A 2 1 0 0 0 0
B 5 0 1 0 1 0
C 6 1 0 1 0 2
469
G.5 When the following parameters are set, manual setting 1 is enabled:
MANUAL SETTING 1 Bit 0 of No. 1092 = 0
Bit 1 of No. 1902 = 0
Nos. 1910 through 1919 = 0 (all set to 0)
In manual setting 1, a setting is made at power–on so that the value set in
parameter No. 1023 is assumed to be a slave number. That is, an axis for
which the value of parameter No. 1023 is 1 is connected to the amplifier
closest to the CNC. An axis for which the value of parameter No. 1023
is 2 is connected to the amplifier next closest to the CNC.
Control Program Servo

Axis No. Axis Name Axis
No.1020 Name
No.1023
Note) M1/M2 : Separate detector interface unit 1 st/2 nd
Note that some functions and settings cannot be used in manual setting
1 as described below.
D No separate detector interface unit can be used.
This means that no separate position detector can be used.
D Set sequential numbers in parameter No. 1023.
For example, 3 cannot be set for an axis without setting 2 for any axis.
D The following servo functions cannot be used:
- Learning control
- High–speed current loop
- Simple electronic gear box (EGB)
470
G.6 Alarms related to pulse coders

ALARMS NC
alarm Message Description
No.
360 n AXIS : ABNORMAL A checksum error occurred in the built–in

CHECKSUM (INT) pulse coder.
361 n AXIS : ABNORMAL PHASE A phase data error occurred in the built–in
DATA (INT) pulse coder.
362 n AXIS : ABNORMAL A rotation speed count error occurred in the

REV.DATA (INT) built–in pulse coder.
363 n AXIS : ABNORMAL CLOCK A clock error occurred in the built–in pulse
(INT) coder.
364 n AXIS : SOFT PHASE A soft phase data error occurred in the built–
ALARM (INT) in pulse coder.
365 n AXIS : BROKEN LED (INT) An LED error occurred in the built–in pulse
coder.
366 n AXIS : PULSE MISS (INT) A feedback error occurred in the built–in
pulse coder.
367 n AXIS : COUNT MISS (INT) A count error occurred in the built–in pulse
coder.
368 n AXIS : SERIAL DATA ER- A data error occurred in the built–in pulse
ROR (INT) coder.
369 n AXIS : DATA TRANS. ER- A CRC error or stop bit error occurred in the
ROR (INT) built–in pulse coder.
380 n AXIS : BROKEN LED (EXT) An LED error occurred in the separate pulse
coder.
381 n AXIS : ABNORMAL PHASE A phase data error occurred in the separate
(EXT) pulse coder.
382 n AXIS : COUNT MISS (EXT) A count error occurred in the separate pulse
coder.
383 n AXIS : PULSE MISS (EXT) A feedback error occurred in the separate
pulse coder.
384 n AXIS : SOFT PHASE A soft phase data error occurred in the sep-
ALARM (EXT) arate pulse coder.
385 n AXIS : SERIAL DATA ER- A data error occurred in the separate pulse
ROR (EXT) coder.
386 n AXIS : DATA TRANS. ER- A CRC error or stop bit error occurred in the
ROR (EXT) separate pulse coder.
471
Alarms related to servo amplifiers

NC
No.
430 n AXIS : SV. MOTOR OVER- A servo module overheat occurred.

HEAT
431 n AXIS : CNV. OVERLOAD A converter (PSM) overheat occurred.
432 n AXIS : CNV. LOWVOLT The control power supply voltage (24 V) has
CON./POWFAULT dropped.
433 n AXIS : CNV. LOW VOLT DC The DC link voltage has dropped.
LINK
436 n AXIS : SOFTTHERMAL The digital servo software detected the soft
(OVC) thermal state (OVC).
438 n AXIS : INV. ABNORMAL The current of the main circuit is too high.
CURRENT
439 n AXIS : CNV. OVERVOLT The DC link voltage is too high.

POWER
440 n AXIS : CNV. EX DECEL- The regenerative discharge amount is too

ERATION POW. high.
441 n AXIS : ABNORMAL CUR- The digital servo software detected an ab-
RENT OFFSET normality in the motor current detection cir-
cuit.
443 n AXIS : CNV. COOLING FAN The internal stirring fan failed.
FAILURE
445 n AXIS : SOFT DISCON- The digital servo software detected a broken
NECT ALARM wire in the detector.
447 n AXIS : HARD DISCON- A broken wire in the separate detector was
NECT (EXT) detected by hardware.
448 n AXIS : UNMATCHED The sign of feedback data from the built–in
FEEDBACK ALARM pulse coder differs from the sign of the feed-
back data from the separate detector.
472
Alarms related to servo amplifiers

NC
No.
460 n AXIS : FSSB DISCON- FSSB communication was disconnected

NECT suddenly. The possible causes are as fol-
lows:
1) The FSSB communication cable is dis-
connected or broken.
2) The power to the amplifier dropped sud-
denly.
3) The amplifier issued a low–voltage
alarm.
461 n AXIS : ILLEGAL AMP IN- Both axes of a 2–axis amplifier were as-
TERFACE signed to the fast type interface.
462 n AXIS : SEND CNC DATA Because of an FSSB communication error, a

FAILED slave could not receive correct data.
463 n AXIS : SEND SLAVE DATA Because of an FSSB communication error,

FAILED the servo system could not receive correct
data.
464 n AXIS : WRITE ID DATA An attempt to write maintenance information

FAILED on the amplifier maintenance screen failed.
465 n AXIS : READ ID DATA At power–up, initial amplifier ID information

FAILED could not be read.
466 n AXIS : MOTOR/AMP COM- The maximum current value of the amplifier
BINATION does not match the maximum current value
of the motor.
467 n AXIS : ILLEGAL SETTING The following servo functions are not en-
OF AXIS abled even when an axis using a DSP ex-
clusively is set on the axis setting screen:
1) Learning control (bit 5 of parameter No.
2008 = 1)
2) High–speed current loop (bit 0 of param-
eter No. 2004 = 1)
3) High–speed interface axis (bit 4 of pa-
rameter No. 2005 = 1)
473
P/S alarms
NC
No.
5134 FSSB : OPEN READY TIME The FSSB did not become ready to open
OUT duringinitialization.
5135 FSSB : ERROR MODE The FSSB entered an error mode.
5136 FSSB : NUMBER OF AMPS The number of amplifiers recognized by the

IS SMALL FSSB is insufficient, compared with the
number of controlled axes.
5137 FSSB : CONFIGURATION The FSSB detected a configuration error.

ERROR
5138 FSSB : AXIS SETTING NOT Axis setting has not been performed in auto-
COMPLETE matic setting mode. Perform axis setting
using the FSSB setting screen.
5139 FSSB : ERROR The servo system could not be initialized

normally. The cause may be an optical
cable failure or incorrect connection with an
amplifier and other modules.
5197 FSSB : OPEN TIME OUT The FSSB did not open when the CNC had
allowed the FSSB to open.
5198 FSSB : ID DATA NOT READ The initial ID information for the amplifier
cannot be read because of a failure in the
temporary assignment.
474
G.7 D MDI input is abnormal (each time data is entered, the power needs to
be turned off).
ACTIONS FOR
First, disconnect the optical cable of the NC, then turn off then on the
TROUBLE power. Next, check the items below.
ENCOUNTERED AT (A) Check parameter No. 1902.
START–UP TIME Action: hen parameter
No. 1902 = 00000000, set the following:
No. 1905 = 00000000
Nos. 1910 through 1919 = 0
Action: hen parameter
No. 1902 = 00000001 or 00000010, set the following:
No. 1905 = Appropriate value
Nos. 1910 through 1919 = Appropriate value
(B) When bit 1 of parameter No. 1815 = 1, check parameter Nos.
1910 through 1919 to see if 16 or 48 is set.
Action: If neither 16 nor 48 is set, set bit 1 of No. 1815 to 1.
(C) Check if communication is open (the green LED is on).
Action: If communication is not open, check the power supply
for the amplifier and optical cable connection.
D The separate detector can be recognized, but feedback pulses from the
separate detector are abnormal.
(A) Check parameter No. 1902.
Action: The setting of parameter
No. 1902 = 00000000 is incorrect. When parameter
No. 1902 = 00000001, set the following:
No. 1905 = 01000000 or 10000000
Nos. 1910 through 1919 = Appropriate value
Nos. 1936 and 1937 = Appropriate value
Action: When parameter No. 1902 = 00000010, set connector
numbers for M0 and M1 in axis setting on the FSSB
screen.
D In axis setting on the FSSB screen, connector numbers for M1 and M2
cannot be set.
Action: Check the FSSB screen to see if separate detector interface
unit IDs are read correctly. If pulse module IDs are not read
correctly, check the separate detector interface unit
connections.
D The settings on the FSSB screen are canceled when the power is turned
off then back on.
Action: After setting desired values, press soft key [SETING] on the
amplifier setting screen and axis setting screen.
D P/S alarm 5138 “AXIS SETTING NOT COMPLETE” is issued.
Action: Automatic setting on the FSSB screen is not terminated
normally. Make settings correctly on the FSSB amplifier
setting screen and axis setting screen, and press soft key
[SETING] on both screens. At this time, be sure to make
settings on the amplifier setting screen and the axis setting
screen in this order.
475
Action: When automatic setting on the FSSB screen is not

performed, set all of parameter Nos. 1902, 1905, 1910
through 1919, 1936, and 1937 to 0 before starting manual
setting.
D The invalid amplifier/motor combination alarm (466) is issued.
Action: Check if the maximum current value of the amplifier read on
the ID screen matches the setting of parameter No. 2165.
Recheck the amplifier/motor combination.
Action: Initialize the servo parameters of each axis.
D When the power is turned off then back on after modifying parameter
No. 1902, the system alarm (920) is issued.
Action: Disconnect the optical cable of the CNC, then turn off then
on the power.
Set all of parameter Nos. 1902, 1905, 1910 through 1919,
1936, and 1937 to 0, then turn off then on the power, then
make an FSSB setting all over again.
476
G.8
EXAMPLES OF
SETTINGS USING
OTHER
CONNECTIONS
G.8.1
Example 1: Learning
Control
D Conceptual diagram of When learning control is used, one NC controlled axis uses one DSP (two
FSSB parameter setting axes of the servo axis card) exclusively.
for using learning (1) Set bit 0 of parameter No. 1902 to 1 to disable automatic setting.
control
(2) Assign two axes of the axis card to each of learning control axes X and
C. (Parameter No. 1023 X = 1, C = 3)
(3) Assign the remaining controlled axes to the axis card (Parameter No.
1023 Z = 5, A = 6, B = 7)
(4) Set bit 0 of parameter No. 1905 to 1 for the A–axis, for which an even
number is set in parameter No. 1023.
(5) When using a 2–axis amplifier, one of the two axes must always be set
for the slow type. So, set bit 0 of parameter No. 1905 to 1.
(6) Set the attributes of parameter Nos. 1910 through 1914 to 0, 2, 4, 5,
and 6, and set the attributes of the remaining parameters to 40 (for
absence of a slave).
Axis card Amplifier/

Axis Name
motor
Path 1
477
G.8.2 Example: FSSB setting for the following:

Example 2: When a Hardware connection
2–Axis Amplifier is Mother board – 2–axis amplifier (LX/LZ) – 2–axis amplifier
Shared by Two Paths (LA/RA) – 2–axis amplifier (LC/RC)
Sub–board – 2–axis amplifier (RX/RZ) – 2–axis amplifier
(LY/RY)
Controlled axis configuration
Mother board: LX, LZ, LC, LA, LY
Sub–board: RX, RZ, RC, RA, RY
Method of setting
When the servo system of another path is controlled as in this example,
automatic FSSB setting is not possible. Manual setting needs to be
used.
D FSSB setting procedure When a motor connected to a path other than the local path is to be used
for controlling servo in using a 2–axis amplifier, set the axis card number (DSP) of the
axes of another path in a remote path in parameter No. 1023.
multi–path system Procedure for setting
(1) Set bit 0 of parameter No. 1902 to 1 to use the manual setting mode.
(2) By hardware connection, the slave number of each motor is
determined. So, in parameter Nos. 1910 through 1919, set (slave
number – 1) and 40 (for absence of a slave).
478
Path 1
Axis Name Axis card Amplifier/

motor
Path 2
motor
(3) Set an axis card number (DSP number) in parameter No. 1023 to
connect an NC controlled axis with a motor.
(4) For an axis for which an even number is set in parameter No. 1023, set
bit 0 of parameter No. 1905 to 1.
With the settings above, a servo motor connected to another path can be
controlled.
When a separate detector interface unit is connected to use a separate
scale, bits 7 and 6 of parameter No. 1905, and parameter Nos. 1936 and
1937 need also be set.
479
Path 1
motor
Path 2
motor
480
G.9 The FSSB setting screen displays FSSB–based amplifier and axis
information, and allows amplifier and axis information to be set.
FSSB DATA DISPLAY
.

[FSSB].
setting screen (or the FSSB setting screen selected previously), and
displays the following soft keys:
There are three types of FSSB setting screens: the amplifier setting screen,
axis setting screen, and amplifier maintenance screen.
Pressing soft key [AMP] switches the screen display to the amplifier
setting screen.
Pressing soft key [AXIS] switches the screen display to the axis setting
screen.Pressing soft key [MAINT] switches the screen display to the
amplifier maintenance screen.
G.9.1 The amplifier setting screen displays slave information divided into
Amplifier Setting amplifier information and separate detector interface unit information.
Screen
(AMPLIFIER SETTING) O1000 N00001
NO.
7 A4–L α SVU 240A 6 C
NO. PCB ID
8 M2 B 12AB
>_
MDI **** *** *** 13:11:56
The amplifier setting screen displays the items below.

D NO.: Slave number
The serial numbers for to up to ten slaves (up to eight amplifiers and
up to two pulse modules) connected via the FSSB are displayed
sequentially. A younger number is assigned to a slave closer to the
CNC.
D AMP: Amplifier type
Amplifier type information starts with the character A, which stands
for “amplifier.” The character A is followed by the ordinal number of
an amplifier counted from the amplifier closest to the CNC, then is
followed by a letter indicating which axis of the amplifier is used (L
for the first axis, and M for the second axis).
481
D AXIS NO: Controlled axis number

The controlled axis numbers set in parameter Nos. 1920 through 1929
are displayed.
When a value outside the range 1 to the maximum number of
controlled axes is set, 0 is displayed.
D NAME: Controlled axis name
The axis name set in the parameter No. 1020 corresponding to a
controlled axis number is displayed. When the controlled axis number
is 0, – is displayed.
D As amplifier information, the following information items are
displayed:
S UNIT: Type of servo amplifier unit
S SERIES: Servo amplifier series
S CURRENT: Maximum current value
D As separate detector interface unit information, the information items
below are displayed.
S EXTRA
The character M, which stands for “separate detector interface
unit,” is followed by the ordinal number of a separate detector
interface unit counted from the separate detector interface unit
closest to the CNC.
S TYPE
The type of a separate detector interface unit is displayed by a letter.
S PCB ID
The ID of a separate detector interface unit is displayed using four
digits in hexadecimal. For a separate detector module (8 axes),
DETECTOR (8AXES) is displayed after the separate detector
interface unit ID. For a separate detector module (4 axes),
DETECTOR (4AXES) is displayed after the separate detector
interface unit ID.
G.9.2 The axis setting screen displays axis information.

Axis Setting Screen
(AXIS SETTING) O1000 N00001
M1 M2 Cs
1 X A1–L 0 0 0 0 1
2 Y A1–M 1 0 1 0 0
3 Z A2–L 0 0 0 1 0
4 A A3–L 0 0 0 0 2
5 B A3–M 0 0 0 0 0
6 C A4–L 0 0 0 0 0
>_
MDI **** *** *** 13:11:56
482
The axis setting screen displays the items below.

The NC controlled axis numbers are displayed sequentially.
D AMP: Type of amplifier connected to each axis
D M1: Connector number for separate detector interface unit 1
The connector number for separate detector interface unit 1 set in
parameter No. 1931 is displayed.
D M2: Connector number for separate detector interface unit 2
The connector number for separate detector interface unit 2 set in
parameter No. 1932 is displayed.
D 1DSP
The value set in bit 0 (1DSP) of parameter No. 1904 is displayed. The
value 1 is displayed for an axis (leaning control axis, high–speed
current loop axis, high–speed interface axis) that exclusively uses a
DSP.
D CS: Cs contour control axis
The value set in parameter No. 1933 is displayed. The value 1 is
displayed for a Cs contour control axis.
D TANDEM (M series only)
The value set in parameter No. 1934 is displayed. For a master axis
and slave axis used for tandem control, an odd number and a
subsequent even number are displayed.
G.9.3 The amplifier maintenance screen displays servo amplifier maintenance

Amplifier Maintenance information. There are two types of amplifier maintenance screens as
shown below. The user can switch between the two screens with the page
Screen
keys and .
(AMPLIFIER SETTING) O1000 N00001
1 X A1–L α SVM–HV 2 40AL

2 Y A1–M α SVM 2 12A
3 Z A2–L β SVM 1 40A
4 A A3–L α SVM 2 20A
5 B A3–M α SVM 2 40A
6 C A4–L α SVU 1 240A
MDI **** *** *** 13:11:56

483
(AMPLIFIER MAINTENANCE) O1000 N00001

NO.
1 X 01A 970123 01
2 Y 01A 970123 01
3 Z 01A 970123 01
4 A 02B 970123 01
5 B 02B 970123 01
6 C 02B 970123 01
MDI **** *** *** 13:11:56

The amplifier maintenance screens display the following items:

D AMP: Type of an amplifier connected to each axis
D SERIES: Series of a servo amplifier connected to each axis
D UNIT: Unit type of a servo amplifier connected to each
axis
D NO. OF AXES: Maximum number of axes of an amplifier
connected to each axis
D CURRENT: Maximum current value of an amplifier connected
to each axis
D VERSION: Version of an amplifier unit connected to each axis
D TEST: Test date of an amplifier connected to each axis
Example) 970123: January 23, 1997
D MAINTENANCE: Engineering change drawing number of an
amplifier connected to each axis
484
B–63665EN/01 APPENDIX H. NOTATION OF MDI KEYS
H NOTATION OF MDI KEYS
Series 16i/160i–LB have two types of MDI keypads : English type and
Symbolic type.
The table below shows correspondence between English keys and
Symbolic keys.
This manual uses English type in the text.
Therefore when a user uses Symbolic type MDI keypads and encounters
an English key in the text, please refer to the correspondence table shown
below.
Name English key Symbolic key
CANCEL key CAN
POSITION key POS
PROGRAM key PROG
OFFSET/ OFFSET
SETTING key SETTING
CUSTOM key CUSTOM
SYSTEM key SYSTEM
MESSAGE key MESSAGE
GRAPH key GRAPH
CNC
CNC/MMC key
MMC
SHIFT key SHIFT
485
H. NOTATION OF MDI KEYS APPENDIX B–63665EN/01
Name English key Symbolic key
INPUT key INPUT
ALTER key ALTER
INSERT key INSERT
DELETE key DELETE
PAGE UP key
PAGE
PAGE
PAGE DOWN key
HELP key HELP
RESET key RESET
CUSTOM
CUSTOM/GRAPH key
GRAPH
486
B–63665EN/01 Index
[Symbols] Alarm 975 (BUS Error), 343
Alarm 976 (Local BUS Error), 344
[Sample Setting 1] General Configuration (Semi–
Closed Loop), 454 Alarm Display, 24
[Sample Setting 2] General Configuration (Closed Alarm History Screen, 24
Loop), 455
Alarm List, 351
[Sample Setting 3] When the C–Axis is a Cs Axis, Alarm List (Serial Spindle), 384
457
Alarm Screen, 24
[Sample Setting 4] Tandem Control Configuration,
459 Alarms, 471
[Sample Setting 5] When the Simple Electronic Gear Alarms 910 and 911 (SRAM Parity), 315
Box (EGB) Function is Used, 461
Alarms 912 to 919 (DRAM Parity), 318
Alarms 920 and 921 (Servo Alarms), 320
Amplifier Maintenance Screen, 483
[A] Amplifier Setting Screen, 481
Actions for Trouble Encountered at Start–up Time,
475 Analog Input Board, 125
Address, 164 Associated Parameters, 225
Adjusting Reference Position (Dog Method), 222 Automatic Operation Cannot be Done, 266
Alarm 300 (Request for Reference Position Return), Automatic Setting, 452
291 Axis Setting Screen, 482
Alarm 401 (V Ready Off), 292
Alarm 404 (V Ready On), 296
Alarm 417 (Digital Servo System is Abnormal), 302 [B]
Alarm 462 (Send CNC Data Failed), 299 Boot Screen, 439
Alarm 463 (Send Slave Data Failed), 299 Boot Slot Configuration Screen, 401
Alarm 5134 (FSSB: Open Ready Time Out), 306 Boot System, 399
Alarm 5135 (FSSB: Error Mode), 306
Alarm 5136 (FSSB: Number of Amps is Small), 310
Alarm 5137 (FSSB: Configuration Error), 306 [C]
Alarm 5197 (FSSB: Open Time Out), 306 Changing Start Sequences, 436
Alarm 5198 (FSSB: ID Data Not Read), 306 Check Items Related to Connection with a Backbone,
245
Alarm 700 (Overheat: Control Unit), 303
Check Items Related to Connection with the Hub, 245
Alarm 701 (Overheat: Fan Motor), 304
Checking Communication, 247
Alarm 85 to 87 (Reader/Puncher Interface Alarm),
283 Checking the Setting of Each Parameter, 246
Alarm 90 (Reference Position Return is Abnormal), Clearing Alarm History, 24
289 CNC Alarm Screen, 446
Alarm 900 (ROM Parity), 313 CNC State Display, 76
Alarm 926 (FSSB Alarm), 324 Color Setting, 109
Alarm 930 (CPU Interrupt), 330 Color Setting Screen, 109
Alarm 935 (SRAM ECC Error), 332 Configuration Display of Software, 20
Alarm 950 (PMC System Alarm), 334 Configuration of PCBs, 21
Alarm 951 (PMC Watchdog Alarm), 337 Configuring a Large Network, 236
Alarm 972 (NMI Alarm on an Option Board), 338 Confirming the Parameters Required for Data Output,
129
Alarm 973 (NMI Alarm with an Unknown Cause),
339 Contents Displayed, 51
Alarm 974 (F–BUS Error), 340 Contrast Adjustment, 113
i–1
Index B–63665EN/01
Corrective Action for Failures, 254 Functions on the IPL screen, 444
Cycle Start LED Signal has Turned off, 272
[G]
[D] General of Interface, 162
Data Input/Output on the ALL IO Screen, 137 Graphic of Wave Diagnosis Data, 82
Data Input/Output Using a Memory Card, 151
Data Sampling for Storage Type Waveform Diagnosis,
84 [H]
Deletion of External Operator Messages Record, 31 Handle Operation Cannot be Done, 263
Digital Servo, 207 Hardware, 124
Display and Operation, 1 Hardware Configuration, 423
Display Method, 21, 48, 90 Help Function, 48
Display on the 7–segment LED at power–on, 431
Displaying Diagnostic Page, 51
Displaying Servo Tuning Screen, 219 [I]
Dogless Reference Position Setting, 224 In a Connector Panel I/O Unit, Data is Input to an Un-
expected Address, 281
In a Connector Panel I/O Unit, No Data Is Output to
an Expansion Unit, 282
[E] Initial Setting Servo Parameters, 208
EMB_ETH FOCAS1/ETHER Log Screen, 251 Input and Output of Data, 126
EMB_ETH MASTER CTRL Log Screen, 250 Input From and Output to I/O Devices Cannot be Per-
formed Input/Output Cannot be Performed Properly,
Embedded Ethernet, 226 279
Embedded Ethernet Error Message Screen, 239 Inputting and Outputting Floppy Files, 146
Embedded Ethernet Maintenance Screen, 241 Inputting and Outputting Offset Data, 144
Error Codes (Serial Spindle), 396 Inputting and Outputting Parameters, 143
Error Messages, 250 Inputting and Outputting Programs, 139
Error Messages and Required Actions, 417 Inputting and Outputting the Operation History Data,
Example 1: Learning Control, 477 42
Example 2: When a 2–Axis Amplifier is Shared by Inputting CNC Parameters, 132
Two Paths, 478 Inputting Custom Macro Variable Values, 135
Examples of Settings Using Other Connections, 477 Inputting Part Programs, 136
Execution Period of PMC, 168 Inputting Pitch Error Compensation Amount, 134
Explanation of Screens, 439 Inputting PMC Parameters, 134
External Operator Messages Record, 31 Inputting Tool Compensation Amount, 136
Inputting/Outputting Data, 129
Interface between NC and PMC, 161
[F] Investigating the Conditions under which Failure Oc-
curred, 254
File operation, 442
IPL Screen, 443
FOCAS1/Ethernet parameter setting screen, 229
FSSB Data Display, 481
FSSB Start–up Procedure/Materials, 449 [J]
Function Keys and Soft Keys, 2
Jog Operation Cannot be Done, 260
Function Number, 428
i–2
B–63665EN/01 Index
[L] [O]
Ladder diagram display screen, 172 Operating Monitor, 90
Ladder Diagram Display/Editing (PMC–SB7), 172 Operation, 224, 428
Ladder diagram editing screen, 181 Operation Before Power–On, 428
Layout of the 7–segment LED and Switches, 427 Operation History, 33
LED Display and Maintenance of Stand–alone Type Operation of Each Function, 432
Unit, 425 Option Setting Screen, 448
LED display during automatic operation, 429 Other Screens, 446
LED display when a system alarm is issued, 430 Outputting CNC Parameters, 130
LED display when the push switch is pressed, 429 Outputting Custom Macro Common Variables, 145
List of Alarm Codes, 352 Outputting Custom Macro Variable Values, 131
List of Alarms (PMC), 371 Outputting Part Program, 132
Outputting Pitch Error Compensation Amount, 131
List of Maintenance Parts, 398
Outputting PMC Parameters, 130
List of Operations, 92
Outputting Tool Compensation Amount, 131
List of Signals by Each Mode, 203
Outputting Waveform Diagnosis Data (Storage Type),
LOAD BASIC SYSTEM Function, 415 86
[M] [P]
Maintenance Information Input/Output, 108 Parameter, 30, 32, 114
Maintenance Information Screen, 105 Parameter Input/Output, 121
Maintenance of Open CNC (Boot–up and IPL), 434 Parameter Setting, 33, 219
Parameter Setting of the FOCAS1/Ethernet Function,
Manual Setting 1, 470 228
Manual Setting 2, 463 Parameters, 91, 111
MEMORY CARD FILE DELETE Screen, 413 PMC Menu Selection Procedure Using the Soft Keys,
MEMORY CARD FORMAT Function, 414 171
Memory Card Types (Functions), 422 PMC Screen, 171

PMCDGN Screen, 194
Memry Card Slot, 420
PMCPRM Screen, 198
Module Configuration Screen, 23
Power Mate CNC Manager, 114
Program list display screen, 175
[N]
NC status display, 429 [S]
Net editing screen, 185 Screen Configuration and Operating Procedure, 402
No Manual Operation nor Automatic Operation can be Screen Display, 24, 31, 34, 109, 115
Executed, 256
Screen Display and Operation, 105
Notation of MDI Keys, 485
Screen Displayed Immediately After Power is Turned
Notes, 32, 47, 89, 112, 122 on, 19
Notes on using the FOCAS1/Ethernet function for the Selection monitor function (PMC–SB7), 177
first time, 228
Servo Alarms, 345
Nothing is Displayed on the LCD when the Power is Servo Tuning Screen, 219
Turned On, 274
Setting Input/Output–related Parameters, 138
i–3
Index B–63665EN/01
Setting Module Screen, 20 System Data Delete Screen, 407

Setting Parameters, 78 System Data Loading Screen, 403
Setting Parameters for Input/Output, 127 System data manipulation, 440
Setting Screen, 201 SYSTEM DATA SAVE Screen, 408
Setting the Embedded Ethernet Function, 228 System Files and User Files, 401
Setting the Input Signal or Output Signal to be Re- System Reserve Area of Internal Relay, 165
corded in the Operation History, 38
Seven–Segment LED Display, 429
Signal trace function (PMC–SB7), 187 [T]
Slave, 451
The Display on the LCD Unit Flashes, 278
Slot Status Display, 19
Troubleshooting, 245, 252
Soft Keys, 2
Software Configuration Screen, 22
SPC Alarms, 348 [U]
Specification, 163
Using the DNC1/Ethernet Function on a Small Net-
Specification of PMC, 163 work, 235
SRAM DATA BACKUP Screen, 410 Using the FOCAS1/Ethernet Function on a Small Net-
SRAM operation, 441 work, 234
Starting the Boot System, 400

Status Screen, 447
Switching between the Embedded Ethernet Devices,
[W]
237 Warning Screen Displayed when an Option is
System Alarm History, 25 Changed, 102
System alarm history screen (detail screen), 27 Warning Screen Displayed when System Software is
Replaced (System Label Check Error), 104
System alarm history screen (history list screen), 25
Waveform Diagnostic Function, 78
System Configuration Screen, 21
Waveform Diagnostic Parameter Screen, 79
System Data Check Screen, 405
i–4
Revision Record
FANUC Series 16i/160i–LB MAINTENANCE MANUAL (B–63665EN)
01 Apr., 2002
Edition Date Contents Edition Date Contents

• No part of this manual may be
reproduced in any form.
• All specifications and designs

are subject to change without
notice.

Gfz-63665en 01

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

Gfz-63665en 01

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Gfz-63665en 01

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GE Fanuc Automation

Computer Numerical Control Products

GFZ-63665EN/01 August 2004

GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty, expressed, implied, or statutory

©Copyright 2004 GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.

1. DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s–2

2. WARNINGS RELATED TO CHECK OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s–3

3. WARNINGS RELATED TO REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s–5

4. WARNINGS RELATED TO PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s–6

5. WARNINGS AND NOTES RELATED TO DAILY MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . s–7

1 DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

` Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.

2 WARNINGS RELATED TO CHECK OPERATION

3 WARNINGS RELATED TO REPLACEMENT

4 WARNINGS RELATED TO PARAMETERS

5 WARNINGS AND NOTES RELATED TO DAILY

1. Memory backup battery replacement

2. Absolute pulse coder battery replacement

Description of 1.Display and operation

This chapter covers hardware–related items, including the hardware

This chapter describes the input/output of data, including programs,

4.Interface between the CNC and PMC

This chapter describes the PMC specifications, the system configuration,

This chapter describes the procedures to be followed in the event of

The appendix consists of a list of all alarms, a list of maintenance parts,

FANUC Series 16i–LB 16i–LB Series 16i

FANUC Series 160i–LB 160i–LB Series 160i

1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

1.11 OPERATING MONITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

3. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

4.2 SPECIFICATION OF PMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

5. DIGITAL SERVO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

6. EMBEDDED ETHERNET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

B. LIST OF MAINTENANCE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398

C. BOOT SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

D. MEMRY CARD SLOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420

E. LED DISPLAY AND MAINTENANCE OF STAND–ALONE TYPE UNIT . . . . . . . 425

F. MAINTENANCE OF OPEN CNC (BOOT–UP AND IPL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434

F.3 EXPLANATION OF SCREENS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439

G. FSSB START–UP PROCEDURE/MATERIALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449

H. NOTATION OF MDI KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485

1 DISPLAY AND OPERATION

This chapter describes how to display various screens by the function

1.1 FUNCTION KEYS AND SOFT KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

: Indicates a screen that can be displayed by pressing a

[ ] : Indicates a soft key(*2)

( ) : Indicates input from the MDI panel.

[ ] : Indicates a soft key displayed in green (or highlighted).

: Indicates the continuous menu key (rightmost soft key)(*3).

Absolute coordinate display

[ABS] [(OPRT)] [PTSPRE] [EXEC]

Relative coordinate display

[REL] [(OPRT)] (Axis or numeral) [PRESET]

[Axis name] [EXEC]

Current position display

[ALL] [(OPRT)] (Axis or numeral) [PRESET]